EN Safety Handbook 08v2 PDF

The Safety handbook
Sweden
Kungsbacka +46 (0) 300 67 59 00
Malmö +46 (0) 40 67 15 600
Bankeryd +46 (0) 36 37 04 60
Stockholm +46 (0) 8 544 707 40
Västerås +46 (0) 21 81 44 30
Experience – Systems – Products
Global sales
Australia Sensorplex Pty Ltd +61 (03) 9562 6699
Austria Contra GmbH +43 (0)1 278 25 55
Belgium Jokab Safety AB, Sweden +46 (0) 300 67 59 00
Brazil Jokab Safety Div. of ABG +55 41 3643 1384
Canada NCC Electronics LTD. +1 519 735 1106
China Jokab Safety China +86 21 613 242 77
Czech Republic Contra spol. S R.O. +420 5 43 210 046
Denmark Jokab Safety DK A/S +45 44 34 14 54
Finland Juha-Elektro OY +358 (0) 10 8328 100
The Safety handbook

France Jokab Safety France SAS +33 810 08 36 20
Germany
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH +49 (0) 7424 95865-0
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH Büro Günzburg +49 (0) 8221 204313 0
Debra GMBH (Cologne) +49 (0) 2234 78898
Ireland Pressure Hydraulics Ltd +353 (0) 59 9143601
Italy Jokab Safety Italia S.R.L +39 039 6880134
Korea Hanlim Auto Co., Ltd. +82 2 2639 8567/8
Netherlands Isolectra B.V. +31 (0) 10 28 55 285
Norway Automasjon og Sikkerhet +47 33 01 52 20
Poland Contra Sp. Z.O.O. +48 33 857 53 44
Portugal Prosistav Lda +351 (0) 234 397 210
Singapore/Malaysia Pics Technologies +65 6744 8018
Slovakia Lucob Spol S.R.O. +421 2 432 921 77
Slovenia Kolektor Synatec D.O.O. +386 5 37 20 677
South Africa PK Welding+Robotics LTD +27 31 914 0990
Spain Safework S.L. +34 93 - 308 07 38
Switzerland Mattle Industrieprodukte AG +41 44 938 13 33
Turkey S-Mikron Elektronik Elektrik Sanayi
Taah. Ltd. Şti +90224 443 52 33
United Kingdom Jokab Safety (UK) Ltd +44 (0) 1908 261595
USA/Mexico Jokab Safety North America +1 734 595 6087
For other countries see www.jokabsafety.com
www.jokabsafety.com Innovations in safety

We develop innovative products
and solutions for machine safety
We make it simple to build safety systems. Developing innovative products and
solutions for machine safety has been our business idea since the company was
founded in Sweden in 1988. Our vision is to become “the best partner for machine
safety”.
Many industries around the world, have discovered how much easier it has be-
come to build protection and safety systems with our components and guidance.
Experience
We have great experience of practical application of safety requirements and standards from both
authorities and production. We represent Sweden in standardisation organisations for machine
safety and we work daily with the practical application of safety requirements in combination with
production requirements.
Systems
We deliver everything from a safety solution to complete safety systems for single machines or
entire production lines. We combine production demands with safety demands for production-
friendly solutions.
Products
We market a complete range of safety products, which makes it easy to build safety systems.
We develop these innovative products continuously. Our extensive program of products, safety
solutions and our long experience in machine safety makes us a safe partner.
Säkerh
et
ova
mar zitk
Anders
Lindh
och sä (t v), pro
ke
dag
Dick Ste rhets PLC:n duktionste

kn
foton:
rik Str nsson (bako Pluto i fabrik iker på Hä

åh m) en stens
komm le (t h) ansva från Allele s nya au ,
er från ktr tomati visar centr
Jokab rat för system o Team i onslö
sning
alskåpe
Safety Es
och op ets arkitektu kilstuna ha för int t med motor
Pluto eratör r ern ma sty

sterm r och projek tillsamman terialha rningar
nte
styr
inalne s
n från tets genomf med sin ko ring.
Beijer. örand llega
autom
e. Sty Fre
rteknike d-
n
ation
figur:da
g toij
er
opera
hos Pluto
inbyg är en säke
Häste
ns
törste gd rh
rmina så kalla buss som ets-PLC
me
l till 32 d all-mast fungerar so d Alla
andra enheter ka er-system dä m en vänd Pluto-enhe
via säk n an r a ter
erhets slutas till upp dra en ingångarna kan an-
Statio busse var-
n1 n. om sin heter för att från alla an
frekve a säkerh fat -
omfor ns- etsutg ta beslut
mare Statio ångarna
n2 .
PLC Statio
gatew n 14
Huvu ay
skåp d-
Pluto
Profib
us
Start/
stopp Plutob
uss
nödstop
p magn
etbryt
are
nödstop
p Lju Start/
20 sri då stopp
Ljusri Ljusb
då om
nödstop
p
nödstop
p
Autom
ation
# 1:2007
www.jokabsafety.com
Introduction
Your partner for machine safety, locally and globally. Our products revolutionise the market. Safety history.
Standards and regulations. This is how you choose safety category. Product overview. Explanations of safety terms.
1
Pluto Safety PLC

Pluto, Pluto Manager, Gateway, Profibus, DeviceNet, CANopen, Ethernet, Safe Encoder, IDFIX, program examples 2
Vital and Tina safety systems

Connection examples for Vital, Tina and Tina Duo 3
Safety relays
RT series, JSB series, Safety timers, Expansion relays, Connection examples 4
Light curtains, Light grids, Light beams
and Scanner 5
Focus, Spot, Look, Bjorn, Focus Wet, Blanking programmer, Connection examples
Stop time measurement and machine diagnosis

Smart, Smart Manager 6
Sensors/Switches
Eden, JSNY series, Magne, Dalton, Knox 7
Control devices
3-position device JSHD4, Two-handed control unit Safeball, Foot-operated control device Fox 8
Emergency stop devices

Inca, Smile, Smile Tina, Lin emergency stop 9
Contacts rails/Bumpers/Safety mats 10
Fencing systems
Quick-Guard, Quick-Guard E, SafeCad, Roller doors 11
Componentlist 12
EC Declaration of Conformity 13
Your partner for machine
safety, locally and globally
Jokab Safety 2008
World-wide we use locally based employees with Production + Safety = Production-

global co-operation in machine safety
friendly protection solutions
Every day, all over the world, we are working with our custom-
ers to find and design production-friendly protection solu-
tions. This usually takes place in conjunction with the people
who are designing production solutions, and those who will
be using the protection. Naturally, one condition is that the
protection shall be practicable. For the protection and the
production to be optimal, both the production equipment and
the protection must also be improved continuously.
Mats Linger and Torgny Olsson founded Jokab Safety AB

in Sweden in 1988, together with Gunnar Widell, who
remained in the company until 2001. In 2002 Jokab
Safety North America was established, by means of a
merger with the North American company NCC elec-
tronics, which had been founded in 1987 by Brian
Sukarukoff and Scott Campbell (inset picture).
1:2 www.jokabsafety.com
1
Our products revolutionise
the market 2
Flexibility
Programmable
Pluto AS-i
3
Not programmable
Pluto All-Master
4
Vital Safety PLC with static and dynamic
Dynamic "doubled up" safety inputs.
safety signal that tests a
sensor, for example, 200
times per second.
Master
5
Safety relay
Double static inputs that
only test the switches
Slaves
Traditional safety PLC
Master-Slave with static inputs
6
each time they are used.
Number of machines/different stops

7
Our dynamic safety circuits and our comprehensive safety With the All-Master Safety PLC it is easy to connect and
PLC are probably the most revolutionary ideas that have disconnect machinery from a safety viewpoint. Common
happened in the safety field in the control and supervision
of protection, in many respects:
emergency stop circuits and sensors can be created
as soon as the buses are interconnected between our 8
They save on inputs: a dual safety circuit with one safety PLCs.
conductor instead of two. In addition, many protection
devices can be connected to the same input while main- We are continuously designing safety systems for difficult
environments and also to create new safety solutions where
taining the highest level of safety.
Reliability is better. Our electronic sensors have much
practical solutions are missing. New technical improvements
give new possibilities and therefore we continuously devel-
9
longer lives than mechanical switches ope new products.
They are safer, since the dynamic safety sensors are
checked 200 times per second. Switches on a door can
only be checked each time they are used, for example
once per hour or even once a month.
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com 1:3 13
Safety history
Developments of the 70's
Our background in safety started in the seventies when there was a significant
focus on the safety of manually operated presses, the most dangerous machine
in those days. The probability of loosing a finger or hand while working with these
machines was very high. New safety solutions for both safety devices as well as
for the control systems for presses were developed and introduced on both old
and new machines. We were directly involved in this work through the design of
Two-Hand devices, control systems for presses, making safety inspections for the
Health and Safety authorities and writing regulations for safety of these machines.
This work provided an excellent base for our knowledge in machinery safety.
The numbers of accidents involving presses decreased significantly during We protected people from loosing
these years however there is still room for new ideas to enable safety equipment fingers or/and hands in dangerous
become more practical and ergonomic. machines.

During the eighties, industrial robots (Irb’s) started to become commonplace in
manufacturing industry. This meant that workers were outside of the dangerous
areas during production but had at certain times to go inside the machine in or-
der to e.g. adjust a product to the correct position, inspect the production cycle,
troubleshoot and to programme the Irb. New risks were introduced and new
safety methods required. It was for example hard to distinguish whether produc-
tion machines had stopped safely or simply waiting for the next signal, such as a
sensor giving a start signal while a product was being adjusted into the correct
position. Mistakes in safety system design resulting in serious accidents were
made, such as the omission of safety devices to stop the Irb, unreliable connec-
tion of safety devices and unreliable safety inputs on the Irb.
In the mid eighties the standards committee for safety in Industrial Robot Sy-
stems EN 775/ISO 775 was started. This was the first international standard for
machine safety. In order to give the correct inputs to the standard, work around
Irb’s was closely studied in order to meet production integrated safety require- Three-position enabling devices were
ments. The introduction of a production oriented safety stop function was made, also introduced for safety during pro-
using for example, software to stop machines smoothly and then safety relays/ gramming.
contactors to disconnect the power to the machines actuators after the machine
had stopped. This technique allows easy restart of production after a stop situa-
tion by the machine safeguards.
There were a lot of discussions as to whether one could have both safety and
practical requirements in a standard, such as a safe stop function, which allowed
an easy restart of the machine. Three-position enabling devices were also intro-
duced for safety during programming, testing and trouble shooting of Irb’s and
other equipment. In the robot standard the three-position enabling function was
first defined by only allowing for hazardous machinery functions in the mid switch
position. Releasing or pressing the three-position push button in panic leading
to a stop signal.

In Europe, during the nineties, the machinery directive was the start of a tremen-
dous increase in co-operation across borders to get European standards for
safety for machinery and safety devices. The experience from different European
countries has led to a wide range of safety standards and this has made work in
safety much easier. With the integration of Europe it is now only necessary for a
safety company such as ourselves to get one approval for our components for all European standards for safety for
of Europe instead of one per country. machinery and safety devices.
Developments 2000 -
Internationally the work on safety has now been intensified within ISO. The
objective is to have the same structure of safety requirements and standards
within ISO as within EN. Jokab Safety is active both internationally and national-
ly in different standard working groups. The co-operation between countries is
leading to better safety solutions, making it much easier to create safe working
environments around the world.
We develop innovative products 1
2009
2008
Inca emergency stop
Dalton with Eden Knox - safe locking 2
for concealed mounting
2007
AS-i
2006
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
CANopen
Smile emergency stop with
3
Ethernet
indication
2005
2004
HMI
Pluto All-Master safety PLC

4
2003
Smart for machine diagnostics
2002
5
2001
2000
Vital with dynamic safety circuit
to category 4
Non-contact sensor
Eden
6
Focus light beam protection
1999
7
1998
SafeCad for Quick-Guard Safeball - ergonomic control device

1997
8
1996
1995 RT series universal relays Three-position

switch for robots
9
1994 Quick-Guard aluminium
fencing system
1993
10
Smallest safety Stop time 3-position
1992 relays JSBT5 and measurement devices
JSBR4
1991
11
1990
Timer reset and first light beam
1989
12
1988
First safety relay First steel fencing system
1:5 13
Directives and
Standards
Directives and standards are of great importance for manufactur-
ers of machines and safety components. EU Directives giving
requirements for the minimum level of health and safety are
mandatory for manufacturers to fulfil. In every member country
the Directives are implemented in each countries legislation.
Maskiner som släpps ut på marknaden/tas i drift från och med
den 29 december 2009 skall följa kraven i det nya maskindirek-
tivet 2006/42/EG.
The objectives of the Machinery Directive, 98/37/EC, are to Harmonised standards

maintain, increase and equalise the safety level of machines Harmonised standards give support on how to fulfil the
within the members of the European Community. Based on requirements of the Machinery Directive. The relationship
this, the free movement of machines/products between the between the Machinery Directive and the harmonised stand-
countries in this market can be achieved. The Machinery ards is illustrated by the diagram below.
Directive is developed according to “The New Approach” Within ISO (The International Organization for Stand-
which is based on the following principles ardization) work is also going on in order to harmonise
the safety standards globally in parallel with the European
•T
he directives give the basic health and safety requirements, standardisation work. One consequence of this is that many
which are mandatory. existing EN-standards will, when revised, change number.
•D
etailed solutions and technical specifications are found For example, EN 954-1 will when revised change number to
in harmonised standards. EN ISO 13849-1. Along with the forthcoming new Machinery
•S
tandards are voluntary to apply, but products designed Directive, all harmonised standards will be reviewed and
according to the harmonised standards will fulfil the basic revised to a greater or lesser extent.
safety requirements in the Machinery Directive. Jokab Safety takes an active part in the working groups
both for the ISO and EN standards.
Examples of standards
The Machinery
98/37/EC
Directive
EN ISO 12100-1
EN ISO 12100-2
EN ISO 14121-1 Giving basic concepts, principles for design, and general aspects that can
A-standard be applied to all machinery
EN ISO 13857
EN 349
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1 B1: Standards on particular safety aspects (e.g. safety distances, surface
EN 999 B1-standard temperature, noise)
B2-standard B2: Standards on safeguards,e.g. two-hand controls, interlocking devices,

pressure sensitive devices, guards
EN ISO 13850
EN1088
EN 60204-1
EN ISO 10218-1 Dealing with detailed safety requirements for a particular

EN 692 machine or group of machines
EN 693
C-standard
The Machinery Directive; for machines and safety components
The definition of a machine can cover everything from
1
From the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC hand-held portable machines to production lines. There are
2. For the purposes of this Directive: exclusions, e.g. machinery for medical use used in direct
(a) ‘machinery’ means: contact with patients, means of transport, i.e. vehicles and
— an assembly of linked parts or components, at least
one of which moves, with the appropriate actuators,
their trailers intended solely for transporting passengers and
agricultural and forestry tractors.
2
control and power circuits, etc., joined together for a
specific application, in particular for the processing, The Machinery Directive is valid also for
treatment, moving or packaging of a material,
— an assembly of machines which, in order to achieve
the same end, are arranged and controlled so that
2. ... ‘safety components’ means a component, pro-
vided that it is not interchangeable equipment, which
the manufacturer or his authorised representative
3
they function as an integral whole,
— interchangeable equipment modifying the func- established in the Community places on the market
tion of a machine, which is placed on the market for to fulfil a safety function when in use and the failure
the purpose of being assembled with a machine or a or malfunctioning of which endangers the safety or
series of different machines or with a tractor by the
operator himself in so far as this equipment is not a
health of exposed persons. 4
spare part or a tool; Safety components are e.g. light curtains, safety relays
and safety PLCs.
CE-marking and Declaration of conformity

Machines manufactured or put on the market from the According to the requirements in the Machinery Directive,
10
1 January 1995 shall be CE-marked and fulfil the require- safety components should not be CE-marked. But many
ments according to the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. This safety components fall under the requirements in other
is also valid for old machines (manufactured before 1 January Directives such as the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC
1995) if they are manufactured in a country outside the EEA
and imported to be used in a country in the EEA.
Directive that require CE-marking. This means that a CE-mark
will anyway be found on most safety components. 11
NOTE The point in time when the Machinery Directive was A new Machinery Directive, 2006/42/EC, will come into
implemented in each Member Country varies. force on 29 December 2009. This Directive is available
Machines have to be accompanied by a Declaration of Con- at http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/mechan_equipment/ma-
formity (according to 98/37/EC, Annex IIA) that states which
directive and standards the machine fulfils. It also shows if
the product has gone through EC Type Examination.
chinery/revdir.htm. Among the new features in the Directive
are full quality assurance as a certification procedure, and
requirements concerning partly completed machinery. Pre-
12
Safety components have to be accompanied with a Dec- pare in good time by reading the Directive and seeing how
laration of Conformity (according to 98/37/EC, Annex IIC). the changes will affect your company.
www.jokabsafety.com 1:7
13
Requirements for the use of machinery This means that when repair/changes are made on the ma-
For a machine to be safe it is not enough that the manu- chine it shall still fulfil the requirements of the Machinery Di-
facturer has been fulfilling all valid/necessary requirements. rective. This doesn´t have to mean that a new CE-marking is
The user of the machine also has requirements to fulfil. For required. (Can be required if the changes are extensive)..
the use of machinery there is a Directive, 89/655/EEC
(with amendment 96/63/EC and 2001/45/EC). A new “Old” machines
Machinery Directive, 2006/42/EC, will come into force on For machines delivered or manufactured in the EEA before
29 December 2009. 1 January 1995 the following is valid.
About CE-marked machinery the Directive gives the follow-

ing requirement (b) work equipment which, if already provided to work-
ers in the undertaking and/or establishment by 31
December 1992, complies with the minimum require-
From 89/655/EEC (with amendment 96/63/ ments laid down in Annex I no later than four years
EC and 2001/45/EC) after that date.
1. Without prejudice to Article 3, the employer must (c) without prejudice to point (a) (i), and notwithstand-
obtain and/or use: ing point (a) (ii) and point (b), specific work equipment
(a) work equipment which, if provided to workers in subject to the requirements of point 3 of Annex I,
the undertaking and/or establishment for the first time which, if already provided to workers in the under-
after 31 December 1992, complies with: taking and/or establishment by 5 December 1998,
(i) the provisions of any relevant Community directive complies with the minimum requirements laid down in
which is applicable; Annex I, no later than four years after that date.
(ii) the minimum requirements laid down in Annex I,
to the extent that no other Community directive is
applicable or is so only partially;

"Old" machines "New" machines

Machine that is put on the 1. Machine that is put on 2. All machines that are
market or put into service the market or put into imported to the EEA
before 1995 in the EEA. service after 1/1 1995 in irrespective of date of
the EEA. origin.
CE-marking +
Declaration of
conformity
Council Directive 89/655/EEC

(with amendment 96/63/EC Low Voltage Directive
and 2001/45/EC) concerning 2006/95/EC
the minimum safety and health
requirements for the use of work
equipment by workers at work. N.B!
Council Directive 89/655/EEC Possible national legislation on Not annex 1, instead use applicable
(with amendment 96/63/EC and specific machines directives.
2001/45/EC) EMC-directive 2004/108/EC Possibly
concerning the minimum safety and more
health requirements for the use of The Machinery Directive
directives
work equipment by workers at work. 98/37/EC
Annex 1 contains minimum requirements for health and
safety. There can also be additional national specific require-
used. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to select a
suitable method.
1
ments for certain machines. NB The point in time when
the Machinery Directive was implemented in each Member Machines in use
Country varies. Therefore it is necessary to check with the Risk assessment must be carried out on all machines that
national authorities in ones own country, to find out what is
considered as “old” and respectively “new” machines.
are in use; CE-marked as well as not CE-marked.
2
Risk assessment – an important tool both To fullfil the requirements from Directive 89/655/EEC
(concerning the minimum safety and health require-
when constructing a new machine and
ments for the use of work equipment by workers at
when assessing risks on older machines
A well thought-out risk assessment supports manufac-
work) risk assessment have to be made.
3
turers/users of machines to develop production friendly
safety solutions. One result of this is that the safety com- Documentation of risk assessment
ponents will not be a hindrance. This minimizes the risk of The risk assessment shall be documented. In the assess-
ment the actual risks shall be analysed as well as the level
4
the safety system being defeated.
of seriousness.
New machines
The following requirement is given by the Machinery Directive
The manufacturer is under an obligation to assess the

hazards in order to identify all of those which apply to 5
his machine; he must then design and construct it tak-
ing account of his assessment.
The standard EN ISO 14121-1 gives guidance on the infor-

mation required to allow risk assessment to be carried out. 6
The standard does not point out a specific method to be
Protection or warning?
How is it possible to choose safety measures that are 9
production friendly and in every way well balanced? The
Machinery Directive gives an order of priority for the choice
of appropriate methods to remove the risks. Here it is further
developed in a five step method.
10
Prioritize safety measures according to the five step
method
1
1. Eliminate or reduce risks by design and construction 2
2. Move the work tasks outside the risk area
3. Use guards/safety devices 3 11
4. Develop safe working routines/information/education
5. Use warnings as pictograms, light, sound etc. 4
5
The further from middle of the circle, the greater the respon-
sibility for the safety is put onto the user of the machine. If full
protection is not effectively achieved in one step, one has to
go to the next step and find complementary measures.
12
What is possible is dependant on the need for accessibility,
the seriousness of the risk, appropiate safety measures etc.
13
Example on prioritizing according to the 5-step-method
Priority Example of hazard and safety measure taken

1. Make machine safe by Hazard: Cuts and wounds from sharp edges and corners on machinery
design and construction
Safety
measure: Round off sharp edges and corners.

2. Move the work tasks Hazard: Crushing of fingers from machine movements during
outside the risk area inspection of the production inside the risk area
Safety
measure: Installation of a camera.
3. Use guard/safety Hazard: Crushing injuries because of unintended start during

devices loading of work pieces in a mechanical press
Safety
measure: Install a light curtain to detect operator and provide safe
stop of the machinery.
4. Safe working Hazard: Crushing injuries because the machine can tip during
routines/information installation and normal use.
Safety
measure: Make instructions on how the machine is to be installed
to avoid the risks. This can include requirements on the
type of fastening, ground, screw retention etc.
5. Warnings Hazard: Burns because of hot surfaces in reach

Safety
measure: Warning signs
The possibilities will increase to achieve a well thought-through safety system if each risk is handled
according to the described prioritizing.
Combine the five step method with production friendly thinking.

This can give you e.g.
• fast and easy restart of machines after a stop from a safety device
• enough space to safely program a robot
• places outside the risk area to observe the production
• electrically interlocked doors, instead of guards attached with screws, to be able to take the
necessary measures for removing production disturbances
• a safety system that is practical for all types of work tasks, even when removing production
disturbances
Jokab Safety has extensive experience within directives and standards

We have long experience of the practical application of directives and standards from both authorities
and production. We represent Sweden in standardization groups within machine safety and we work daily
with the practical application of safety demands in conjuction with production demands.
Examples of regularly used EN/ISO standards 1
EN ISO 12100-1 Safety of machinery – Basic concepts, Part 1: This standard defines basic terminology and methodology used in
EN ISO 12100-2 general principles for design – achieving safety of machinery. The provisions stated in this standard are
Part 1: Basic terminology, methodology
Part 2: Technical principles
intended for the designer.
Part 2: This standard defines technical principles to help designers in
achieving safety in the design of machinery.
2
EN ISO 13857 Safety of machinery - Safety distances to This standard establishes values for safety distances to prevent danger zones
prevent hazard zones being reached by being reached by the upper limbs. The distances apply when adequate safety
EN 349
upper and lower limbs
Safety of machinery – Minimum gaps

can be achieved by distances alone.
The object of this standard is to enable the user (e.g. standard makers, design-
3
(ISO 13854) to avoid crushing of parts of the human ers of machinery) to avoid hazards from crushing zones. It specifies minimum
body gaps relative to parts of the human body and is applicable when adequate
safety can be achieved by this method.
EN ISO 13850 Safety of machinery – Emergency stop

– Principles for design
This standard specifies design principles for emergency stop equipment for
machinery. No account is taken of the nature of the energy source.
4
EN 574 Safety of machinery – Two-hand control This standard specifies the safety requirements of a two-hand control device
devices – Functional aspects – Princi- and its logic unit. The standard describes the main characteristics of two-hand
ples for design control devices for the achievement of safety and sets out combinations of
functional characteristics for three types. 5
EN 953 Safety of machinery – Guards – General This standard specifies general requirements for the design and construction
requirements for the design and con- of guards provided primarily to protect persons from mechanical hazards.
struction of fixed and movable guards
EN ISO 13849-1
(replaces EN 954-1)
Safety of machinery – Safety related
parts of control systems –
This standard provides safety requirements and guidance on the principles
for the design (see 3.11 of EN 292-1:1991) of safety-related parts of control
6
Part 1: General principles for design systems. For these parts it specifies categories and describes the charac-
teristics of their safety functions. This includes programmable systems for all
machinery and for related protective devices. It applies to all safety-related
parts of control systems, regardless of the type of energy used, e.g. electrical,
hydraulic, pneumatic, mechanical. It does not specify which safety functions
and which categories shall be used in a particular case.
7
EN ISO 13849-2 Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts This standard specifies the procedures and conditions to be followed for the
of control systems. Validation validation by analysis and testing of:
• the safety functions provided, and
• the category achieved of the safety-related parts of the control sys-
tem in compliance with EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1), using the design
rationale provided by the designer.
8
EN 62061 Safety of machinery. Functional safety of The standard defines the safety requirements and guiding principles for the
safety-related electrical, electronic and design of safety-related electrical/electronic/programmable parts of a control
EN 999 (will be replaced by

programmable electronic control systems system.
Safety of machinery. The positioning This standard provides parameters based on values for hand/arm and approach
9
EN ISO 13855) of protective equipment in respect of speeds and the methodology to determine the minimum distances from specific
approach speeds of parts of the human sensing or actuating devices of protective equipment to a danger zone.
bod
EN 1088
and EN 1088/A1
Safety of machinery. Interlocking devices
associated with guards. Principles for
This standard specifies principles for the design and selection - independ-
ent of the nature of the energy source - of interlocking devices associated
10
design and selection with guards. It also provides requirements specifically intended for electrical
interlocking devices. The standard covers the parts of guards which actuate
interlocking devices.
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment This part of IEC 60204 applies to the application of electrical and electronic
of machines. General requirements equipment and systems to machines not portable by hand while working,
11
including a group of machines working together in a co-ordinated manner
but excluding higher level systems aspects (i.e. communications between
systems).
12
13
New standards for safety-related
parts of control systems
Since 10 November 2006 the revised standard EN 954-1 • EN 62061 can be used up to the highest level, SIL 3.
has been in force. This is called EN ISO 13849-1. During a This applies to protective functions that are electrical,
transition period extending until 1 November 2009 both electronic and programmable. Where all or part of the pro-
standards will be valid. It is however worth remembering that tective functions are mechanical, hydraulic or pneumatic,
this only applies within the EU – at the international level (ISO EN ISO 13849-1 should be applied.
level) the transition period does not apply – ISO 13849-1
has completely replaced EN 954-1. There has been a more general standard for functional safety
The IEC has also produced a standard for safety in control in existance for several years, EN 61508 (del 1-7) Functional
systems, IEC 62061 Safety of machinery – Functional safety safety of safety-critical electrical, electronic and program-
of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable mable electronic control systems.
electronic control systems, in force since 23 May 2005.
In what situations should either IEC 62061 or IEC
When should each standard be applied? 61508 be used?
• EN ISO 13849-1 can be applied to all protective functions Example: Designers of safety PLCs should use EN 61508;
(mechanical, electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic) up to the those who integrate a safety PLC into a machine control
highest level, where PL=e. system and prepare applications program software can use
EN 62061.
Applying EN ISO 13849-1.

Risk graph for determining required PLr for safety function.
Key Risk parameters

1 The starting point for evaluating the contribution of the S Seriousness of the injury
protective function to risk reduction. S1 Light (usually temporary) injury
L A low contribution to risk reduction S2 Severe (usually permanent) injury, including fatality
H A high contribution to risk reduction F Frequency and/or exposure time to the source of
PLr The required performance level risk
F1 Seldom or less often and/or a brief exposure time
F2 Frequent or continuous and/or a long exposure time
P Possibility to avoid or limit injury
P1 Possible under special conditions
P2 Hardly possible
In the case of a risk assessment of a machine or type of
machine, one determines which protective measures are
categories are selected – B, 1, 2, 3 or 4 for these parts.
Here it is not always possible (nor desirable) to be able
1
necessary in order to ensure that the safety of the machinery to assign a category to the entire safety function. With the
will agree with the Machinery Directive and the standards method in EN ISO 13849-1 one selects instead a required
that are to be applied. In respect of the safety measures that Perfomance Level (PLr) and this applies to the entire safety
involve the control systems of machines, one must decide
"how safe" the safety must be - the higher the risk the more
reliability is demanded of the safety function. In EN 954-1
function. The choice of required Perfomance Level (PLr)
takes place in a similar way to the selection of a category,
see the risk graph.
2
How do you achieve the performance level (PLr) that is determined by the risk graph?
There are a number of parameters to take into account when designing a certain protection function. These are as follows:
• MTTFd for each individual component – Mean Time To Failure, dangerous
3
• DC, Diagnostic Coverage – to what extent dangerous faults are detected
• the structure – which categories are to be used for the parts in their protective functions
• CCF, Common Cause Failure – measures that will be relevant when working with some form of redundancy (for
categories 2,3 and 4)
• how the function acts in a fault condition – also given by the selected category
4
• systematic fault – measures to avoid these in the design
The Performance Level (PL) is expressed as the Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour within certain ranges.
Performance Level, PL
a
PFHD
10-5 ≥ till <10-4
5
b 3x10-6 ≥ to <10-5
c 10-6 ≥ to <3x10-6
d
e
10-7 ≥ to <10-6
10-8 ≥ to <10-7
6
The standard gives the designer several choices for

achieving a certain PL. The following illustration shows
The values of MTTFd, DC and the categories of our prod-
ucts will be given to you when you contact us. In some 7
how this is possible, depending on which levels the pa- cases we can state a PL straight away for a protective
rameters achieve. function or part of a protective function.
10
11
Förklaring
PL prestandanivå
1 MTTFd för varje kanal = låg (kort tid) 12
2 MTTFd för varje kanal = medel (medellång tid)
3 MTTFd för varje kanal = hög (lång tid)
13
Simplified assessment of performance level PLlow Nlow → PL
(PL) a >3 → None, not permitted
A safety function most often consists of the following
≤3 → a
parts
• Input – light beam, interlocked gate, etc. b >2 → a
• Logic – monitoring of the input, control and supervision ≤2 → b
of components for switching off energy c >2 → b
• Output – switches, valves, etc. for switching off energy
≤2 → c
A safety function can be said to consist of N parts. d >3 → c
One way of verifying that the PL has been achieved by us-
ing the risk graph, see the illustration on page 1:10, is to ≤3 → d
calculate all the parameters (MTTFd, DCavg, etc.). If on the e >3 → d
other hand the performance levels (PL) of the three parts ≤3 → e
(input, logic and output)of the safety function are known, NOTE The calculated values in the table are based on the centre
the estimation of achieved PL becomes much simpler. point of each interval for the respective PL.
NOTE The calculated values in the table are based on the

centre point of each interval for the respective PL.
The method is as follows:

1. Identify the part of the safety function that has the lowest
PL; this will be PLlow
2. Identify the number of Nlow ≤ N in the safety function that
have PLlow
3. Find the achieved PL in the table.
As an example - a common solution - consider an interlocked

gate (safety interlock), a safety relay and two monitored
contactors with positive output contacts.
Example:
Safety relay Two positive output monitored contactors

Safety interlock
MTTFd = 600 years MTTFd = 35 years
MTTFd = 100 years
DC = 99.9% DC = 99.9%
Category 1
Category 4 Category 4
→ PL = c
→ PL = e → PL = e
PLlow is PL = c and Nlow is 1. With the aid of the table one can see that PL for the entire safety function
will be PL = c.
The safety interlock is inherently in category 1 and can never be more than this even if both its contacts
are used to obtain short-circuit supervision of a connaction to the safety relay.
Designers of safety systems can use this simple method. Contact us so that we can give you the per-
formance levels (PL) of our products, and also guide you as to how the performance levels (PL) are to be
calculated for the components that will be connected in order to remove the energy to moving parts.
Applying EN 62061
If one chooses to design a safety function in accordance with EN 62061, the level of reliability is expressed as the
1
Safety Integrity Level, SIL. There are a total of 4 levels, but in the EN 62061 standard SIL 3 is the highest level. SIL also
(similar to the Performance Level PL), is expressed as the Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour.
Safety Integrity Level, SIL

3
Probability of Dangerous Failure per Hour (PFHD)
≥10-8 to <10-7
2
2 ≥10-7 to <10-6
1 ≥10-6 to <10-5
There is a method in EN 62061 for assigning the Safety Integrity Level. 3

Severity (Se) Class (Cl)
4
3-4
SIL2
5-7
SIL2
8-10
SIL2
11-13
SIL3
14-15
SIL3
4
3 (OM) SIL1 SIL2 SIL3
2 (OM) SIL1 SIL2
1
OM = Other Measures
(OM) SIL1
5
The seriousness of injury that can occur is defined at one of
Definition of protective safety in accordance with
four levels. Class is the addition of the values of frequency
(Fr, stated as a value between 1 and 5, where 5 represents
EN 62061
"Function of a machine whose failure can result in an im-
6
the highest frequency), probability that a dangerous event
mediate increase of the risk(s)"
will occur (Pr, stated as a value between 1 and 5, where
5 represents the highest proability) and the possibility
of avoiding or limiting injury (Av, sated as a value of 1, 3
or 5, where 5 represents the least chance of avoiding or
limiting an injury).
If the SIL requirements are not fulfilled in any of the sub-ele-
ments or by the safety function in its entirety, there must be
7
The safety function that is to be designed must at least a re-design.
fulfil the SIL that has been assigned to it in the analysis.
The safety function consists of a number of sub-elements. You will get the PFHD values of our products when you
Example: a door is interlocked by a non-contact sensor
which is in turn monitored by a Pluto safety PLC, with out-
contact us.
8
puts that break the power to two supervised contactors. Finally
The sensor is sub-element 1, Pluto is sub-element 2 and This is just a brief introduction to the EN ISO 13849-1 and
the two supervised contactors are sub-element 3. If in the EN 62061 standards. You are welcome to contact us so
analysis it has been established that SIL2 shall be used,
every individual sub-element in the safety function must
that we can prepare suitable training and guide you in how
to apply the standards to our products. 9
fulfil the SIL2 requirements. The safety function must then
in its entirety fulfil the SIL2 requirements.
10
11
12
13
This is how you
choose the safety
category
”A fault in the control circuit logic, or failure of or damage to the control circuit must
not lead to dangerous situations”. This is the declaration of the EU’s Machinery
Directive.
EN 954-1 is valid in parallel with EN ISO 13849-1 during a transition period, but
terminates on 1 November 2009 to be replaced completely by EN ISO 13849-1.
During the transition period, it is possible to choose which of the two standards to
apply. A further standard that can be applied to safety-related parts is EN 62061.
Information concerning these standards can be found on the previous pages.
The significance of this statement is that a fault such as a jammed Choice of category
relay, a short circuit in a transistor or a short circuit between two It is above all a question of the technique available. Gate operation
conductors should and must not result in the safety function failing, equipment can for example be fitted with a monitored interlocking
with the consequent risk of personal injuries. switch (category 1) or a dynamic sensor (category 4). However,
Please note, “a fault” means that the system is only expected interlocking circuits with relays and transistors, etc. normally require
to handle one fault at a time. Two components failing at the same solutions in categories 2 – 4 in order to achieve a higher safety
time is not regarded as likely as long as they cannot be made to level than for standard control circuits.
fail by an external influence. Appendix B to EN954-1 shows an example of how a category
is chosen. The example gives some guidance but has its limita-
Methods for increased safety tions. The safety category is chosen based on the safety risk of
In order to increase the reliability of a safety circuit, the following the machinery. The risk is estimated based on the parameters S,
methods are usually used: F and P.
• Well-tried safety components and safety principles
• Redundancy/Duplication
• Supervision S Severity of injury
S1 Slight (normally reversible) injury
The European standard EN 954-1 S2 Serious (normally irreversible) injury including death
EN 954-1 is a standard specifically relating to safety-related parts F Frequency and /or exposure time to the hazard
of control systems. The standard has a system of categories, based F1 Seldom to quite often and/or the exposure time is
on the above mentioned methods, which increases the reliability short
of a safety function. F2 Frequent to continuous and/or the exposure time is
long
Category B P Possibility of avoiding the hazard
• Basic requirement P1 Possible under specific conditions
• Correctly rated components P2 Scarcely possible
• Circuits handling earth faults Category
Category 1
• All conditions of B apply
• Well-tried safety components and safety principles
• Components with a greater reliability.
Category 2
• Individual supervised components
• The safety function may fail
• The loss of the safety function is detected by monitoring
Category 3 and 4
• The safety function is always retained during a failure Fig. 1 Method for selecting a safety category for safety-
• The difference between category 3 and 4 is that certain related parts of control system. Annex B (informative) of
types of fault are not detected in category 3. standard EN 954-1.
• Possible category which can require additional
•
measures.
Recommended category according to this method.
Overdimensioned measure according to this method.
By taking the three parameters S, F and P into account as
shown in the drawing (figure 1), a recommended control system
the safety signal is monitored all the time and a fault directly
leads to a stop signal or with a magnetic switch which has two 1
category can be obtained according to this method. However, independent contact elements which are monitored every time
the problem with this table is that it does not give a clear-cut a gate opens. From the user's perspective the dynamic function
answer but several alternatives. For example, an automatic is preferable because several sensors can be connected to
production plant with estimated risk factors of S2 (serious a single safety module and still achieve category 4. Also the
injuries), F1 (seldom to quite often), P2 (scarcely possible to
avoid an accident) comes under the categories 1 – 4 although
sensor’s safety function is monitored without having to open
a gate. For a magnetic switch the requirements for category 4
2
categories 2 and 3 would be the preferred choice as these are only fulfilled if one switch per monitoring unit is used and
are marked with two black filled rings. A higher category can if the gate is opened regularly.
always be chosen and category 1 may also be chosen if the Since the standard EN 954-1 was written, development has
system´s intended behaviour is maintained. A justification for
the deviation should also be given.
The fact that categories 1 and 4 are combined in the same
progressed and the costs to fulfill category 4 have dropped
dramatically. Generally mechanical switches are replaced with
non-contact sensors to increase the reliability of production
3
safety circuit is due to the standard not specifying a strict equipment. The same goes for the safety side. With electronic
hierarchical safety order. When comparing categories 2 – 4, non-contact switches, with a transmitter and a receiver, one
category 4 is normally the safest. However, when comparing avoids the problems of deterioration and excessive stress
category 1 with categories 2, 3 and 4, this is not always a
matter of course.
which harm the sensor. For that kind of sensor dynamic
monitoring is required to enable a safe function. This means 4
that its function is constantly being monitored, hundred of
A mechanical switch does not give a safe function! times per second. The reaction time for a safe stop will then
When it comes to mechanically operated interlocked switches, be the same during a malfunction as during the activation of a
it has long been accepted a Category 1 switch is adequate for stop (e.g. a gate opening). The monitoring frequency will also
many installations, which is also supported by several standards.
However some companies have now re-evaluated this and have
be astronomical compared to that of mechanical switches
and magnetic switches, which are only monitored every time
5
instead started to demand two mechanical switches or non- they are used. In the new EN ISO 13849-1, which will replace
contact switches/sensors, where they previously accepted 954-1, probability calculations are used together with different
single mechanical switches. Many reported incidents form the category levels to compare different “performance levels”. Even
background to this. The requirements for switches to provide
safe functioning are that they are mounted correctly and that
their positions do not change during their life-cycle, in other
when using EN ISO 13849-1 it can be so that one achieves
reasonably high theoretical reliability with an electromechanical
switch, although this presumes correct installation, proper
6
words, ideal conditions. In many installations the location of use and otherwise ideal conditions. A non-contact switch
hatches or doors changes over time. This has led to a switch not instead provides high levels of both theoretical and practical
giving a stopping signal when an interlocked gate has opened. reliability.
The reasons for this are many, but they can be summarized in
mechanical deterioration or physical damage to a door/hatch. Our conclusion, use dynamic signals! 7
In turn this has led to an interlocked switch being affected by Our conclusion is that today it is more cost effective, safer and
higher stress than the switch manufacturer’s specifications. To more reliable to work with dynamic signals to achieve category
avoid this type of malfunction it is more appropriate to use non- 4 for sensors and monitoring units. In that case it is also
contact switches/sensors because mechanical deterioration possible to fulfill the Machinery Directive, 1.2.7. requirement:
does not affect the safety function, i.e. the stop signal is given
directly if the position is wrong.
“A fault in the control circuit logic, or failure of or damage to
the control circuit, must not lead to dangerous situations”.
8
A non-contact switch/sensor does not have a guided function Also one does not have to discuss whether the correct safety
and is designed to fulfill the requirements in another way. The category has been chosen!
requirements are fulfilled either with dynamic sensors where
9
*Dynamic monitoring, *Static monitoring,
Door 1 Door 2 Door 3 Vital/Pluto Interlocked switch e.g. RT6
Dynamic sensors
* *
10
Door 1
11
Up to 30 doors (Eden sensors) can be connected to the dynamic
monitoring maintaining category 4.
Maximum 1 door (2 interlocked switches) can
be connected to the static monitoring for cat-
egory 4 to be maintained for the entire system.
12
13
We train you on safety
requirements
- enhance your knowledge!
What requirements are there today?
With the incorporation of Sweden into the EU there are
many new standards and regulations with which to comply.
There have also been changes and revisions of existing
standards and directives.
As a business and designer one is obliged to know about
and to follow all the regulations. But it can be difficult for
each individual company to keep track of all the new regu-
lations and how they should be applied.
Your local Jokab Safety sales office can help you with
training and analysis during a build-up phase or as a
continuous consulting assignment.
Our course trainers have a extensive experience in machine safety

A distinguishing feature of all the engineers at Jokab Safety is that they work daily with practical applications of standards
and regulations. This is true for everything from safety components for individual machines to entire deliveries of safety
systems for larger production lines. Within the company there is also a very good knowledge of machine control and
production. We are also represented in standardisation groups which decide on European and International standards
concerning machine safety. Because Jokab Safety is represented globally, we have the knowledge of safety requirements
in different countries.
Training in machine safety

Are you building machines for sale or for your own use? Are you a user of machines? Are you working with automation
of production plants or do you make technical evaluations of machines prior to purchase?
Regardless of the purpose, there is a need for knowledge concerning what requirements and regulations exist in
respect of machine safety, and how they should be applied.
We offer company-adapted training in the following fields:
• Product liability and its consequences • Machine safety analysis; method and cases
• CE-labelling • Choice of safety measures/safety devices
• The Machine Directive and how to apply it • Requirements for manufacturer´s technical
• Choice of certification procedure with examination documentation
of the parts which are required in order to be able • Requirements for manuals
to CE-label a machine • Requirements for ”old machines”
• Harmonised standards and the applications of • Specific interpretation cases, e.g. re-construction of
these, e.g. machines
- EN ISO 13849-1/-2 • Forthcoming changes in the Machine Directive
- EN ISO 12100-1/-2
- EN 60204-1
Company-adapted training in machine safety
- EN ISO 13850
Contact your local sales office with questions and
- EN ISO 13857, EN 999 (EN ISO 13855)
your current training needs. Together with you,
we will customize the training to your specific
company requirements.
1
Training in risk analysis
We regularly have training courses in our offices. One of these covers risk analysis and how to choose production
adapted measures.
A course in risk analysis contains the following:

2
• Risk analysis - from theory to practice Training courses at local sales office
• What durability towards errors shall the safety system Contact your local sales office with questions and
have?
• Standard EN ISO 13849-1/-2
your current training needs. Together with you, we
will customize the training to your specific company
3
• Safety distances for fencing systems and safety requirements.
components - how do you choose?
• Cases, practice and briefing of risk analysis and
choice of actions
4
Product training
Our unique Pluto Safety PLC gives new and great possibilites to build-up a cost effective and flexible safety
5
system. With this also comes the demands of higher knowledge. For you as a customer to be able to quickly get
started using Pluto in the most effective way and to learn about its possibilities, we regularly offer trainings at our
local sales offices. In the training course cost is included a Pluto, software for Pluto and full documentation. We
also offer training on the other Jokab Safety products such as the Vital solution, safety relays and light beams/
curtains. 6
Training - Pluto and other Jokab Safety products
Contact your local sales office with questions and
your current training needs. Together with you, we
will customize the training to your specific company 7
requirements.
8
Consulting
Do you need assistance in CE-marking a machine? Do you want a third party to carry out a risk analysis on a machine 9
line? Do you have the need of a partner to examine how various regulations´ effect the safety of your machines?
We can offer assistance and support in both short and longer

assignments. Here are a few examples of what we can offer you: 10
• Risk analysis with proposal of measures. We do this together
with the customer and it is often done as a pilot-project so that the
company afterwards themselves can carry out analysis.
• Guide the customer business through a CE-marking of machine/ plant.
• Write/review technical documentation/manuals
Stopping time measurement is
required in order to be able to deter-
11
mine the correct safety distance.
• Interpret standards and regulations
• Stopping time measurement - We can measure the stopping time Consulting - Contact us
on your machines with our Stopping time and motion analyser tool. Come to us with your needs and we
Knowledge of the stopping time is a prerequisite to be able to determine
the correct safety distance. EN 999 sets the requirements.
will plan with you a suitable project
programme. You can also contact us
12
• Programming of Pluto Safety-PLC. with short questions which we can solve
directly over the phone or via e-mail.
13
Light beams/light
Safety circuit according to
Category 4 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
curtains/scanner
–Focus and Spot
A complete range of light beams and light curtains.
Dynamic circuits
–Vital, Pluto and Tina adaptation
Dynamic safety circuits for multiple sensors in accordance
with the highest safety category. Tina converts volt free
contacts to dynamics safety signals, etc.
.
System
• Industrial robots for different sectors
Safety relays • Level crossings with barriers

–RT-series, JSB-series, safety timers • Mechanical/Hydraulic presses
and expansions relays • Packaging machinery
The smallest and most flexible safety relays on the
market.
Sensors/switches E-stops
–Eden, Magne and JSNY-series –Smile series and JSNY10
Dynamic non-contact sensors, interlocking devices and Unique e-stop devices that can work with dynamic dual
magnetic switches. signals.
1
Safety PLC
–Pluto
A unique ”All Master” safety PLC for simple design of
safety systems.
2
AS-i Stopping time and
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
CANopen
Machine diagnosis tool 3
Ethernet
–Smart
Smart stop analyser. Stop time and machine diagnosis
HMI
tool.
5
Control devices
–Safeball, JSHD4
Training & consulting and Fox 6
Ergonomic three-position devices,
• Machine safety & risk analysis two-hand control devices and foot
• Standards operated switches.
• Protection systems 7
• Programming
• Product training
10
Fencing system/SafeCAD/
Roller door
11
Rails/bumpers/mats
–Quick-Guard and SafeCad Safety contact rails, bumpers and mats.
A stable and flexible fencing system which is easy to
construct
12
13
explanation of safety terminologY
Supervised Reset Contact Strip/Mat

The input must both be closed and opened before the Contact Strips/Mats can be supervised by a true two
outputs of the safety relay are activated. Using this input channel safety relay. A stop signal being generated
method both the reset device and the interconnecting when both inputs are connected (shortcircuited) to
cable are supervised. each other.
Test Brake Strip
The input is used to supervise contactors and valves,
When a Brake Strip is squeezed the contacts within
and must be closed before the safety relay can be
the strip are forced open and provides a stop signal via
reset. It can also be used as a simple form of reset only
requiring a contact closure. In this case however, the a suitable safety relay.
risk of short circuit must be prevented and the reset Interlocked Hatch
device supervised separately. When a Interlocked Hatch is opened an interlock
Time Reset device gives a stop signal via a safety relay. If the hatch
This is used to prevent unintentional reset when cannot be entered by a human body automatic reset
somebody is in the risk area. Within a guaranteed can be allowed.
maximum time two or more reset push buttons must be
activated. The PB’s must be placed in such physical Interlocked Gate
positions so that the users can overview the total When a Interlocked Gate is opened an interlock device
danger area. The Time Reset function can be achieved gives a stop signal via a safety relay. If the gate can
using a JSHT1 in combination with a safety relay be passed by a human body a safety relay with a
incorporating a supervised reset. supervised reset should be used.
Delayed Safety Stop Foot Pedal
Where it is permissable to allow a machine to stop A safety foot operated switch is used when the operator
before disconnection of power, it is necessary to has to have both hands free. Safety relays can be
achieve a Delayed Safety Stop. The delay period being used to supervise Foot Pedals to ensure both correct
the time between the initiation of the stop signal and the operation and to ensure shortcircuits in connecting
opening of the safety contacts. The time delay must be
cables do not cause unintentional start signals.
designed in such a way that it will not increase in time
in the case of a component failure. This type of delay Two Hand Control
is permitted, dependant upon risk assessment, for both This requires the use of a safety relay to supervise
emergency stops and other safety devices. that the two start push buttons are pressed within 0.5
Bypass Connection sec of each other before a start signal is allowed. The
This is sometimes permissible where it is required to, highest safety level requires two contacts in each PB,
e.g., allow material transport into a dangerous area. The a duplicated stop function being given even if only one
Bypass Connection must be of the same safety level as PB is released (see JSBR4). Shortcircuits between
the safety device being bypassed. connecting wires are detected automatically. In the
lower safety level other safety relays can be used.
Time Bypass Connection
This is the provision of a guaranteed maximum time Emergency Stop
for the transportation of material or passing with an When an Emergency Stop push button is activated
enabling device. a stop signal is given via a safety relay. Reset of the
Emergency Stop device should not by itself lead to a
Inching
start signal being given.
Inching requires safety outputs to be closed for a
maximum period of time allowing the machine to Machine I/O
move only a short distance each time the inching All types of machines have a need to interface to
control is activated. The time must be designed so emergency stops, contactors and other types of safety
that the specified time will not increase in the case of
devices. Approved safety relays make this easy to
component failure.
perform.
Three Position Enabling/Hold to Run Device
These devices are used during trouble shooting or True Two Channel
testing of machines. If the device push button is pressed True Two Channel requires two inputs with different
into its bottom position or released completely a safe voltages to be closed before the safety relay can be
duplicated stop signal is given. JOKAB SAFETY´s activated. A stop signal is given even if only one input
Three Position Devices have duplicated switches and is opened or a short circuit is detected across the
are supervised by a true two input channel safety relay. inputs.
Pluto Safety PLC
Including dynamic signals, the new safety principle.
Pluto/Gateway/Encoder
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
AS-i
CANopen
Ethernet
12 I/O + 31 AS-i safety nodes
20 I/O 46 I/O
(A/D)
HMI
Pluto Manager
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page 1
Why you should use the Pluto safety PLC _______________________________2:2
Pluto with and without a databus ______________________________________2:4

s)/OVERVIEW _________________________________________________________2:6 2
s0LUTO4ECHNICALDATA ____________________________________________________2:8
s0LUTOACCESSORIES____________________________________________________ 2:10
s0LUTOCERTIlCATION ____________________________________________________ 2:11
3
Pluto Manager ____________________________________________________ 2:12
Pluto Gateway _____________________________________________________ 2:14

s0ROlBUS __________________________________________________________ 2:16
4
s$EVICE NET _________________________________________________________ 2:18
s#!.OPEN _________________________________________________________ 2:20
s%THERNET __________________________________________________________ 2:22 5
Safe encoder ______________________________________________________ 2:24
Example – Robot cell with Pluto _____________________________________ 2:28

6
Electrical connections ______________________________________________ 2:29
Pluto settings _____________________________________________________ 2:30 7

PLC code Pluto ____________________________________________________ 2:32
10
11
12
Descriptions and examples in this book show how the products work and can be used. This does not mean that they can meet the requirements for
all types of machines and processes. The purchaser/user is responsible for ensuring that the product is installed and used in accordance with the
applicable regulations and standards. We reserve the right to make changes in products and product sheets without previous notice. For the latest
updates, refer to www.jokabsafety.com. 2008.
13
Approval:
Why you should
have Pluto safety EN 954-1, Category 4
EN 61496-1, Type 4
%.3),
PLC's.
– for simplifying the design of and changes to safety systems!
Pluto is an ”All-Master” safety PLC concept, that simplifies This concept enables simple communication, programming
the design of safety systems and achieves the highest safety and changes to the safety system. With the use of a 'Gateway'
LEVELCATEGORY ACCORDINGTO%. %.)3/ device, a Pluto can communicate with other bus systems
AND3),ACCORDINGTO)%#%.4HEKEYDIFFERENCE and thereby form part of a larger network. Gateway units are
between Pluto and conventional safety PLC´s is that there available for several different bus systems, such as Profibus,
is no "Master-Slave" relationship between the control units #AN/PEN$EVICE.ETAND%THERNET7ITHA0LUTO!3 IBOTH
connected to the safety bus. Each Pluto is a 'Master' unit and safety slaves and standard slaves can be handled.
can see the other Plutos' inputs and outputs, and can thereby Pluto offers an economic solution for both single machines
make decisions about its own safety environment. and for major machine systems.
Our solution with All-Master

Pluto – All Master
Pluto All-Master )/ + )/ + )/
Pluto All-Master
Pluto All-Master
4 + 4 + 4
!3 ISAFETY
)/ nodes
+
Traditional safety PLC
Master
Safe bus
4 Pluto AS-i
Slaves +
)/ )/
6 + 4
– to supervise safety devices! 1
Light beams Light grids/curtains POSITION Sensors/ Two-hand Emergency Strips Mats
2
devices switches controls stops
Most safety devices on the market can be connected di-

rectly to Pluto units. By using dynamic signals with sensors
For example non-contact Eden sensors, Spot light beams
and Tina emergency stop buttons can all be connected in 3
from Jokab Safety only one input is needed for category 4, series to a single Pluto input. Even mechanical switches can
COMPAREDTOTWOINPUTSFOROTHERMANUFACTURERSg0,#S)T be connected to the 'dynamic' safety circuit using Jokab
is also possible to connect up to 10 sensors in series to a 3AFETYgSVARIOUS4INAADAPTERS0LUTOALSOHAS)/CONNECTIONS
single input on Pluto according to category 4. that can be used as both inputs and outputs.
4
– to save on inputs!
Dynamic signals
1–10 doors with one Eden per door
category 4
Dynamic signals
1-10 sensors
category 4
5
7
/
T
PU
NE
IN
IN
NE
PU
/
T
8
Pluto
has inputs for static and
dynamic sensors. Several
sensors can be connected
to one dynamic input in
accordance with category 4.
9
10
N
IO
Tw
T
EC
o
NN
in
O
pu
C
ts
NE
/
IO connections Static inputs (mechanical switches)

0LUTOHAS)/CONNECTIONSTHATCANBEUSEDINTHREEWAYS 2 for each door = category 4
sINPUT
sOUTPUT
11
sboth input and output at the same time (e.g. for a reset button with lamp
indication)
input/output
12
13
Pluto with databus - an overview
Pluto B20
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
CANopen
Ethernet
20 I/O
3AFEBUSFORCONNECTIONOFUPTO0LUTOUNITS
Patented
HMI
Gateway for two-way databus HMI!N(-)OPERATOR Pluto bridge

communication between Pluto and 4 independent panel can communicate With a Gateway set up
other control systems. failsafe safety outputs with Pluto in both direc- as a Pluto bridge, it is
tions. Connection can be POSSIBLETO
made via the bus or direct sincrease the databus
to the front of the Pluto. length
Pluto is an All-Master-System for dynamic and static safety circuits 4HEINTERFACEIS23 suse different databus
where the inputs and other information are shared on a databus. speeds for each section
Several safety sensors can be connected to one input while still sfilter information from
achieving the highest level of safety. There are also combined in- one section to reduce
puts and outputs that can be used, for example, for lamp pushbut- the databus loading on
tons where the input and output functions are used simultaneously. other sections.
Pluto has inputs for all safety devices on the market, and the Pluto
Manager software selects how each input shall respond.
Pluto without a databus – A single Pluto can be used as a

fully programmable safety logic controller.
Pluto S20 Pluto S46 Connector expansion
Patented Patented Patented
Several expansion relays can be con-

nected to a single Pluto safety output
while retaining the safety level.
0LUTOWITHOUTABUSCONNECTIONISAVAILABLEINTWOSIZESWITHAND)/THE3AND3 RESPECTIVELY)NOTHER

words, they are similar to the equivalent versions with bus connections, the B20 and B46-6.
1
Pluto B46 Pluto AS-i
2
46 I/O Safety Monitor/Master
Safe bus 12 I/O + 31 AS-i safety slaves

(A/D)
3
Approvals
Patented Patented EN 954-1, Category 4
EN ISO 13849-1, PL e
EN 61496-1, Type 4
EN 61508, SIL 3
EN ISO 62061, SIL 3
4
EN ISO 60204-1
EN 50178
EN ISO 574, Type lllc
EN ISO 50295 (Only Pluto AS-i)
6 independent 4 independent
5
failsafe safety outputs failsafe safety outputs
Absolute encoder. Pluto AS-i is an AS-i module which can be con-

8 single turn or multi
turn absolute encoders
NECTEDTOA!3 IBUS)TCANEITHERBE!3 IMASTER
on the bus or work together with an AS-i master 6
can be connected di- ASMONITOR)TINCLUDES!3 INODESANALOGUEAND
rectly to the safety bus. digital outputs, as well as safety outputs.
7
Free software is available via our website, at
www.jokabsafety.com!
8
10
Pluto Manager
Programming is performed using ladder or
Boolean algebra – with timers, auxiliary mem-
11
ory, registers, sequential programming and
TÜV-approved function blocks. The program
can be downloaded cost-free from the web
site. Programs can be loaded via one Pluto to
all the other Pluto units on the databus.
12
13
I/O Overview - Pluto
IDFIX
IDFIX
)$ #ONNECTIONFORIDENTIlERWHICHHASAUNIQUE)$NUMBERTHATCANBEREADBYTHESYSTEM

) 3AFETYINPUTS6$# THATAREINDIVIDUALLYSECURE4HISMEANSTHATCOMPLETESAFETYCANBEACHIEVEDWITH
only one input if Jokab Safety dynamic safety components are used.
/THERWISETWOINPUTSAREREQUIREDFOREACHSAFETYFUNCTION
)1 )/THATCANBEUSEDFORSAFETYINPUTSORSIGNALOUTPUTSEGTOINDICATEORCONTROLFUNCTIONSTHATARENOT
SAFETY RELATED&OR)1ASSAFETYINPUTSREFERTO)
11 &AILSAFERELAYOUTPUTSTHATAREINDIVIDUALLYFAILSAFEANDINDIVIDUALLYPROGRAMMABLE
11 &AILSAFETRANSISTOROUTPUTS 6$# THATAREINDIVIDUALLYFAILSAFEANDINDIVIDUALLYPROGRAMMABLE)NTENDED
for electro-mechanical components such as contactors and valves.
11 Failsafe relay outputs that are individually failsafe and individually programmable.
Input connection 1
4HESYSTEMOFFERSSOLUTIONSFORBOTHSINGLEANDTWO CHANNELSAFETYDEVICES)NORDERTOMONITORWIRING
short-circuits it is possible to use up to three different dynamic signals and static voltage (+24 V) to
supply the inputs. The inputs are then programmed to only accept one of the signal types.
)NATWO CHANNELSYSTEMBOTHCHANNELSWILLBEMEASUREDUSINGTWODIFFERENTSIGNALS4HESYSTEMWILL 2

thereby be able to detect a short-circuit between the channels.
)NASINGLECHANNELSYSTEMTHEDYNAMICSIGNALISMODIlEDATEACHSENSOR!SHORT CIRCUITBETWEENTHEINPUT
and the output of the sensor will be detected at the Pluto input. Category 4 can thus be achieved by using
only one channel and one input. 3
Emergency
4
stop with Eden sensor
Tina
Spot light
beam
Emergency
5
stop with
Tina
6
Two-channel system Single channel dynamic system, category 4
)NPUTCONNECTIONALTERNATIVEINACCORDANCEWITHCATEGORY%. %.)3/
7
Reset button that uses the combined input and output facility
8
Resetting with a lamp
input/output
9
A1 X4
(Current monitoring)
24VDC
4YPE"4 10
Both a lamp and a pushbutton can be connected to the same terminal. This function Examples of connector expan-
ISFORRESETTINGSAFETYDEVICESANDTOREDUCETHENUMBEROF)/SUSED sion 11
4HE0LUTO!HASACURRENTMONITORINGFUNCTION)1ANDCANMONITORTHATALAMP
is intact. The lamp is only considered to be intact if sufficient current is being drawn from
THEOUTPUT/NEAPPLICATIONISMUTINGLAMPSSAFETYDEVICEBYPASS (OWEVERACCORDING
TO%. THEREISNOLONGERAREQUIREMENTTOMONITORMUTINGLAMPS
12
13
Technical data - general Pluto databus
Max number of Pluto units on
-ANUFACTURER */+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN THEDATABUS CAN
$ATABUSTYPE 100, 125, 200, 250, 400, 500,
#OLOUR Black and beige
$ATABUSSPEEDS 800, 1000 kb/s
/PERATINGVOLTAGE 24V DC ±15% Up to 600 m
)NSTALLATION MM$).RAIL $ATABUSCABLELENGTH 150 m at 400 kb/s
%LECTRICALINSULATION #ATEGORY))INACCORDANCEWITH AS-i databus

)%# -ASTERPROlLE M2
.UMBEROFSLAVEUNITS
3AFETYCATEGORY Cat. 4 in accordance with $ATABUSOPERATION Master
EN 954-1 Safety monitor
3),INACCORDANCEWITH Safety monitor & slave
EN 61508/EN 62061
Temperature
Failsafe inputs I & IQ !MBIENTTEMPERATURE –10˚C to +50˚C
4YPE 6FOR0.0SENSORS )1 3TORAGEANDTRANSPORT –25˚C to +55˚C
also configurable as non-failsafe
outputs Response times
Current at 24 V 5.1 mA Dyn. A or static input to relay
Max. overvoltage 6CONTINUOUS OUTPUT <20.5 ms + program exec. time
Dyn. A or static input to
Failsafe transistor outputs Q TRANSISTOROUTPUT <16.5 ms + program exec. time
/UTPUTVOLTAGE –24 VDC Dyn. B or Dyn. C input to
/UTPUTVOLTAGETOLERANCE Supply voltage - 1.5 V at 800 mA RELAYOUTPUT MSPROGRAMEXECTIME
-AXCURRENT 800 mA Dyn. B or Dyn. C input to
Failsafe relay outputs Q TRANSISTOROUTPUT <19 ms + program exec. time
Max. voltage 250 V AC
Max current 1.5 A Software setting "NoFilt". 5 ms shorter response time on
))1INPUTS
Non-failsafe outputs Q
4YPE Transistor +24V, PNP "open !3 IDATABUSTORELAYOUTPUT MSPROGRAMEXECTIME
collector" also configurable as !3 IDATABUSTOTRANSISTOROUTPUT <29 ms + program exec. time
failsafe inputs
-AXCURRENTOUTPUT 800 mA Additional Response times
Databus between Pluto units 10 ms
Indication Databus between Pluto units 10–40 ms
input/output LED PER)/GREEN on error
$ISPLAY SEGMENTSCHARACTERS
Enclosure classification
%NCLOSURE )0)%#
#ONNECTIONTERMINALS )0)%#
Technical data - type-specific
Pluto A20 Pluto B16 Pluto B20

20 I/O 16 I/O 20 I/O
Current monitoring Non-failsafe outputs
!RTICLENUMBERORDERINGDATA
Failsafe inputs )) )) ))
Failsafe inputs or non-failsafe outputs )1)1 )1)1 )1)1
Max total load 2.5 A Max total load 2.5 A Max total load 2.5 A
Analogue inputs ) 6 ) 6 ) 6

Failsafe relay outputs 11 – 11
Failsafe transistor outputs 11 – 11
Current monitoring )1)1 ! – –
±10%
Pluto databus
s s s
AS-i databus – – –
/WNCURRENTCONSUMPTION 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA

2ECOMMENDEDEXTERNALFUSE 6A 6A 6A
Dimensions (w x h x d) 45 x 84 x 118 mm 45 x 84 x 118 mm 45 x 84 x 118 mm
1
The units are assembled with a gap of at least 5 mm.

4
6
The terminal blocks are detachable without needing to disconnect the wiring.
7
8
Pluto S20 Pluto B46-6 Pluto S46-6 Pluto AS-i
20 I/O
Non-Pluto databus

46 I/O

46 I/O
Non-Pluto databus

AS-i databus

9
)) ))))) ))))) ))
)1)1 )1)1 )1)1 )1)1
Max total load 2.5 A Max total load 2 A
)1)1
Max total load 2 A
Max total load 2 A
)1)1
Max total load 2 A
Max total load 2 A
10
) 6 ) 6 ) 6 )1)1 6
11 1111 1111 11
11
–
11
–
11
–
11
– 11
–
s –
s
– – –
s
100 mA 150 mA 150 mA 100 mA 12
6A 10A 10A 6A
45 x 84 x 118 mm 90 x 84 x 118 mm 90 x 84 x 118 mm 45 x 84 x 118 mm
13
PLUTO ACCESSORIES
Name Article no. Explanation
Gate-P1 Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus
Pluto Gateway and Profibus.
Profibus
Gate-C1 Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus

Pluto Gateway and CANopen.
CANopen
Gate-D1 Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus

Pluto Gateway and DeviceNet.
DeviceNet
Gate-E1 Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus
Pluto Gateway and Ethernet.
Ethernet
IDFIX-R )DENTIlERSnTOGIVE0LUTOANADDRESS2EADONLY
IDFIX-RW )DENTIlERSnTOGIVE0LUTOANADDRESS0ROGRAMMABLE2EADWRITE
IDFIX-DATA )DENTIlERSnFOR0LUTO!3 ISTORAGEOFSAFETYCODES

R-120 Terminating resistor for Pluto databus.
Operator's panel (-)DISPLAYX,#$'RAPHIC5.)/0%XOR

(-)SOFTWARE$ESIGNER
(-)PROGRAMMINGCABLE
Pluto Manager Programming tool for Pluto including function blocks.
Can be downloaded from www.jokabsafety.com
Pluto program- For loading PLC programs and monitoring.

ming cable
Databus cable CAN-Bus cable yellow 2 x 0.50 mm²
CAN-Bus cable purple 2 x 0.50 mm² halogen-free
Absolute !BSOLUTEENCODERMODEL23!SINGLETURN

encoder
Absolute Absolute encoder model RSA 698 (multi turn)

encoder
#ABLEFORABSOLUTEENCODER5NITRONIC,I9#9X
#ONNECTORFORABSOLUTEENCODER23!
Pluto communications cable for operator's panel
1
10
11
12
13
Pluto Manager
Programming a project
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step by step
Step 1
I/O configuration
The inputs and outputs are configured depending on what they are connected to, static or dynamic signals,
inputs and/or outputs, etc.
Step 2
Defining variables
4HEVARIABLESINTHESYSTEMAREINPUTS) OUTPUTS1 AUXILIARYMEMORIES- GLOBALAUXILIARYMEMORIESFOR
databus communication (GM) and registers (R). The names of the variables can be changed as required
instead of the default variable names used in the PLC program.
Step 3
Ladder programming
The programming language used in Pluto contains function blocks, certified by TÜV Rheinland, with solutions
for the most common safety functions. The function blocks can be used in conjunction with standard ladder
instructions. The programming language has a full instruction repertoire, similar to standard PLCs on the
market, including timers, arithmetic functions, sequential programming set, etc.
List of standards and special function blocks for Pluto Manager 1
The safety designer has complete freedom to program the safety functions or to use TÜV-approved pre-defined safety
function blocks.
Blocks in the standard library (func05): 26. Multiplication.

1. Two-channel function with input for start
2. Two-channel function with test input
$IVISION 2
4WO CHANNELFUNCTIONWITHTESTANDRESETINPUTSAND Other function blocks
reset indication. 1. Safety absolute encoder.
4. Two-channel function with simultaneous requirement. 2. Electronic cam.
5. Single channel function with input for start.
6. Single channel function with start and test inputs.
%XTERNALCOMMUNICATION
3
3INGLECHANNELFUNCTIONWITHRESETANDTESTINPUTS Special function blocks:
8. Two-channel function with max. time limitation 1. Program library with program block for eccentric
(equivalent to JSHT2). Time begins to count down shaft presses.
when both inputs are activated. 2. Custom special blocks can be made available.
9. Two-channel function with max. time limitation
(equivalent to JSHT2). Time begins to count down
4
TC1RTI
when one of the inputs is activated. Function block example
10. Single channel pulse function, e.g. for timed reset. In1 Q
11. Two-channel pulse function, e.g. for timed reset. TC1RTI
12. Two single channel bypass connection functions with
max. time limiting.
Two-channel function with test and reset
inputs, and reset indication.
In2 IndReset
5
3INGLECHANNELBYPASSCONNECTIONFUNCTIONWITHMAX s)NAND)NARESAFETYINPUTSTOWHICHTHE
time limiting. safety device outputs are connected.
14. Two-channel bypass connection function with max. sTest is a condition that must be true at the Reset TCfault
time limiting and simultaneous requirement.
15. Two-channel safety function with max. time
moment of switching on, and can be used
for monitoring external components. Test
must be true before the Reset input closes,
6
limited bypass connection. i.e. the function block cannot be initiated Test
16. Two-hand control. by Test.
#OUNTERWHICHCOUNTSUPTOPRESETVALUE sReset is a supervised reset input and
18. Counter which counts down from preset value to 0. must be activated (positive flank) after the other inputs have
/FFDELAY
-UTINGLAMP?1
activated for the function output to be activated.
s4HE)ND2ESETOUTPUTISACTIVATEDWHENTHEFUNCTIONBLOCKIS
7
and flashes when the function block is ready for resetting.
-UTINGLAMP?1 sThe TCfault output is activated in the case of a two-channel
-UTINGLAMP7?17ITHPOSSIBILITYTOSETTHE FAULTIEIFTHEFUNCTIONBLOCKISACTIVATEDANDONLYONEOF)N
power level in Watts. AND)NOPENSANDCLOSES
-UTINGLAMP7?17ITHPOSSIBILITYTOSETTHE
power level in Watts. Description
The function block acts as a conventional two-channel safety
8
24. Light curtain with single cycle operation. RELAYWITHDUALANDSUPERVISEDINPUTS)N)N
25. Light curtain with single cycle operation and reset
selection.
9
Internet support - Pluto
/URWEBSITEHASASECTIONDEDICATEDTO0LUTOCUSTOM-
ers, offering continuously updated product support. The
0LUTOCUSTOMERSITEOFFERS 10
s% MAILSUPPORTDIRECTLYLINKEDTOOUR0LUTOSPECIALISTS
s(ARDWAREMANUALS
s4HE3AFETY-ANUALWITHTHEMOSTIMPORTANTSAFETY
requirements
s0ROGRAMMINGMANUAL
11
s'ATEWAYMANUAL
s&UNCTIONBLOCKDESCRIPTIONS
s#OMMONQUESTIONSANDANSWERS
s0LUTO-ANAGERINSTALLATIONlLEPROGRAMMINGTOOLS
s0LUTO/3lLESTOUPDATESYSTEMSOFTWARE
12
s#ONlRMATIONOFCOMPLIANCE
13
Use:
Pluto Bi-directional status information
Gateway
from the Pluto safety PLC
Features:
Profibus DP Two-way communication

Built-in filter function, shared
network
DeviceNet /NLYMMWIDE
Can be located anywhere in
CANopen the databus
Common interface with Pluto
Ethernet Ready-made function blocks
Pluto Gateway is a unit providing two-way communication For programming Pluto there are ready-made function
between a Pluto safety PLC and other field buses. There blocks which, via a Pluto Gateway, send and receive data
AREFOURDIFFERENTTYPESAVAILABLE from the supervisory system.
The GATE-D1 and GATE-C1 types, which use a CAN
GATE-P1 – Profibus-DP databus on both sides, can also usefully be used as CAN
GATE-D1 – DeviceNet bridges where it is required to split a Pluto databus into
GATE-C1 – CANopen several sections. This is particularly useful when long data-
GATE-E1n%THER.ET)002/&).%4AND-ODBUS4#0 bus cables are needed. There is also a built-in filter function
which makes it possible to block data that is not required
4HE 0LUTO 'ATEWAY IS A COMPACT UNIT MOUNTED ON A $). for use on the other side of the bridge, which reduces the
rail, and can be connected anywhere in a Pluto databus. databus loading in the other sections and thereby permits
The unit has a common interface with Pluto, i.e. the same longer databus cables.
cabling, and the Pluto Manager PC program can be used
for servicing and where necessary programming. Normal-
LYHOWEVERALLTHESETTINGSAREMADEVIAA$)0SWITCHES
which means that programming tools are not required to
put the gateway itself into operation.
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto Gateway 1
10
11
12
13
Pluto Gateway
Profibus
Profibus DP
0,54/'ATEWAY0ROlBUSFORTWO WAYCOMMUNICATIONWITH PLC function blocks

Pluto safety PLC. 4OSIMPLIFYTHEINTEGRATIONOFA0LUTO'ATEWAY02/&)"53
into the supervisory PLC system, Jokab Safety provides
Data from Pluto ready-made function blocks for several popular brands of
6IA 02/&)"53 A SUPERVISORY 0,# SYSTEM CAN HAVE AC- PLC. The function blocks make it easier to receive and
CESSTOTHE)/ANDOTHERVARIABLESINA0LUTOSAFETY0,# send information to the Pluto system. The function blocks
'LOBAL)/INA0LUTOSAFETY0,#AREACCESSIBLEVIA02/&)- are supplied as open units with full access for the custom-
BUS modules in the gateway, one module for each Pluto er to change and add functions. These function blocks can
unit. Local data in Pluto units can be read by a "local data” be obtained via the Jokab Safety web site.
module together with the PLC codes in the supervisory
system.
Data to Pluto
6IA 02/&)"53 A SUPERVISORY 0,# SYSTEM CAN TRANSMIT
non-safety-related information to a Pluto safety PLC. A to-
tal of 64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit registers
can be transmitted. Function blocks for these functions are Pluto databus LED
available in Pluto Manager.
+BUTTON
PC port
Profibus LED
Profibus connector
Technical data - Gateway Profibus 1
Manufacturer: */+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/ordering data: GATE-P1
Databuses: -Pluto databus CAN (isolated)
Pluto databus speeds:

02/&)"5323ISOLATED
100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800 and
2
1000 kbit/s
(automatic speed detection)
PROFIBUS speed: Up to 12 Mbit/s (automatic speed
detection)
PROFIBUS address: 3ETTINGVIA$)0SWITCHES 3
PROFIBUS version: DP slave, DP-V0
Connections: 4OP POLETERMINALFOR0LUTODATABUS
(included)
&RONTSTANDARD POLE02/&)"53CON-
nection.
Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V DC 119 mm
4
(included)
Status indication: Pluto databus status indication via LED
02/&)"53STATUSINDICATIONVIA,%$
Operating voltage:
Current at 24 V:
24 V DC, -15% till +20%
< 100 mA (recommended fuse ≤6 A)
5
Dimensions (w x h x d): 22.5 x 101 x 119 mm
101 mm
Installation: MM$).RAIL
Operating temperature (ambient):
Temperature, transport and storage:
-10°C to + 55ºC
-25°C to + 55ºC 6
Humidity: EN 60 204-1 50% at 40ºC (ambient
90% at 20ºC)
Enclosure classification: %NCLOSURE)0 )%#
4ERMINALS)0 )%#
22,5 mm 7
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto Profibus 8
10
11
12
13
Pluto Gateway
DeviceNet
DeviceNet
0,54/ 'ATEWAY $EVICE.ET FOR TWO WAY COMMUNICATION There is also a built-in filter
filter function which makes it pos-
with Pluto safety PLC. sible to block any data that is not required for use on the
other side of the bridge, which reduces the databus load-
Data from Pluto ing in the other sections and thereby permits longer data-
Via DeviceNet a supervisory PLC system can have access bus cables.
TOTHE)/ANDOTHERVARIABLESINA0LUTOSAFETY0,#'LOBAL
)/S IN A 0LUTO SAFETY 0,# ARE ACCESSIBLE VIA $EVICE.ET ABB Robotics IRC5
”implicit” messages. Local data in Pluto units can be read 0,54/ 'ATEWAY $EVICE.ET HAS SUPPORT FOR INTEGRATION
via DeviceNet ”explicit” messages. INTO AN !"" 2OBOTICS )2# SYSTEM 4HE DOCUMENTATION
that describes this integration can be obtained via the Jok-
Data to Pluto ab Safety web site.
Via DeviceNet a supervisory PLC system can transmit non-
safety-related information to a Pluto safety PLC. A total of
64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit registers can be
transmitted (via DeviceNet ”implicit” or ”explicit” messag-
es). Function blocks for these commands are available in
Pluto Manager.
Pluto databus LED
Pluto bridge
A GATE-D1 can also be used to advantage as a CAN +BUTTON
bridge when it is required to divide a Pluto databus into
several sections. This is particularly useful when long data- PC port
bus cables are needed. DeviceNet LED
DeviceNet connector
Technical data - DeviceNet 1
Manufacturer */+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/ordering data: GATE-D1

-DeviceNet CAN (isolated)
100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800 and
2
1000 kbit/s
DeviceNet speeds: ANDKBITSSETVIA$)0
switch)
DeviceNet address: 3ETTINGVIA$)0SWITCHES 3
DeviceNet Version: /$6!VERSION
(included)
Front, 5-pole terminal for DeviceNet
(included)
Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V DC 119 mm
4
(included)
Status indications: Pluto databus status indication via LED
DeviceNet MNS status indication via
Operating voltage:
LED
24 V DC, -15% till +20% 5
Current at 24 V: < 100 mA (recommended fuse ≤6 A)
101 mm
Dimensions (w x h x d): 22.5 x 101 x 119 mm
Installation: MM$).RAIL
Operating temperature (ambient): -10°C to + 55ºC 6
Temperature,
transport and storage: -25°C to + 55ºC
90% at 20ºC)
Enclosure classification: %NCLOSURE)0 )%#
4ERMINALS)0 )%#
22,5 mm 7
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto DeviceNet 8
10
11
12
13
Pluto Gateway
CANopen
CANopen
0,54/ 'ATEWAY #!.OPEN FOR TWO WAY COMMUNICATION Pluto bridge

with Pluto safety PLC. A GATE-C1 can also be used to advantage as a CAN
bridge when it is required to divide a Pluto databus into
Data from Pluto several sections. This is particularly useful when long data-
Via CANopen a supervisory PLC system can have access bus cables are needed.
TOTHE)/ANDOTHERVARIABLESINA0LUTOSAFETY0,#'LOBAL There is also a built-in filter function which makes it pos-
)/S IN A 0LUTO SAFETY 0,# ARE ACCESSIBLE VIA #!.OPEN sible to block any data that is not required for use on the
0$/MESSAGES,OCALDATAIN0LUTOUNITSCANBEREADVIA other side of the bridge, which reduces the databus load-
#!.OPEN3$/MESSAGESTOGETHERWITHTHE0,#CODESIN ing in the other sections and thereby permits longer data-
the supervisory system. bus cables.
Data to Pluto
Via CANopen a supervisory PLC system can send non-
safety-related information to a Pluto safety PLC. A total of
64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit registers can be
TRANSMITTED#!.OPEN0$/OR3$/MESSAGES &UNCTION
blocks for these commands are available in Pluto Manager. Pluto databus LED
+BUTTON
PC port
CANopen LED
#!.OPENCONNECTOR
Technical data - Gateway CANopen 1
Article number/ordering data: GATE-C1

-CANopen CAN (isolated)
100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800 and
2
1000 kbit/s
CANopen speeds: ANDKBITSSETVIA$)0
switch)
10, 20, 50, 100, 125, 250, 500, 800
and 1000 kbit/s (via software)
3
CANopen address: 3ETTINGVIA$)0SWITCHESORSOFTWARE
CANopen version: ”Version 4.02 of the CiA Draft Standard
v
(included) 119 mm
4
Front, 5-pole terminal for CANopen
(included)
Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V DC
(included)
Status indications: Pluto databus status indication via LED
CANopen status indication via LED
5
Operating voltage: 24 V DC, -15% till +20%
101 mm
Current at 24 V: < 100 mA (recommended fuse ≤6 A)
Dimensions (w x h x d):
Installation:
22.5 x 101 x 119 mm
MM$).RAIL 6
Operating temperature (ambient): -10°C to + 55ºC
Temperature, transport and storage: -25°C to + 55ºC
Enclosure classification:
90% at 20ºC)
%NCLOSURE)0 )%#
22,5 mm 7
4ERMINALS)0 )%#
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto CANopen 8
10
11
12
13
Pluto Gateway
Ethernet
Ethernet
0,54/'ATEWAY%THERNET'!4% %FORTWO WAYCOMMUNI- Data to Pluto

cation with Pluto safety PLC. Via the Ethernet protocol a supervisory PLC system can
transmit non-safety-related information to a Pluto safety
Protocol PLC. A total of 64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit
0,54/ 'ATEWAY %THERNET '!4% % HANDLES THE STATUS registers can be transmitted. Function blocks for these
from and to Pluto safety PLCs via Ethernet protocols Eth- functions are available in Pluto Manager.
ER.ET)002/&).%4INFUTURE -ODBUS4#0ANDASIMPLE
BINARYPROTOCOLTHATUSES4#0)0
&OR)0 ADDRESSCONlGURATIONETCTHEREISASIMPLEWEB
server and a terminal server.
Data from Pluto

Via one of the Ethernet protocols a supervisory PLC system
CANHAVEACCESSTOTHE)/ANDOTHERVARIABLESINA0LUTO
SAFETY0,#'LOBAL)/SINA0LUTOSAFETY0,#AREACCES-
SIBLEVIATHEUSUAL)/TRANSFERINTHERESPECTIVEPROTOCOL
Local data in Pluto units can be read by special commands Pluto databus LED
together with the PLC codes in the supervisory system.
+BUTTON
PC port
Ethernet LED
Ethernet connector
Technical data - Ethernet Terminal server (TCP/IP) Simple server with the same
commands as via the serial pro-
1
Manufacturer */+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN gramming port in the unit.
Article number/ IP address Static sharing via web server or
ordering data: GATE-E1 via programming port.
Pluto databus
Pluto databus speeds
CAN (isolated)
100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800
Gateway configuration 4AKESPLACEVIA%THER.ET)0
02/&).%4-ODBUS4#0OR
VIATHEBINARY4#0)0SERVER
2
and 1000 kbit/s
(automatic speed detection) Connections 4OP POLETERMINALFOR0LUTO
Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s databus (included)
Half and full duplex Front, Ethernet connection via
Ethernet protocol Status from and to Pluto safety

PLC
RJ-45 (screened cable cat. 5e
FTP) 3
Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V
%THER.ET)0 DC (included)
02/&).%4INDEVELOPMENT
- Modbus TCP Status indications Pluto databus status indication
"INARYSERVER4#0)0 via LED (Pluto databus)
Note that certain combinations

Ethernet module status indica-
tion via LED (Mod Status)
4
of server protocols cannot be Ethernet network status indica-
used simultaneously. tion via LED (Net Status)
Operating voltage 24 V DC, -15 % till +20 %
'ATEWAYSTATUSAND)0ADDRESS
configuration
- Web server
Current at 24 V < 150 mA (recommended fuse
≤6 A) 5
4ERMINALSERVER4#0)0 Dimensions (w x h x d): XXMM
EtherNet/IP !CCORDINGTO/$6!h#)0%DITION Installation MM$).RAIL
vANDh%THER.ET)0!DAPTION
OF#)0%DITIONv Operating temperature
PROFINET
-INIMUM20)OFMS
)NDEVELOPMENT
(ambient)
Temperature,
-10°C to + 55ºC
6
transport and storage -25°C to + 55ºC
Modbus TCP According to the Modbus organi-
sation, version 1.0b (approx. 20 Humidity EN 60 204-1 50 % at 40ºC
messages per second). (ambient 90 % at 20ºC)
Binary server (TCP/IP) 3IMPLE4#0)0PROTOCOLTOSEND

status from/to the Pluto system.
Enclosure classification %NCLOSURE)0 )%#
4ERMINALS)0 )%# 7
Web server &ORSIMPLESHARINGOF)0
addresses.
8
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto Ethernet
PLC
9
Ethernet, non safety
119 mm
GATE-E1
PLUTO
BUS
PR
Mod
K
Status
Net
Status
10
Modbus TCP
EtherNet/IP
PROFINET
101 mm
Gateway
Pluto CAN bus, safety 11

CH I1 I3 I6 IQ10 Q2 CH I1 I3 I6 IQ10 Q2 CH I1 I3 I6 IQ10 Q2
CL I0 I2 I4 I5 I7 IQ11 Q3 CL I0 I2 I4 I5 I7 IQ11 Q3 CL I0 I2 I4 I5 I7 IQ11 Q3
IQ12 IQ14 IQ16
IQ13 IQ15 IQ17

Q0
ID 0V +24V
Q1 IQ12 IQ14 IQ16
IQ13 IQ15 IQ17

Q0
ID 0V +24V
Q1 IQ12 IQ14 IQ16
IQ13 IQ15 IQ17

Q0
ID 0V +24V
Q1
12
MM
Pluto Pluto Pluto
13
Use:
Pluto Safe position and speed deter-
Safe Encoder mination of machine movements.
Features:
High resolution
Selectable resolution
Connected directly to the Pluto
databus
Ready-made function blocks
Rotational absolute value sensor for safe Up to 16 absolute encoders can be connected to a Pluto
positioning CAN databus. A Pluto on the databus reads the sensor
Together with a Pluto safety PLC, this rotational absolute values, which are evaluated. With a special function block
encoder can be used for safe position determination. This in the PLC code, it is possible to design two-channel solu-
is particularly useful in the case of such equipment as gan- tions with the sensors. The user can obtain safe values for
try robots, industrial robots, etc. Also in eccentric shaft position and speed from these values. This enables super-
presses, existing cam mechanisms can be replaced by ab- vision of stationary and overspeed conditions.
solute value position sensors for safe positioning. The sen- The absolute value sensors are standard sensors with
sors are available in single and multi-turn versions. modified software to meet the safety requirements.
Example of an application where 2 sensors provide safe position determination in a gantry robot.
Technical data – Safe Encoder RSA 597 1
Article number/ordering data: 23!
Ambient temperature ²#²#
Temperature, transport and storage
Ingress protection class
²#²#
)0 INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
2
At shaft inlet )0 INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
Vibration (55 to 2000 Hz) MS2INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
60068-2-6
Shock (6ms) < 2,000 m/s2INACCORDANCEWITH)%#

3
Material, enclosure Aluminium
Surface treatment Painted and chromed or anodised
Weight
Accuracy and resolution
!PPROXG
4
Resolution BITSPOSITIONSPERROTATION
Accuracy ± ½ LSB (Least Significant Bit)
Operating voltage
Polarity-protected
6DC
9ES 5
Short-circuit protected 9ES
Databus speed 5 kbit/s - 1 Mbit/s, preset at 500kbit/s
Address input Active low
Code type Binary 6
Programmable functions Resolution, 0 position
Direction, Databus speed
Current consumption 50 mA at 24V dc
Max current consumption 100 mA
7
10
11
12
13
Technical data – Safe Encoder RSA 698
Article number/ordering data: 23!
Ambient temperature ²#²#
Temperature, transport and storage ²#²#
Ingress protection class )0 INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
At shaft inlet )0 INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
Vibration (55 to 2000 Hz) < 100 m/s2INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
60068-2-6
Shock (6ms) < 2,000 m/s2INACCORDANCEWITH)%#

Material, enclosure Aluminium
Surface treatment Anodised
Weight Approx. 400g
Accuracy and resolution
Resolution, total 25 bit
BITSPOSITIONSPERROTATION
12 bits, 4096 rotations
Accuracy ± 1 LSB (Least Significant Bit)
Operating voltage 6DC
Polarity-protected 9ES
Short-circuit protected 9ES
Databus speed 10 kbit/s - 1 Mbit/s
Code type Binary
Programmable functions Resolution, 0 position
Current consumption 50 mA at 24V dc
Max current consumption 100 mA
Safe Encoder Descriptions of inputs and outputs 1
!DR%NCODER!%NCODER!NODEADDRESS
Function block for a single-turn encoder !DR%NCODER"%NCODER"NODEADDRESS
that generates safe position and speed -AX$IFF-AXALLOWEDDEVIATIONBETWEENTHEENCODERS
values from two absolute encoders. (max 2% of Range)
Function
The block reads and evaluates one absolute
2ANGE.UMBEROFINCREMENTSPERREVOLUTION
/+3ETWHENENCODERSAREWORKING/+AND 2
the position values are within the margin set by 'MaxDiff'
encoders. The position value is sent to 0OSITION0OSITIONVALUE
the 'Position' output. The 'Speed' output 3PEED3PEEDVALUEASINCREMENTSMS
is the average value for the speed, at the !%NCODER!POSITION-USTNOTBEUSEDIN0,#PROGRAM
RATEOFPULSESMS)FANERROROCCURS
THEg/+gOUTPUTISSETTOZERO)NCERTAIN
applications the values of 'Position' and
"%NCODER"POSITION-USTNOTBEUSEDIN0,#PROGRAM
3
NOTE! Position values from single encoders are only available
'Speed' are used in conjunction with the FORADJUSTMENTPURPOSESANDMUST./4BEUSEDFORSAFETY
g/+gOUTPUT
NOTE!7HENERROROCCURSg0OSITIONg g3PEEDg
ANDTHE/+OUTPUTWILLBERESET
4
Safe Encoder Descriptions of inputs and outputs

5
!DR%NCODER!%NCODER!NODEADDRESS
Multiturn !DR%NCODER"%NCODER"NODEADDRESS
-AX$IFF-AXALLOWEDDEVIATIONBETWEENTHEENCODERSMAX
Function block for a multi-turn encoder OF)NCR0ER2EV
that generates safe position and speed )NCR0ER2EV.UMBEROFINCREMENTSPERREVOLUTION
values from two absolute encoders.
Operative system 2.4.4 or higher is
/+3ETWHENENCODERSAREWORKING/+AND
the position values are within the margin set by 'MaxDiff'
6
required. 0OSITION0OSITIONVALUE
3PEED3PEEDVALUEASINCREMENTSMS
Function !%NCODER!POSITION-USTNOTBEUSEDIN0,#PROGRAM
The block reads and evaluates two "%NCODER"POSITION-USTNOTBEUSEDIN0,#PROGRAM
absolute encoders. The average value for
the two sensors is calculated and sent to NOTE! Position values from single encoders are only available
7
the 'Position' output. The 'Speed' output FORADJUSTMENTPURPOSESANDMUST./4BEUSEDFORSAFETY
is the average value for the speed, at the
rate of pulses/10 ms. The block monitors NOTE!7HENERROROCCURSg0OSITIONg g3PEEDg
that the encoder position values do not ANDTHE/+OUTPUTWILLBERESET
differ by more than the input value set by
g-AX$IFFg)FANERROROCCURSTHEg/+gOUT-
8
PUTISSETTOZERO)NCERTAINAPPLICATIONS
the values of 'Position' and 'Speed' are
USEDINCONJUNCTIONWITHTHEg/+gOUTPUT
9
Encoder Cam Descriptions of inputs and outputs
0OS2EG)NPUTFORTHEPOSITIONVALUE
Function block for electronic cam gear. -IN0OS-INIMUMLIMITVALUE
Function
-AX0OS-AXIMUMLIMITVALUE 10
/UTPUT1ISACTIVATEDIFTHEVALUEOFTHE
input register 'PosReg' is within the limits
for ’MinPos’ and ’MaxPos’.
./4%)TISPOSSIBLETOSPECIFYAVALUE
that defines the sensor's zero position.
Position <0 is not permitted. 11
%XAMPLE)F-IN0OSAND
-AX0OS1ISACTIVATEDWHEN
the position is greater than 2999 or less
than 201.
12
13
Example – Robot cell with Pluto
Description: Function:
The example describes a processing machine served by Emergency stop takes priority and will stop both the ma-
a robot. The machine safety system consists of one Pluto chine and the robot. The machine hatch acts as the zone
to which all protection has been connected. The robot has divider, when the hatch is closed the machine forms one
been equipped with a Pluto to which the cell protection zone and the robot another zone. When the machine hatch
has been connected. The Pluto for the machine has been is open, both the machine and the robot belong to the
connected via a databus cable to the robot's Pluto so that SAMEZONE)FTHEDOORISOPENEDWHENTHEMACHINEHATCH
common functions, such as emergency stop, can be used is open, the machine and the robot will both stop, but if the
by the whole cell. machine hatch is closed, only the robot will be stopped.
After the door has been opened, the system must be reset
by means of the reset button on the outside of the door.
Emergency stop is reset when the pressed-in button is
PULLEDOUT./4%4HECELLOPERATINGCYCLEMUSTNOTHOW-
ever start immediately on resetting the emergency stop or
the door.
Electrical connections 1
Apparatus Robot Electrical equipment
enclosure enclosure
Pluto databus
enclosure for machinery
2
Emergency stop
Emergency stop Safety interlock switch
Machine
emergency
3
Door
stop
Machine
protective
stop
Robot
Emergency stop
Robot
Autostop
5
Matning Supply
0ROJECTCREATEDBY*OHAN4ORSTENSSON*OKAB3AFETY!"
9
0ROJECTCHECKEDBY
0ROJECTAPPROVEDBY
10
(ISTORY
!UGUST 0ROJECTCREATED
11
12
13
Pluto 0 settings
Pluto 0
)%MERGENCYSTOP?CHANNEL? #HANNELFROMTHEEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTON
)%MERGENCYSTOP?CHANNEL? #HANNELFROMTHEEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTON
)$OOR 3IGNALFROMTHEDOORSENSOR
12OBOT?!UTOSTOPP?/+ !UTOMATICSTOPFORTHEROBOT
12OBOT?%MERGENCYSTOP?/+ %MERGENCYSTOPFORTHEROBOT
1 /UTPUTTHATGENERATESADYNAMICSIGNAL
'-2ESET?IND?MEM #OLLECTIVEMEMORYFORINDICATIONINTHERESETBUTTON
'-%MERGENCYSTOP?/+?MEM !UXILIARYMEMORYFOREMERGENCYSTOP/+
-2ESET?)ND??MEM !UXILIARYMEMORYFORINDICATIONINTHERESETBUTTON
Pluto 1 settings 1
9
Pluto 1
)% STOP?MACHINE?CHANNEL?#HANNELFROMTHEEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTONONTHEMACHINE
)% STOP?MACHINE?CHANNEL?
)-ACHINEHATCH?.#
#HANNELFROMTHEEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTONONTHEMACHINE
#HANNELFROMTHESAFETYINTERLOCKSWITCH
10
)-ACHINEHATCH?./ #HANNELFROMTHESAFETYINTERLOCKSWITCH
)2ESET 2ESETBUTTON2ESET
1% STOP?MACHINE?/+ %MERGENCYMACHINESTOP
1-ACHINE?PROTSTOP?/+ 0ROTECTIVEMACHINESTOP
1
12ESET?)ND
/UTPUTTHATGENERATESADYNAMICSIGNAL
)NDICATIONLAMPINTHERESETBUTTON
11
'--ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM 'LOBALAUXILIARYMEMORYFROMTWO CHANNELSUPERVISIONOFTHESAFETYINTERLOCKSWITCHIN
the machine hatch.
'-% STOP?MACHINE?/+?MEM 'LOBALAUXILIARYMEMORYFROMTWO CHANNELSUPERVISIONOFTHEEMERGENCYSTOPONTHEMACHINE
-2ESET?)ND??MEM !UXILIARYMEMORYFORINDICATIONINTHERESETBUTTON
12
13
PLC code Pluto 0
1
Start
2 Two-channel supervision with automatic reset emergency stop at the door.

% STOP?KANAL? TC1S % STOP?/+?MEM
) '-
In1 Q
E-stop_kanal_2
)
In2
Start
GM0.1 = E-stop_OK_mem Auxiliary memory for emergency stop OK

I0.0 = E-stop_kanal_1 Channel 1 from the emergency stop button
I0.1 = E-stop_kanal_2 Channel 2 from the emergency stop button
3
Emergency stop for the robot
When the emergency stop is activated, the robot will perform an emergency stop.
To reset the safety features, the emergency stop button must be reset.
% STOP?/+?MEM % STOP?MACHINE?/+?MEM 2OBOT?.3?/+
'- 1

GM1.1 = E-stop_machine_OK_mem Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the emergency stop on the machine.
Q0.3 = Robot_NS_OK Emergency stop for the robot
4
Automatic stop for the robot
When the door of the cell opens the robot is set to automatically stop.
To reset the safety features, the door must be closed and then the reset signal given.
$OOR ResetT 2OBOT?!UTOSTOPP?/+

) 1
In1 Q
Reset Reset_ind_1_mem
) -
Reset
IndReset
Test
).2 = Door Signal from the door sensor

I1.15 = Reset Reset button Reset
M0.0 = Reset_ind_1_mem Auxiliary memory for indication in the reset button
Q0.2 = Robot_Autostopp_OK Automatic stop for the robot
5 )NDICATIONLAMPINTHERESETBUTTON
Summary of local memories that shall generate the signal in the reset lamp.
The global memory is then used in the Pluto where the output is.
Reset_ind_1_mem Reset_ind_1_mem
M0.0 GM0.0
GM0.0 = Reset_ind_mem Collective memory for indication in the reset button

M0.0 = Reset_ind_1_mem Auxiliary memory 1 for indication in the reset button
6
1
)NDICATIONONTHEDISPLAY
!LARMn-ACHINEHATCHOPEN
To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.
This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.
SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.
-ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM32?%RROR#ODE 32?0LUTO$ISPLAY
2
'- 32 32
GM1.0 = Machine hatch_OK_mem Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the safety interlock switch in the machine hatch.
SR0.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay
SR0.11 = SR_ErrorCode
Pluto display figure
Error code. For user error 200 + no
3
7
Alarm 02 – Door open.

4
Door SR_ErrorCode = 0 SR_PlutoDisplay = 202

) 32 32
5
10.2 = Door Signal from the door sensor
SR0.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay Pluto display figure
SR0.11 = SR_Errorcode Error code. For user error 200 + no
8
6
Alarm 01 - Emergency stop activated
% STOP?/+?MEM 32?%RROR#ODE
SR0.11 = 0
32?0LUTO$ISPLAY
SR0.10 = 201
7
SR0.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay
SR0.11 = SR_ErrorCode
Pluto display figure
Error code. For user error 200 + no 8
10
11
12
13
PLC code Pluto 1
1
Start
2 Two-channel supervision with automatic reset of the emergency stop on the machine.
% STOP?MACHINE?KANAL? TC1S % STOP?/+?MEM
) '-
In1
E-stop_machine_kanal_2
)
In2
Start
I0.0 = E-stop_machine_kanal_1 Channel 1 from the emergency stop button on the machine
I0.1 = E-stop_machine_kanal_2 Channel 2 from the emergency stop button on the machine
3 Two-channel supervision of the machine hatch switch.

The switch has alternating contacts and the variable name shows the contact arrangement for the respect signals when the key is in the sensor.
- Machine hatch_NC gives a signal

-ACHINEHATCH?./GIVESASIGNAL
-ACHINEHATCH?.# -ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM TC1S
) '-
In1 Q
-ACHINEHATCH?./
)
In2
Start
I1.11 = Machine hatch_NC Channel 1 from the safety interlock switch
I1.12 = Machine hatch_NO Channel 2 from the safety interlock switch
4 Emergency machine stop.

When the emergency stop is activated, the machine will perform an emergency stop.
To reset the safety features, the emergency stop button must be reset.
% STOP?/+?MEM % STOP?MACHINE?/+?MEM -ASKIN?% STOP?/+
'- 1

Q1.0 = Maskin_E-stop_OK Emergency machine stop.
5
Protective machine stop.
When the protective stop is activated, the machine will stop.
)FTHEDOORINTOTHEROBOTAREAISOPENEDATTHESAMETIMEASTHEMACHINEHATCHISCLOSEDTHEMACHINEWILLCONTINUEWITHITSWORKCYCLE
To reset the safety features, the door or the machine hatch must be closed and then the reset signal given.
-ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM ResetT -ASKIN?SKYDDSTOPP?/+

'- 1
In1 Q
Door Reset_ind_2_mem
) -
IndReset
Reset
)
Reset
Test
1
I0.2 = Door Signal from the door sensor
I1.15 = Reset Reset button Reset
M1.0 = Reset_Ind_2_mem Auxiliary memory 2 for indication in the reset button
6
Q1.1 = Maskin_skyddstop_OK Protective machine stop.
2
)NDICATIONLAMPINTHERESETBUTTON
Summary of memories that shall generate the signal in the reset lamp.
2ESET?IND?MEM 2ESET?)ND
'- 1
2ESET?)ND??MEM
3
M1.0
GM0.0 = Reset_Ind_mem
M1.0 = Reset_Ind_2_mem
Q1.15 = Reset_Ind
Collective memory for indication in the reset button
Auxiliary memory 2 for indication in the reset button
Indication lamp in the reset button.
4
7
!LARMn-ACHINEHATCHOPEN
5
-ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM 32?%RROR#ODE 32?0LUTO$ISPLAY

'- 32 32
6
SR1.11 = SR_ErrorCode Error code. For user error 200 + no
7
8
Alarm 02 – Door open.
8
Door SR_ErrorCode = 0 SR_PlutoDisplay = 202
) 32 32
I0.1 = Door Signal from the door sensor

9
9
Alarm 01 - Emergency stop activated.
10
% STOP?/+?MEM 32?%RROR#ODE
SR1.11 = 0
32?0LUTO$ISPLAY
SR1.10 = 201 11
12
13
Safety system - Vital
Supervision of dynamic safety signals.
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page 1
Dynamic safety circuit for Vital and Pluto _______________________________3:2
Why you should use the Vital safety system _____________________________3:4

s#ONNECTIONOFUNITSANDCABLELENGTHSTO6ITAL _________________________________3:5
2
s.UMBEROF%DENSTHATCANBEUSEDWITH6ITALAND0LUTO ___________________________3:6
s.UMBEROF4INASTHATCANBEUSEDWITH6ITALAND0LUTO ___________________________3:7
sCONNECTIONSn6ITAL _____________________________________________________3:8
s4ECHNICALDATA6ITAL_____________________________________________________3:9
3
Why could you use the Tina adapter unit? _____________________________ 3:10
s4INAISAVAILABLEINSEVERALVARIANTS ________________________________________
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA!!"!!!!!AND! __________________
3:11
3:14
4
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA! ______________________________________________ 3:15
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA!"AND# __________________________________ 3:16
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA! _____________________________________________
s#ABLING ___________________________________________________________
3:17
3:17
5
s/NE6ITALSUPERVISESTHEENTIREROBOTCELL___________________________________ 3:19
Tina Duo 1/2 6

– Remote sensor expansion unit with reset capability for Vital/Pluto _____ 3:20
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA$UOAND _______________________________________ 3:21
Connection example - Vital & Tina _____________________________ 3:22 – 3:39 7
10
11
12
Descriptions and examples in this book show how the products work and can be used. This does not mean that they can meets the requirements for
all types of machines and processes. The purchaser/user is responsible for ensuring that the product is installed and used in accordance with the
applicable regulations and standards. We reserve the right to make changes in products and product sheets without previous notice. For the latest
updates, refer to www.jokabsafety.com. 2008 v02.
13
Dynamic inputs on Vital/Pl
Dynamic safety circuits, connected to Pluto (with programming) or Vital (without programming).
Vital is a safety module with redundant

safety outputs, which can monitor up to The active safety sensors for the dynamic safety circuits offer a higher
%DENDOORSENSORSANDSTILLCOM- safety level than passive sensors, since a fault is already detected at its
ply with the highest safety level. Tina BEGINNINGORWHENTHEPOWERISSWITCHED/.
Duo makes it possible to monitor even
MORESENSORS6ITALOFFERSTHECHOICE
between manual and automatic reset of
THESAFETYCIRCUIT4HE0,#Pluto safety
0,#HASMANYINPUTSFORDYNAMICSAFETY
loop circuits.
Pluto Vital
Safety category 4 according to

EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
0ATENTED
Tina adapter
It can be useful to connect safety

sensors in parallel if, for instance,
a safety light beam/curtain (one of
the sensors) is not supposed to
generate a shutdown, when a robot
is in a safe position, monitored by
%DENTHEOTHERSENSOR
Standard sensors with switching outputs
The Tina adapters are used to adapt switching

sensors to the dynamic safety circuits. This allows the
use of switches with positive opening, contact strips,
emergency stops and light curtains in the dynamic
safety circuits.
1
luto
The drawing shows a door, which is monitored by an 2
ACTIVE%DENDOORSENSORWITHASUPERVISEDMANUAL
reset outside the danger zone.
Tina Duo allows for the addition of one more

DYNAMICCIRCUITWITHUPTOACTIVESENSORS 3
and traditional sensors, equipped with Tina
OR4INA$UO)TISPOSSIBLETOSELECTARESET
WITH,%$INDICATIONORANAUTOMATICRESETFOR
each Tina Duo on the site.
Reset 4
Reset
Reset
5
27 sensors and Tina Duo

6
Tina Duo Tina Duo
7
Tina Duo
8
LED
All active sensors and Tina adaptors
have LEDs, which indicate whether 9
everything is OK (green), the safety
circuit is interrupted (red), or if the
circuit has been opened by another
series-connected sensor (blinking).
10
11
Tina 8A
Tina 8A is a connection block for 8 active sen-

sors or sensors equipped with Tina adaptors.
12
There is also a Tina 8B Profibus version which
Tina 8B Profibus TRANSMITSTHEINFORMATIONSIGNALSTOTHE0ROlBUS
13
Approvals:
Why you should
use the Vital safety
Features:
system Safety solution with different types
of safety components in the same
safety circuit
Eden
.ON CONTACTSENSOR
Spot 10
Safety light beam
Spot 35
Safety light beam
INCA 1
Safety circuit in accordance with %MERGENCYSTOP
category 4 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
Focus
Safety light grid/
Safety light curtain
Strips
Vital Interlocking device Bumpers
Safety module E-stop
Mats
- To be able to connect several safety compo- - To supervise safety components!

nents in series (at category 4) and supervise
Most safety components on the market can be connected to
them with only one safety module! THE6ITALMODULE$YNAMICSENSORSENABLESAFETYCATEGORY
6ITALISTHEHEARTOFANEWSOLUTIONWHICHMAKESITPOSSIBLE to be achieved in a single-channel system. For example Jokab
to install/connect many different types of safety device in 3AFETY|SDYNAMICNON CONTACT%DENSENSOR3POTLIGHTBEAM
THESAMESAFETYCIRCUITANDSTILLACHIEVESAFETYCATEGORY ANDEMERGENCYSTOPSVIA4INAADAPTORS CANBEUSED%VEN
INACCORDANCEWITH%. %.)3/ 4HE6ITAL MECHANICALSWITCHESCANBECONNECTEDTO6ITALWITHTHEAID
module is based upon a dynamic single-channel concept OF*OKAB3AFETY|S4INAADAPTORS5PTOCOMPONENTSCAN
as opposed to conventional dual-channel safety relays. Up BECONNECTEDTOA6ITALMODULE
to 30 dynamic sensors can be connected directly in
the safety circuit and be supervised by only one Vital - For easy installation and assembly of a
module. 4HE6ITALTHEREFOREREPLACESSEVERALSAFETYRELAYS safety system!
Safety components with output contacts can be connected
6ITALISASMALLMMINWIDTHELECTRONICSAFETYMODULE
TOTHE6ITALVIALOWCOST4INAADAPTORS
that dynamically supervises a number of safety components.
4HE6ITALALSOHASAUTOMATICALLYORMANUALLYSUPERVISEDRESET 6ITAL|SDETACHABLECONNECTORBLOCKSSIMPLIFYTHECONNECTION
selection, dual safety outputs, and an information output for TROUBLE SHOOTING AND EXCHANGE OF MODULES 4HE 6ITAL AND
RESETINDICATIONANDSTATUSINFORMATIONFOR0,#|S other safety components can be connected together using
STANDARDCABLESANDWITHCABLESHAVING-CONNECTIONS
- why should you choose Vital?

s3AFETYCATEGORYACCORDINGTO s#ANACCOMMODATELONGCABLELENGTHS sDetachable connector blocks
%. %.)3/ DYNAMIC
sManually supervised or automatic s,%$INDICATIONOFPOWERSUPPLY
safety circuit
reset dynamic signal and outputs
s7IDTHMM
s4WO./SAFETYOUTPUTS sInformation output with two functions
s#OST EFFECTIVECABLEROUTINGCONNECTIONS
Connection of units and cable lengths to
Vital
!MAXIMUMOF4INA!UNITSEQUIVALENTTO%DEN4INA
UNITSXCONNECTEDTO4INA!4INA! CANBE
1
CONNECTED TO ONE 6ITAL WITH A TOTAL CABLE LENGTH OF
Three connection alternatives METRESMM2)5PTO4INA!UNITSCANBECONNECTED
!CCORDINGTO#ATEGORY%. CONNECTIONOFSENSORS TOONE6ITALEQUIVALENTTO%DEN4INAUNITS WITHATOTAL
ADAPTORUNITSINTHE6ITALSAFETYCIRCUITmust be made as per
the following connection examples.
CABLELENGTHOFMETRESMM2 TO4INA!
Example
2
Example %ITHER X METRE CABLES MM2) from the control
5SESEPARATECONNECTIONCABLESFROMEACHSENSORADAPTOR
CABINETANDMETRECABLESMM2) to each sensor/unit
UNITTOTHE6ITALSAFETYMODULE)NTERCONNECTIONSTOBEMADE
or XMETRECABLESMM2) from the control cabinet
via suitable terminals in the control cabinet.
Example
AND METRE CABLES MM2)to each sensor/unit. The
CONNECTIONISEQUIVALENTTO%DENOR4INAUNITS 3
5SE 4INA!4INA! CONNECTOR BLOCKS TO SIMPLIFY THE ! 4OTAL OF %DEN4INA UNITS CAN BE CONNECTED USING A
CONNECTIONOFEXTERNALLYMOUNTEDSENSORSADAPTORUNITS/NLY MAXIMUMCABLELENGTHOFMETRESMM2 ORMETRES
4INA!4INA!CONNECTORBLOCKSMAYBEUSEDUse of any MM2). If the power supply is only fed from one direction
other connector blocks will not meet the safety circuit
requirements.
(from one end of the network) the total cable length is reduced
TOAPPROXMETRESMM2 ANDMETRESMM2). 4
Example Connection advice for dynamic sensors to
5SE- !AND- "9CONNECTORSTOCONNECTSENSORS Pluto and Vital.
in series/parallel.
Sensors can be connected in many different ways. Here is
Cable lengths and number of sensor/

some advice that can make connection better and more stable.
The advice is general, but particularly applicable to the use of
5
adaptor units for the three connection 4INA!AND4INA!UNITS
examples. s .EVERHAVEMORETHANTHERECOMMENDEDNUMBEROF
In order to determine the number of sensor/adaptor units that
CANBECONNECTEDTOA6ITALUNITITMUSTBEREMEMBEREDTHAT
ONE 3POT42ISEQUIVALENTTOlVE %DENOR4INAUNITS
sensors in the loop.
s If possible use a switched mains power supply that can
DELIVERASTABLE6$#
6
5NITSINPARALLELAREEQUALTOONEUNIT4HEFOLLOWINGEXAMPLES s In the sensor system, use as short cables as possible.
provide guidance AS TO POSSIBLE CONlGURATIONS AND CABLE s 7HENCONNECTINGA4INA!OR4INA!UNITTHESUPPLY
lengths using suitable cables. voltage at the terminal (out at the unit) must not be less
Example
THAN6OLTS
s 5SESCREENEDCABLEPREFERABLYMM2 or thicker, from
7
5PTOMETRESMM2ORMM2 conductors) in total
the apparatus enclosure and ground it at one end, for
can be connected to the sensors/units in this example. The
example at the apparatus enclosure, not at both ends.
CONNECTIONISEQUIVALENTTO%DENOR4INAUNITS
s Do not route the signal wiring close to heavy current cabling
!MAXIMUMOF%DENOR4INAUNITSCANBECONNECTEDTOTHE
6ITALUNITONAMAXIMUMCABLELENGTHOFMETRESMM2
CONDUCTORS ORMETRESMM2 conductors).
or close to equipment that gives off a lot of interference,
such as frequency converters for electric motors. 8
s .EVERCONNECThSPAREvCONDUCTORS
Example s )F- "AREUSEDFORCONNECTIONOFAPARALLELLOOPWITH
5PTOMETRESMM2CONDUCTORS TO4INA!AND supply to the sensors from two directions, the loop must be
METRECABLESTYPE- #MM2) to each sensor/
UNITCONNECTEDTOTHE4INA!4HISCONNECTIONEXAMPLEIS
EQUIVALENTTO%DENOR4INAUNITS
as short as possible. This is because the conductors that
are not being used are also connected, which increases
the capacitive load and reduces the stability of the system.
9
10
11
12
13
Number of Edens that can be used with Vital and Pluto
4HETABLESBELOWSHOWTHENUMBEROF%DENSTHATCANBECONNECTEDTO6ITALAND0LUTOWITHTHEMAXIMUMVOLTAGE
variation. The values have been established in a laboratory environment. The actual possible number of connected
%DENS MAY THEREFORE DIFFER FROM THOSE GIVEN IN THE TABLE 4HE VALUES SHOULD BE REGARDED AS GUIDELINES *OKAB
3AFETYRECOMMENDSAMAXIMUMOF%DENSPER6ITALANDAMAXIMUMOF%DENSPER0LUTOINPUT4HETABLEWAS
PREPAREDACCORDINGTOMEASUREMENTSWITHCONNECTIONEXAMPLE!)FCONNECTIONEXAMPLE"ANDMM2 cable is
USEDWITHFEEDVOLTAGEFROMTWODIRECTIONS THEVALUESFORMM2 in the tables are used.
Apparatus enclosure Apparatus enclosure

Terminals X number of metres of cable Terminals
Sensor
X number of metres of cable
Sensor
9NUMBEROFSENSORS 9NUMBEROFSENSORS
6ITAL Sensor
6ITAL
Sensor
Number of Edens that can be used with Vital

Number
of sensors %VENMM2 /DDMM2 %VENMM2 /DDMM2
metres
cable
Number of Edens that can be used with Pluto

Number
of sensors %VENMM2 /DDMM2 %VENMM2 /DDMM2
metres
cable
Number of Tinas that can be used with Vital and Pluto 1
4HE FOLLOWING TABLES SHOW THE NUMBERS OF 4INA ! 4INA ! 4INA ! AND 3MILE4INA THAT CAN BE CONNECTED TO
6ITALAND0LUTOWITHTHEMAXVOLTAGEVARIATION4HEVALUESHAVEBEENESTABLISHEDINALABORATORYENVIRONMENT4HE
actual possible number of connected units may therefore differ from those given in the table. The values should
BEREGARDEDASGUIDELINES*OKAB3AFETYRECOMMENDSAMAXIMUMOFUNITSPER6ITALANDAMAXIMUMOFUNITS
PER0LUTOINPUT4HETABLEWASPREPAREDACCORDINGTOMEASUREMENTSWITHCONNECTIONEXAMPLE!)FCONNECTION
EXAMPLE"ANDMM2CABLEISUSEDTHEVALUESFORMM2 in the tables are used.
2
Apparatus enclosure Apparatus enclosure
Terminals X number of metres of cable
Sensor
Terminals X number of metres of cable
Sensor 3
9NUMBEROFSENSORS 9NUMBEROFSENSORS
6ITAL Sensor
6ITAL
Sensor
4
Number Number of Tina-3A, 6A, 7A and Smile Tinas that can be used with Vital
of sensors
%VENMM2 /DDMM2 %VENMM2 /DDMM2 5
metres
cable
8
Number Number of Tina-3A, 6A, 7A and Smile Tinas that can be used with Pluto
of sensors
%VENMM2 /DDMM2 %VENMM2 /DDMM2
9
10
11
metres
cable 12
13
Reset connections – Vital 1
Manually supervised reset Automatic reset Testing external contactor status
B1
The manually supervised reset contact !UTOMATICRESETISSELECTEDWHEN"8 #ONTACTORS RELAYS AND VALVES CAN BE
CONNECTED TO INPUT 8 MUST BE CLOSED AND8ARECONNECTED4HERELAYOUTPUTS SUPERVISED BY CONNECTING @TEST CONTACTS
and opened in order to activate the relay are then activated at the same time as the BETWEEN " AND 8 "OTH MANUALLY
outputs. inputs. supervised and automatic reset can be
used.
Output connection – Vital 1

Relay outputs Information outputs Connection of S1
%VEN NUMBERS OF SENSORS %DEN 3POT
4INA REQUIRES A CONNECTION BETWEEN "
AND3
" 9 3 IS NOT TO BE CONNECTED FOR ODD
numbers of sensors.
" 6ITAL 3EECONNECTIONEXAMPLESBELOWlG!
4HE6ITALHASTWO./ SAFETYOUTPUTS
In order to protect the output contacts
it is recommended that loads (inductive) 4HE6ITALHASASINGLECHANGEOVERCONTACT
ARESUPPRESSEDBYlTTINGCORRECTLYCHOSEN information relay output.
6$2SDIODESETC$IODESARETHEBESTARC 4HERELAYOUTPUT9ISCONNECTEDINTERNALLY
suppressors, but will increase the switch-off TO6AND6INTHEFOLLOWINGWAY
time of the load. s 9ISINTERNALLYCLOSEDTO6"
WHENTHE6ITALISNOTRESET
s 9ISINTERNALLYCLOSEDTO6
"WHENTHE6ITALISRESET
Connection examples of safety devices to Vital 1
Technical data – Vital 1 LED indication
On &IXEDLIGHTSUPPLYVOLTAGE/+
1
Manufacturer */+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN &LASHINGLIGHTUNDER VOLTAGEOR
Article number/Ordering data: 6ITAL overload.
T R 43IGNALOUT/+23IGNALIN/+
Safety category (according to 1 2 Indicates that the output relays
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1)
Colour

"LACKANDBEIGE Mounting
have been activated
MM$).RAIL
2
Weight 220 g $).RAIL ²#TO²#
/PERATINGTEMPERATURERANGE
Power supply
6ITAL! ! 6$# Connection blocks (detachable)
&ROM6ITALTOSENSORSUNITS" " 6$#
Fuse
Max screw torque
-AXCONNECTIONAREA
Solid conductors
.M
XMM2XMM2!7'
3
!NEXTERNALFUSESHOULDBElTTED #ONDUCTORWITHSOCKETCONTACT XMM2XMM2
INTHESUPPLYTO! !4 !IRANDCREEPDISTANCE K6$).6$%
Max line resistance Protection class )0)%#
ATNOMINALVOLTAGETO8
Power consumption
/HM %NCLOSURE
#ONNECTIONBLOCKS
)0)%#
4
$#SUPPLYNOMINALVOLTAGE This equipment is intended for (CSA/UL Requirement):
(without load) 7 sINDOORUSE
$#SUPPLYNOMINALVOLTAGE sALTITUDEMAXM
(with max load) 7 sMAXIMUMRELATIVEHUMIDITYATMAX²#ANDDECREASING
Dynamic safety circuit
4 /UTPUTSIGNAL
LINEARLYTOAT²#
sPOLLUTIONDEGREE
sINSTALLATIONCATEGORYOVERVOLTAGECATEGORY )),OCALLEVEL
5
2 Input signal
appliances,portable equipment, etc. with smaller transient
Reset input X1 overvoltage than installation category (overvoltage category) III.
Supply for reset input 6$# This equipment is not to be used in any other way than stated in
2ESETCURRENT
Minimum contact closure time

M! max. (inrush current M!
during contact closure)
technical description.
6
for reset 80 ms
Connection of S1
%VENNUMBERSOFSENSORS%DEN3POT424INA REQUIREA
CONNECTIONBETWEEN"AND33ISNOTCONNECTEDFORODD
NUMBERSOFSENSORS/DDNUMBERNOCONNECTIONBETWEEN"AND
3
7
Number of sensors
-AXNUMBEROF%DEN4INATO
6ITAL
Total max. cable length to
%DEN4INA
-AXNUMBEROF3POT42TO6ITAL
M
PAIRS
8
Total max. cable length to Spot
42 M
The above limits vary depending on cable size and application. Connector blocks are detachable
3EETHECONNECTIONEXAMPLEONPAGESANDINTHE
SECTION#ONNECTIONOFUNITSANDLENGTHSOFCABLINGTO6ITALAND
THENUMBEROF4INA%DENUNITSTO6ITALOR0LUTO
(without cables having to be disconnected) 9
Response time
!T0OWERON MS
When activating (input-output) MS
When deactivating (input-output)
!T0OWERLOSS
MS
MS 10
Relay outputs
./ 2
Max switching capacity, resistive
load
Minimum load !6!#6!7

11
#ONTACTMATERIAL M!6
Mechanical life !G#D/
%XTERNALFUSE%. operations
!OR!SLOW
Relay information output
(changeover contact)
12
9 n6 )NDICATES6ITALISNOTRESET
6 )NDICATES6ITALISRESET
-AXLOADON9 M!)NTERNALAUTOMATICFUSE
13
Approvals:
Why could you
use Tina adapter Application:
units? !DAPTIONOFMANYDIFFERENTTYPES
OFSAFETYDEVICESTOTHE6ITAL0LUTO
safety circuit
-AX4INA UNITSINSERIES
1 Individual indication for every

connected safety mat, strip
or bumper.
4INA! 4INA" 4INA! 4INA! 4INA! 4INA"# 2

4INA!
Vital/Pluto safety circuit,
category 4, using Tina adapter units
0LUTO 6ITAL 3
4INA! 4INA! 4INA! 4INA" 4INA! 4INA!
4
"YPASSINGLAMPSUPERVISION Simple connection arrangements
4INA!
- To adapt safety components to a dynamic safety devices e.g. a light grid or an interlocked gate switch/
single-channel circuit according to safety sensor, it must only be possible to allow the bypass function if
category 4! a lamp indication is given. The lamp indication must therefore
be supervised. With this system it is possible to bypass one
or more safety components at the same time.
Tina units allow safety components with mechanical contacts,
SUCHAS% STOPSSWITCHESANDLIGHTBEAMSCURTAINSWITHDUAL
OUTPUTSTOBECONNECTEDINTO6ITALOR0LUTODYNAMICSAFETY - As a connection block for simplified con-
CIRCUITS4HISENABLESSAFETYCATEGORYTOBEACHIEVEDIN nection to a dynamic circuit!
ACCORDANCEWITH%. %.)3/ FORTHECON-
4HE4INA!!CONNECTIONBLOCKSAREAVAILABLEWITHOR
NECTED SAFETY COMPONENTS TOGETHER WITH THE 6ITAL0LUTO
-CONNECTIONS4HEYAREUSEDTOENABLESEVERALSAFETY
control unit. .OTE*OKAB3AFETYS%DENAND3POTCOMPONENTS
COMPONENTSHAVING-CONNECTIONTERMINATEDCABLESTO
CANBEDIRECTLYCONNECTEDTOTHE0LUTO6ITALDYNAMICCIRCUIT
be connected together. The blocks are connected with a
without using a Tina adapter unit.
suitable multi-core cable, that contains status information
from each safety component, to the control cabinet. This
- For bypassing of safety components in a ENABLES SIMPLIlED WIRING 4HE CONNECTION BLOCK CONTAINS
dynamic circuit! electronic circuits which modify the coded dynamic signal
in the safety circuit. .OTE Several connection blocks can be
4HE4INA!BYPASSUNITISUSEDFORBYPASSINGOFSAFETYCOM- CONNECTEDTOONE6ITAL0LUTO5SING4INA!!CONNECTION
ponents in a dynamic circuit and provides the possibility for BLOCKS ELIMINATES CONNECTION FAULTS AND CAN SIGNIlCANTLY
supervision of bypass lamp indication. During bypassing of reduce system cable costs.
1
Tina is available in several versions
2
4INAISAVAILABLEINSEVERALVERSIONSDEPENDINGONTHETYPEOFSAFETYCOMPONENTTHATISCONNECTEDTOTHE6ITALOR0LUTO
CIRCUIT!LSOAVAILABLEISABYPASSINGUNITTHREECONNECTORBLOCKSWITHOR-CONNECTORSANDABLINDPLUGFOR
UN USEDCONNECTIONS!SANACCESSORYTHEREISA9 CONNECTORFORSERIESORPARALLELCONNECTIONANDEVENFORCONNECTION
of light beams with separate transmitter and receiver.
!LL4INA UNITSAREDESIGNEDTODECODETHEDYNAMICSIGNALINTHESAFETYCIRCUITOF6ITAL0LUTO
3
1 3 4
4INA! 4INA" 4INA! 4INA! 4INA! 4INA! 4INA"
5
4INA! 4INA! 4INA"# 4INA! 4INA!
Tina 2A/B, Tina 3A and Tina 7A are used to connect safety Tina 4A, Tina 8A, Tina 11A and Tina 12A are used as ter-
components with mechanical contacts, such as emergency
stops, switches and light curtains/light beams with relay
MINALBLOCKSANDSIMPLIFYCONNECTIONTOA6ITALSAFETYCIRCUIT
%ACHSAFETYCOMPONENTISCONNECTEDTOTHETERMINALBLOCK
6
OUTPUTS./4%)NORDERTOMAINTAINSAFETYCATEGORYAND VIAAN-CONNECTION!TERMINALBLOCKISCONNECTEDTOTHE
TOREDUCETHERISKOFELECTRICALINTERFERENCE4INA!!AND apparatus enclosure by means of a cable that also contains
!UNITSMUSTBEINSTALLEDWITHINTHESAMEPHYSICALENCAP- status information from each safety component that is con-
sulation as the safety component that is to be monitored,
and this is to be connected to the Tina unit with as short a
NECTEDTO4INA!4INA!ANDSUMMEDINFORMATIONFROM4INA
!4INA!4HEREISALSOA4INA"0ROlBUSWHEREBYTHE 7
cable as possible. INFORMATIONSIGNALSGOTOA0ROlBUSCONNECTOR4INA!MUST
Tina 10A/B/C units are used for connection of Focus light BEUSEDASABLANKINGPLUGINUNUSED-CONNECTIONS
BEAMSCURTAINSTO6ITALOR0LUTO4INA"HASANEXTRA-
connector that enables reset, a reset lamp and switching of
THE&OCUSSUPPLYVOLTAGE4HE4INA#HASANADDITIONAL
-CONNECTORTHATPERMITSA&OCUSTRANSMITTERTORECEIVE
8
power.
2 4 9
4INA! 4INA!
Tina 6A is used to connect door sensitive edges and

safety mats, and provides an indication for each unit (Tina
!MAYALSOBEUSED )FA4INA!ISCONNECTEDCLOSE
Tina 5A is used as a bypass for safety components in a
6ITALSAFETYCIRCUITANDFORMONITORINGLAMPINDICATIONSINTHE
case of a bypass.
10
to the edge or mat, the risk of electrical interference is
reduced.
11
- why should I choose Tina?
s 3AFETYCIRCUITCATEGORY%. %.)3/
s )NDIVIDUALSTATUSINDICATIONOFEVERYCONNECTEDUNITIN
s 3UPERVISIONOFLAMPINDICATINGBYPASSINGOFSAFETY
device
12
the safety circuit s 1UICKRELEASE-CONNECTOR
13
Connection examples of sensors to Tina 8A
Tina 4A
Safety-PLC,
Pluto Safety module,
Vital
Tina 4A and Tina 8A

Tina 4A and Tina 8A are connection blocks equipped Each M12 connector on Tina 4A /8A contains:
with electronic circuits which modify the coded dynamic s POWERSUPPLY6$#
signal in the Vital/Pluto safety circuit. s short circuit supervised input and output which require
CONNECTIONSOF%DEN4INAOR3POT42
The cable between Vital and Tina 4A/ 8A s output information from sensor
has conductors for:
s POWERSUPPLY6$# Notice3EVERAL4INA!AND4INA!UNITSCANBECON-
s coded dynamic signal output/input NECTEDTO6ITAL0LUTO3UITABLECABLESWITHMM2 feed
s Information signals from each sensor CONDUCTORANDMM2INFORMATIONCONDUCTORARE#FOR
connected to the block. THE4INA!AND#FOR4INA!
Description of the image on the previous page 1
Connection 1 Connection 5
/NE%DENISCONNECTEDDIRECTLYTOTHE4INA!4HE%DEN /NE3MILE IS CONNECTED TO THE 4INA ! 4HE INFORMATION
STATUSISSHOWNBYAN,%$ONTHE!DAMSENSOR!STATUS SHOWN BY AN ,%$ ON THE 3MILE IS ALSO CONNECTED TO THE
INFORMATIONSIGNALISALSOCONNECTEDTO4INA! TERMINALBLOCKONTHE4INA!
Connection 2 Connection 6
2
/NE&OCUSSAFETYLIGHTGRIDISCONNECTEDTOTHE4INA! !SAFETYINTERLOCKSWITCHISCONNECTEDVIAA4INA!MOUNTED
VIAA4INA!4HEOUTPUTFROMTHE4INA!ISVIAA- DIRECTLYONTHESWITCH4HEOUTPUTFROMTHE4INA!ISVIAA
CONNECTOR 4HE CONNECTION BETWEEN 4INA ! AND 4INA -CONNECTOR4HECONNECTIONBETWEENTHE4INA!AND
! IS ACHIEVED USING A CABLE WITH - CONNECTORS ON
each end.
THE4INA!ISTHEREFORESIMPLYMADEWITHACABLEWITH-
CONNECTORS ON EACH END /N THE 4INA ! THERE IS A ,%$
3
4HE4INA!HASTWO,%$SWHICHSHOWTHESTATUSOF which shows the status of the switch. The same information
the light grid. The same status information signal is con- SIGNALISCONNECTEDTOTHE4INA!
NECTEDTOTHE4INA!4INA!ANDTHE&OCUSTRANSMITTER
ARECONNECTEDVIAAN- "TO4INA!
Connection 3
Connection 7
!3POTTRANSMITTERANDRECEIVERARECONNECTEDDIRECTLY
TOTOTHE4INA!VIAA- "9CONNECTOR4HESTATUS
4
!3POTLIGHTBEAMISCONNECTEDDIRECTLYTO4INA!! INFORMATIONSHOWNBYTHE,%$ONTHE3POTISALSOCONNECTED
9CONNECTOR- "FOR-PLUGSISCONNECTEDTOTHE TOTHE4INA!
transmitter and the receiver. The status information shown
ONTHE3POT,%$ISALSOCONNECTEDTO4INA! Connection 8
4INA ! IS A PLUG WHICH HAS TO BE CONNECTED TO 4INA !
5
Connection 4 inputs when no sensor is required, in order to complete the
!SAFETYMATSAMEFORSAFETYSTRIPANDSAFETYBUMPER IS safety connection circuit.
CONNECTEDVIAA4INA!TOTHE4INA!4WO,%$SIN4INA
!SHOWSTHESTATUSOFTHEMAT4HESAMESTATUSINFORMA-
TIONSIGNALISCONNECTEDTO4INA!
Note: !LLINPUTCONNECTORSONTHE4INA!MUSTBECONNECTED
TOSENSORSORHAVE4INA!PLUGSlTTED 6
HH3301D Connection example – Vital 1 and Tina 8A with different safety device types
7
10
11
12
13
Technical data – Tina Current consumption
4INA!!"AND! M!
Manufacturer */+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN 4INA!!AND! M!
4INA! M!
Article number/Ordering data: 4INA!
4INA! M!
4INA!
4INA" Tina 3A, 6A och 7A
4INA! #URRENTTHROUGHSAFETYDEVICE
4INA!PS contacts M!
4INA! Short circuit current between
4INA! contacts M!
4INA!
4INA! Tina 4A and Tina 8A
4INA! Max torque for terminal block: .M
4INA"0ROl"US Temperature range
4INA! stock ²#TO²#
4INA" operating ²#TO²#
4INA#
4INA! Material based on polyamid
4INA! Max connected units/cable
Technical data – Tina 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A, 4A, 6A, 7A, 8A and 11A length SEEDATAFOR6ITAL
Safety category with Vital or Pluto Protection class )04INA!)0

(according to EN 954-1/EN ISO Connections for 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A,
13849-1) 4A, 6A, 7A, 8A and 11A
Färg svart BROWN 6$#
6$# 4INA!!!
LED on Tina 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A, 6A, white (2) dynamic input signal
7A and 11A BLUE 6$#
'REEN PROTECTION/+SAFETYCIRCUITINTACT BLACK dynamic output signal
&LASHING PROTECTION/+SAFETYCIRCUITWAS GREY indication output
interrupted earlier
2ED protection open, safety circuit 6$#WHEN,%$IS'REENOR&LASHING
interrupted (continuous red lamp TOLERANCE 6$# M!MAX
NOTUSEDIN4INA!!OR! 6$#WHEN,%$IS2EDTOLERANCE6$#
DIODESON4INA!mASHWHEN #ONNECTIONBLOCK 4INA!STATUSFORCONNECTEDUNIT
the connected unit opens) ACCORDINGTOCONNECTION
#ONNECTIONBLOCK 4INA!SEEABOVE 4).!!
Note. Shielded cable is recommended between cabinet and Tina
!!3HIELDTOBECONNECTEDTOGROUNDINCABINETONLY
Connection of Tina 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 6A, 7A and 8A

-
male ,%$

Tina 1A Tina 7A*

See connection example ((".
See connection example(!!
Tina 2A/B Tina 4A
brown M20 brown
,YSDIOD ,%$
white white
* blue * blue
black 4INA! black
4INA"
* grey * grey
Σ info
See connection example(!! See connection example(($

- brown Tina 8A
M20
Tina 3A male blue ]4INA!PS
green
only
*
orange
*
,%$X
Σ info
See connection example(!!
See connection example (($.
- -
male female
Tina 6A
Tina 11A
,%$X
3EETHECONNECTIONEXAMPLES("!!
See connection example((! * )NORDERTOACHIEVECATEGORYACCORDINGTO%. %.)3/
THECONNECTIONTOTHESAFETYDEVICEMUSTBEMADEINSIDE
ANENCLOSUREIESAFETYSWITCH% STOP
Tina 5A 1
Bypassing of Eden and Tina units.
)FONEORMORE%DENOR4INAUNITSAREBYPASSEDBYA
4INA!ADIODESUCHASA.MUSTBEINSER-
TEDWITHFORWARDCURRENTOUTFROMPINOFTHELAST 2
BYPASSEDUNIT)FONEORMORE%DENOR4INAUNITSARE
BYPASSEDBYONEORMORE%DENOR4INAUNITSDIRECT
TOEACHOTHERADIODESUCHASA.MUSTBE
inserted by the last unit in both loops with forward
CURRENTOUTFROMPIN2EFERTOEXAMPLE($!
)NTHECASEOFBYPASSINGOFA4INA!"OR#OROF
3
more than one unit towards each other, it is recom-
MENDEDTHATA4INA!OR- -ISUSED3EETHE
EXAMPLES(%#$%&OR'
4
Function
Technical data Tina 5A
The Tina 5A is designed for bypassing of safety de-
vices connected to the Vital/Pluto safety circuit and
for supervision of lamp indication.
Article number/Ordering data: 4INA! 5
During bypassing of safety devices e.g. a light grid or an Safety category together with
interlocked gate, it must only be possible to allow the bypass Vital/Pluto, EN 954-1/
function if a lamp indication is on. The lamp indication must EN ISO 13849-1
therefore be supervised. Whether indication is required de-
PENDSONTHESPECIlCSITUATIONANDRESULTOFRISKANALYSIS
7HENTHE4INA!RECEIVESACODEDDYNAMICSIGNALTO3
Colour
Weight
"LACKANDBEIGE
G
6
ANDTHEBYPASSINDICATIONLAMPISONCONNECTEDACROSS, Bypass connection 4INA!CANBYPASS
, ABYPASSINGOUTPUTSIGNALISPROVIDEDON3AND3! MAX%DEN4INA UNITSOR
broken or short circuit in the indication lamp leads to an inter- 3POT42
RUPTIONOFTHEBYPASSOUTPUTSIGNALON3AND3THEREFORE
stopping the bypassing.
4HEDYNAMICSIGNALTO3ON4INA!MUSTBETHEINPUT
Connections
! !3UPPLY
3)NPUTDYNAMICSIGNAL
6$#
M!
7
SIGNALFROMTHElRSTOFTHESAFETYDEVICESINTENDEDTOBYPASS 3/UTPUTDYNAMICSIGNAL
MODIlED M!MAX
The signal can be connected via output contacts from a
3/UTPUTDYNAMICSIGNAL
safety relay, a safety timer or be initiated via a unit providing M!MAX
THEDYNAMICCODEDSIGNALASFOREXAMPLEAN%DENSENSOROR
a Spot light beam.
MODIlEDTWICE
, ,"YPASSINDICATIONLAMP
(or resistor when lamp is not
MIN7MAX7 8
required 820 ohm/2W.
4HE DYNAMIC CODED OUTPUT SIGNAL FROM 3 OR 3 IS TO BE 4HE4INA!ISSUPPLIEDWITHTHE
connected to the output signal from the last safety device resistor connected across termi-
which is to be bypassed. NALS,,4HISRESISTORMUSTBE
S2 is used if:
taken away and replaced with a
suitable rated lamp when by-
9
pass indication is required).
s ANodd number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed 9)NFORMATIONOUTPUTBYPASSON M!MAX
using an odd number of dynamic safety units. See draw-
ING(%# LED indication
3IGNAL $YNAMICINPUT3OK
s ANeven number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed
using an even number of dynamic safety units. See draw-
/N
-UTE
Supply voltage ok
$YNAMICOUTPUTON33
10
ING(%& AND6$#TO, ,OK
S3 is used if:
Current consumption A1-A2
s ANodd number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed .OBYPASS M!
using an even number of dynamic safety units. See draw- $URINGBYPASSUSING7
ING(%$
s ANeven number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed
indication lamp
Mounting
M!
MM$).RAIL
11
using an odd number of dynamic safety units. See draw-
ING(%% Operating temperature range ²#TO²#
Protection class
The total number of dynamic safety units is calculated by
ADDINGTHENUMBEROF%DEN3POTAND4INAUNITSCONNECTED
INTHE6ITALCIRCUIT3EETHECONNECTIONEXAMPLES(%#
%NCLOSURE
#ONNECTIONBLOCKS
)0
)0 12
$%&OR'
13
Tina 10A, 10B and 10C
Technical data for Tina 10A, 10B and 10C
Article number/ 4INA!
ordering data: 4INA"
4INA#
Colour black
Safety category with Vital 1 or
Pluto in accordance with
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
4INA!"#ARETHREECONNECTIONUNITSWITH-
connections, that make it easy to connect a light Operating voltage
4INA!"# 6$#
CURTAINORLIGHTBEAM&OCUSWITH/33$OUTPUTSTO
THEDYNAMICSAFETYCIRCUITSOF6ITALAND0LUTO4HISALSO LED on Tina 10A/B/C
'REEN &OCUS/+SAFETYCIRCUITCLOSED
ENABLESCOMPLETEEXTERNALINTERCONNECTIONSWITH-
&LASHING &OCUS/+SAFETYCIRCUITOPEN
cabling, which reduces the cabling to and connec- 2ED Focus open, safety circuit open
TIONSINTHEAPPARATUSENCLOSURE4INA!"#HAS
Current consumption
,%$SFORFUNCTIONINDICATIONWITHGREENREDORmASH-
ing green/red indications. 4INA!"# M!
Ambient temperature
Tina 10AHASTWO-CONNECTIONSTHATARECON- 3TORAGE #TO²#
NECTEDTO6ITAL0LUTOANDALIGHTCURTAINLIGHT /PERATION #TO²#
beam Focus receiver. See the connection examples Material polyamide-based
((&(2, Enclosure classification )0
Number of units connected
Tina 10BHASTHREE-CONNECTIONSTHATARECON-
to Vital OFF
NECTEDTO6ITAL0LUTOANDALIGHTCURTAINLIGHT -AXNUMBEROF4INA! OFFWHEN&OCUSISSUPPLIEDVIA
BEAM&OCUSRECEIVERAND!NEXTERNALRESETBUTTON -AXNUMBEROF4INA"# 6ITALANDARESETLAMPISUSED
ANDMUTINGLAMPSUCHASUNIT&-) # OFFWHEN&OCUSISSUPPLIED
3EETHECONNECTIONEXAMPLES(2, with power separately or no
reset lamp is used
Tina 10CHASTHREE-CONNECTIONSTHATARECON- Number of units connected to
NECTEDTO6ITAL0LUTOANDALIGHTCURTAINLIGHT one Pluto input
BEAM&OCUSRECEIVERANDALIGHTCURTAINLIGHTBEAM -AXNUMBEROF4INA!"# 2 off
Focus Transmitter. See the connection examples Connections
(($(2, 4INA! TO6ITALOR0LUTO
TO&OCUSRECEIVER
4INA" TO6ITALOR0LUTO
TO&OCUSRECEIVER
TO2ESETUNIT
4INA# TO6ITALOR0LUTO
TO&OCUSRECEIVER
TO&OCUSTRANSMITTER
Tina 10A, 10B and 10C connections
Tina 10A Tina 10B Tina 10C

2 2 2
1 1 1
3
3 3
Tina 12A 1
➌ Technical data for Tina 12A
➋
Article number/
ordering data:
4INA!
2
Colour black
➊ Pluto in accordance with
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
4INA!ISAJUNCTIONBLOCKWITHAN-CONNECTOR Operating voltage 6$# 3

It enables quick and easy connection of two Dalton LED on Tina 12A
process locks OR-AGNE!WITHINTEGRATED%DEN 'REEN Safety circuit closed and sensor
SENSORSVIAACABLETOA0LUTOSAFETY0,#ORA6ITAL /+
SAFETYCIRCUIT4HE4INA!HAS,%$INDICATIONAND &LASHING Safety circuit or sensor open
an information output to report the status of the
safety sensors.
2ED .OTUSED 4
Current consumption M!
4HE4INA!HASTHREE POLE-CONNECTORSTHAT Material polyamide-based
are connected to Enclosure classification )0
10LUTO6ITALINFORMATIONFORTHESENSORANDLOCKAND
a lock signal
Number of units connected
to Vital OFF
5
2$ALTONWITH%DENNO -AXNUMBEROF4INA!
3$ALTONWITH%DENNO
Number of units connected to
one Pluto input
➋ ➌ -AXNUMBEROF4INA!
Connections 1
OFF
Function
6
WHITE $YNAMICINPUTSIGNALTO%DEN
brown (2) 0OWERSUPPLYVOLTAGE6$#
FOR$ALTONAND%DEN
GREEN ,OCKINGSIGNALTO$ALTON
➊
YELLOW
GRAY
.OTUSED
)NFORMATIONOUTPUT%DEN
%DEN/+
7
PINK Dynamic output signal from
%DEN
BLUE 6$#
)NFORMATIONOUTPUT$ALTON
red (8)
Dalton 2 = locked 8
Cabling
9
Advantages:
!REAMM2
!LWAYSSCREENEDCABLE
The screen is always connected
10
to negative in male connectors.
-ANYOF*OKAB3AFETYgSPRODUCTSARECONNECTEDUSINGSTANDARD- The guide pin in the small
connectors. This facilitates installation, saving a lot of time, and also
dramatically reduces the risk of incorrect connection.
connector is indicated by a
recessed arrow that is easy to
11
7EHAVETHEREFOREDEVELOPEDCABLESWITHCONDUCTORSXMM
recognise.
SCREENINGORCONDUCTORSXMMSCREENINGWHICHOFFERTHE
advantages that we believe a good cable should have. These are avail- #ONVENIENTCABLEIN06#
able in any length and in various standard lengths, with moulded straight
or angled male or female connectors. 0ARTICULARLYSUITABLECABLESFORTHE
4INA!AND4INA!UNITSARE#AND#4HEYHAVETHICKERMM2
The cable is also available in
any length
12
CONDUCTORSFORTHEFEEDLINEANDMM2FORTHEOTHERCONDUCTORS
screening. 2EFERTOTHECOMPONENTLISTFORTHEVARIANTSTHATAREAVAILABLE
13
’Y’ branch with M12 connection and M12-connection device with screw connectors
M12-3A M12-3B M12-3D M12-3E M12-3M
Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female
2 2
2 2 2

Male Female Male Male Female Male Male
See the connection See the connection See the connection See the connection ex- See the connection
EXAMPLES(!#$ EXAMPLES(!#$ examples AMPLES("!! examples
nCHAP (($& ("!nCHAP !AND!nCHAP (($nCHAP
((!$nCHAP (($nCHAP (2/,nCHAP ((%nCHAP
See product list for applications
M12-C01 M12-C02 M12-C03 M12-C04
Female Male Female Male Female Male
Example of safety component connections based on ’Y’ branch
2 3 2 2
2 3
4INA ! 3 4INA # 4INA ! - "

1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 - !
One Vital supervises the entire robot cell! 1
The cell has dynamic protection connected to

a Vital, with the following functions: er 2
s 4WOCHARGINGSTATIONS
!TEACHCHARGINGSTATIONALIGHTCURTAINCHECKSFOR
anyone putting their hand into a risk area, and an
%DENSENSORCHECKSWHETHERAROBOTISINSIDETHE
A er
3
same risk area. This means that a stop is only or-
dered if a robot and a person are in the same area. B
When the station is clear, the person presses the
reset button connected to the light curtain.
s &ENCEWITH%DEN INTERLOCKEDDOOR
2ESET Door/
%MERGENCYSTOP
2ESET
,IGHTCURTAIN
4
If the door is opened, the robot stops. To reset
the robot system, the door must be closed and a A
supervisory reset button operated. Door
s 4HREEEMERGENCYSTOPSWITH4INAUNITS
Dynamic safety circuit in accordance with
category 4 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
2ESET
,IGHTCURTAIN
5
If any of the emergency stop buttons is pressed,
the robot performs an immediate emergency stop. B
Connection example for the protection solution above 7

Smile 11EA Tina Eden Focus Reset Eden Smile 11EA Tina Eden Focus Reset Smile 11EA Tina
FMI FMI
8
Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver
Tina 1A
2 2
9
2 3 2 3
3 3
M12-3B 1 1 M12-3B 1 1
2 3
Tina 10B
2 3
Tina 10B
10
M12-3M M12-3M
1 1
11
Tina 8A
Pluto 0LUTO Vital 12
13
Approvals:
Remote sensor expansion unit
with reset capability for Vital/Pluto
Tina Duo 1/2 Safety unit for:

%XPANSIONUNITFORINCREAS-
ing the number of sensors
INA6ITALOR0LUTOCIRCUITWITH
automatic or manual local
reset.
Features:
,OCALRESET
4INA$UO
%XTERNALWITH&-) %
4HE 4INA $UO UNIT CAN EXPAND THE NUMBER OF SENSORS IN A 6ITAL0LUTO 4INA$UO
SYSTEM )T CREATES A FURTHER DYNAMIC CIRCUIT IN WHICH UP TO ACTIVE
SENSORS STANDARD SENSORS WITH 4INA OR OFF 4INA $UOS CAN BE Integral push button.
connected. It also permits resetting of the new sensors. The Tina Duo
SPLITSTHESIGNALINTOTWOCIRCUITS!AND" #IRCUIT"ISTHEEXPANDED %ASYCONNECTIONWITH
CIRCUITWHEREEXTERNALRESETISPOSSIBLECIRCUIT!ISRESETBYTHE6ITAL
0LUTO 4HE4INA$UOISEQUIVALENTINTERMSOFTIMINGTOTHREE %DENOR -CONNECTORS
4INAUNITSINCIRCUIT!
4WOJUMPERSARELOCATEDUNDERTHEBOTTOMCOVER4HEYDElNE-ANUAL ,%$INDICATIONFOR
!UTO 2ESETAND%VEN/DDNUMBEROFSENSORSBETWEEN" "
4HE4INA$UOCONTAINSAgSLIMMEDDOWNgVERSIONOF6ITALTHATMONITORS %VEN/DDNUMBERS
CIRCUIT"4HEREFOREITISPOSSIBLETOCONNECTASMANYSENSORSTOCIRCUIT of sensors.
" AS FOR A hREGULARv 6ITAL )T IS HOWEVER IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT WHEN A
SENSORISOPENEDINCIRCUIT"THEFALL TIMEOFTHEMAINUNIT0LUTO6ITAL IS
INCREASEDBYMS&OREACHADDITIONAL4INA$UOTHATISCONNECTEDITIS
-ANUAL!UTOMATICRESET
possible to select local resetting with indication, or automatic resetting.
Information output.
The system can have 'an infinite' number of sensors connected to one
main Vital unit.
Reset
Pluto Vital
supervise
door
Technical data Tina Duo 1/2 4INA$UO 1
Ordering data: 4INA$UO
WITH-CONNECTORFORRESET
button)
4INA$UOWITH
integral reset button)
2
Pluto in accordance with
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
Colour: 9ELLOWPROlLEWITHBLACKFRONT
and end covers
Tina Duo 2
3
Weight: G
Power supply: 6$# RIPPLE
Consumption: 7
Response time: !DDMSFOREACHCIRCUIT
-MALEANDFEMALE
4
Connectors:
LED's: )NFO!UTO-ANUAL2ESET
%VEN/DD
Jumpers behind
bottom cover:
-ANUAL!UTOMATIC2ESET
%VEN/DDNUMBERSOFSENSORS 5
Dimensions: XXMM
7
Connection diagram
"ROWN
8
White
"LUE
"LACK
'REY
").
POLEMALE-CONNECTOR
9
"/54).
POLEFEMALE-CONNECTOR
"ROWN White "LUE "LACK 'REY

10
!/54
POLEFEMALE-CONNECTOR
!).
POLEMALE-CONNECTOR 11
"ROWN White "LUE "LACK 'REY 12

Man./ %VEN
!UTO /DD
13
Tina Duo with two separate local automatic reset circuits
Tina Duo 2 and Tina 4A with manual local reset
Tina Duo with three circuits each with separate manual reset and with or
without external power supply
1
7
HH3300F Vital 1 with Tina 8B Profibus and different types of safety devices
10
11
12
13
Contents Page
HH3300F Vital 1 with Tina 8B Profibus and different types of safety devices ____________ 3:23
HA3300A Connection example Vital 1 ____________________________________________ 3:25
HA3301A Vital 1 with several Eden ______________________________________________ 3:25
HA3302A Vital 1 and Tina 4A with 4 Eden ________________________________________ 3:26
HA3302B Vital 1 and 2 Tina 4A and 4 Eden and emergency stop _____________________ 3:26
HA3303A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 2A_____________________________________ 3:27
HA3304A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 3A ____________________________________ 3:27
HA3305A Vital 1 with Eden and lightgrid Focus/Tina 10C____________________________ 3:28
HA3306C Vital 1 with 2 lightbeams Spot _________________________________________ 3:28
HA3306D Vital 1 with 3 lightbeams Spot__________________________________________ 3:29
HA3307A Vital 1 with Eden, lightgrid/Tina 3A and emergency stop/Tina 7A _____________ 3:29
HD3800A Vital 1 with safety light beam Spot ______________________________________ 3:30
HD3801A Vital 1, series and parallel _____________________________________________ 3:30
HE3811A Safety light beam Spot with time-limited reset _____________________________ 3:31
HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s. ____________________________ 3:31
HE3824D Eden and bypassed lightbeam with Eden ________________________________ 3:32
HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s. ____________________________ 3:32
HE3824F Eden and 2 bypass lightbeams with Eden ________________________________ 3:33
HE3824G Eden and 2 separetely bypassed lightbeams _____________________________ 3:33
HH3300A Vital 1 with different types of safety devices and M12–3A __________________ 3:34
HH3300D Vital 1 with Tina 4A and different types of safety devices ___________________ 3:34
HH3302D Vital 1 with Tina 8A and different types of safety devices ___________________ 3:35
HH3301E Connection example Vital 1 ____________________________________________ 3:35
HH3400A2 Vital 1 Solutions ____________________________________________________ 3:36
HB0005A Vital with Eden and Smile emergency stop, with separate reset ______________ 3:36
HB0006A Vital with 4 Eden units + Reset via M12-3E and Tina 4A ____________________ 3:37
HB0007A Vital with two Dalton units via Tina 12A __________________________________ 3:37
HB0001A Pluto with Smile emergency stop unit + Reset via M12-3E and Adam via Tina 4A _ 3:38
HB0002A Pluto with five Eden units, for two zones via M12-3E and Tina 4A ____________ 3:38
HB0003A Pluto with five Smile emergency stop units, via Tina 11A and Tina 4A _________ 3:39
HB0004A Pluto with different zones for Eden + Reset and two Eden units +via M12-3E _____ 3:39
HA3300A Connection example Vital 1
1
6
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
HA3301A Vital 1 with several Eden 7
10
11
12
13
HA3302A Vital 1 and Tina 4A with 4 Eden
HA3302B Vital 1 and 2 Tina 4A and 4 Eden and emergency stop
HA3303A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 2A
1
6
HA3304A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 3A 7
10
11
12
13
HA3305A Vital 1 with Eden and lightgrid Focus/Tina 10C
HA3306C Vital 1 with 2 lightbeams Spot
HA3306D Vital 1 with 3 lightbeams Spot
1
6
HA3307A Vital 1 with Eden, lightgrid/Tina 3A and emergency stop/Tina 7A 7
10
11
12
13
HD3800A Vital 1 with safety light beam Spot
HD3801A Vital 1, series and parallel
HE3811A Safety light beam Spot with time-limited reset
1
6
HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s. 7
10
11
12
13
HE3824D Eden and bypassed lightbeam with Eden
HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s.
HE3824F Eden and 2 bypass lightbeams with Eden
1
6
HE3824G Eden and 2 separetely bypassed lightbeams 7
10
11
12
13
HH3300A Vital 1 with different types of safety devices and M12–3A
HH3300D Vital 1 with Tina 4A and different types of safety devices
a b c a b
Dominate
HH3302D Vital 1 with Tina 8A and different types of safety devices
1
6
HH3301E Connection example Vital 1 7
10
11
12
13
HH3400A2 Vital 1 Solutions
HB0005A Vital with Eden and Smile emergency stop, with separate reset
HB0006A Vital with 4 Eden units + Reset via M12-3E and Tina 4A
1
6
HB0007A Vital with two Dalton units via Tina 12A 7
10
11
12
13
HB0001A Pluto with Smile emergency stop unit + Reset via M12-3E and Adam via Tina 4A
HB0002A Pluto with five Eden units, for two zones via M12-3E and Tina 4A
HB0003A Pluto with five Smile emergency stop units, via Tina 11A and Tina 4A
1
6
HB0004A Pluto with different zones for Eden + Reset and two Eden units +via M12-3E 7
10
11
12
13
Safety Relays
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page 1
Why should you use Safety relays?______________________________________4:2

The smallest and most flexible Safety relays on the market________________4:3 2
Safety relay summary_________________________________________________4:4

Safety relay - RT - series
• RT6__________________________________________________________________________ 4:6 3
• RT7_________________________________________________________________________ 4:10
• RT9_________________________________________________________________________ 4:14
• JSBRT11____________________________________________________________________ 4:18
4
Safety relay - JSB - series
• JSBR4_ _____________________________________________________________________4:20
• JSBT4_______________________________________________________________________4:22
•
•
BT50(T)_ ____________________________________________________________________4:24
BT51(T)_ ____________________________________________________________________4:26
5
• RT10________________________________________________________________________4:28
• JSBT5(T)_ ___________________________________________________________________4:30
Safety timers 6
• JSHT1A/B_ __________________________________________________________________4:32
• JSHT2A/B/C_________________________________________________________________4:34
Expansion relays 7
• E1T_________________________________________________________________________4:36
• JSR1T_______________________________________________________________________4:38
• JSR2A_______________________________________________________________________4:40
• JSR3T_______________________________________________________________________4:42 8
Connection examples_______________________________________________ 4:44
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
international approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustrate
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
12
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
based on the examples given. 2008 v02.
13
Why should you use
safety relays?
– to meet existing safety standards! has, for example, inputs that are checked for short-circuits and
dual redundant circuits that are checked at each operation.
”A fault in the control circuit logic, or failure of or damage This can be compared to the dual brake circuits in a car. If
to the control circuit must not lead to dangerous situations”. one of the circuits is faulty the other will stop the car. In a
This is the requirement in the EU´s Machinery Directive safety relay there is an additional function which only allows
98/37/EC under the heading 1.2.7. “ Failure of the control a machine to start if both circuits are ok.
circuit”. The directive implies that no person should be put The standard for safety related parts of the control sys-
at risk if for example, a relay sticks or if a transistor or two tem describes various safety categories depending on the
electrical conductors short-circuit. level of risk and application. One single universal relay with
A safety relay will fulfill these requirements. A safety relay selectable safety categories solves this.
– to supervise safety devices!
Light beams Light curtains/ Three posi- Safety Two-hand Emergency Safety strips Safety mats
Light grids tion devices interlock devices stop & Bumpers
switches
– for safe stops and reliable restarts!
Dual stop signals when the Supervised reset when Timed reset when you Automatic reset for small
gate is opened. there can be a person cannot see the entire risk hatches.
Entering or putting a hand or within the risk area. area. Where body entry is not
limb into a hazardous area To make sure that nobody Sometimes a double reset possible through a hatch,
must cause all machinery that is within the restricted area function is necessary to the safety circuit can be
can cause personal injury when activating the reset make sure that no one is left automatically reset.
to stop safely. Many seri- button. A supervised reset behind in the risk area. First, The safety relays are reset
ous accidents occur when button must be pressed and after ensuring no other per- immediately when the hatch
machinery is believed to released before a reset can son is inside the hazardous interlock switch contacts are
have stopped but is in fact occur. Many serious acci- area, the pre-reset button closed.
only pausing in its program dents have been caused by must be activated, followed
sequence. The safety relay an unintentional and unsu- by the reset button outside
monitors the gate interlock pervised reset. the risk area within an ac-
switch and cables and gives ceptable time period e.g 10
dual stop signals. seconds. A safety timer and
a safety relay can provide
this function.
The most flexible safety relays 1
on the market! 2
We have the most flexible safety relays on the market. Our they are compatible with all our previous safety relays as well
first universal relay was developed in 1988. as with other manufacturers' products.
Nowadays, the flexibility is even greater and size has been Is a universal relay expensive? No, our latest patented
3
reduced by 85 %. construction is extremely simple and the number of major
A universal relay is a safety relay with various input options components is less compared to our previous universal
for various safety devices and risk levels. relays. This means that the safety relays are even more reli-
Internally, the safety relay is of the highest safety level able than before.
(category 4 according to EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1). We also have a great deal of experience from safety
A machine supplier can therefore, with one single safety relay, solutions in our own system developments. It would be our
select the input configuration that best suits their custom-
ers' safety requirements. In addition, our safety relays have
pleasure to share these experiences with you! Please see
the complete safety solutions in the section “Connection
4
detachable connector blocks for ease of replacement and examples”. Please do not hesitate to contact us if you should
testing. As our universal relays incorporate all input options, require any other safety solutions.
5
Inputs for various safety devices. Input for manual or
automatic resetting.
6
RT7: the most
flexible safety
relay on the
market!
7
8
Scale 1:1
9
Detachable connector blocks.
10
Outputs for program stop, gate opened Safety outputs for immediate and de-
or closed and reset indication. layed stops at optional times.
Some of the advantages with JOKAB SAFETY’s safety relays:

11
• Universal relays • Small and compact • Functions set by external
• Excellent reliability • Detachable connector blocks hardwired links
• Approved in Europe,
USA, Canada
• Supervised reset
• Low power consumption
• Permits the use of long
emergency stop cables
• LED indication for inputs and
outputs
• Powerful switching capacity
12
• Time reset • EX compatibility
13
summary
SAFETY RELAYS
To facilitate the choice of safety relay or combinations of
safety relays, please see:
– the table below dividing the safety relays into
application fields
– the table on the opposite page showing possible input
and output options
– the relevant data sheet giving comprehensive
information about each specific safety relay
– the circuit diagram for various applications in the
- Which safety relay should you choose? section “Connection examples”.
First of all, we would recommend the selection of one of Note: All earlier types of relays that can now be replaced
our latest universal relays in the RT-series. These are both by those in this manual are still kept as stock items and
practical and cost effective. can be supplied upon request.
Application fields
Safety-
Safety relays Expansion relays
timers
JSBT5T, BT50T, BT51T
JSBT5, BT50, BT51
JSHT2A/B/C
JSHT1A/B
JSBRT11
JSBR4
JSR2A
JSR1T
JSR3T
JSBT4
RT10
RT6
RT7
RT9
E1T
Interlocking switch/Gate/Hatch l l l l l l l l
Light curtains l l l l
Light beams l l l l
Safety mats l l l l l l
Contact strips l l l l l l
Two-hand control device l
Emergency stop l l l l l l l l
Hold to run/enabling device l l l l l l l
Foot control device l l l l l l l
Area supervision l l l l l l
Time resetting l
Time bypassing l l
Inching l
Output expansion l l l l l l l l l l
Delayed output l l l l l
Input alternatives (see also technical data on the next page)
Single-channel, 1 NO from +24 V Two-channel, 2 NO from +24 V Two-channel, 1 NO & 1 NC from +24V Two-channel, 1 NO from 0 V &
Safety category 1. Safety category 3 Safety category 4 1 NO from +24 V. Safety category 4
The input must be closed before the Both the inputs must be closed before the One input must be closed and one must Both the inputs must be closed before the
outputs can be activated. A stop signal outputs can be activated. A stop signal be opened before the outputs can be outputs can be activated. A stop signal
is given when the input is opened. is given if one or both of the inputs are activated. A stop signal is given if one or is given if one or both of the inputs are
opened. Both the inputs must be opened both of the inputs change position or if opened. Both the inputs must be opened
and reclosed before the outputs can be the inputs short-circuit. Both inputs must and reclosed before the outputs can be
reactivated. A short-circuit between the be put into their initial position before the reactivated. A Stop signal is given if there
inputs is not monitored by the safety re- outputs can be reactivated. is a short-circuit between the inputs.
lay. Category 4 can only be achieved if a
safety device with short circuit monitored
outputs is connected.
1
Technical data
Safety-
Safety relays Expansion relays
2
timers
BT50 (JSBT5)
JSHT2A/B/C
JSHT1A/B
JSBRT11
JSBT5T
JSBR4
JSR2A
JSR1T
JSR3T
JSBT4
BT50T
BT51T
3
BT51
RT10
RT6
RT7
RT9
E1T
Safety category 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 4 4 1–4° 1–4° 1–4° 1–4° 1–4° 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4
Safety input
Single-channel, 1 NO from +24 V l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Two-channel, 2 NO from +24 V l l l l 4

Two-channel, 1 NO & 1 NC from +24 V l l l l
Two-channel, 1 NO from 0 V & 1 NO from + 24 V l l l l l l l l l l l l
Contact strips/Safety mats

5
l l l l l l
Reset & test input
Monitored manual l l l l l l
Automatic/Unmonitored manual l l l l l l l l l l l
Testing of contactors, relays, valves, etc.
Output
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6
NO 3 2 2 7 3 3 3 4 2 4* 4* 4
NO delayed
7
2 3† 3 4 4* 4* 2¤
NO impulse outputs 2¤ 2¤
NC 1 1 2 1 1 1 1* 1
NC delayed 1† 1 1*
Info. output
Switching capacity (resistive load)

2 3 1 1 1 1
8
6A/250VAC/1500VA/150W 4 3 2 9 4 4 4 4‡ 4‡ 4 4 4 5
4A/250VAC/1000VA/100W 2 ¤
2 ¤
2¤
6A/250VAC/1380VA/138W 2‡ 9
10A/250VAC/1840VA/192W 5
Width (mm) 45 45 22,5 100 45 45 22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5 45 45 22,5 45 45 22,5
* Indicates the possibility of selecting delayed outputs Indicates one relay contact per output (other relays having two contacts per output)
10
¤
‡
delayed ° Category 4 depending on connection (When used as expansion relay with Pluto Safety PLC, then Category 4) † fixed 0.5 s delay
Contact strips/Safety mats Monitored manual reset Automatic/unmonitored manual Testing of contactors, relays &
11
Safety category 1. Safety category 4. reset valves
For an unpressurised mat/strip, both A monitored reset means that the safety Automatic reset means that the outputs Can be carried out with both auto-
the relay inputs must be closed for the relay will not be reset if the reset but- are closed immediately when both the matic and manual reset.
outputs to be activated. In the case of an ton gets jammed when pressed in or if input conditions are satisfied and the
12
activated mat/strip and short-circuit input the input short-circuits. In order for the test input is closed.
channels, the relay will be de-energized. resetting to be complete, the input must
Current limitation prevents the safety be closed and opened before the outputs
relay from being overloaded when the can close.
channels short-circuit.
T9T114
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
RT6 Safety relay for:
Emergency stops
Light curtains
Three position devices
Interlocked gates/hatches
Magnetic switches
Light beams
Safety mats
Contact strips
Foot operated switches
Features:
Five input options
Single or dual channel input
Would you like a single safety relay for all your safety Manual supervised or auto-
applications? matic reset
Then choose the RT6 universal relay to supervise both your
safety devices and the internal safety of your machinery. In Test input for supervision of
addition you can select the safety level required for each external contactors
installation. All this is possible because the RT6 has the most
versatile input option arrangement available on the market.
Width 45 mm
Many other relays can therefore be replaced by the RT6. LED indication of supply,
The relay also comes with other options such as manual
inputs, outputs, short-circuit
or automatic reset. Manual supervised reset can be used
for gates and other safety devices that can be bypassed. and low voltage level.
Automatic reset can be used for small hatches, if deemed 3 NO / 1 NC relay outputs
acceptable from risk assessment.
The RT6 also has information outputs that follow the in- Two voltage free transistor
puts and outputs of the relay. These outputs will for example information outputs
indicate if a gate is open or closed and if the safety relay
needs to be reset. Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48,
The RT6 is designed with a minimum amount of compo- 115 or 230 VAC
nents thus keeping both production costs and component
acquisitions to a minimum. Quick release connector
Choose the RT6 to simplify your safety circuits and reduce blocks
your costs.
Technical information - RT6 1
Inputs
The RT6 can be configured to operate with any of the following Safety level
input options: The RT6 has internal dual and supervised safety functions. A short-
2
1. Single channel, 1 NO contact from +24 V DC, safety cat. 1. circuit, internal faulty component or external interference will not
2. Dual channel, 2 NO contacts from +24 V DC, safety cat. 3. present a risk to options with the highest safety level. A manual
3. Dual channel 1 NO, 1 NC contact from +24 V DC, safety cat. 4 reset requires that the reset input is closed and opened before the
4. Dual channel, 1 NO contact from 0V and 1 NO contact from safety relay outputs are activated. A short-circuit or a faulty reset
+24 V DC, safety cat. 4. button is consequently supervised.
5. Safety mats/contact strips 1 ‘contact’ from 0V and 1 ‘contact’ When the RT6 is configured for dual channel input, both the
3
from +24 V DC, safety cat. 1. inputs are supervised for correct sequence operation before the
unit can be reset.
When the input/inputs are activated and the test/supervised reset The input options 3 and 4 have the highest safety levels as all
is complete, relays 1 and 2 are energized. Simultaneous activation short-circuits and power failures are supervised. This in combination
is not required where there are dual channels. The two relays are with internal current limitation makes the relay ideal for supervision
de-energized when the input/inputs are de-activated in accordance of safety mats and contact strips.
4
with the input option chosen or in case of a power failure. Relays
1 and 2 must both be de-energized before the outputs can be Regulations and standards
activated again The RT6 is designed and approved in accordance with appropri-
ate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
Transistor output status information EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
The RT6 has two voltage free transistor outputs that can be con-
5
nected to a PLC, computer or other monitoring device. These
outputs give the input and output status of the relay. Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
Reset and testing problems, see the section “Connection examples”.
The RT6 has two reset options; manual and automatic. The manual
supervised reset is used when the RT6 is monitoring safety devices
6
that can be bypassed, i.e. to ensure that the outputs of the safety
relay do not close just because a gate is closed. The automatic
reset should only be used if deemed an acceptable risk.
In addition, the RT6 can also test (supervise) whether, for ex-
ample, contactors and valves etc are de-energized/de-activated
before a restart is allowed.
Indication of low voltage

The ‘On’ LED will flash if the relay supply voltage falls below an
7
acceptable level. This indication will also be given if a monitored **Only for AC supply
safety mat/contact strip is actuated. See connection option 5.
8
Connection of supply - RT6
DC supply AC supply DC-supply of AC-units 9
10
The RT6 DC option should be supplied The RT6 AC option should be supplied All AC-units can also be supplied by
with +24 V on A1 and 0 V on A2. with the approprate supply voltage via +24 VDC to S53 (0VDC to S23).
connections A1 and A2.
11
The S23/ must be connected to
protective earth.
Note
With both DC and AC modules, if cable shielding is used 12
this must be connected to an earth rail or an equivalent
earth point.
13
Connection of safety devices - RT6
1. SINGLE CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V 3. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO, 1 NC from 5. Safety mat/Contact strip
+24V
The input (contact to S14) must be closed One input contact must be closed (S14) and Both ‘contact’ inputs from a inactivated
before the outputs can be activated. When one opened (S44) before the relay outputs safety mat/contact strip must be made in
the input contact is opened the relay safety can be activated. The safety relay contacts order to allow the RT6 relay outputs to be
output contacts open. will open if one or both of the inputs activated. When the safety mat/contact
change state or in case of a short-circuit strip is activated or a short-circuit is detected
2. DUAL CHANNEL, 2 NO from +24V between S14 and S44. Both inputs must across S14-S23, the relay will de-energize
return to their initial positions before the (safety outputs open) and the ‘ON’ LED
relay outputs can be reactivated. will flash. As output S13 has an internal
current limit of 70 mA, the RT6 will not be
overloaded when the mat/contact strip is
4. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V, activated or a short-circuit is detected.
Both input contacts (S14 and S34) must 1 NO to 0V
be closed before the relay outputs can be
activated. The safety relay contacts will
open if one or both of the input contacts
are opened. Both the input contacts must
be opened and reclosed before the relay Relay functions as for option 2, but a short-
can be reset. A short-circuit between inputs circuit, in this case between inputs S14
S14 and S34 can only be supervised if the and S24, is supervised (safety outputs
device connected to the inputs has short- are opened).
circuit supervised outputs, e.g. JOKAB
Focus light curtains.
Reset connections - RT6
Manual supervised reset Automatic reset Testing external contactor status
*connected to S13 for safety mat/

contact strip
The manual supervised reset contact con- Automatic reset is selected when S53, Contactors, relays and valves can be
nected to input X1 must be closed and X1 and X4 are linked. The relay outputs supervised by connecting ‘test’ contacts
opened in order to activate the relay out- are then activated at the same time as between S53 and X1. Both manual super-
puts. the inputs. vised and automatic reset can be used.
Output connections - RT6

Relay outputs Transistor outputs
***Note
These outputs are only for information
purposes and must not be connected to
the safety circuits of the machinery.
The RT6 has three (3 NO) safety outputs The RT6 has two(2) voltage free transistor
and 1 NC information output. outputs for information.
In order to protect the output contacts The transistor outputs are supplied with
it is recommended that loads (inductive) voltage to Y13, either from S53 (+24V)
are suppressed by fitting correctly chosen or an external 5-30 VDC supply. Y14 and
VDR’s, diodes etc. Y24 follow the relay inputs and outputs
Diodes are the best arc suppressors, as follows:
but will increase the switch off time of • Y14 becomes conductive when the relay
the load. input conditions are fulfilled.
• Y24 becomes conductive when both the
output relays are activated.
Technical data - RT6 Transistor outputs
External supply to Y13
Short-circuit proof
+5 to +30 VDC
1
Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden Y14 Indicates that the input condi-
Article number/Ordering 10-026-00 RT6 24DC tions have been fulfilled
data 10-026-02 RT6 24AC Y24 Indicates that the output relays
are activated
2
10-026-03 RT6 48AC
10-026-04 RT6 115AC Maximum load of Y14, Y24 15 mA /output
10-026-05 RT6 230AC Maximum voltage drop at
maximum load 2.4 V
Colour black and beige
LED indication
Weight 335 g (24 VDC), 485 g On Supply voltage OK, the LED is on
(24-230 VAC) Flashing light in case of under-
Supply
Voltage (A1-A2) 24 VDC +15/-20%, In1 In2
voltage or overload
Indicates that the input conditions
3
24/48/115/230 VAC, are fulfilled.
+15/-10%, 50-60 Hz 1 2 Indicates that the output relays
are activated.
Power consumption
4
DC supply, nominal voltage <2.4 W Mounting
AC supply, nominal voltage 5.3 VA Rail 35 mm DIN rail
Operating temperature range -10° C to + 55° C
Connection S13
Short-circuit protected voltage output, 70 mA +/- 10% current Connection block (detachable)
limitation. Is used for the inputs S14, S34 and S44. Maximum screw torque 1 Nm
Maximum connection area
Connection S53
5
Solid conductors 1x4mm2 /2x1.5mm2/12AWG
Short-circuit protected voltage output, internal automatic fuse 270 mA.
Conductor with socket contact 1x2.5mm2/2x1mm2
Is used for the reset and autoreset inputs X1 and X4
Air and creep distance 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
Connection S23
Protection class
0V connection for input S24
Enclosure IP 40 IEC 60529
Safety inputs Connection block IP 20 IEC 60529
S14 (+) input
S24 (0V) input
S34 (+) input
20 mA
20 mA
20 mA
6
S44 (+) input 30 mA
Reset input X1
Supply for reset input +24 VDC
Reset current
Minimum contact
closure time for reset
300 mA current pulse at contact
closure, then 30 mA
100 ms
7
Maximum external connection
cable resistance at nominal
voltage for
S14, S24, S34
S44, X1
300 Ohm
150 Ohm 8
Response time
At Power on DC/AC <90ms/<220ms
When activating (input-output) <20 ms
9
When deactivating (input-output) <20 ms
At Power Loss <150 ms Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
Relay outputs
NO 3
NC 1
Maximum switching capacity res.
10
load AC 6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
Maximum switching capacity res.
load DC 6A/24 VDC/150 W
Maximum switching capacity
res. load 12A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load 10mA/10 V (if load on contact
has not exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material
Mechanical life
Ag+Au flash
>107 operations 11
12
13
Approvals:
Safety relay

Emergency stops
Light curtains
Magnetic switches
Light beams
Safety mats
Contact strips
Features:
4 NO/1 NC relay outputs, 2
NO outputs can be delayed
for soft stops
Delay times RT7A 0; 0,5;
1,0; 1,5 s RT7B 0; 1,0; 2,0;
Universal relay with delayed outputs 3,0 s
The RT7 is a universal relay that can be used to supervise both Five input options
safety devices and the internal safety of your machinery. In ad-
dition, you can select the safety level that is required for each Single or dual channel input
installation. All this is possible because the RT7 has the most
versatile input options arrangement available on the market. The Manual supervised or auto-
RT7 can therefore replace many other relays. matic reset
The RT7 has four (4 NO) dual safety outputs of which two
may be delayed for up to three seconds in order to achieve a
Test input for supervision of
safe and ‘soft’ stop. A ‘soft’ stop allows machinery to brake external contactors
and stop gently before power is removed. A ‘soft’ stop has Width 45 mm
many benefits: the machinery life will be prolonged, processed
products will not be damaged, and restarts from the stopped LED indication of supply,
position are made possible and easier. inputs, outputs, short-circuit
Another option with the RT7 is manual or automatic reset-
and low voltage level
ting. A manual supervised reset is used for gates and other
safety devices that can be bypassed, while an automatic reset Three voltage free transistor
is used for small safety hatches if deemed appropriate from a information outputs
risk point of view.
In addition, the RT7 has information outputs that follow the Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48,
inputs and outputs of the relay. These outputs indicate if for 115 or 230 VAC
example a gate is opened or closed, if there is a delay or if the
relay needs to be reset. Quick release connector
Choose the RT7 to simplify your safety circuits and reduce blocks
your costs.
Technical information - RT7 A/B
Inputs Safety level
1
The RT7 can be configured to operate in either of the following The RT7 has internal dual and supervised safety functions. Power
input options: failure, an internal faulty component or external interference will not
1. Single channel, 1 NO contact from +24 VDC, safety cat. 1. present a risk to options with the highest safety level. A manual
2. Dual channel, 2 NO contacts from +24 VDC, safety cat. 3.
3. Dual channel, 1 NO, 1 NC contact from +24 VDC, safety cat. 4.
4. Dual channel, 1 NO contact from 0V and 1 NO contact from
reset requires that the reset input is closed and opened before the
safety relay outputs are activated. A short-circuit or a faulty reset
button is consequently supervised.
2
+24 VDC, safety cat. 4. When the RT7 is configured for dual channel input, both the
5. Safety mats/contact strips, 1 ‘contact’ from 0V and 1 ‘contact’ from inputs are supervised for correct sequence operation before the
+24 VDC, safety cat. 1. unit can be reset. The input options 3 and 4 have the highest safety
When the input/inputs are activated and the test/supervised reset

is complete, relays 1,2,3 and 4 are activated. Relays 1 and 2 are
levels as all short-circuits and power failures are supervised. This
in combination with internal current limitation makes the relay ideal
for supervision of safety mats and contact strips.
3
immediately de-energized when the inputs are deactivated in ac-
cordance with the input option selected. Relays 3 and 4 are either Regulations and standards
de-energized immediately or after the selected time delay. The RT7 is designed and approved in accordance with appropri-
All the relays (1,2,3 and 4) must be de-energized before the RT7
can be reset.
ate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1. 4
Transistor output status information
The RT7 has three(3) voltage free transistor outputs that can be
connected to a PLC, computer or other monitoring device. These
outputs give the input and output status of the relay.
Reset and testing

5
The RT7 has two reset options; manual and automatic.
The manual supervised reset is utilised when the RT7 is used
to monitor safety devices that can be bypassed, i.e. to ensure that
the outputs of the safety relay do not close just because the gate
is closed.
The automatic reset should only be used if acceptable from a
6
risk point of view. The RT7 can also test (supervise), if for example, **Only for AC supply
contactors and valves etc are de-energized/de-activated before a
restart is allowed.
Indication of low voltage

The ‘On’ LED will flash if the relay voltage falls below an accept-
7
able level. This indication will also be given if a monitored safety
mat/contact strip is actuated. See connection option 5.
8
Connection examples
DC supply AC supply DC-supply of AC-units
10
The RT7 DC option should be supplied The RT7 AC option should be supplied All AC-units can also be supplied by
with +24 V on A1 and 0 V on A2. with the appropriate supply voltage via +24 VDC to S53 (0VDC to S23).
connections A1 and A2.
The S23/
protective earth
must be connected to
11
Note
With both DC and AC modules, if cable shielding is used
this must be connected to an earth rail or an equivalent
earth point.
12
13
Connection of safety devices - RT7 A/B
1. SINGLE CHANNEL, 1 NO from 3. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO, 1 NC from 5. Safety mat/Contact strip
+24V +24V
The input (contact to S14) must be closed One input contact must be closed (S14) and Both ‘contact’ inputs from an inactivated
before the outputs can be activated. When one opened (S44) before the relay outputs safety mat/contact strip, must be made in
the input contact is opened the relay safety can be activated. The safety relay contacts order to allow the RT7 relay outputs to be
output contacts open. will open if one or both of the inputs change activated. When the safety mat/contact strip
state or in the case of a short-circuit between is activated or a short-circuit is detected
2. DUAL CHANNEL, 2 NO from +24V S14 and S44. Both inputs must be returned across S14-S23, the relay will de-energize
to their initial positions before the relay out- (safety outputs open) and the ‘ON’ LED will
puts can be reactivated. flash. As output S13 has an internal current
limit of 70 mA, the RT7 will not be overloaded
4. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V, when the mat/contact strip is activated or a
Both input contacts (S14 and S34) must 1 NO from 0V short circuit is detected.
be closed before the relay outputs can be
activated. The safety relay contacts will open if
one or both of the input contacts are opened.
Both the input contacts must be opened
before the relay can be reset. A short-circuit
between the inputs S14 and S34 can only Relay functions as option 2, but a short-circuit,
be supervised if the device connected to the in this case between inputs S14 and
inputs has short-circuit supervised outputs, S24, is supervised (safety outputs are
e.g. JOKAB Focus light curtains. opened).
Reset connections - RT7 A/B

*
*connected to S13 for safety mat/contact
strip
The manual supervised reset contact con-
nected to input X1 must be closed and Automatic reset is selected when S53, X1
opened in order to activate the relay out- and X4 are linked. The relay outputs are then Contactors, relays and valves can be
puts. activated at the same time as the inputs. supervised by connecting ‘test’ contacts
between S53 and X1. Both manual supervised
and automatic reset can be used.
Output connections - RT7 A/B

Relay outputs information outputs. Time delay outputs
The RT7 has four (4 NO) safety outputs The transistor outputs are supplied with Time delays are selected by linking the
of which two can be delayed, and 1 NC voltage to Y13 either from S53 (+24V) or appropriate T0, T1 and T2 connections.
information output. externally from 5 to 30 VDC. Y14, Y24 When a stop signal is detected a program
In order to protect the RT7 output contacts and Y34 follow the inputs and outputs as stop command is first given to the PLC/servo
it is recommended that loads (inductive) follows: which brakes the dangerous machine opera-
are suppressed by fitting correctly chosen • Y14 becomes conductive when the re- tions in a ‘soft’ and controlled way.
VDR’s, diodes etc. Diodes are the best arc lay input conditions are fulfilled. The delayed relay safety outputs will then
suppressors, but will increase the switch off • Y24 becomes conductive when both turn off the power to the motors, i.e. when
time of the load. the output relays are activated. the machinery has already stopped. It takes
Transistor outputs • Y34 becomes conductive when both usually around 0.5 to 3 seconds for a danger-
The RT7 has three(3) voltage free transistor the delay output relays are activated. ous action to be stopped softly.
***Note
These outputs are only for information purposes and must not be connected to the safety circuits of the machinery.
Technical data – RT7 A/B Relay outputs
NO direct (relays 1/2) 2
1
Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden NO direct or delayed (relays 3/4) 2
Article number/Ordering data NC (relays 1/2) 1
RT7B 10-028-10 24DC 3 s Maximum switching capacity
res. load
2
10-028-12 24AC 3 s
10-028-13 48AC 3 s Relays 1/2 AC 6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
10-028-14 115AC 3 s DC 6A/24 VDC/150 W
10-028-15 230AC 3 s Relays 1/2 total 9A distributed on all contacts
RT7A 10-028-20 24DC 1,5 s
10-028-22 24AC 1,5 s Relays 3/4 AC 6A/250 VAC/1380 VA
10-028-23 48AC 1,5 s DC 6A/24 VDC/138 W
10-028-24
10-028-25
115AC 1,5 s
230AC 1,5 s
Relays 3/4 total
Minimum load (Relays 1/2/3/4)

6A distributed on all contacts
10 mA/10V (if load on contact

3
Colour Black and beige has not exceeded 100 mA)
Weight 405 g (24 VDC) 550 g ( 24- Contact material AgSnO2+ Au flash
230 VAC) Mechanical life >107 operations
Supply
Voltage (A1-A2) 24 VDC +15/-20%,
24/48/115/230 VAC,
Transistor outputs
External supply to Y13
Y14
+5 to +30 VDC
Indicates that the input condi-
4
+/-15%, 50-60 Hz tions are fulfilled
Y24 Indicates that the output relays
Power consumption
1/2 are activated
DC supply, nominal voltage 4.6 W
AC supply, nominal voltage
Connection S13
8.7 W
Y34
Maximum load of Y14,Y24, Y34

Indicates that the delay output
relays 3/4 are activated
15 mA /output
5
Short-circuit protected voltage output, Maximum voltage drop at
70 mA +/-10% current limitation. maximum load 2.4 V
Is used for the inputs S14, S34 and S44.
LED indication
Connection S53
Short-circuit protected voltage output,
internal automatic fuse, max 270 mA.
On Supply voltage OK, the LED is on.
Flashing light in case of under-
voltage or overload.
6
Is used for the reset and autoreset inputs X1 and X4. In1 In2 Indicates that the input conditions
are fulfilled.
Connection S23
1 2 Indicates that the output relays
0V connection for input S24.
7
1/2 are activated.
Safety inputs t Indicates that the delay output
S14 (+) input 20mA relays 3/4 are activated.
S24 (0V) input 20 mA
S34 (+) input 20 mA
Mounting
S44 (+) input 25 mA
Rail 35 mm DIN rail
8
Reset input X1 Operating temperature range
Supply for reset input +24 VDC 24VDC -10° C to + 55° C
Reset current 600 mA current pulse at contact 24-230VAC -10° C to + 45° C
Minimum contact closure, then 30 mA.
Connection blocks
closure time for reset 100ms
(detachable)
Maximum external connec- Maximum screw torque 1 Nm
9
tion cable resistance at Maximum connection area
nominal voltage for Solid conductors 1x4mm2 /2x1.5mm2 /12AWG
S14, S24, S34 300 Ohm Conductor with socket contact 1x2.5mm2 /2x1mm2
S44, X1 150 Ohm Air and creep distance 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
Response time Protection class
At Power on DC/AC <90/<140 ms Enclosure IP 40 IEC 60529
When activating (input-output)
When deactivating (input-output)
At Power loss
<20 ms
<20 ms
<80 ms
Connection block IP 20 IEC 60529
10
Delay time options
RT7A 0; 0.5; 1.0; 1.5 secs
RT7B 0; 1.0; 2.0; 3.0 secs
11
12
Connector blocks are detachable
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
Emergency stops
Light curtains
Magnetic switches
Light beams
Safety mats
Contact strips
Features:
Five input options
Single or dual channel input

Would you like a small safety relay for all your safety Manual supervised or automatic
applications? reset
Then choose the compact RT9 universal relay to supervise both
your safety devices and the internal safety of your machinery. Test input for supervision of
In addition, you can select the safety level that is required for external contactors
each installation. All this is possible due to the RT9 offering
the most versatile input option arrangement available on the Width 22.5 mm
market. The RT9 can therefore replace many other relays.
Other RT9 options include selection of either manual LED indication of supply, inputs
supervised or automatic resetting. The manual supervised
reset can be used for gates and other safety devices that can and outputs, short-circuit and
be bypassed. Automatic reset can be used for small safety low voltage level
hatches, if deemed acceptable from risk assessment.
In addition, the RT9 has a double information output that will 2 NO relay outputs
indicate e.g if a gate is open or if the relay needs resetting.
The RT9 uses the latest component technology and One changeover relay with a
modern assembly techniques to ensure a highly cost effective
double information output
solution.
Choose the RT9 to simplify your safety circuits and reduce
Supply 24 VDC
your costs.
Quick release connector blocks
Technical information - RT9 1
Inputs Indication of low voltage
The RT9 can be configured to operate in either of the following The ‘On’ LED will flash if the relay supply voltage falls below an
input options: acceptable level. This indication will also be given if a monitored
2
1. Single channel, 1 NO contact from +24VDC, safety cat. 1. safety mat/contact strip is actuated. Please see Connection
2. Dual channel, 2 NO contacts from +24VDC, safety cat. 3. option 5.
3. Dual channel, 1 NO, 1 NC contact from +24VDC, safety cat. 4.
4. Dual channel, 1 NO contact from 0V and 1 NO contact from Safety level
+24VDC, safety cat. 4. The RT9 has internal dual and supervised safety functions. Power
5. Safety mat/contact strips, 1 ‘contact’ from 0V and 1 ‘contact’ failure, an internal faulty component or external interference
3
+24VDC, safety cat. 1. will not present a risk to options with the highest safety level. A
manual reset requires that the reset input is closed and opened
When the input/inputs are activated and the test/supervised reset before the safety relay outputs are activated. A short-circuit or
is complete, relays 1 and 2 are energised. These are de-energised a faulty reset button is consequently supervised.
when the input/inputs are de-activated in accordance with the input When the RT9 is configured for dual channel input, both
option chosen or in case of a power failure. the inputs are supervised for correct operation before the unit
4
Relays 1 and 2 must both be de-energized before the RT9 can can be reset.
be reset. The input options 3 and 4 have the highest safety levels
as all short-circuits and power failures are supervised. This in
Relay output status information combination with an internal current limitation makes the relay
The RT9 has a changeover contact relay output that can be con- ideal for supervision of safety mats and contact strips.
nected to a PLC, control lamp, computer or similar. The output gives
5
information about the status of the relay. Regulations and standards
The RT9 is designed and approved in accordance with appropri-
Reset and testing ate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
The RT9 has two reset options; manual and automatic. The manual EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
supervised reset can be used when the RT9 is monitoring safety
devices that can be bypassed, i.e. to ensure that the outputs of Connection examples
6
the safety relay do not close just because a gate is closed. The For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
automatic reset option should only be used if appropriate from a problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
risk point of view.
Due to special internal circuits the RT9 can be automatically reset
regardless of the operational voltage rise time, this being an important
factor when large loads are started up on the same power supplies
7
at the same time.
In addition, the RT9 can also test (supervise), if for example,
contactors and valves etc are de-energised/de-activated before
a restart is made.
8
Connection of supply - RT9
DC supply
9
Short circuit The RT9 should be supplied with +24 V on A1
and 0 V on A2.
protection
Automatic
Note
If cable shielding is used this must be connected
to an earth rail or an equivalent earth point.
10
fuse
11
12
13
Connection of safety devices - RT9
1. SINGLE CHANNEL, 1 NO from 3. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO, 1 NC from 5. Safety mat/Contact strip
+24V +24V
The input (contact to S14) must be closed One input contact must be closed (S14) and Both ‘contact’ inputs from a inactivated
before the outputs can be activated. When one opened (S44) before the relay outputs safety mat/contact strip must be made
the input contact is opened, the relay safety can be activated. in order to allow the RT9 relay outputs
output contacts open. The safety relay contacts will open if to be activated. When the safety mat/
one or both of the inputs change state or contact strip is activated or a short-circuit
2. DUAL CHANNEL, 2 NO from +24V in case of a short-circuit between S14 and is detected across S14-S23, the relay will
S44. Both inputs must be returned to their de-energize (safety contacts open) and
initial status before the relay outputs can be the ‘ON’ LED will flash. As output S13
reactivated. has an internal current limit of 70 mA, the
RT9 will not be overloaded when the mat/
Both input contacts (S14 and S34) must 4. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V,
contact strip is activated or a short-circuit
be closed before the relay outputs can be 1 NO from 0V
is detected.
activated. The safety relay contacts will
open if one or both of the input contacts
are opened. Both the input contacts must
be opened and reclosed before the relay
can be reset. Relay functions as option 2, but a short-
A short-circuit between inputs S14 and circuit, in this case between inputs S14
S34 can only be supervised if the device and S24 is supervised (safety outputs are
connected to the inputs has short-circuit opened).
supervised outputs, e.g. JOKAB Focus
light curtains
Reset connections - RT9

The manual supervised reset contact Automatic reset is selected when A1(+), X1 Contactors, relays and valves can be
connected to input X1 must be closed and X4 are linked. The relay outputs are then supervised by connecting ‘test’ contacts
and opened in order to activate the relay activated at the same time as the inputs. between A1(+) and X1. Both manual
outputs. supervised and automatic reset can be
used.
Output connections - RT9

Relay outputs Information outputs
The RT9 has two (2 NO) safety outputs. The RT9 has a single changeover contact
In order to protect the output contacts information relay output.The relay output
it is recommended that loads (inductive) Y14 is connected internally to 0V and 24V
are suppressed by fitting correctly chosen in the following way:
VDR’s, diodes etc. Diodes are the best arc • Y14 is internally closed to 0V when
suppressors, but will increase the switch off the RT9 is not reset.
time of the load. • Y14 is internally closed to +24V when
the relay is reset.
Technical data - RT9 LED indication
On Supply voltage OK, the LED is on.
1
Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden Flashing light in case of under-
Article number/Ordering data 10-029-00 RT9 24DC voltage, overload or current
limiting
Colour Black and beige In1 In2 Indicates that the input conditions
Weight
Supply
210 g
24 VDC +/- 20%
1
are fulfilled.
2 Indicates that the output relays
have been activated.
2
Voltage (A1-A2)
Mounting
Power consumption Rail 35 mm DIN rail
Nominal voltage 2.5 W Operating temperature range -10°C to + 55°C
Connection S13 Short-circuit protected voltage
output, 70 mA +/- 10% current
Connection blocks
(detachable)
3
limitation. Is used for the inputs Maximum screw torque 1 Nm
S14, S34 and S44. Maximum connection area:
Input currents Solid conductors 1 x 4mm2 / 2 x 1.5mm2/12AWG
4
(at nominal supply voltage) Conductor with socket contact 1 x 2.5mm2 / 2 x 1mm2
S14 (+) input 30 mA Air and creep distance 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
S24 (0V) input 20 mA Protection class
S34 (+) input 20 mA Enclosure IP 40 IEC 60529
S44 (+) input 25 mA Connection blocks IP 20 IEC 60529
Reset input X1
Supply for reset input
Reset current
+24 VDC
300 mA current pulse at contact
closure, then 30 mA
5
for reset 80ms
(at low limit voltage -20%) 100ms
Maximum external connection
cable resistance at a nominal
6
voltage for
S14, S24, S34 300 Ohm
S44, X1 150 Ohm
Response time
At Power on
When activating (input-output)
<100 ms
<20 ms
7
When deactivating (input–output) <20 ms Connector blocks are detachable
At Power Loss <80 ms (without cables having to be disconnected)
Relay outputs
NO
res. load AC
2
6A/250/1500 VA
8
res. load DC 6A/24 VDC/150W
Max. total switching capacity: 8A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load 10 mA/10V (if load on contact

has not exceeded 100 mA)
9
Contact material Ag+Au flash
Mechanical life >107 operations
Relay information output
(Changeover contacts)
Y14 - (0V)
+(24V)
Indicates that RT9 is not reset.
Indicates that RT9 is reset.
10
Maximum load of Y14 250 mA
Short-circuit protection for
information output Internal automatic fuse
11
12
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
JSBRT11 Safety relay for:

Emergency stop
Light curtains
Magnetic switches
Light beams
Features:
A flexible safety relay with many outputs Selectable inputs and safety
The JSBRT11 has been designed to provide the safety system category
circuit designer with the ability to select from both a range
of input connection configurations and either automatic or Manual supervised or automatic
supervised reset.
reset
The unit can be hardwire configured to operate in either
of the following input configurations:
Width 100 mm
• Mode 1: Single Channel (1 NO contact from +24 VDC),
safety category 1. LED indication for supply, inputs
• Mode 2: Dual Channel (2 NO contacts from +24 VDC),
safety category 3. and outputs
• Mode 3: Dual Channel (1 NO, 1NC contacts from + 24
VDC), safety category 4. 7 NO + 2 NC relay outputs
• Mode 4: Dual Channel (1 NO contact from 0 V and 1 NO
contact from + 24 VDC), safety category 4. Supply 24 VDC 24, 48, 115 or
In addition the unit can also be used to test that contactors 230 VAC
and valves have fallen/returned to their ’reset’ state before a
new ’start’ signal is given. Quick release connector blocks
Safety level The highest safety level of the JSBRT11 is in configuration

The JSBRT11 has dual and monitored internal safety func- mode 3 and 4 because all short circuits are supervised i.e.
tions. Power failure, internal component failures or external a short circuit between the inputs leads to a safe state as
interference (with the exception of short circuiting of input the outputs drop out.
contact when used in a single channel input mode) do not
result in a dangerous function. Regulations and standards
When wired for supervised reset, should a short circuit The JSBRT11 is designed and approved in accordance with
appear across the reset input the relay will not automatically appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
reset when the input/inputs are made. Only when the super- 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/
vised reset input is made and broken will the relay reset. EN ISO 13849-1.
The JSBRT11 provides detection of contact failure in the
inputs when wired in dual channel mode. Both inputs have Connection examples
to be opened and closed in order to enable the reactivation For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
of the relay. problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Technical data – JSBRT11
Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
1
Colour: Black and Beige 118
Power supply A1 - A2: 24 VDC +/- 15%
24, 48, 115, 230 VAC +/- 15%, 50-60 Hz
Power consumption:
Relay Outputs:
Max. switching capacity res. load AC:
< 3 VA
7 NO and 2 NC
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
72
2
Max. switching capacity res. load DC: 6A/24 VDC/150 W
3
mm
Min. load: 10mA/10 V 100
(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA) Connector blocks are detachable
Contact material AgSnO2+ Au flash (without cables having to be disconnected)
Max. Input wire res. at nom. voltage: 200 Ohm (S14,S24,S34,X1,X4); 100 Ohm (S44)
Response time at deactivation (input-output): <20 ms
<30 ms
4
Response time at activation (input-output):
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2.5 mm2/2x1mm2
Mounting: 35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class, enclosure: IP 40 IEC 60259
terminals: IP 20 IEC 60259
Article number/Ordering data:
5
Air and creep distance: 4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1
10-025-00 24DC
Operating temperature range: -10°C to +55°C
10-025-02 24AC
Function indication: Electrical Supply, Input 1 and 2, 10-025-03 48AC
Output relays 1 and 2 10-025-04 115AC
Weight: 610 g (24 VDC) 790 g (24-230 VAC) 10-025-05 230AC
Technical description – JSBRT11

Both inputs have to change state in order
to give a dual stop function and to allow a
6
*
Supply
K
K new start after stop.
** Configuration mode 4
*** Operation as mode 2 but short circuits be-
*Supervision circuit **Test and Automatic reset circuit
The supply voltage is connected across A1

*** Only for AC-supply
tween the inputs leads to a safe state i.e. the
relays inside the JSBRT11 will drop out.
Supervised reset connection.
7
Configuration mode 2.
and A2. The input connection configuration Both inputs have to be closed in order to The input to X1 (see diagram below) has to
and type of reset required is set by connecting enable the unit to be activated. A stop signal be closed and opened in order to activate the
the unit as shown in the diagrams below. is given if both or one input is opened. Both unit, after input/inputs are made according to
When the input/inputs and the test/super-
vised reset are made K1 and K2 energise.
K1 and K2 will de-energize if the power
inputs have to be opened and reclosed in
order to enable the reactivation of the unit.
the configuration mode selected. This mode
is selected when X1 - X4 is open-circuit.
Automatic reset connection.
8
If the possibility of short circuits between
is disconnected or a stop signal is given in the inputs cannot be excluded, configura- The input has to be closed in order to activate
accordance to the configuration mode wired. tion mode 3 or 4 should be used in order to the unit after input/inputs are made accord-
Both K1 and K2 have to be de-activated reach the highest safety level. ing to the configuration mode selected. This
before the outputs of the JSBRT11 can
be closed again.
One input has to be closed and the other
mode is selected when a connection between
X1 and X4 is made.
Test.
9
input has to be opened in order to enable
When the single input opens both K1 and the unit to be activated. A stop signal is Test contacts of contactors can be connected
K2 relays are deactivated. given if both or one input change state. between S53 and X1 for supervision.
Electrical connection – JSBRT11

10
SINGLE CHANNEL *, 1 NO from +24V DUAL CHANNEL*, 1 NO, Supervised manual reset
1 NC from +24V
11
Test Reset
DUAL CHANNEL*, 2 NO from +24V DUAL CHANNEL*, 1 NO from +24V, Automatic reset
1 NO from 0V
Test
It is recommended that all switched loads

12
are adequately suppressed and/or fused
in order to provide additional protection * With the input conditions shown, the JSBRT11 is in its de-
for the safety contacts. energized state, i.e. output contacts are open.
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
JSBR4 Safety relay for:

Two-hand devices of type IIIc
Emergency stop
Interlocked Gates/Hatches
Contact strips
Safety mats
Features:
Dual input channels
synchronism 0.5 s
Supervised reset
Test input
A universal relay for two-hand- and many other safety
devices Width 45 mm
The JSBR4 has two inputs, which both have to be closed
to keep the safety output contacts closed. A short-circuit LED indication for supply,
across the inputs will cause the output contacts to open. inputs and outputs
The inputs can however be subjected to a continuous
short-circuit without damaging the safety relay. 3 NO/1NC relay outputs
In order to make the safety outputs close the reset input
must be closed and opened. In this way an unintentional Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48,
reset is prevented in the case of a short-circuit in the reset 115 or 230 VAC
button cable or if the button gets jammed in the actuated
position. The reset input can also be used for test/super- Quick release connector blocks
vision to ensure that contactors or valves have returned
to their initial off/stop position before a new start can be
allowed by the safety relay.
When the JSBR4 is used as a two-hand device relay, the relay. This is valid both for the inputs A and B as well
both buttons have to be pressed within 0.5 seconds of as for the reset input. The JSBR4 operates at the highest
each other in order to close the outputs. safety level for safety relays (category 4).
When the JSBR4 is used for Safety Mats and Safety
Strips the ”stop” condition is given following detection of Regulations and standards
a short-circuit between input channels A and B. The safety The JSBR4 is designed and approved in accordance with appro-
mat, safety strip or the relay will not be damaged by a con- priate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
tinuous short-circuit. This also gives the advantage that if EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
there is a failure between the inputs in the installation, the The JSBR4 complies with the highest safety level for the
safety relay will not be damaged. connection of a two-hand device of type IIIc in accordance
with EN 574.
Safety level
The JSBR4 has a twin supervised safety function. Com- Connection examples
ponent failure, short-circuit or external disturbance (e.g. For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
loss of power supply) will not prevent the safe function of problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Technical data – JSBR4
120 1
Colour: Black and Beige
Power supply: 24 VDC +/- 15%
24/48/115/230 VAC +/- 15% , 50 - 60 Hz
Power consumption:
Relay outputs:
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
< 2 VA
3 NO + 1 NC
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
74 2
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC: 6A/24 VDC/150 W
Max. res. load total switching capacity: 12A distributed on all contacts
mm
Minimum load: 10mA/10 V (if load on contact has not exceeded
3
45
100 mA)
Contact material: Ag + Au flash Connector blocks are detachable
Max. Input Wire res. at nom. voltage: 300 Ohm (S13 - S14 and S23 - S24) (without cables having to be disconnected)
Response time at deactivation: < 20 ms (145 ms at power loss)
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1 x 4 mm2/2 x 1,5 mm2.
Conductor with socket contact: 1 x 2,5 mm2/2 x 1 mm2.
Mounting:
Protection class enclosure/terminals:
35 mm DIN-rail
IP 40/20 IEC 60529 Article number/Ordering data 4
Operating temperature range: -10°C to +55°C 10-002-00 24DC
4kV/2 DIN IEC 60664-1 10-002-02 24AC
Air and creep distance:
10-002-03 48AC
LED indication: Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs 10-002-04 115AC
5
Weight: 350 g (24 VDC), 460 g (24 - 230 VAC) 10-002-05 230AC
Technical description – JSBR4
Prot.
circ.
with the requirement that a component fault,
short circuit or external interference do not
6
Reset & Supervision circ.
result in a dangerous function.
The safety outputs consist of contacts
from K1 and K2 connected internally in
7
*
* Only for AC-supply series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 -24 and
33 - 34. These contacts are used to cut
The electrical supply is connected across K2 drop, due to short circuiting between the power to components which stop or
A1 and A2. After Voltage reduction and the inputs, opening of the inputs or power prevent hazardous movements/functions.
Rectification (AC-versions) or reverse polarity failure. If one input is opened the other input It is recommended that all switched loads
protection (DC-version) there is an overload must also be opened for K1 and K2 to be are adequately suppressed and/or fused in
protection-circuit.
When the inputs S13-S14 and S23-S24
have closed and the reset is made, the relays
activated again.
The monitoring circuit checks K1 and K2 and
that the reset circuit to X2 is both closed and
order to provide additional protection for the
safety contacts.
Note: Output 41-42 is intended for indica-
8
K1 and K2 are activated. opened before K1 and K2 are energized. Both tion purposes only, e.g. gate opened.
A dual stop signal is given when K1 and the stop and reset function therefore comply No load between S14 and S24 allowed.
9
Electrical connection – JSBR4
10
Emergency stop with manual resetting. Interlocked gate with manual reset. Contact mat/strip with manual reset.
11
Two hand device with buttons in separate

or same enclosure. Buttons to be pressed
Enabling device, JSHD4. Stop condi-
tion is given in both top and bottom PB
positions.
Control and supervision of external con-
ductor, relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s
expansion relays.
12
in within 0.5 s of each other. Footpedal
switches can be connected in the same
configuration.
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
JSBT4 Safety relay for:

Emergency stops
Interlocked Hatches
Safety mats
Contact strips
Features:
Dual input channels
synchronism 0.5 s
Test input
Safety relay with synchronised dual input channels
(within 0.5s) Width 45 mm
The JSBT4 has two inputs, both of which have to be
closed in order to keep the safety output contacts closed. LED indications for power on,
A short circuit between inputs A and B will cause the out- inputs and outputs
put contacts to open. The inputs can be continuously short
circuited without damaging the safety relay. 3 NO/1NC relay outputs
For the outputs to close, the test input must be closed.
The test input is intended to monitor that contactors or Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48, 115
valves have dropped/returned before a new start is permit-
or 230 VAC
ted.
This test input must not be confused with the reset func-
tion required for gates that a person can walk through and Quick release connector blocks
where there is a high safety requirement (see JSBR4).
If the JSBT4 is used for safety Mats and safety Strips,
the "stop" condition is given following detection of a short
circuit. The safety mat, safety strip or the relay will not be
damaged by a continuous short-circuit. This also provides
the advantage that if there is a failure between inputs A
and B in the installation, the safety relay will not be dam-
aged.
Safety level
The JSBT4 has a twin supervised safety function. Compo- Regulations and standards
nent failure, short-circuit or external disturbance (e.g. loss The JSBT4 is designed and approved in accordance with appro-
of power supply) will not prevent the safe function of the priate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
relay. Safety category level 3 or 4, depending on use. EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
The true two-channel safety function has the advantage
that the cabling installation demands for safety can be re- Connection examples
duced, due to the fact that a short-circuit between the in- For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
puts will directly open the relay's safety outputs. problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Technical data – JSBT4
120 1
Power supply: 24 VDC +/- 15%
24/48/115/230VAC +/- 15%, 50 - 60 Hz
Power consumption:
Relay outputs:
< 2 VA
3 NO + 1 NC
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
74 2
mm
Minimum load: 10mA/10 V
3
45
(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material: Ag + Au flash Connector blocks are detachable
Max. Input Wire res. at nom. voltage: 300 Ohm (S13 - S14 and S23 - S24) (without cables having to be disconnected)
Response time at deactivation: < 20 ms, 145 ms with switched supply/power loss
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2.5 mm2/2x1mm2.
4
Article number/Ordering data
10-004-00 24DC
Protection class enclosure/terminals: IP 40/20 IEC 60529 10-004-02 24AC
Operating temperature range: -10°C – +55°C 10-004-03 48AC
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1 10-004-04 115AC
10-004-05 230AC
LED indication: Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs 10-004-14 115AC1 s.
5
Weight: 350 g (24VDC), 460 g (24-230VAC) 10-004-20 24DC 1.5 s.
Technical description – JSBT4

failure (short circuit, component, external
disturbance) shall not prevent the safe func-
Prot.
circ. Reset & Supervision circ.
tion of the JSBT4.
The safety outputs consist of contacts
6
series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 -24 and
33 - 34. These contacts are used to cut
* the power to components which stop or
*Only for AC-supply
The electrical supply is connected across
A1 and A2. After Voltage reduction and
input is opened the other one also has to be
opened in order to activate K1 and K2 again.
prevent hazardous movements/functions.
are adequately suppressed and/or fused in
7
Rectification (AC-versions) or reverse polarity The test circuit, X1 - X2,has to be closed in order to provide additional protection for the
protection (DC-version) there is an overload order to activate the outputs, thereafter the safety contacts.
protection-circuit. test circuit can be opened or closed conti- The NC output 41 - 42 should only be used
When the inputs S13-S14 and S23-S24
are closed within 0.5 seconds of each other
the relays K1 and K2 are energized . A dual
nously. If the test circuit is closed after the
inputs there is no requirement to close them
within 0.5 seconds of each other.
for monitoring purposes e.g. Indication lamp
or PLC input etc. The output contacts are
closed until the module is reset.
8
stop signal is given, K1 and K2 de-energize, The internal supervision circuit monitors Note: Output 41-42 is intended for indica-
when there is a short circuit between or an the two Inputs and relays K1, K2. The stop tion purposes only, e.g. gate opened. No load
opening of the inputs or at power loss. If one function then fulfils the requirement that one between S14 and S24 allowed.
9
Electrical connection – JSBT4
10
TEST TEST TEST
Emergency stop with automatic resetting. Interlocked hatch with automatic resetting. Contact mat/strip with automatic reset
TEST TEST
11
TEST
LOAD
Monitoring to ensure that the Start button

cannot stick in pressed position. Short
circuiting over the closing contact is not mon-
Enabling device, JSHD4. Stop condition is
given in both top and bottom positions.
Control and supervision of external contactor,
relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s expansion
relays.
12
itored. The RT-series and JSBR4 have built
in short circuiting monitored resetting.
13
Approvals:
Safety relay/expansion relay
BT50(T) Safety relay for:

Emergency stop
Interlocked hatch
Expansion of Pluto
Features:
Single and “dual” channel
Test/"reset" input
Width 22.5 mm
LED indication
3 NO/1NC relay outputs
Supply 24 VDC
Safety relay/expansion relay to Pluto BT50 - Additional power

The BT50 is designed to connect safety devices, such as terminals
emergency stops, directly in the voltage supply circuit to
the relay. Despite a maximum built-in width of 22.5 mm the
relay is very powerful. BT50T - One changeover relay
With 3NO safety outputs, 1NC output (for monitoring with a double information output
purposes), a test input and complete internal supervision, (Y14)
the BT50 is quite unique. In addition, delayed outputs
(BT50T) can be ordered.
In order for the safety outputs to close, the supply volt- BT50T
age, e.g. by means of an emergency stop button, must be
connected to A1 and A2 and the test input closed. After
Delay times selectable from
actuation of the relay the test input can be opened again. 0 - 1.5 s
The test input is intended to supervise that contactors
or valves have dropped/returned before a new start can
be permitted.The test input can also be used for starting
and the start button can be supervised (see the connec- circuiting, and therefore installation is critical for the safe-
tion example on the next page). ty level to be achieved. To achieve a higher safety level a
screened cable can be used and/or connection made to
More outputs both A1 and A2 (see the example on the next page).
By connecting a BT50 to a safety relay/PLC it is easy to in-
crease the number of safe outputs. This means that an un- Regulations and standards
limited number of dangerous machine operations and func- The BT50 is designed and approved in accordance with appropri-
tions can be stopped by using just one safety relay/PLC. ate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC, EN
ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
Safety level
The BT50 has a twin and supervised internal safety func- Connection examples
tion. Power failure, internal component faults or external For examples of how our safety relays can solve various
interference cannot result in dangerous functions. safety problems, please see the chapter “Connection
Input via A1 on its own is not protected from short examples”.
Technical data – BT50(T)
1
Operational voltage: 24 VDC + 15%/-25%
Power consumption: < 2 VA
Relay outputs:
3 NO + 1 NC
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA 2
Minimum load: 10mA/10 V(if load on contact has not
exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material:
Max Input Wire res. at nom. voltage:
Ag + Au flash
200 Ohms
3
Response time at deactivation (input - output): Version B <20 ms or delayed max 1500 ms (old
version of BT50 <60 ms)
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 2x1mm2.
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
IP 40/20 IEC 60529 4
Operating temperature range: -10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance: 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1 Article number/Ordering data
LED indication: Electrical Supply, Relay and X4 10-033-00 BT50
5
Weight: 200 g 10-033-10 BT50T
Technical description – BT50(T)

The NC output 41 - 42 should only be
used for monitoring purposes e.g. indication
6
K1
Supervision circuit lamp for emergency stop pressed.
K2
BT50T - Info. output

When supply voltage is connected to A1 or external interference cannot lead to a
7
and A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated. K1 dangerous function. Max load
and K2 drop if the supply voltage is discon- The safety outputs consist of contacts 250 mA
nected. Both relays K1 and K2 must drop for from K1 and K2 connected internally in
them to be activated again. Another require- series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 - 24,
ment is that the test circuit, A1 - X4, must and 33 - 34. These contacts are used to
be closed for the outputs to be activated. cut the power to components which stop BT50T - Delay times
8
Thereafter A1 - X4 can either be open or or prevent hazardous movements/functions.
constantly closed. It is recommended that all switched loads A2 T1 T2 A2 T1 T2
The supervising circuit ensures that both are adequately suppressed and/or fused in 0s 1.0 s
K1 and K2 have dropped before they can order to provide additional protection for the 0.5 s 1.5 s
be reactivated. The stop function complies safety contacts.
with the requirement that a component fault
Electrical connection – BT50(T)

9
* *
10
Emergency stop with reset when emergency Hatch with automatic reset. BT50 as emergency stop and control
button returns. relay with Start and Stop function.
11
* LOAD
A1 X4
A1 X4
Emergency stop with dual connection direct
to the supply voltage.
Controlled monitoring of external con-
tactor, relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s
expansion relays.
Monitoring to ensure that the On but-
ton is not stuck in pressed position. A
short circuit over the closing contact is
12
not monitored.
* BT50 has additional power terminals A1 and A2.
13
Approvals:
Safety relay/expansion relay
BT51(T) Safety relay for:

Emergency stop
Interlocked hatch
Expansion of Pluto
Features:
Test/"reset" input
Width 22.5 mm
LED indication
Safety relay/expansion relay to Pluto
The BT51 is designed to connect safety devices, such as 4 NO relay outputs
relay is very powerful. Supply 24 VDC
With 4 NO safety outputs, test input and complete in-
ternal supervising, the BT51 is quite unique. In addition Quick release connector blocks
you can order delayed outputs (BT51T).
In order for the safety outputs to close, the supply volt- BT51 - Additional power
age, e.g. by means of an emergency stop button, must be terminals
actuation of the relay the test input can be opened again. BT51T - One changeover relay
The test input is intended to supervise that contactors with a double information output
or valves have dropped/returned before a new start can (Y14)
and the start button can be supervised (see connection
example on next page). BT51T
Delay times selectable from
More outputs 0 - 1.5 s
By connecting BT51 to a safety relay/PLC it is easy to
increase the number of safe outputs. This means that an
unlimited number of dangerous machine operations and
functions can be stopped from one safety relay/PLC.
Regulations and standards
Safety level The BT51 is designed and approved in accordance with
The BT51 has a twin and supervised internal safety func- appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such
tion. Power failure, internal component faults or external are 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1,
interference cannot result in dangerous functions. EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
Input via A1 only is not protected from short circuiting,
and therefore installation is critical for the safety level to be Connection examples
achieved. To achieve a higher safety level a screened ca- For examples of how our safety relays can solve various
ble can be used and/or connection made to both A1 and safety problems, please see the chapter “Connection
A2 (see example overleaf). examples”.
Technical data – BT51(T)
1
Operational voltage: 24 VDC + 15%/-25%
Relay outputs:
4 NO
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA 2
Max. res. load total switching capacity: 12 A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load: 10mA/10 V(if load on contact has not exceeded
100 mA)
Contact material:
Ag + Au flash
200 Ohms
3
Response time at deactivation: <20 ms or delayed max 1500 ms (BT51T)
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 2x1.5 mm2 Connector blocks are detachable
Conductor with socket contact: 2x1mm2. (without cables having to be disconnected)
4
Protection class enclosure/terminals: IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range: -10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance: 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1 Article number/Ordering data
LED indication: Electrical Supply, Relay and X4 10-033-20 BT51
Weight: 200 g 10-033-30 BT51T
5
Technical description – BT51(T)
Supervision circuit
6
When supply voltage is connected to A1 or external interference cannot lead to a BT51T - Info. output
7
and A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated. K1 dangerous function.
and K2 drop if the supply voltage is discon- The safety outputs consist of contacts
nected. Both relays K1 and K2 must drop for from K1 and K2 connected internally in Max load
them to be activated again. Another require- series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 - 24, 33 250 mA
ment is that the test circuit, A1 - X4, must - 34 and 43 - 44. These contacts are used
be closed for the outputs to be activated. to cut the power to components which stop
8
Thereafter A1 - X4 can either be open or or prevent hazardous movements/functions.
constantly closed. It is recommended that all switched loads
BT51T - Delay times
The supervising circuit ensures that both are adequately suppressed and/or fused in
K1 and K2 have dropped before they can A2 T1 T2 A2 T1 T2
order to provide additional protection for the
be reactivated. The stop function complies 0s 1.0 s
safety contacts.
0.5 s 1.5 s
Electrical connection – BT51(T)

9
* *
10
Emergency stop with reset when emergency Hatch with automatic reset. BT51 as emergency stop and control
button returns. relay with Start and Stop function.
11
LOAD
*
A1 X4 A1 X4
Emergency stop with dual connection direct
to the supply voltage.
Controlled monitoring of external con-
tactor, relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s
expansion relays.
Monitoring to ensure that the On but-
short circuit over the closing contact is
12
not monitored.
* BT51 has additional power terminals A1 and A2.
13
Approval:
Safety relay
RT10
Not ready at the time of printing
Safety relay for:

Contact rails
Safety mats
Advantages:
Manual or automatic reset
facility
Test input for monitoring
external contacts
22.5 mm width
LEDs to indicate power on,
inputs and outputs, short-
circuits and open circuits
2 NO relay outputs
One relay output with dual
information
Operating voltage 24 V DC
Detachable connection blocks
Two-wire connection
Safety relay for contact rails, bumpers and safety with safety mats across which passage is permitted. Auto-
mats matic resetting can be used when passage over or through
The RT10 is a safety relay that monitors one or more series- the protection area is not possible and if suitable from a
connected contact rails, bumpers or safety mats with a risk viewpoint.
two-wire connection and termination resistance.
Operation, a short-circuit or an open circuit in the contact Regulations & standards
rail, bumper or safety mat, or a change in the termination The RT10 is designed and approved in accordance with
resistance will be detected by the RT10 and any hazardous appropriate directives and standards.
machinery movement inhibited. Examples of applicable regulations and standards are
Despite its compact design, the RT10 has two safety 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/
outputs, two information outputs, five LEDs, dual connection EN ISO 13849-1.
terminals for supply voltage and a detachable terminal block
which considerably simplifies installation and servicing. Connection examples
In addition there is a manual or automatic reset facility. You will find examples of how our safety relays can solve
Manually supervised resetting can be used, for example, various safety problems in “Connection examples”.
Technical data - RT10
Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
LED indications
On Supply voltage OK, LED continuous-

1
Article number/ordering data: 10-029-50 RT10 24DC ly lit. LED flashing on undervoltage,
overload or current limiting.
Colour Black and beige
S/O Indicates short-circuit or open circuit
Weight 210 g
2
at safety input.
Operating voltage R Input conditions fulfilled OK.
Operating voltage (A1-A2) 24 VDC +/- 20% 1 2 Indicates that the output relays are
Power consumption activated.
At nominal voltage 2W Installation
Safety input resistance S15/S16 Rail 35 mm DIN rail
OK 1.2 kOhm Ambient temperature -10°C to + 55°C
Short-circuit
Open circuit
Reset input X1
less than 150 Ohms
more than 1.5 kOhm
Connection blocks (detachable):
Max. torque, terminal screws
Max. connection area:
1 Nm
3
Supply for reset + 24 V DC Solid conductors: 1 x 4 mm2/2 x 1.5mm2/12 AWG
X1 300 mA pulse when closing Conductor with socket contact: 1 x 2.5mm2/2 x 1 mm2
thereafter 30 mA Air and creep distance: 4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1
Minimum closing time at nominal Protection class
voltage
Minimum closing time at undervoltage
(-20%)
80 ms
100 ms
Enclosure
Connection blocks
IP 40 IEC 60529
IP 20 IEC 60529
4
Response times
At activation <100 ms
At start (input-output) <20 ms
At deactivation <20 ms
At loss of power
Relay outputs
NO
<80 ms
2
5
Max. switching capacity res. load AC 6A/250 V AC/1500 VA
Max. switching capacity res. load DC 6A/24 V DC/150 W
Max. total switching capacity res. load 8A distributed on all contacts
Max. switching capacity 10 mA/10 V (at max. load <100 mA)
Contact material
Mechanical life
Relay output with dual information
Ag + Au flash
107 operations 6
Y14 -(0V) Indicates that the RT10 is not reset.
+(24V) Indicates that the RT10 is reset.
Max. load at Y14 250 mA
Short-circuit protection for Connector blocks are detachable
information output Internal automatic fuse (without cables having to be disconnected)
7
Electrical connections – RT10 8
10
11
12
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
JSBT5(T) Safety relay for:

Emergency stop
Interlocked hatch
Features:
Test/start input
Width 22.5 mm
LED indication
3 NO/1NC relay outputs

Single channel safety relay
The JSBT5 is designed to connect safety devices, such as
(T) = delayed outputs 0.5 sec.
relay is very powerful. Supply 12 VDC, 24 VDC/AC
With 3 NO safety outputs, 1 NC, test input and complete
internal supervising, the JSBT5 is quite unique. In addition
you can order delayed outputs (JSBT5T).
In order for the safety outputs to close, the supply volt-
age, e.g. by means of an emergency stop button, must be
actuation of the relay the test input can be opened again.
The test input is intended to supervise that contactors
or valves have dropped/returned before a new start can
and the start button can be supervised (see connection
example on next page).
Safety level Regulations and standards

The JSBT5 has a twin and supervised internal safety func- The JSBT5 is designed and approved in accordance with
tion. Power failure, internal component faults or external appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
interference cannot result in dangerous functions. 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
Input via A1 only is not protected from short circuiting, EN ISO 13849-1.
and therefore installation is critical for the safety level to be
achieved. To achieve a higher safety level a screened ca- Connection examples
ble can be used and/or connection made to both A1 and For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
A2 (see example overleaf). problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Technical data – JSBT5(T)
99 1
Operational voltage: 12 VDC, 24 VDC/AC + 15%/-25%, 50 - 60 Hz
Relay outputs:
3 NO + 1 NC
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
82
2
Minimum load: 10mA/10 V
Contact material:
AgCuNi
200 Ohm
22.5
mm
3
Response time at deactivation: <60 ms or delayed max 500 ms (JSBT5T)
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 2x1.5 mm2
Operating temperature range:
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
-10°C – +55°C
4
Air and creep distance: 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
10-005-01 JSBT5 24AC/DC
Function indication: Electrical Supply 10-005-07 JSBT5 12VDC
Weight: 200 g 10-005-11 JSBT5T 24AC/DC
5
Technical description – JSBT5(T)
6
When supply voltage is connected to A1 or prevent hazardous movements/functions.
and A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated.
K1 and K2 drop if the supply voltage is
K1 and K2 have dropped before they can
be reactivated. The stop function complies
are adequately suppressed and/or fused in
7
disconnected. Both relays K1 and K2 must or external interference cannot lead to a order to provide additional protection for the
drop for them to be activated again. Another dangerous function. safety contacts.
requirement is that the test circuit, X1 - X2, The safety outputs consist of contacts The NC output 41 - 42 should only be
must be closed for the outputs to be activa- used for monitoring purposes e.g. indication
ted. Thereafter X1 - X2 can either be open
or constantly closed.
series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 - 24,
and 33 - 34. These contacts are used to
lamp for emergency stop pressed. 8
The supervising circuit ensures that both cut the power to components which stop
Electrical connection – JSBT5(T) 9
10
Emergency stop with automatic reset when Hatch with automatic reset. JSBT5 as emergency stop and control
emergency button returns. relay with Start and Stop function.
11
Emergency stop with dual connection direct Controlled monitoring of external contactor, Monitoring to ensure that the On but-
to the supply voltage. relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s expansion
relays.
short circuit over the closing contact is 12
not monitored. The JSBR4 has built in
short circuit monitored resetting.
13
Approvals:
Safety timer
JSHT1 Safety timer for:

Time reset
Time bypassing
Features:
Hardwire time selection 5 – 40 s
Selectable single or dual
channel input
Test input
Width 45 mm
LED indication for supply,
inputs and outputs
The JSHT1A/B closes two independent relay outputs
during a guaranteed maximum time when the inputs 1+1 NO relay outputs
are opened.
Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48, 115
Time reset or 230 VAC
Time reset can prevent unintentional reset of safety sys-
tems when someone is still in the dangerous area of the Quick release connector blocks
machine. During a guaranteed maximum time, one or se-
veral PB´s for reset must be activated. The reset buttons
should be sited in such a way that operatives have a clear Connection examples
overview of the whole area which is guarded. Time reset For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
is made by the combination of a safety relay and the timer problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
relay JSHT1A/B.
Time bypassing
The JSHT1 can also be used for time bypass of light
beams for e.g. autotruck into a dangerous area. 1
2
Operation
When the inputs open the output contacts close. The out-
put contacts open when the inputs close or when the time
period has expired. The time period is hardwire selectable
on terminals T1, T2 and T3. The time given is the maximum
time. One or two channel operation is also hardwire selec-
table.
Light beam being bypassed Time reset procedure. First push
for a maximum pre-set time PB1, then exit dangerous area and
e.g. 5 sec. by the JSHT1 close the door, then push PB2
The JSHT1A/B is designed and approved in accordance during entrance and exit with (PB1 and PB2 must be pressed
with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of the JSHD4 Three Position within the predetermined time pe-
such are 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, Enabling device. riod selected). After this procedure
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1. the machine can be safely restarted.
Technical data – JSHT1 A/B
120 1
Power supply: 24 VDC ± 15 %, 24/48/115/230 VAC ± 15 %,
50 - 60 Hz (AC versions JSHT1A only)
Power consumption:
Max Input Wire res. at nom voltage/channel:
Response time at activation:
< 3 VA
100/200 Ohm (1 Channel/ 2 Channel))
< 30 ms
74 2
Response time at deactivation: < 15 ms
Selectable time(± 15 % at nom. v.): JSHT1A: 5-10-15-20 sec
JSHT1B: 5-15-30-40 sec mm
Relay outputs:
2 x 1 NO
4A/250 VAC/1000 VA
4A/24 VDC/100 W
45

3
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
Max. total switching capacity: 8A distributed on all contacts (without cables having to be disconnected)
100 mA)
Contact material:
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
AgCuNi
Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2.5 mm2/2x1mm2
4
Mounting: 35 mm DIN-rail Article number/Ordering data
Protection class enclosure/terminals: IP20/IP40 IEC 60529 10-011-00 JSHT1A 24DC
Operating temperature range: -10°C – +55°C 10-011-02 JSHT1A 24AC
LED indication:
4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1
Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs
10-011-03
10-011-04
10-011-05
JSHT1A 48AC
JSHT1A 115AC
JSHT1A 230AC
5
Weight: 24 VDC: 330 g 24/48/115/230 VAC: 430 g 10-011-10 JSHT1B 24DC
Technical description – JSHT1 A/B

6
Connection and
monitoring circuit
Timer
7
** are closed again before the set time pe-
riod has expired the outputs will open. In
** Only for AC-supply. order to close the outputs again both the
inputs have to be closed and both internal 8
relays K1 and K2 deactivated (controlled by
The electrical supply is connected across are activated and the outputs close. K1 the supervising circuit) and the inputs again
A1 and A2. The internal supervising circuit and K2 are activated for the hardwired opened.
is activated directly when the supply is on. selected time (set by connections on the By external hardwire connections the
The inputs A and B must both be closed
and then opened. Thereafter K1 and K2
terminals T1, T2 and T3). If there is a short
circuit between the inputs or the inputs
JSHT1 can be made single or dual chan-
nel input. See figure below. 9
Electrical connection – JSHT1 A/B
Connection for single channel input Connection for dual channel input
10
11
Selection of time by hardwire links
* It is recommended that all switched loads are adequately
JSHT1A JSHT1B suppressed and/or fused in order to provide additional pro-
tection for the safety contacts. In the figure the monitoring
of two contactors in the test input is shown.
12
13
Approvals:
Safety timer
JSHT2 Safety relay for:

Time bypassing
Inching
Features:
Hardwire time selection
0.2 – 40 s
Selectable single or dual
channel input
Test input
Width 45 mm
LED indication for supply, inputs
The JSHT2A/B/C closes two independent relay outputs
and outputs
during a guaranteed maximum period of time when 1+1 NO relay outputs
the inputs are closed.
Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48, 115 or
230 VAC
Time bypassing
Sensors detect the autocarrier and are connected to the Quick release connector blocks
JSHT2 which supervises the sensors and bypasses the
light beam for a maximum predetermined time.
Inching
Inching applications require safety outputs to be closed Connection examples
for a predetermined maximum period of time, allowing the For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
machine to move only a short distance each time the in- problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
ching control is activated. For each new motion the inching
control e.g. PB or pedal must be released and activated
again.
Operation
When the inputs close the output contacts close. The out-
put contacts open when the input opens or when the time
period has expired. The time is hardwire selectable on the
terminals T1, T2 and T3. The time given is the maximum
time. Single or dual channel operation is also hardwire se-
lectable.

The JSHT2A/B/C is designed and approved in accordance
with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of Light beam being bypassed Shaft only turns a small
such are 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, only for the time it takes the amount each time the PB is
autocarrier to pass. pressed.
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
Technical data – JSHT2 A/B/C
120 1
Power supply: 24 VDC ± 15 %
24/48/115/230 VAC ± 15 %, 50 - 60 HZ
Power consumption:
Max Input Wire res. at nom voltage/channel:
Response time at activation:
< 3 VA
100/200 Ohm (1 Channel/ 2 Channel)
< 30 ms
74 2
Response time at deactivation: < 15 ms
Selectable time(± 15 % at nom. v.): JSHT2A: 0.2 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 1.0 sec
JSHT2B: 5 - 10 - 15 - 20 sec mm
Relay outputs:
JSHT2C: 5 - 15 - 30 - 40 sec
2 x 1 NO
4A/250 VAC/1000 VA
45
3
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC: 4A/24 VDC/100 W (without cables having to be disconnected)
Contact material:
100 mA)
AgCuNi
Single strand: 1 x 4 mm2, 2 x 1,5 mm2
10-012-00
10-012-02
JSHT2A 24DC
JSHT2A 24AC
4
Conductor with socket contact: 1 x 2,5 mm2, 2 x 1 mm2 10-012-03 JSHT2A 48 AC
10-012-04 JSHT2A 115 AC
10-012-05 JSHT2A 230 AC
Protection class enclosure/terminals: IP 20/IP 40 IEC 60529 10-012-10 JSHT2B 24DC
Operating temperature range:
-10°C – +55°C
4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1
10-012-12
10-012-13
10-012-14
JSHT2B 24AC
JSHT2B 48 AC
JSHT2B 115 AC
5
LED indication: Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs 10-012-15 JSHT2B 230 AC
Weight: 24 VDC: 310 g. 24/48/115/230 VAC: 410 g. 10-012-20 JSHT2C 24DC
Technical description – JSHT2 A/B/C

6
Connection and
monitoring circuit
Timer
7
**
** Only for AC-supply.
8
The electrical supply is connected across (set by connections on the terminals T1, K2 deactivated (controlled by the super-
A1 and A2. The internal supervising circuit is T2 and T3). If there is a short circuit bet- vising circuit) and then the inputs closed
activated directly when the supply is on. The ween the inputs or the inputs are opened again.
inputs A and B must both be opened and again before the set time period has expi- By external hardwire connectors the
then closed. Thereafter K1 and K2 are ac-
tivated and the outputs close. K1 and K2
red the outputs will open. In order to close
the outputs again both the inputs have to
JSHT2 can be made to operate from
either single or dual channel inputs. See 9
are activated for hardwired selected time be opened and both internal relays K1 and figure below.
Electrical connection – JSHT2 A/B/C
Connection for single channel input Connection for dual channel input 10
11
Selection of time by hardwire links
JSHT2A JSHT2B JSHT2C * It is recommended that all switched
loads are adequately suppressed
and/or fused in order to provide
additional protection for the safety
12
contacts. In the figure the monitoring
of two contactors in the test input
is shown.
13
Approvals:
Expansion relay
E1T Expansion relay with:

More safety outputs
Delayed safety outputs
Features:
Width 22.5 mm
Supply 24 VDC
LED output indication
4 NO relay outputs
Single or dual channel
operation option
More outputs Quick release connector blocks

By connecting expansion relays to a safety relay it is easy
to increase the number of safe outputs. This means that
an unlimited number of dangerous machine operations
and functions can be stopped from one safety relay. Stop category 1 may also be permitted when it is not
possible to gain physical access to the machine before
Safe soft stop the safe stop is affected e.g:
When a gate is opened a program stop is first given to the s 'ATESACCESSTIMEISNORMALLYOVERSEC
machine’s PLC/servo which brakes the dangerous opera- s #OVERSANDGATESWHICHARELOCKEDUNTILDANGEROUS
tions in a soft and controlled way. The safety outputs then operations and functions have been stopped.
break the power to the motors, that is, when the machine s ,ONGDISTANCESBETWEENASAFETYDEVICEANDA
has already stopped. Normally between 0.5 and 1 second dangerous machine function.
is needed to brake a dangerous machine operation softly.
Soft stop ensures many advantages: Safety level
s 4HEMACHINELASTSLONGER The E1T has twin stop functions, that is, two relays with
s 0ARTSBEINGPROCESSEDARENOTDAMAGED mechanically operated contacts. A monitored stop func-
s 2ESTART FROM STOPPED POSITION IS ENABLED AND SIMPLI- tion is achieved by connecting the test output (terminals
fied. X1 and X2) to the test or reset input on the safety relay
A safe soft stop is achieved by means of a safety relay which is being expanded.
which gives the program stop, and an expansion relay, One condition for a safe delayed stop is that the delay
E1T, which gives safe delayed stop signals. See section time cannot increase in the event of a fault. The E1T com-
”Connection examples”. The drop time delay on a E1T can plies with this requirement.
as standard be selected from 0 to 3 seconds. By connec-
ting several E1T´s in series even longer times can be ac- Regulations and standards
hieved. The E1T is designed and approved in accordance with ap-
propriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
When are delayed safe stops used? 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
Delayed safety stop signals can be used for emergency EN ISO 13849-1.
stops according to EN418 § 4.1.5. Stop category 1, i.e. a
controlled stop with power to the actuator(s) available to Connection examples
achieve the stop and then removal of power when stop is For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
achieved. problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Technical data – E1T
1
Operational voltage: 24 VDC ± 15%
Power consumption: 2W
Relay outputs:
Max. switching capacity res. load AC:
4 NO
6A/250VAC/1500VA 2
Max. switching capacity res. load DC: 6A/24VDC/150W
Total unit switching cap: 12A distributed on all contacts
Min. switching load: 10 mA/10 V
Contact material:
Ag + Au flash
3
Maximum external resistance at a nominal voltage: 150 Ohm (S14, S24)
Response time at deactivation (input - output): < 0,020 s, 0,5 s, 1 s, 1,5 s, 2 s, 3 s, ± 20%
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1,5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2,5 mm2/2x1mm2.
Mounting:
Protection class encloure/terminals:
35 mm DIN rail
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
10-030-00 E1T 0s 24DC
4
Operating temperature range: -10°C – +55°C 10-030-10 E1T 0,5s 24DC
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1 10-030-20 E1T 1 s 24DC
10-030-30 E1T 1,5s 24DC
LED indication: Output status 10-030-40 E1T 2s 24DC
Weight: 220 g 10-030-50 E1T 3s 24DC
5
Technical description – E1T
stop signal is given, K1 and K2 drop, if the To check that both the relays K1 and
inputs are opened or during power failure. K1 K2 drop during a stop signal they must be
and K2 drop either directly or after a delay* (if
incorporated). Delay time of module is fixed
monitored. This is achieved by connecting
X1 and X2 to the test or reset input on the
6
and shown on front panel of device. The delay safety relay which is expanded (see below).
circuit is so arranged that the design time K1 and K2 are mechanically operated relays,
cannot be exceeded. therefore, if one of the output contacts
should stick closed then the relay’s contact
The E1T has to be connected to a safety
relay in order to fulfill the necessary safety
in X1-X2 cannot be closed thus preventing
a new ready signal being given to the safety
7
requirements (see connection examples relay.
below). The safety relay controls and mo- Inductive loads should be equipped with
nitors the E1T (The E1T can be connected an arc suppressor to protect the output
for single or dual channel operation - see contacts.
below). When the inputs S14 and S24
close, relays K1 and K2 are activated. A
Diodes are the best arc suppressors
but will increase the switch off time of
8
the load.
Electrical connection – E1T

9
SAFETY RELAY RT6 SAFETY RELAY RT6
10
11
DELAYED SAFETY STOP
Dual channel expansion with delayed safety

Single channel expansion of outputs for a
safety relay connected to an emergency
stop.
outputs for a safety relay monitoring a gate. 12
13
Approvals:
Expansion relay
JSR1T Expansion relay with:
More safe outputs
Delayed safe outputs
Information output
Features:
Width 45 mm
Supply 24 VDC
LED function indication
4 NO/1 NC relay outputs
Single and dual channel
More outputs
By connecting expansion relays to a safety relay it is easy
to increase the number of safe outputs. This means that an
unlimited number of dangerous machine operations and
functions can be stopped from one safety relay. Stop category 1 may also be permitted when it is not
possible to gain physical access to the machine before the
Safe soft stop safe stop is affected e.g:
When a gate is opened a program stop is first given to the s 'ATESACCESSTIMEISNORMALLYOVERSEC
machine’s PLC/servo which brakes the dangerous opera- s #OVERSANDGATESWHICHARELOCKEDUNTILDANGEROUS
tions in a soft and controlled way. The safety outputs then operations and functions have been stopped.
break the power to the motors, that is, when the machine s ,ONGDISTANCESBETWEENASAFETYDEVICEANDA
has already stopped. Normally between 0.5 and 1 second dangerous machine function.
is needed to brake a dangerous machine operation softly.
Soft stop ensures many advantages: Safety level
s 4HEMACHINELASTSLONGER The JSR1T has twin stop functions, that is, two relays with
s 0ARTSBEINGPROCESSEDARENOTDAMAGED mechanically operated contacts. A monitored stop function
s 2ESTARTFROMSTOPPEDPOSITIONISENABLEDAND is achieved by connecting the test output (terminals X1
simplified. and X2) to the test or reset input on the safety relay which
A safe soft stop is achieved by means of a safety relay is being expanded.
which gives the program stop, and an expansion relay, JS- One condition for a safe delayed stop is that the de-
R1T, which gives safe delayed stop signals. See section lay time cannot increase in the event of a fault. The JSR1T
”Connection examples”. The drop time delay on a JSR1T complies with this requirement.
can as standard be selected from 0 to 10 seconds. By
connecting several JSR1T´s in series even longer times Regulations and standards
can be achieved. The JSR1T is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
When are delayed safe stops used? 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
Delayed safety stop signals can be used for emergency EN ISO 13849-1.
stops according to EN418 § 4.1.5. Stop category 1, i.e. a
controlled stop with power to the actuator(s) available to Connection examples
achieve the stop and then removal of power when stop is For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
achieved. problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Technical data – JSR1T
120 1
Power supply: 24 VDC ± 15%
Power consumption: <2W
Relay outputs:
4 NO + 1 NC
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
74 2
Minimum load: 10mA/10 V (if load on contact has not
exceeded 100 mA) mm
Contact material:
Max Input Wire res. at nom voltage:
Ag + Au flash
150 Ohm (S14, S24)
45
Connector blocks are detachable 3
Response time at deactivation(input- output): < 0,020 s, 0,5 s, 1 s, 1,5 s, 2 s, 3 s, 5 s, 8 s, (without cables having to be disconnected)
10 s ± 20 %
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1,5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2,5 mm2/2x1mm2 10-015-00 JSR1T 0 6A 24 DC
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
10-015-05
10-015-06
10-015-10
JSR1T 1,5
JSR1T 8
JSR1T 0,5
6A 24DC
6A 24 DC
6A 24 D
4
Operating temperature range: -10°C – +55°C 10-015-20 JSR1T 10s 6A 24DC
4KV/2 IEC 60664-1 10-015-30 JSR1T 1 6A 24 DC
10-015-40 JSR1T 2 6A 24 DC
LED indication: Output Relay Supplies 10-015-50 JSR1T 3 6A 24 DC
Weight: 280 g 10-015-60 JSR1T 5 6A 24DC
5
Technical description – JSR1T
signal is given, K1 and K2 drop, if the inputs To check that both the relays K1 and
are opened or during power failure. K1 and
K2 drop either directly or after a delay* (If
K2 drop during a stop signal they must be
6
incorporated). Delay time of module is fixed X1 and X2 to the test or reset input on the
and shown on front panel of device. The safety relay which is expanded (see below).
delay circuit is so arranged that the design K1 and K2 are mechanically operated relays,
time cannot be exceeded. therefore, if one of the output contacts
The JSR1T has to be connected to a safety

should stick closed then the relay’s contact
in X1-X2 cannot be closed thus preventing
7
relay in order to fulfill the necessary safety a new ready signal being given to the safety
requirements (see connection examples be- relay.
low). The safety relay controls and monitors Inductive loads should be equipped with
the JSR1T. (The JSR1T can be connected an arc suppressor to protect the output
for single or dual channel operation - see
below). When the inputs S14 and S24
contacts.
Diodes are the best arc suppressors
8
close, relays K1 and K2 are activated. A stop but will increase the switch off time of the
load.
Electrical connection – JSR1T

9
SAFETY RELAY RT6 SAFETY RELAY RT6
10
02/'2!-34/0
JSR1T
JSR1T
11
JSR1T DELAYED SAFETY STOP
Expansion of outputs for safety relay con- Dual-channel expansion with delayed safety
nected to emergency stop with automatic
reset.
outputs for safety relay monitoring a gate. 12
13
Approvals:
Expansion relay
JSR2A Expansion relay with:
More safe outputs
Greater current switching
capacity
Information output
Features:
Switching up to
10 A/250V/output
Width 45 mm
LED function indication
4 NO/1 NC relay outputs
5 supply versions
More outputs
The JSR2A expansion relay is used to provide increased Supply 24 VDC/VAC, 48 115
switching capacity and number of safety outputs to a safety and 230 VAC
relay. This means that an unlimited number of dangerous
machine operations and functions can be stopped from one Quick release connector blocks
safety relay.
Greater current switching capacity

The JSR2A Expansion relay enables switching of up to 10
amps (AC/DC) per output contact.
Safety level
The JSR2A has twin stop functions, that is, two relays with
mechanically positively guided contacts. A monitored stop
function is achieved by connecting the test output (terminals
X1 and X2) to the test or reset input on the safety relay which
is to be expanded.

The JSR2A is designed and approved in accordance with
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Technical data – JSR2A
120 1
Supply A1 - A2: 24 VDC/AC, 48, 115, 230 VAC + 15%, 50-60 Hz
Power consumption: < 2.5 VA
Relay outputs:
4 NO + 1 NC
10A/250VAC/1840VA
74
2
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC: 10A/24 VDC/192W
Minimum load: 10mA/10V/100mW
Contact Material:
Max. wire resistance at nominal voltage:
AgSnO2 + Au flash
(mm)
3
24 VDC/VAC: 100 Ohm 45
48/115/230 VAC: 200 Ohm Connector blocks are detachable
Mechanical operational Life: >107 operations (without cables having to be disconnected)
Response time:
At deactivation (input - output):
At activation (input - output):
Terminals (removable):
<25 ms
<15 ms
Note
4
Max. screw torque: 1 Nm The total switching capacity of the JSR2A
Connection Area (max.): is 26A.
Single strand: 1 x 4 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 /12AWG The load on each single contact must not
5
Conductor with socket contact: 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1 mm2 exceed 10 A.
Mounting: 35 mm DIN rail Min. switching requirement of 10mA is not
Operating temperature range: -10oC to +55oC valid after the contact has been subjected
Air and creep distance: 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1 to load currents exceeding 100 mA.
Protection class:
Enclosure: IP 40 IEC 60529
6
Terminals: IP 20 IEC 60529 Article number/Ordering data:
LED indication: 10-027-01 JSR2A 10A 24AC/DC
On Supply voltage 10-027-03 JSR2A 10A 48 AC
1 2 Output relays 1 and 2 10-027-04 JSR2A 10A 115AC
Weight: 313 g 10-027-05 JSR2A 10A 230AC
7
Technical description – JSR2A
Test Outputs The JSR2A has to be connected to a suit- drop during a stop signal they must be
able safety relay in order to fulfill the nec-
essary safety requirements (see chapter
“Connection examples”). The Safety Relay
X1 and X2 to the test or reset input on the
safety relay which is expanded. K1 and
8
controls and monitors the JSR2A unit. (The K2 have mechanically positively guided
Supply
JSR2A can be connected for single or dual contacts, therefore, if one of the output
channel operation - see Electrical connection contacts should stick closed then the
diagrams below). When the inputs to S14
and S24 close, internal relays K1 and K2
are activated. A stop signal is given, K1 and
relay’s contact in X1-X2 cannot be closed
thus preventing a new ready signal being
given to the safety relay.
9
K2 drop, if the inputs are opened or during
power failure.
To check that both the K1 and K2 relays
10
Electrical connection – JSR2A

11
One channel expansion of RT6 with
JSR2A connected for manual reset.
Reset
Dual channel expansion of RT6 with JSR2A

12
connected for automatic reset.
13
Approvals:
Expansion relay
JSR3T Expansion relay with
delay with:
Hardwire selection of
delay time
Delayed safe outputs
Features:
Width 22.5 mm
Supply 24V AC/DC
Output indication
2 x 1 NO relay outputs
Hardwire Selectable Delay
0.5 - 10.0 sec by hardwire links
and Time trim potentiometer
Delayed outputs
By connecting the JSR3T expansion relay to a compatible
Safety relay it is easy to obtain safe "delayed" outputs.
The JSR3T provides the system designer with the facility
to hardwire selected time delays in steps between 0.5 and
10 seconds.
Use of delayed outputs controlled way, and to switch a delayed expansion relay e.g
There are many applications where delayed outputs are neces- JSR3T. The delayed safety outputs of the JSR3T expansion
sary and permissible. For example delayed stop signals can relay are then used to control the safe disconnection of the
be used for emergency stops according to EN418 § 4.1.5 power to the actuators/motors etc. of the machine.
Stop Category 1 (a controlled stop with power to the machine
actuator(s) available to achieve the stop and then removal of Safety level
power when stop is achieved). Stop Category 1 may also be The JSR3T has twin stop functions, using two positively
permitted when it is not possible to gain physical access to guided contact relays.
the machine before the safe stop is effected e.g. by: In order to achieve the level of monitoring required the
• Covers and Gates which are locked until dangerous JSR3T must be used with a suitable Safety Relay e.g.
operations and functions have been stopped. JSBR4, or RT6. The JSR3T test output (terminals X1 and
• Long distances between a safety device and dangerous X2) must be connected to the test input of the Safety relay
machine functions. being expanded (see connection examples).
Using this technique of stopping a machine provides many The JSR3T provides delay times that even in the event of
advantages i.e.: an internal fault condition complies with the requirement that
• Machines last longer as they are not subjected to excessive the set delay cannot increase in time.
loading etc when requested to stop.
• Parts being processed are not damaged. Regulations and standards
• Restarting machines from stopped position is simpli- The JSR3T is designed and approved in accordance with
fied. appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
A safe "Soft" stop is achieved by means of a safety relay 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
giving a programme stop to the machine control system. EN ISO 13849-1.
e.g. when a gate is opened or emergency stop is activated.
The output of the Safety relay is used to provide both a stop Connection examples
signal to the machine control system i.e. via a PLC which For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
applies the necessary braking/stopping of the machine in a problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Technical data – JSR3T
99 1
Power supply: 24 VAC/DC, 50 - 60 Hz
Relay Outputs:
2 x 1 NO (See Connection examples)
4A/250VAC/1000 VA
82
2
Minimum load: 10mA/10V (if load on contact has not
exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material:
Max. Input wire res. at nom voltage:
AgNi
100 Ohm
22.5
mm
3
Response time at activation: <20ms
Response time at deactivation: <0.5 - 10.0 sec. at nom. voltage. Selected delay
can be lowered by up to approx. 30% by means
of preset potentiometer on front panel.
Mounting:
Single strand: 2x1.5 mm2
35 mm DIN-rail
4
Protection class, enclosure/terminals: IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range: –10°C to +55°C
Air and creep distance:: 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Weight:
Outputs
158 g
10-017-01 JSR3T 24 AC/DC
5
Technical description – JSR3T
6
Note 1
Max. time set by hardwire links can only be
reduced (up to approx. 30% reduction) by
Time Trim potentiometer.
7
NOTE 2
Both the output contacts of K1 and K2 (13
- 14 and 23 - 24) must be used. Output
When supply voltage is connected to A1 and termined by the hardwire link configuration contacts must be either connected in se-
A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated. When
the supply voltage is removed relays K1 and
chosen (set by connecting links on the ter-
minals Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4.) and the setting
ries (forming one safety output) or used in
parallel circuits in order to obtain necessary
8
K2 remain energized for a time period de- of the Time Trim potentiometer. redundancy.
Electrical connection – JSR3T

9
10
11
It is recommended that all switched loads are adequately suppressed and/or
fused in order to provide additional protection for the safety contacts.
Selection of time delay by hardwire links (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4). 12

Selected delay can be lowered by up to approx. 30% by means of preset
potentiometer on front panel.
13
Contents Page
HA5400A Connection examples JSBR4 ___________________________________________ 4:45
HA6400A Connection examples JSBT4 ___________________________________________ 4:45
HA6500A Connection examples JSBT5____________________________________________4:46
HA6500B Connection examples BT50 ____________________________________________4:46
HA6501B Connection examples BT50T ___________________________________________ 4:47
HA6500C Connection examples BT51 ____________________________________________ 4:47
HA6501C Connection examples BT51T ___________________________________________4:48
HA7100A Connection examples JSBRT11 _________________________________________4:48
HA7600A Connection examples RT6 ______________________________________________4:49
HA7600B Principle drawing RT6 _________________________________________________4:49
HA7672A Enabling device JSHD4 - EX with RT6 ____________________________________4:50
HE3811B Safety Light Beam Spot with time-limited reset _____________________________4:51
HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s ______________________________4:52
HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s _____________________________4:52
HG7636B Focus light grid/curtain with three-position device __________________________4:53
HG7611A Interlocked door with RT6 and pre-reset __________________________________4:53
HG7636A Interlocked door with three-position device ________________________________4:54
HG7646A Interlocked door with three-position device and time-limited entrance/exit ______4:54
HG7654A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR1T _____________________ 4:55
HG7658A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR2A _____________________ 4:55
HG7673A Interlock switch JSNY8 with RT6 ________________________________________4:56
HG7674A Safety interlock switch JSNY9M/MLA with RT6 ____________________________4:56
HG7674B Safety interlock switch JSNY9S/SLA with RT6 _____________________________ 4:57
HH0000C Three-position device JSHD4 with various safety modules ___________________ 4:57
HI8552A Connection examples JSHT2 intermittent running ___________________________4:58
HK7600A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT6 _______________________________________4:58
HK7100A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT10 ______________________________________4:59
HL7600B Several JSNY7 connected to one RT6 with unique indication _________________4:59
HM0000A Magnetic switch JSNY7 with various safety modules________________________4:60
HN7660A Delayed outputs RT6 with output expansion JSR3T and RT7 _________________4:60
HP7600A Machine control - Isolation of PLC inputs and outputs _______________________4:61
HP7600B Machine control-Isolation of PLC outputs __________________________________4:61
HR7200B Focus light curtain/beam _______________________________________________4:62
HR7800B Focus lightbeam/curtain ________________________________________________4:62
HT5400A Two-hand device with safety relay JSBR4 _________________________________4:63
HB0008A Focus light curtain/light beam connected to an RT9 with the aid of a M12-3D _____ 4:63
HA5400A Connection examples JSBR4
1
HA6400A Connection examples JSBT4 7
10
11
12
13
HA6500A Connection examples JSBT5
HA6500B Connection examples BT50
HA6501B Connection examples BT50T
1
HA6500C Connection examples BT51 7
10
11
12
13
HA6501C Connection examples BT51T
HA7100A Connection examples JSBRT11
HA7600A Connection examples RT6
1
HA7600B Principle drawing RT6 7
10
11
12
13
HA7672A Enabling device JSHD4 - EX with RT6
1
HE3811B Safety Light Beam Spot with time-limited reset 7
10
11
12
13
HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s
HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s
HG7636B Focus light grid/curtain with three-position device
1
HG7611A Interlocked door with RT6 and pre-reset 7
10
11
12
13
HG7636A Interlocked door with three-position device
HG7646A Interlocked door with three-position device and time-limited entrance/exit
HG7654A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR1T
1
HG7658A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR2A 7
10
11
12
13
HG7673A Interlock switch JSNY8 with RT6
HG7674A Safety interlock switch JSNY9M/MLA with RT6
HG7674B Safety interlock switch JSNY9S/SLA with RT6
1
HH0000C Three-position device JSHD4 with various safety modules 7
10
11
12
13
HI8552A Connection examples JSHT2 intermittent running
HK7600A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT6
HK7100A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT10
1
HL7600B Several JSNY7 connected to one RT6 with unique indication 7
10
11
12
13
HM0000A Magnetic switch JSNY7 with various safety modules
HN7660A Delayed outputs RT6 with output expansion JSR3T and RT7
HP7600A Machine control - Isolation of PLC inputs and outputs
1
HP7600B Machine control-Isolation of PLC outputs 7
10
11
12
13
HR7200B Focus light curtain/beam
HR7800B Focus lightbeam/curtain
HT5400A Two-hand device with safety relay JSBR4
1
HB0008A Focus light curtain/light beam connected to an RT9 with the aid of a M12-3D 7
10
11
12
13
Light curtains, Light grids,
Light beams and Scanner
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page 1
Why use light beams/light curtains?_ ___________________________________5:2
• Reset – 3 alternatives___________________________________________________5:4
• Muting______________________________________________________________5:5 2
• Blanking_____________________________________________________________5:5
Light curtain for short safety distance___________________________________5:6

3
Cycle initiation with light curtain________________________________________5:7
Safety light curtain and light grid - Focus ___________________________________5:10

• Summary__________________________________________________________ 5:11
4
• Technical data_ _____________________________________________________ 5:12
• Reset_____________________________________________________________ 5:12
• Laser aligner JSRL-3__________________________________________________ 5:13
• Muting with MF-T and MF-L units_________________________________________ 5:13
5
• Muting with FMC and FMI units__________________________________________ 5:15
Muting sensors – Mute R____________________________________________ 5:18 6

Muting sensors – Mute D____________________________________________ 5:19
Focus stand system - Bjorn__________________________________________ 5:20 7

Focus Wet_ ________________________________________________________ 5:22
Blanking programming – BP 1_ ______________________________________ 5:23 8

Connection examples_______________________________________________ 5:24
Safety Light Beam Spot_ ____________________________________________ 5:32 9

Laser scanner Look_________________________________________________ 5:36
10
11
12
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not quarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
13
Why use light grids
and light curtains?
Light beams and light curtains are a production friendly safety component that do not
physically impact on the actions of the machine operator. Light barrier protection is also a
good safety component for use when goods are to be passed in and out of a risk area.
How does a light beam/light curtain What is the difference between a light
work? curtain and a light beam?
Both light grids and light curtains utilise optical transmitter A light curtain has several beams that are placed closely
and receiver units. From the transmitters beams of infrared together whereas a light grid consists of only one, two,
light are sent to the receiver. When a light beam is interrupted three or four light beams. The beams are closest on a light
a dual stop signal is given to the dangerous machines inside curtain that is used for finger detection. Then the resolution
the light beam/curtain protected area. ISMM,IGHTCURTAINBEAMSAREATTHEIRWIDESTSPACING
when used for thigh detection (90mm resolution). For light
grids the beams are normally placed at a relative distance
OFTOMM4HECHOICEBETWEENLIGHTGRIDORLIGHT
curtain is often a question of available safety distance, reach
ANDPRICE,IGHTCURTAINSAREOFTENCHOSENFORSHORTSAFETY
DISTANCES,IGHTGRIDSARECHOSENFORLONGDISTANCESUPTO
MANDFORALOWPRICE
Light grids for long distances Light grids with monitored by-
passing during material transport
1
3
Light curtain for short safety Light curtain to protect during
distances cycle initiation 4
6
Light curtain as area Light curtain for inner area
protection limiting
7
9
What safety requirements are there for a light protection device?
High safety demands are stated in the standard
%. WHICHDEALSWITHLIGHTPROTECTION4HEMAIN
demands are on a safe stopping function and that light from
Type 2 states that a simple but monitored safety function is
required, which means that the safety function shall be moni
tored through periodic tests which break the output when a
10
light sources other than the transmitter or other disturban fault occurs. Between the testing times there can though be
ces do not affect the safety function. faults which result in the safety component malfunctioning.
Depending on how the safety function is built up there The test function can either be built into the safety device
are safety components of type 2 and 4 to choose between.
Type 2 and 4 relates in principle to category 2 and 4
or an external unit (e.g. the machine´s control system) can
INITIATE A TEST -AXIMUM ALLOWED SCATTERING ANGLE FOR THE
11
ACCORDINGTO%. %.)3/ LIGHTIS¼²
Type 4 which has the highest safety level, states that a ,IGHT BEAMS AND LIGHT CURTAINS ARE INCLUDED AMONG THE
fault is not allowed to affect the safety function and that the products in the machine directive´s appendix 4, which me
fault shall be detected by the outputs falling immediately
ORTHATTHEYDONOTRE CONNECTAFTERBEINGDISCONNECTED
ans that an external certifying procedure with an officially
recognised institution is called for. 12
-AXIMUMALLOWEDSCATTERINGANGLEFORTHELIGHTIS¼²
13
Reset – 3 alternatives
Supervised manual reset
When a light beam/light curtain is interrupted it will give
a stop signal to dangerous machines within the risk area
ITPROTECTSANDARESET LAMPWILLBELIT&ORANEWSTARTOF
the machine the light beam/light curtain has to be reset.
This is done with the reset button which is placed where it
cannot be reached from within the area which is protected.
4HEREAREHIGHREQUIREMENTSONTHERESETFUNCTION NEITHER
a short circuit nor a component fault shall give automatic
reset. When the reset button has been set the outputs are Reset button with light indication.
ACTIVATEDANDTHERESET LAMPISTURNEDOFF
Supervised time-reset
$URING TIME RESET UNINTENTIONAL RESET IS PREVENTED WHEN
someone is inside the risk area. To reset the light beam
(see figure) button 1 must first be pressed and afterwards
BUTTONWITHINEGSECONDS4HISISESPECIALLYIMPORTANT
when one cannot see the entire area that is protected by 1
2
the light beam.
Button 1 is pressed and afterwards, within a chosen

time e.g. 5 seconds, button 2 is pressed for resetting
the light beam.
Automatic reset
Automatic reset is used when the light beam is used for
area monitoring. When the light beam is actuated this in
dicates that e.g. a robot is in the area. The robot is stop a
ped if a person enters the same area e.g. through a gate.
b
When the light beam is free again the control unit will be
reset automatically.
A light beam b indicates that the robot is situated in area

A. In this position it is possible to walk in through the gate
to area B without stopping the robot.
Muting Bypassing may be needed for different reasons. One of the
1
most common reasons for bypassing is during in and out
feeding of material on a conveyor, auto industrial trucks, etc.
(bypassing) Another common application is bypassing while passing with
ATHREE POSITIONDEVICETOTHERISKAREA
Important aspects for bypassing are that it should be safe ,
not be activated by mistake and be difficult to defeat. In other
2
words it should give a reliable bypassing when a loading
carrier comes but not allow a human to pass. To achieve the
highest safety level a dual and supervised bypassing system
is needed (usually with at least two independant signals).
If this is done with sensors, it is recommended they be of
3
different kinds, because of the probability of them both mal
functioning for the same reason e.g. common mode failure.
An example of a solution is to use a mechanical limit switch
ANDAPHOTO CELLSENSOR
To avoid deliberate defeating/ manipulation of the bypassing 4
SENSORSSIGNALSASAFETYRELAYORASAFETY 0,#ISCONNECTED
thereby monitoring that the sensors are both activated and
deactivated in every bypassing cycle.
The number of variations in bypassing systems are almost
infinite.This depending on the specific requirements of each
plant/machine. For Focus there are a number of bypassing
5
possibilities prepared.
Automatic bypassing of light beam when an auto industrial truck

6
passes.
Blanking (fixed or floating) 10

Blanking, (fixed or floating,) means permanent switching switched off can be changed and follow the location of the
off of a number of beams in the protected field of a light object that is being moved around in the protected area
curtain. This is a function that is permitted and used when an
object that is larger that the resolution of the light curtain is
permanently located in the protected area, without breaking
while the machinery is operating. Other beams are active
and providing normal protection, but often with reduced
resolution.
11
the safety outputs (OSSD). If the object is removed from the When a “blanking” function is used, it is very important that
protected area, the safety outputs are broken. the light curtain provides protection and can detect objects
”Fixed blanking” means that the area that is intentionally as small as a finger or hand, depending on the resolution,
switched off does not change while the machinery is
operating. Other protected areas remain unaffected, with
anywhere outside the area that is rendered inactive because
the object is there.
12
unchanged resolution. It must not be possible to select the “blanking function”
”Floating blanking” means that the area that is intentionally without using a key, tool or similar unlocking device.
13
Light curtain for short
safety distance
A light curtain can be used in a machine or a production
plant in the same way as a hatch. There is a great difference
though when it comes to the risk situation. When one has a
light curtain installed with a short safety distance in front of
a dangerous machine, there is a high risk for spontaneous
ENGAGEMENTINTOTHEMACHINEOFTENCALLEDAFTER GRASP)FTHE
dangerous machine movement does not stop during such an
engagement, one has a small chance of avoiding injury be
CAUSEONECANREACHTHERISKPLACEWITHINMAYBEMS
Therefore it is of great importance that the whole chain
in the stopping circuit is fully dualled and supervised. Even
valves and contactors which ultimately control dangerous
movements normally have to be doubled up and supervi
sed.
Hand resolution
Automatic machines
For light curtains on automatic machines there shall be a
reset function which is active when the machine is set for
automatic production whether or not it is a passable protec
tion. After an engagement one must first use a reset function
then the restart of the cycle should be made with a seperate
starting device. The same reset applies for machines with
SEMI AUTOMATICDRIVE
Operator protection during manually

serviced machines
With manually operated machines where one or more
operators pick in and out parts between every cycle. This
type of application is the most risky because the number of
engagements into the machine´s dangerous area is often
several times per minute.
Light curtains on presses

,IGHTCURTAINSHAVETRADITIONALLYBEENACOMMONPROTECTION
method among press applications and there has since long
existed detailed information on the usage of light curtains
on presses. (see next spread for presses) Finger resolution
Safety level
Only light curtains of type 4 are accepted on presses.
dangerous movement the press should not be able to restart
Reset without being reset. During engagement after the end of the
On the servicing side i.e. the side or sides where there is an cycle no reset is needed.
operator that picks in and out parts, there shall be a seperate For a light curtain which is placed as protection on those
reset function for the light curtain, usually a button. If there sides which are not servicing sides, there shall be a reset
are several light curtains e.g. on the front and back there button which always needs to be activated after an engage
shall be one for each. If the light curtain is actuated during a ment.
1
Cycle initiation with
light curtain 2
Cycle initiation
#YCLEINITIATIONISACONCEPTWHENTHEMACHINEISDESIGNEDSO
that a new cycle starts when you take your hand out from the
light curtain. A cycle is defined as the hand being placed in
and taken out once. Usually it is possible to choose between
3
ONE CYCLEANDTWO CYCLEOPERATION$URINGONE CYCLEANEW
press stroke is started when the light curtain has has been
ACTUATEDONCEANDDURINGTWO CYCLEWHENTHELIGHTCURTAIN
has been actuated twice. The operator thereby operates the
press by the action of putting parts in and out.
4
Because the press starts without any particular command
there are some risks involved and therefore many conditions
have to be met before the machine operates.
To restrict the usage to smaller presses which cannot be
entered there are the following limitations: The table height
MAXMM 5
MAY NOT BE LOWER THAN MM THE STROKING LENGTH MAY
not be larger than 600 mm and the table depth may not be
LARGERTHANMM4HELIGHTCURTAINSHALLHAVEMMOR
HIGHERRESOLUTION)FTHEPRESSISNOTSTARTEDWITHINAPPROX
seconds after the the end of the cycle, a new cycle should
not be accepted without the light beam being again manually
6
reset. Note. For machines with cycle initiation, the installa
tion of the light curtain must be in accordance with machine
parameters and all relevant standards and regulations.
Installation of light curtain

7
4HELIGHTCURTAINMUSTBEINSTALLEDSONO ONECANREACHA Between the light curtains protection area and mechanical
trapping/crushing risk without actuating the light curtain. PARTSTHERESHALLONLYBEMAXMMGAPTOPREVENTAHUMAN
The most important thing is that there are no gaps under, from standing there. In practise to acheive this demand and the
on the sides and over the top during cycle operation. The
lower edge of the light curtain must therefore be slightly
required safety distance one usually has to complement with
e.g. additional mechanical protection or additional horizontally 8
below the press table edge. Also if it is open above the light POSITIONED LIGHT CURTAINS IE STEP IN LIGHT CURTAIN !NOTHER
curtain the height must be adapted so that it is not possible solution could be a lying or an angled light curtain.
TOREACHOVERTHEPROTECTIONAREASEE%. 0OSSIBLE
physical adjustment possibilities must be limited so that no
gaps can occur. 9
Installation – correct and incorrect during cycle initiation
10
11
Correctly installed. Incorrect intallation. Incorrect installation. Gap Correctly installed.
The operator cannot reach
into the machine without
Gap below the light curtain.
The operator can reach into
above the light curtain. The
operator can reach into the
,IGHTCURTAINCOMPLE
mented with a horizontal
12
actuating the light curtain. the machine without actua machine without actuating the light curtain to detect
ting the light curtain. light curtain. the operator.
13
Safety distance - light curtain according to EN999
The safety distance ’S’ is a minimum distance between
a light curtain and a dangerous area. The safety dis
tance shall guarantee that a person is not able to reach a
dangerous machine part before the machine movement
has stopped. This is calculated with the formula from
%. -ACHINE 3AFETY 0LACEMENT OF SAFETY DEVICES
with concern to the speed in which the body approaches
the risk area.
3+X4 #
S = safety distance in mm Resolution for finger

K = body/part of body (e.g. hand) speed in mm/s (≤14 mm) gives C = 0
T = T1 + T2
where
T1 = the safety device´s reaction time in seconds
T2 = the machine´s reaction time in seconds
#FURTHERDISTANCEINMMBASEDUPONTHEBODY|SINTRU
sion towards the risk area before the safety device has
been actuated.
Calculation of safety distances for vertical and horizontal installation according

to EN999
S = safety distance in mm S = safety distance in mm

(THELOWERBEAMMAYNOTBESITUATEDHIGHERTHAN H = the light curtain field must be positioned between 0 and
mm above the ground 1000 mm above the floor
H2 = the upper beam may not be situated lower than 900 mm
above the ground The safety distance for horizontal installation is
calculated with the following formula:
The safety distance for vertical installation
For S ≤ 500 mm the safety distance is calculated
with the following formula: 3X4 X(
where H is the safety field´s height above the reference
3X4 XD plane , e.g. the ground
where d is the light curtain´s resolution in mm. nX( MAYNOTBELESSTHANMM$EPENDING
on the resolution, d, that the light curtain has, there is a
K here is 2000 mm/s which represents the speed of minimum height that the safety field may be placed. This is
THEHAND4HEEXPRESSIONXD MAYNEVERBELESS calculated with:
THAN-INIMUMSAFETYDISTANCE3ISMM (XDn
(CANNOTBELESSTHAN7ITHARESOLUTIONDORMM
If the safety distance according to the formula one can therefore install the light curtain from H = 0 and
above gets larger than 500 mm one can instead up. The higher it is situated, the shorter the safety distance
use:
gets. The highest permissable height H of the safety field
is 1000 mm.
3X4 XD When you use a horizontal light curtain as entry protec
K is1600 mm/s which represents the speed of the body. TIONTHEDEPTHOFTHELIGHTCURTAINSHOULDBEATLEASTMM
-INIMUM SAFETY DISTANCE ACCORDING TO THIS FORMULA IS to prevent people from inadvertently stepping over it. The
MM estimated safety distance is measured from the machine’s
hazardous section to the outermost beam of the horizontal
light curtain (seen from the machine).
Safety distances for new and old presses 1
New presses Old presses
&OR NEW #% MARKED PRESSES THERE ARE SPECIlC REQUIRE N.B. For old presses there are different rules for each
ments from the standards EN 692-ACHINETOOLSn3AFETY country.
n-ECHANICALPRESSESn3AFETYANDEN 693-ACHINETOOLS
n3AFETYn(YDRAULICPRESSES 2
The same requirements apply for vertical installation on
presses as with vertical installation on other machines with
THEDIFFERENCETHAT#ISGIVENACCORDINGTOTHEFOLLOWING
3
Resolution, Safety distance Cycle
d, (mm) addition, C (mm) initiation
≤ 14 0 4
>14 20 80 0ERMITTED
>20
40 240 Not
>40 permitted 5
Other manually serviced machines
The rules for presses may well be applied to other machines
which function in a similar way and that have the same risk
6
situation. There is no other standard which is as detailed on
the usage of light curtains.
For cycle initiation the light curtains resolution, d, must be
≤MM4HISAPPLIESTOBOTHOLDANDNEW#% MARKED
presses.
7
Safety distance for light beams according to EN999 8

For light beams the safety distance is calculated To fulfill the requirements the beams should be installed at
from the following: the following heights:
3X4 MM 9
4HEFORMULAAPPLIESWHETHERONEINSTALLSORBEAMS)T Number of beams Height over the reference
is the risk assessment that decides the number of beams plane, e.g. ground
that are to be chosen. The following possibilities must be
considered.
4

10
sTOCRAWLUNDERTHELOWESTBEAM
2 400, 900
sTOREACHOVERTHETOPBEAM
sTOREACHINBETWEENTWOBEAMS
sTHATTHEBODYPASSESINBETWEENTWOBEAMS
11
12
13
Approvals:
Safety Light Grids and
Safety Light Curtains
Focus Application:
Optical protection in an
opening or around a risk area
Features:
Type 2 or 4 according to EN
61496
Flexible assembly
,%$INDICATION
(IGHPROTECTIONCLASS)0
2ANGE M
Time reset
Fixed / floating blanking
-UTING
,IGHTGRID% STOPAND%DEN
in the same safety circuit with
6ITALOR0LUTOENABLESSAFETY
category 4 according to
A light grid/light curtain with many %. %.)3/
possibilities
The Focus units are light grids/curtains with safety func
tions intended for applications where it is of great impor Focus light grids/curtains and is enabled directly when an
tance to protect persons from a dangerous machine, robot INDICATIONLAMP,-3ISCONNECTED-UTINGIMPLIESTHATONE
or other automated systems where it is possible to access or more segments or the whole light curtain can be bypas
to a dangerous area. sed during in and out passage of material.
Focus creates a protection field with infrared beams. If )NTHE&OCUSWITH-UTINGTHEREISALSOAN/VERRIDEFUNC
any beam is interrupted the safety mechanism is trigge tion which makes it possible to bypass the light grid/curtain
red and the dangerous machine is stopped. Focus fulfills i.e. activate the outputs if a machine start is necessary even
THEREQUIREMENTSFORNON CONTACTSAFETYEQUIPMENTTYPE if one or more light beams are interrupted. This is the case
(Focus 2 series) and type 4 (Focus 4 series) according to when the muting function is chosen and the A and B inputs
THEINTERNATIONALREGULATIONSTANDARD%. are activated. If for example during the muting operation a
5NITSAREAVAILABLEWITHSAFETYHEIGHTSBETWEENAND loading pallet has stopped inside the safety field after a vol
MM!LLELECTRONICCONTROLANDMONITORINGFUNCTIONS tage loss, the override function is used to enable the pallet
are included in the light curtain profiles. External connec to be driven clear.
TIONISMADEVIAA-CONNECTIONATTHEENDOFTHEPROlLE
Synchronization between transmitter and receiver is achie Floating blanking or fixed blanking
ved optically. No electrical connection between the units is It is also possible to obtain the Focus light grids/curtains
REQUIRED#ONTROLANDMONITORINGOFTHEBEAMTRANSMISSION with either ”floating blanking or fixed blanking”. Floating
ISCARRIEDOUTBYTWOMICRO PROCESSORSWHICHALSOGIVEIN blanking makes it possible to ’disconnect’ a defined num
formation on the status and alignment of the light curtain via ber of beams from the safety field. The object is then free
SEVERAL,%$S to move in the safety field without the safety function being
triggered. During ”fixed blanking” the object is not able to
Muting and Override included in all Focus move in the safety field. The other beams are active with
4HEv-UTINGvANDv/VERRIDEvFUNCTIONSAREAVAILABLEONALL normal resolution.
Focus light curtain
Standard: -UTINGBYPASSING PARTLYORCOMPLETELY
Focus light grid
Standard: -UTINGBYPASSING OFONETWOTHREEOR
1
Supervised output for muting lamp. Over four beams. Supervised output for
RIDE-ANUALLYSUPERVISEDORAUTOMATIC muting lamp. Override.
RESET4IME RESET -ANUALLYSUPERVISEDORAUTOMATIC
Option: Fixed or Floating blanking.

KL2-500D:
RESET4IME RESET
Light grids for tough environments with two 2
parallel beams of light for improved reliability.
Muting-unit for Focus FMC-Focus Muting Connector with

Standard: -UTINGBYPASSING OFLIGHTCURATINORLIGHT M12 connection
GRIDINONEORTWODIRECTIONS, FORM4 FORM
The unit is connected directly to the light
Standard:

&-#ISASMALLOPTIMISEDCONNECTION
BLOCKWITH-INPUTS&-#ISUSEDFOR
3
CURTAINGRIDVIAA- CONNECTION - CONNECTIONOFMUTINGSENSORSMUTING
LAMPPRE RESETFORTIMERESET RESETBUTTON
Muting-unit MF-T with four beams connected with indication, override and safety outputs.
directly to the bottom of a light grid with a
M12-connection. The entire T-unit is then
connected with an M12-connection on the
4
muting-unit.
5
Summary - Focus light curtain/grid, Type 2 (F2-) and 4 (F4-)
6
Type (x) X=2 or 4 Fx-14-zzz Fx-35-zzz Fx-K(L)4-zzz Fx-K(L)3-800 Fx-K(L)2-500 Fx-KL2-500D Fx-K1C-500/LD
Resolution (mm) 14 35 300/400 400 500 500 500
150
300
450
150
300
450
7
600 600
Safety field 750 750
900
height (mm=zzz) 900 900 800 500 500 500
Other heights on request 1050
1200
1050
1200
1200
8
1350 1350
1500 1500
1650 1650
Range (m)
type 2 K
0,2-6 0,2-15
0,5-50
4-50
0,5-50
4-50
0,5-50
4-50
0,5-50
0,2-6/0,5-12
9
type 4 K
type 4 KL 0,2-25 0,2-25 0,2-25 0,2-25
Reaction time (ms) 15 - 45 14 - 26 14 14 14 14 14
Manual reset s s s s s s s
Automatic reset s s s s s s s 10
Time reset s s s s s s s
Muting inputs (bypassing) s s s s s s s
Supervision of muting-lamp s s s s s s s
Override
MF-T
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
11
MF-L ¤1 ¤1 ¤1 ¤1 ¤1 ¤1 ¤1
2 2
Floating Blanking ¤ ¤
Fixed Blanking
Dyn. adaption to Vital
¤
¤3
2
¤2
¤3 ¤3 ¤3 ¤3 ¤3 ¤3 12
sStandard ¤¹ When ordering add ”L” ¤² When ordering add ”B” ¤With Tina 10A/10B/10C or FMC-Tina
Note! &ORORDERINGDATAANDARTICLENUMBERSEETHE0RODUCTLIST&ORMOREINFORMATIONSEEOURHOMEPAGE
13
Function description
Focus consists of two units, a transmitter unit and a recei Safety outputs OSSD 1 and OSSD2
ver unit. All the optical units are scanned regularly so that &OCUSHASTWO0.0OUTPUTS /33$AND/33$)FTHE
all objects that are placed between the transmitter and the load to be switched is alternating current or requires a hig
receiver will be detected. HERCURRENTTHANM!THENONESHOULDUSEASAFETYRELAY
If any light beam is interrupted, the dangerous machine EG240LUTO0,#ORTHE&2- UNITCONVERTSTHEOUT
movement will be stopped by the outputs from the light PUTS TO RELAY CONTACTS FROM *OKAB 3AFETY 4HE &-# 4INA
curtain. The reaction time for the Focus varies from 14 ms and Tina 10A/10B converts the outputs to a dynamic signal
TOMSDEPENDINGONTHENUMBEROFBEAMSINTHELIGHT FORCONNECTIONTO0LUTOOR6ITAL0LUTOCANALSOWORKDIRECTLY
CURTAIN 4HE lVE ,%$|S IN THE RECEIVER AND THE TWO IN THE WITHTHE/33$ OUTPUTS
transmitter show the status of the light curtain/grid.
Technical data – Focus

Supply voltage: 6$# RIPPLE
Power consumption: 10 W max (transmitter and receiver connected)
Wavelength on transmitter LED: NM
Profile dimensions: XMM
Protection class: )0
Operating temperature: TO²#
Storage temperature: -TO²#
Outputs: SUPERVISED0.0OUTPUTSWITHCROSSCIRCUITMONITORING
Max. load: M!OVERLOADCCPROTECTION
Response time: nMS
Connection transmitter: - PIN
Connection receiver: - PIN
Indication: ,%$|SON2ECEIVERAND4RANSMITTERSHOWINGALIGNMENTSTATUSAND
power supply
Enclosure: Aluminium painted yellow
Certified to standard: 4YPEANDACCORDINGTO%.
LED information - Focus

The LED´s in the receiver indicate the following: The LEDs in the transmitter indicate the following:
5PPER9ELLOW n!LIGNMENT 0OWER'REEN n)SLITWHENTHETRANSMITTERHASSUPPLY
"REAK2ED n)SLITIFTHELIGHTCURTAINSBEAMISINTER voltage.
rupted 3TATUS9ELLOW n)SLITWHENTHETRANSMITTERISFUNCTION
'UARD'REEN n)SLITWHENTHEENTIRELIGHTlELDISFREE ing correctly.
,OWER9ELLOW n)SLITDURINGNORMALOPERATIONWHEN Is flashing or is turned off during an error in the
there is dirt on the light curtain´s front glass. transmitter.
Is flashing during normal operation when the OSSD
OUTPUTSARESHORT CIRCUITED Note! 4HE,%$SAREALSOUSEDFORTROUBLESHOOTING
0OWER'REEN n)SLITWHENTHERECEIVERHASSUPPLY
voltage.
Reset - Focus
On every Focus there are inputs for reset and other s Time reset n$URINGMANUALRESET4ORESETTHE&OCUS
functions: APRE RESETBUTTONMUSTlRSTBEACTUATEDANDAFTER
2ESET!LIGNMENTAND/VERRIDEBYPASSINGISONLYPOSSIBLE wards within 8 seconds a reset button outside the risk
when muting is used.) area must be actuated.
Choice of reset
Reset possibilities 2ESET ALTERNATIVES ARE CHOSEN WITH DOUBLE CHANGE OVER
s Automatic reset n7HENTHELIGHTlELDISFREETHEOUT switches in the Focus receiver. On delivery the Focus is set
puts are closed directly. (Setting when delivered). for automatic reset.
s Manual resetn&OCUSGIVESAREADYSIGNALWHENTHE
light field is free and the reset button has been actuated.
Laser aligner JSRL-3 1
Facilitates alignment of light beams or light curtains, parti
cularly when the solution involves one or more mirrors. The
*32, ISSIMPLYSECUREDBYTHEACCOMPANYINGELASTICATED
tape around the transmitter and receiver unit, which must
be located so that the flat rear of the unit is up against the
front glass of the light curtain. When the laser aligner is
2
switched on the red laser spot must be visible, if appro
priate via a mirror, at the corresponding unit.
4HE*32, CONTAINSTWOTYPE!!!BATTERIESTHATARECHAN
ged by unscrewing the bottom end lid.
3
Muting (bypassing) - Focus
"UILT INMUTINGFOR&OCUSISAVAILABLEINTHREEWAYS Muting-lamp
In the Focus receiver unit it is also possible to directly con
4
s 0RE MADEMUTINGUNITS-& 4AND-& ,WHICHHAVE NECTAMUTING LAMP)TISALSOPOSSIBLETOCONNECTTHEMUT
INTEGRALPHOTO CELLS5NITSAREMANUFACTUREDWITHTHE ING LAMPVIAA&-#$URINGBYPASSINGTHEMUTING LAMPISLIT
same profile as Focus. "YPASSINGISONLYPOSSIBLEIFTHEMUTING LAMPISFUNCTIONING
s #ONNECTIONOFMUTINGSENSORSVIAA&-#
s3EPARATECONNECTIONOFMUTINGSENSORS!AND"
directly to the Focus receiver unit.
Conditions for muting 5
A -UTINGINPUT!MUSTBEACTUATEDATLEASTMSBEFORE
muting input B for muting to be possible.
B -UTINGISACTIVATEDASLONGASTHECONDITIONSAREFULlLLED
3EEALSOREQUIREMENTSFORMUTINGIN)%#43CHAP
Muting with MF-T and MF-L units

TERSAND 6
-& 4AND-& ,AREMUTINGUNITSWITHINTEGRATEDPHOTOCELLS MF-T (Diagram 1)
in the same profile type as the Focus light grid/curtain. No -& 4CONTAINSFOURPHOTOCELLS!""AND!ARRANGED
additional sensors are required because the muting units as shown. They are configured for installations where ma
CONTAINTHEREQUIREDCOMPONENTS-& 4-& ,ISCONNECTED
DIRECTLYTO&OCUSWITH- CONNECTORS
terial is transported ”in” or ”out” or in both directions ”in
and out”. 7
NOTE. All standard Focus light grids/curtains are delivered
Alternative 1 Alternative 2 CONNECTEDTOFUNCTIONTOGETHERWITHTHE-& 4
F F MF-L (Diagram 2) 8
o o -& ,CONTAINSTWOPHOTOCELLS!AND"WHICHAREACTUA
c c ted before exiting through the light grid/curtain. The light
u u grid/curtain being bypassed just prior to the exit of the ma
s s terial.
&OCUS-& 4 &OCUS-& , NOTE. 5NIT -& , IS PRIMARILY INTENDED FOR MATERIAL TRANS
9
port ”out” of a working area. The standard Focus light grid/
out/in from out from
CURTAINDELIVEREDDOESNOTFUNCTIONTOGETHERWITHTHE-& ,
risk area risk area
version. They need to be ordered separately together with
THE-& ,UNIT
MF-T Reflex (Alternative 3)

10
M12 connection #ONTAINSFOURTRANSMITTERSRECEIVERSANDASEPARATEREmECTOR
between Focus UNIT2ANGEM5SEDINTHEMUTINGMODEFORTRANSPORTOFMA
and MF-T terial into and/or out of hazardous areas. For other functions
REFERTO!LTERNATIVE4HISUNITTOGETHERWITHLIGHTBEAM&
+# PROVIDESELECTRICALCONNECTIONSONONLYONESIDE
11
MF-L Reflex (Alternative 4)
#ONTAINSTWOTRANSMITTERSRECEIVERSANDASEPARATEREmECTOR
UNIT2ANGEM5SEDINTHEMUTINGMODEFORTRANSPORTOFMA
Alternative 3
(Alternative 4)
terial into and/or out of hazardous areas. For other functions
REFERTO!LTERNATIVE4HISUNITTOGETHERWITHLIGHTBEAM&
12
M12 to control cabinet +# PROVIDESELECTRICALCONNECTIONSONONLYONESIDE
13
Examples on how the muting sensors can be placed
A solution with Focus Muting unit MF-T with integrated muting sensors.
0OSSIBLEDIRECTIONOFMOVEMENT INOUTOFRISKAREA
Risk area
A solution with Focus Muting unit MF-L with integrated muting sensors
This solution shall only be used for movement out from a risk area.
B1 A1
Risk area
d2 = 260 mm
D = 300 mm
NOTE. the muting sensors A and B must be placed so D: indicates the minimum length of the material that is
THATTHESENSOR!ISALWAYSACTIVATEDATLEASTMSBEFORE to actuate the muting sensors that must be maintained
sensor B. during the passage through the light grid/curtain.
DINDICATESTHEMEASUREMENTBETWEENTHETWOFOURPRE
ASSEMBLEDMUTINGSENSORSWITHINTHE-& ,AND-& 4
Muting with FMC and FMI units 1
The FMC Focus Muting Connector, is a small, optimal

unit which is used when the Focus light grid/curtain is re
The FMI Focus Muting Indicator, is a small unit with
BUILT IN MUTING LAMP RESET BUTTON vPOWER OFFv FOR ALIGN
5
quired to be bypassed for in and out passage to and from MENTANDOVERRIDE 4HE&-)UNITISCONNECTEDTOTHE&-#
A DANGEROUS AREA 4HE &-# UNIT IS EASILY CONNECTED TO UNITWITH-CONNECTORSTOFACILITATETHEMUTINGFUNCTION
&OCUSWITHA-CONNECTOR connection.
6
Various FMC, FMI, FRM- versions and Tina units
4HE4INA VERSIONSHAVEDYNAMICSAFETYOUTPUTSFOR6ITAL0LUTO 7
&-# 7ITHCONNECTORSFORMUTINGSENSORS
8
(A+B), reset, power off and muting
LAMP2 AND-
&-) ! ONLYMUTINGLAMPS
&-) # WITHRESETANDPOWEROFF
&-) $ ITHRESETPOWEROFFANDRESISTOR
W
instead of muting lamp.
&-) % A SPRE RESETlTTEDINCONNECTOR!
! ON&-# 4INA ORASRESET
&-) '
FOR4INA$UOIN2 CONNECTOR
ITHRESETANDRESISTORINSTEADOF
W
muting lamp.
9
&-# 4INATHESAMEAS&-# BUTMADEFOR
CONNECTIONOF6ITALOR0LUTO
Tina 10A: adapter unit for connection of Vital
OR0LUTO
10
4INA" SIMPLIlED&-# 4INABUTWITH
ONLY2 CONNECTOR
4INA# SIMPLIlED&-# 4INABUTWITH
ONLYPOWERFEEDATCONNECTOR
- - BYPASSUNITFOREASYCONNECTION
outside the enclosure.
&2- ! CONVERTSTHETWO/33$OUTPUTSTO
relay outputs (and power feed).
*330
*3!0
BLANKINGPLUGFORUNUSEDINPUTS
ADAPTERFOR&-#UNITSFORUSE
WITHOUT&-) "OR $AT2 CON
11
nector with muting resistor.
12
13
Connection of Focus and muting components with FMC-1 and FMI-1
Ex 1. #ONNECTIONOFLIGHTCURTAINWITHCONNECTIONBLOCK Ex 2. #ONNECTIONOFLIGHTCURTAINWITHCONNECTIONBLOCK
&-# TESTRESETBUTTONANDSWITCHFORSUPPLYVOLTAGE &-# 4HE2ESETUNIT&-)MUSTBEPLACEDOUTOFREACH
placed in (by) the control cabinet. from the risk area.
#ABINET #ABINET
-UTINGLAMP
-UTINGLAMP
&-)
0OWERvOFFv 2ESET
#ONNECTION 4EST2ESET 0OWERvOFFv

UNIT&-# #ONNECTION
UNIT&-#
-UTING -UTING
photocells photocells
Connection of Focus and muting components directly to the control cabinet
-UTINGLAMP s 4HE4%342%3%4BUTTONSHALLBEPLACEDSOTHEOPERA
#ABLETO
tor can see the protected area during reset, testing, and
Test & reset lamp bypassing. It should not be possible to reach the button
buttons
Supply
cable
from within the risk area.
s 4HE ,-3 LAMP FOR INDICATION OF MUTING AND BYPASSING
-UTING
0ROTECT
cable shall be placed so that it can be seen from all directions
cables &2 CABLE
&4 CABLE from where it is possible to access the dangerous area
s )FPHOTOCELLSAREUSEDASMUTINGSENSORSTHENTHESEN
sor receivers should be assembled on the light curtain´s
transmitter side to minimise the interference risk.
s 4HE SYSTEM IS PROTECTED AGAINST DANGEROUS FUNCTIONS
caused by damage on the transmitter cable and/or the
receiver cable. However, we recommend that the cables
be protected so that physical damage to them can be
minimised.
M12-connection device with screw connectors
- # - # - # - #
Muting with Mute R and Mute D 1
A solution with two sensors (here photocells) and one (or two) movement directions for material transport:
0OSSIBLEDIRECTIONOFMOVEMENT ).%VEN)./54ISPOSSIBLE
2
2ISKAREA
d3
3
d4
B S A
DMM
d4 the least possible
S = dafety light curtain/light beam
4
A solution with four sensors and one movement direction for material transport:
0OSSIBLEDIRECTIONOFMOVEMENT ). 5
D
2ISKAREA 6
B2 A2
S
B1
d1
A1
d1 < 200mm 7
d2 > 250mm
d2
D=(d1x2)+d2+40
D
8
A solution with four sensors and two movement directions for material transport:
9
0OSSIBLEDIRECTIONOFMOVEMENT )./54
2ISKAREA
10
A2 B2
S
B1
d1
A1
d1 < 200mm 11
d2 > 250mm
d2 D=(d1x2)+(d2x2)+40
D
D: indicates the minimum length on the material that is to actuate the muting sensors that must be main
tained during the passage through the light grid/curtain.
12
d1 must be as short as possible, and definitely less than 200 mm
d2: indicates the distance between A1 and B1
13
Muting sensors – Mute R
2ETRO REmECTIVE with polarizing filters
Features:
2ANGEADJUSTABLE
,IGHTRESERVEWARNING
indicator
4RANSISTOROUTPUT0.0
1000 Hz switching frequency
3HORT CIRCUITPROTECTION
reverse polarity protection
ANDPOWER UPOUTPUT
suppression
#ONNECTOR-
6$# %-#TESTEDACCORDINGTO
0.0 )%#AND%.
$ARK ONOUTPUT
%.
6$#
Technical data Supply voltage
Allowable ripple ¼OF5S
-UTE2&342 Current consumption (without load) M!
Article number/ordering data:
Max. load current 100 mA
Output 0.0DARKON
Residual voltage <1,6 V
Connection #ONNECTOR -
Max. switching frequency 1000 Hz
Range adjustment Yes
Protection class )0
Range MWITHREmECTOR&:2
MWITHREmECTOR&:2 Temperature
6ISIBLE REDNMPULSEDWITH (operating and storage) TO²#
Light source
polarizing filter Weight approx.G
All technical data at 25˚ C and 24V.
PNP output
1
3UPPLYVOLTAGE6
2
4
2l
4 $ARK ONOUTPUT

3UPPLYVOLTAGE
Dark-on output
The output is activated when an object interrupts the light.
Connector M12
#ONNECTOR-
2ANGEADJUSTMENTAND 2
function indicator
0LASTICHOUSING 1
Muting sensors – Mute D 1
$IFFUSE REmECTIVEWITHBACKGROUNDREJECTION
2
Features:
Electronically adjustable
background rejection 3
,IGHTRESERVEWARNING
indicator
$UALTRANSISTOROUTPUTS0.0
3HORT CIRCUITPROTECTIONRE
4
verse polarity protection
ANDPOWER UPOUTPUTSUPP
ression
#ONNECTOR-ROTATABLE
5
6$# %-#TESTEDACCORDINGTO
0.0
LIGHT ONOUTPUT )%#AND%.
DARK ONOUTPUT %.
6
Technical data
Allowable ripple ¼OF5S
Current consumption (without load) M!
7
Max. load current 200 mA
Article number/ordering data: -UTE$*3/'0
Residual voltage <1,6 V
Output 0.0LIGHT ANDDARK ON
Max. switching frequency 200 Hz
Connection #ONNECTOR-
Range adjustment
Range (depending on material)
Yes
0.2... 0.8 m
Protection class
Operating temperature
Weight
)0
TO²#
APPROXG
8
Light source )NFRARED ,%$NMPULSED
6$# All technical data at 25° C and 24V.
Supply voltage
9
1 Function indicator
2ANGEADJUSTMENT
'LASSCOVEREDOPTICS
#ENTEROFTHEOPTICALAXIS
0REFERREDDETECTIONDIRECTION
"OREFORMMSELF TAPPINGSCREW
10
#ONNECTOR-
/PENINGFOR-NUT
11
Connector M12
PNP output
2
1 Light-on output:
2l
2
4
3UPPLYVOLTAGE6
2 $ARK ONOUTPUT
Output energized when object is present.
Dark-on output:
1 12
2l
4 ,IGHT ONOUTPUT
Output energized when no object is present.
3UPPLYVOLTAGE 4
13
Application:
Bjorn
0ROTECTSLIGHTCURTAINLIGHT
A strong support for light grids grids and mirror
and mirrors
Features:
2OBUST
Adjustable
Bjorn is a very stable and flexible stand system

in which Focus safety light beams and mirrors
are mounted in the stand. The fixings for the mir
rors in the stand can be turned to provide either
vertical or horizontal angles. The robust material
of the Bjorn protects Focus units from direct col
lisions, and thus prevents unnecessary material
damage and halts in production.
Bjorn is available in stock as a standard version
for dual safety light beams. Bjorn versions can
ALSOBEORDEREDFOR&OCUSAND BEAMS
2ECEIVER
-
-
Transmitter
Bjorn N2
-
-
Bjorn V2
vertical
Bjorn H2
horizontal
Technical data - Bjorn
1
Article number/ordering data: "JORN(
"JORN6
"JORN(
"JORN(

"JORN(
"JORN.
"JORN.
2
"JORN.
"JORN.
"JORN.
H = Horizontal reflection
V = Vertical reflection
N = Floor stand for Focus
3
Colour: 9ELLOWPOWDER COATED2!,
Material: MMSTEEL
Dimensions:
#ROSSSECTION
Foot
Weight:
MMXMM
MMXMM
4
H2, V2 och N2 KGST
( 17 kg/st
( ( 20 kg/st
. 27 kg/st
Protection against water and dust
for Focus light curtains and light
beams ≤
5
Bjorn N2
22-041-45
Bjorn N3
22-041-46
Bjorn N4-1
22-041-47
Bjorn N4-2
22-041-48
Bjorn N5
22-041-49
Bjorn H2
22-041-40
Bjorn V2
22-041-41
Bjorn H3
22-041-42
Bjorn H4-1
22-041-43
Bjorn H4-2
22-041-44
9
10
11
12
13
Application:
Focus-Wet
0ROTECTIONINSEVERE
nPROTECTIONAGAINSTWATERAND environments
dust for Focus light curtains and
light beams Features:
!DJUSTABLE¼²
2OTATABLEANDREPLACEABLE
tube
#APABLEOFDRAININGAND
through ventilation
Technical data – Wet

Article number/ordering data: 7ET
7ET
7ET
-#ABLE 7ET
gland 7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
Wet is used for protection against water (or dust) 7ET
where extreme washing conditions are encounte 7ET +
7ET +
RED4HEPROTECTIVEENCAPSULATIONRATING)0 NOW 7ET +
enables Focus light curtains and light beams to 7ET +
be used for such applications as the food industry 7ET +#
7ET +$
where the use of high pressure washing for cleaning 7ET -&4
machinery often occurs. The draining and through 7ET -&,
ventilation capabilities mean that condensation Colour: Transparent plastic
can be avoided. Length including lid: light curtain/light beam + 66 mm
Wet, with Focus light curtains or light beams, is Material:
Tube 0#
PRE ASSEMBLEDCOMPLETEWITHCABLINGONREQUEST Lid 0%($
During installation on a machine a Wet unit can Angle bracket Stainless steel
BE ADJUSTED BY ¼ ² WITH THE ACCOMPANYING Max. ambient temperature: ²#
angle bracket. The plastic tube is rotatable and Installation adjustment ¼²
the outside is easy to clean. Protection rating )0)0+
Blanking programmer BP1
AQUICKWAYTOPROGRAMBLANKING
A switch at the cable connection of the light
curtain receiver enables a choice of whether a
blanking function and if so which is to be used.
Once this choice has been made, programming
of the unit in the light field is made easy by using
THE"LANKINGPROGRAMMER"0)FTHEEXTENTOFTHE
object in the protected field then changes, the light
curtain can be reprogrammed, only 11 seconds
AFTERTHEPUSHBUTTONONTHEFRONTOFTHE"0HAS
been pressed.
4HE"0ISEASILYCONNECTEDINSERIESWITHTHE
cable to the light curtain receiver unit, using the
-CONNECTORANDTHEFREELENGTHOFTHEUNITS
cable.
The unit can be fitted during operation.
HR7000C-01 Focus - Connection without and with muting function
HR7000E-01 Focus - Connection with pre-reset function
HR7000F-01 Focus - Connection with muting to safety relay 1
HR7000G-01 Focus - Connection with MF-T/MF-L units 7
10
11
12
13
HR7000H-01 Focus - Connection with FMC/Tina Interface
HR7000I-01 FMC
HR7000J-01 FMC-1 or FMC-1 Tina with muting sensors and reset unit 1
HR7000K-01 FMC-1 or FMC-1 Tina connected with Pre Reset 7
10
11
12
13
HR7000L-01 Tina 10A, 10B and 10C connection example
HR7000M FRM-1 - Changing OSSD outputs to relay contacts
HR7000O-01 Connection example FMC/FMI 1
HR7000P Cable connection example 7
10
11
12
13
HR7000Q Cable connection example
HR7000S Focus; Muting with the aid of Pluto, FMC and a transfer cable
Focus - Certificates 1
10
11
12
13
Approvals:
Safety Light Beam
Spot Application:
0HOTOELECTRICGUARDINGOFAN
entrance or around a risk area
Features:
Safety level Type 4 according
to EN 61496
Versatile mounting
,%$INDICATION
0ROTECTIONCLASS)0
MORMRANGE
Bypassing possibility
A light beam for the highest safety level
#ANBECONNECTEDWITHSEVERAL
The light beam is available in two versions Spot 10 for dis other different safety devices in
TANCESUPTOMAND3POTFORUPTOM4HELIGHT
beams can be mounted at different heights and be angled the same safety circuit at cate
around a machine using our mirrors and brackets. GORYTOGETHERWITH6ITAL0LUTO
3POTAND6ITAL0LUTOINCOMBINATIONFULlLSTHEREQUIREMENTS ACCORDINGTO%.
FOR#ATEGORYACCORDINGTO%. ANDTYPEACCORDING
to EN 61496. Several light beams, Eden sensors and emer
gency stops can be connected in series achieving the high
safety level for the safety circuit. A number of solutions for
bypassing of light beams for material transport are available.
&ORINDICATIONTHEREARE,%$|SONTHETRANSMITTERANDON
the receiver which indicate ’contact’ between transmitter
and receiver and safety status. The ’contact’ information is
available via the light beam receiver connection cables.
4RANSMITTER2ECEIVER 4RANSMITTER2ECEIVER
Function 3POT4 3POT2 3POT4 3POT2
The Spot light beam is supervised by the Vital safety mo
DULEORBYTHE0LUTOSAFETY 0,#!UNIQUECODEDSIGNALIS 10 m 10 m
M M
sent out from the control unit to the transmitter (Spot T).
4HE SIGNAL WHICH COMES BACK FROM THE RECEIVER 3POT 2
IS THEN COMPARED IN THE 6ITAL0LUTO )F THE CORRECT CODED * *
SIGNAL IS RECEIVED THE 6ITAL0LUTO SWITCHES THE NECESSARY #ODEDPULSETRANSMISSION
safety output contacts to permit dangerous machine mo #ODED
VEMENTS #ODING GUARANTEES THAT NO OUTPUT SIGNALS CAN pulse * 6$#4HISSUPPLYDOES
transmission not need to be the same as
be produced by light from other sources, interference or
connected to the Vital.
faults in components in the transmitter or receiver. The light
beam is dynamically supervised which means that if the
signal stops pulsating at the correct frequency it is imme #ODEDPULSETRANSMISSION
diately detected. By means of coding, the dynamic signal
Vital Safety module can accomodate up
can pass between up to 6 pairs of transmitters and recei to 6 Spot systems.
vers, with only one pair needing to be electrically connec
ted to a Vital.
Mounting and alignment – Spot 1
Safety distance
The basic principle is that dangerous machine movements
should be stopped before a person reaches the dangerous
AREAWHICHSHOULDBEATLEASTMMFROMTHELIGHTBEAMS
When determining the correct safety distance the stopping 2
time of the machine and the risk level must be taken into
ACCOUNT SEE ALSO %. #ONTACT US FOR FURTHER INFOR
mation.
Accessories and Mounting

The Spot light beam can be mounted using a variety of
3
brackets, posts and mirrors. See ordering list for further
information.
4
1100
900
700
400
mm

5
Mounting heights for 2 or 3 light beams.
6
Different sizes of mirrors, mounting brackets and profiles
are available. See component ordering list.
Note. Every mirror reduces the sensing distance of the beam

BYAPPROX JSM64 7
Pivot M18 bracket for Spot 10
or MUTE R (FSTR1) for example
8
Alignment
When aligning the light beam, look towards the transmitter.
In the lens will be seen a strong red light. When this light
is seen from the receiver (via mirrors if fitted) the light beam
IS BASICALLY ALIGNED 4HE ,%$ ON THE RECEIVER IS ON WHEN
2 9
the receiver is aligned with the transmitter. By moving the
transmitter up/down and left/right the best alignment can
be found.
When vertically mounting, (as shown in the diagram) the
receiver should be mounted above the transmitter as this will
simplify the alignment and minimise the risk of extraneous T
10
LIGHTDISTURBANCE)NEXCEPTIONALLIGHTDISTURBANCEENVIRON
ments the received light can be adjusted by a screw on the
REAROFTHE3POTRECEIVER/N3POTTHISADJUSTMENT
can be made on the transmitter. To make the alignment even
EASIERTHE,ASER!LIGNER*32, CANBEUSEDFOR3POT
11
The laser has visible light (class IIa) and is easy to mount for
ALIGNING3UPPLYTOTHE,ASER!LIGNERISTAKENFROMTHE3POT
42CONNECTOR
NOTE! 7HENUSING,ASERALIGNERdo not look directly into

the laser. Observe all necessary precautions when using
Laser aligner JSRL2 for
light beam Spot T/R.
12
laser devices, failing to do so can result in eye damage.
13
Technical data Operating temperature range o# o#
Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden Cable connection -lXEDCONNECTOR
Article number/Ordering data 3POT42 Casing Material

3POT42 Spot 10: Steel housing with polyacryl lens
protection.
Safety level with Vital/Pluto 3POT 0OLYAMIDEHOUSINGWITHPOLYA
(according to EN 61496) Type 4 cryl lens protection.
Safety category together with Colour
Vital/Pluto (according to Spot 10: Steel grey
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1) 4 3POT Yellow/black
Power supply 6$#RIPPLE¼ Weight
Current consumption Spot 10: 2 x 21g
Transmitter: M! 3POT 2 x 100 g
2ECEIVER M! Connections
Info. output +10 mA max. Transmitter: Brown (1) 6$#
Light source 2EDVISIBLELIGHTNM¼² White (2) Dynamic signal in
"LUE 6$#
Optical power 2ECEIVER "ROWN 6$#
Spot10: < 0,1 mW White (2)
3POT < 0,2 mW "LUE 6$#
Function indication Black (4) Dynamic signal out
'REENTRANSMITTER,%$ON 0OWERSUPPLYOK 'REY Info output
'REENRECEIVER,%$STATUS 6$#WHEN,%$ISGREENORmASHING
On: Alignment ok, safety circuit TOLERANCE 6$#
closed 06$#WHEN,%$ISOFF
Flashing: Alignment ok, earlier safety TOLERANCE6$#
circuit open
Off: Beam interrupted, safety circuit mm
67
open 61
-
Protection class )0
Range
Spot 10 M
3POT M -
Installation
Spot 10: X-NUTSPROVIDED Spot 10 T/R Spot 35T/R
3POT Either via mounting holes in the
casing or with angle bracket
*3-PROVIDED
Connection of Spot T/R to Vital1
Vital 1 with 2 light beams Spot 1
Vital 1 with 3 lightbeams Spot 7
10
11
12
13
Approvals:
Laser scanner
Look Application:
0HOTOELECTRICGUARDINGOF
several risk areas
Features:
4YPE)%#
Easy to install
0ROTECTEDFROMWELDING
sparks/arcs
Easy to program
4 individual programmable
PROTECTIONAREASSIMULTAN
EOUSLYWITH0LUTO
A laser scanner that has the ability to scan

four individual areas
,OOK IS NOT AFFECTED BY AMBIENT LIGHT LEVELS SUN ETC OR
4HE ,ASER 3CANNER ,OOK HAS THE ABILITY TO SCAN FOUR welding arcs/sparks. The protection fields are quick and
individual areas. Each area can be programmed individually EASYTOCREATEONA0#INA7INDOWSENVIRONMENT)THAS
FORTHESPECIlCAPPLICATIONMAKINGITIDEALFORAUTO CARRIERS four individual programmable protection areas. Each area
that need to operate along different paths. The safety level consists of one personnel protection field with maximum 4
ISACCORDINGTO4YPE%. )TISAPPROVEDFORUSE MRADIUSANDONEWARNINGlELDOFMAXIMUMMRADIUS
as personnel protection in robot working areas, conveyor #HANGING BETWEEN THE AREAS IS EASILY ACHIEVED USING
equipment etc. The small design makes it easy to install. additional sensors.
Technical Data Warning field

Scanning distance: 2ADIUS M
Article number/Ordering ,OOK*3 Area: AREASSWITCHABLEBY6$#
data input
General data Output: 0.0 TRANSISTOR6$#M!
Scanning rate: 3CANSSEC 2ESOLUTION MMATM¼
Scanning angle: ² 2ESPONSETIME 80 ms
Operating voltage: 6$# 2EmECTANCEFACTOR MIN
Transmitter: ,ASERDIODE0ROTECTIONCLASS Contour measurement
#URRENTCONSUMPTION APPROXM! -EASUREMENTRANGE 2ADIUS M
Angle resolution: ² Output: 23
Weight: 2 kg 2ESPONSETIME 80 ms
Housing: (MM7MM 2EmECTANCEFACTOR MIN
$MM 2ESET manual or automatic
Personnel protection field Suitable interface safety relay: 242424*3"24OR0LUTO
Scanning distance: 2ADIUS M
Area: AREASSWITCHABLEBY6$#
input
Output: X/33$M!FAILSAFE
TRANSISTOR0.0OUTPUTS6$#
2ESOLUTION 70 mm at 4 m
2ESPONSETIME 80 ms
2EmECTANCEFACTOR MIN
Software - Look scanner
Function buttons Dialog box for selecting Inactive safeguarded -EASUREDAREALIMITS
1
which area pair to display AREAPAIR
Warning indication,
an object is inside the
An object is detected Active safeguadred area pair 1
6
inside the detection area, 2ED$ETECTIONAREA
safeguarded area the machine stops Green: Safeguarded area
Connection example - Look scanner with RT9 7
10
11
12
13
Stopping time and
machine diagnosis tool
Smart
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page
1
Stopping time________________________________________________________6:2
Stopping time and Machine Diagnosis Tool - Smart_______________________6:3 2
Smart Manager_ _____________________________________________________6:4
Smart and accessories________________________________________________6:6
10
11
12
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not quarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
13
Stopping time
Why measure stopping time?
— to find out which safety arrangements can be used in a certain area
around a machine, and where they should be located.
Stopping time
The safety distance (how far away from the risk area a safety
component must be placed) is based upon the machines stop-
ping time. The basic idea is that a safety component should
be placed so far from the risk area that it is not possible to
enter the area before the machine has stopped.
The stopping time for manually operated machines is espe-
cially important when light beams and light curtains are used
as safety components. By reflex action the operator tries to
grab or adjust if something has gone wrong in the machine
tool, even if the machine has started. It is then imperative that Where the safety distance is small, one can for example sit close
the machine stops before the hand reaches the risk area. to the machine and work, as in the picture on the left. If the safety
A short stopping distance is also of importance for getting distance is greater, it may be necessary to approach the machine
good ergonomics. to intervene, and also perhaps use additional protection to prevent
Grabbing or adjusting is also common when using auto- starting when someone is within the protected distance.
matic machines. Usually this is done to prevent production
down-time by quickly adjusting a work piece. The stopping devices around a machine based on its stopping time. When
time is also of great importance if someone trips and falls it is complete, this standard will become EN ISO 13855. The
into the machine. standard is general for all types of machinery, although for
Stopping time, walking speed (1.6 m/s) and hand speed some, where there is a harmonised C standard, the require-
(2.0 m/s) is used for the calculation of safety distances. ments for minimum distance and stopping time measurement
Sometimes a fixed minimum distance is also used. See will apply. In the case for example of mechanical press tools
the standard EN 999 for more details on the calculation of there is also a requirement in EN 692 for how stopping
safety distances. time measurements are to be performed, and in the case of
hydraulic press tools this is in EN 693.
Stopping distance
For safety contact strips it is extra important that the stop- Annual checks
ping distance is monitored. An incorrect stopping distance Wear in a machine is something that can affect braking and
could in many cases result in very high risks. The stopping motors, which means that the stopping time of a machine
distance is also needed during area limiting e.g. for robots can change with time. Certain other changes in a machine,
when dividing the working area into sectors. such as changing the weight of a workpiece or alterations in
pneumatic pressure, can also affect the stopping time. For
these and other reasons it is important to perform an annual
check on the stopping time.
How the stopping time affects the choice of protective

equipment – an example
There was a case where we measured the stopping time of
For door sensitive edges, it is important that the stopping dis- the rollers in a textile industry company. The company had
tance is shorter than the soft part of the sensitive edge. planned to place light beams or a light curtain in front of the
rollers to prevent the operators from being caught in the
Regulations and standards material and dragged in. The stopping time measurement
It is also important to measure the stopping time, to meet the showed that it took over one second for the rollers to stop.
requirements set by the machinery standards, directives and During this time the material was pulled in by almost two
regulations. Here we can help, with our long experience in metres. In order to obtain sufficient protection distance, the
the practical application of regulations and standards, from light beams would have needed to be positioned almost
the viewpoints of both the authorities and production. In ad- three metres from the machinery, and a light curtain about
dition we collaborate with the standardisation committees two metres away. The factory did not have so much space,
responsible for producing these standards. One example is nor was it realistic. The solution became instead vertical
the revision of EN 999, which deals with the placing of safety sliding safety barriers.
Stopping time and Machine Approvals: 1
Diagnosis Tool
Smart Smart shows graphs/values for:
Stopping time
Stopping distance
2
Speed
3
Position of stopping signal
Features: 4
Easy to use
Measurements with or with-

out electrical connection 5
Ideal for machine perform-
ance diagnosis
Calculation of correct safety

distances
6
Smart is ideal for safety supervision and for

diagnosis of machine operation
Smart is perfect for periodic monitoring of safety parameters
and other conditions for the maintenance and trouble-shoot-
7
ing of machines. Because Smart can compare old and new
Smart has many valuable features for machine diagnosis: graphs, it becomes easy to find out the reasons for machine
• Graphic presentation of measurements malfunctions. One can also supervise machines during opera-
• Easy to analyse stopping characteristics and movement
• Gives parameters for safety design (e.g. stop time)
tion and compare how they perform over time.
Stopping units and sensors

8
• Calculates minimum allowed safety distance
• Shows how the stop distance can be optimised Smart is a further development of our well established JSSM1
• Electrical reaction time and mechanical/hydraulic Stopping Analyser. All the stopping units and sensors for
the JSSM1 can also be used with Smart. The amount of
breaking can be identified and analysed
• Digital in/out signals and analogue inputs connection possibilities have also increased. Smart has 9
digital I/O, one input for an incremental sensor (for position
9
and speed) and two analogue inputs. This makes it easy to
measure sequences in conjunction with motion lapse and
other analogue values.
10
Webbsupport - Smart
On our web site http://customer.jokabsafety.com we
have a special page for you as a Smart customer.
Here you can keep up to date by downloading the latest
version of Smart Manager, manuals, drive routines or
11
read the FAQs.
12
13
Smart Manager
Smart is controlled in real time by a computer using the Smart Manager Benefits:
program. This performs measurements, and the measured data can be
saved and analysed. The measurements are saved in an SQL database, Simple program structure
with the ability to export data to Microsoft Excel if necessary. The program Shows the entire stop sequence
calculates the stopping time and protective distance, and can print out the
results, together with a graph of the event sequence. Smart Manager is Provides a machine movement
available in several languages: English, Swedish, Danish, German, French, “fingerprint”
Czech and Polish. Translation into other languages can easily be arranged Compares measurements
as necessary. The program is free, and is available for downloading from
our web site when purchasing equipment to measure stopping times. Calculates stopping time
Saves measurements to a
database
Exports measured data to Excel
Prints out a complete
measurement report
• Current values from sensors and the system

• Start conditions
• Stop signal conditions
• Shutdown conditions
• Measuring settings can be saved
Start menu
• Stop time data
• Zoom control
• Own cursors
Measuring
form
Stop signal
given
Measured
result
Relay contacts Machine
drop out stopped
Calculations
• Min., max. and average value and
standard deviation from a series of
System requirements measurements
Windows XP/2000/Me/NT • Protective distance can be calculated
100 MB free dsk space
Pentium II 233 MHz
128 MB RAM
Saving Archiving
1
• Select measurement series • Search filter
• State extra information, e.g. • Saved measurements
the conditions and special • Exported measurements
circumstances for the mea-
surements. 2
Conversion of analogue signals

Smart can measure and show graphs for two different analogue sensors at the same
3
time, with its inputs for 0/4-20 mA. Conversion of the measured current values can be
done automatically by setting minimum and maximum values and the units for the inputs.
In this way, for example, the results from an analogue pressure sensor can be shown and
calculated as 0-400 bar instead of 4-20 mA, or an analogue load cell as 0-2 kN. This also
means that if it is desired for the system to be triggered at a certain force, that force can
4
be defined instead of needing to calculate the equivalent current value.
Printout
Printing out is one of the most important functions of the program. Here is shown all the vital information about the mea-
surements that is needed for such items as annual checking or providing the basis for CE labelling of a machine. Since
5
the entire measuring sequence is shown in graphical format, one can understand why the stopping time has a certain
value and also, in some cases, see what needs to be done to minimise the stopping time. The graph also acts as a kind of
“fingerprint" of the machine movements, which means that different measurements can be compared with each other to
see how the stopping sequence varies from time to time, or from year to year. In this way the effects of e.g. worn brakes
or the effect on the machine control system can be seen. In order to get a complete basis from a measurement it is also 6
important to state what assumptions have been made and what conditions applied when deciding when and how the stop
signal was given.
Among other things, the stop signal details the person measuring, the measuring equipment, the machinery, the calcula-
tions and the protective distance. The printout also has a replaceable company logo and a field for extra information.
7
10
11
12
13
Smart and accessories
Smart Logger
The Smart Logger is the principal unit for Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
data collection. The logger has a USB Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-01 Smart Logger
connection to the PC and 8 off M12 con-
Dimensions: 62 x 220 x 80 mm. (wxhxd)
nections: one for the power supply to the
I/O, one connection for an incremental Weight: 0.5 kg
sensor, two connections for analogue Protection class: IP 67
sensors and four connections for other
Supply voltage: 24 VDC
I/O signals.
The Logger encapsulation is watertight, Response speed: max 1 ms
with M12 connections to prevent the Positional accuracy: +/- 0.1 mm
entry of particles and fluids in the work- 8 inputs, 4 outputs (NPN OC)
Digital I/O:
shop environment. To prevent the Smart
Logger from being damaged by incorrect Analogue inputs: 2 off, 0/4-20 mA
currents and voltages from external Encoder: 1 connection for a pulse sensor
equipment, all inputs and outputs, and
external units, are electrically isolated
from the processor in the Smart Logger
by means of opto-couplers.
SM2 Button unit

The SM2 is used in conjunction with the Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Smart Logger for measuring with a manual Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-02 SM2 Button unit
stop impulse, without an electrical
Dimensions: Size: 50 x 100 x 25 mm. (wxhxd)
connection to the machine. When an SM2
is, for example, pressed against an Weight: 0.2 kg
emergency stop button to stop the Application area: Two-handed control unit, Emergency
machine, the SM2 sends a signal to the stop, etc.
Smart Logger to start the measurement.
Supply voltage: Fed from the Smart Logger
An LED on the SM2 lights when the
desired stop position is reached. The SM2
is connected to the Smart Logger by an
M12 connection.
SM3 Relay unit

The SM3 is used in conjunction with the Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Smart Logger for automatic stopping Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-03 SM3 Relay unit
time measurements at the set position, or
Dimensions: 85 x 72 x 49 mm. (wxhxd)
alternatively a manual stop pulse. When a
stop signal comes from the Smart Logger Weight: 0.2 kg
a relay switches in the SM3. Application area: Electrical connection providing a stop
The SM3 then sends a signal to the pulse.
Smart Logger to start measuring, and
also activates the relay outputs to stop
the machine. The relay in the SM3 is Relay outputs: 2 NO, 2 NC, 6A/250 VAC.
reset via the software when a new Encoder: 1 connection for a pulse sensor
measurement is to be made. The SM3
is connected to the Smart Logger by an
M12 connection.
SM11 Flag unit

The Smart Logger is used in conjunction Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
with the SM11 for automatic measure- Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-11 SM11 Flag unit
ments of the stopping time and stopping
Dimensions: 145 x 85 x 37 (wxhxd). Shaft ø3 x 45 mm
distance. The unit is located in a light
curtain with the flag parallel to the beam. Weight: 0.6 kg
When the flag is activated, the light Application area: Ligh curtain, light beam
beam/light curtain is interrupted, and the
Protection class: IP 40
machine stops. The SM11 is connected
to the Smart Logger by an M12 con- Batteries: 10 rechargeable 1.2 V NiMH batteries.
nection. Total 12 V
Power: Max 1200 mAh (approx. 200 operations).
Temperature: 0 to +45°C.
Installation: On a table or a standard ¼” camera
tripod
Charger: SM14
SM5 1250/2500 Linear sensor
The SM5 is an incremental pulse sensor Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
1
for connection to a Smart Logger. The Article number/Ordering data: SM5/1250: 70-300-04 Linear sensor
sensor is protected by a robust enclo- SM5/2500: 70-300-05 Linear sensor
sure. The sensor and end of the cable
Dimensions: SM5/1250: 106 x 88 x 100 mm (wxhxd)
are secured to the machine by powerful
2
SM5/2500: 114 x 125 x 116 mm (wxhxd)
magnets. The SM5 is connected to the
Smart Logger by an M12 connection. Weight: SM5/1250: 1 kg
SM5/2500: 1.4 kg
Application area: Linear movement, e.g. press tools
Max length: 1250 or 2500 mm
3
Max speed: 5 m/s
Resolution: 0.1 mm
SM7 Rotation sensor

The SM7 is an incremental sensor for
connection to a Smart Logger. The
sensor detects rotational movement via
Manufacturer:
Dimensions:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
70-300-07 SM7 Rotation sensor
Sensor size: 46 x 40 x 59 (wxhxd)
4
a wheel rolling against a shaft. The stand
Stand size: Extended, approx. 400 x 50 x
secures the sensor with the aid of just
90 (wxhxd)
one knob. The stand itself is secured to
the machine by a powerful magnetic foot. Weight: 1.7 kg including stand
The SM7 is connected to the Smart Log-
ger by an M12 connection.
Application area::
Supply voltage:
Max speed:
Rotating motion, e.g. lathes, rollers
Fed from the Smart Logger
5 m/s
5
Resolution: 0.1 mm
Wheel circumference: 125 mm
SM13 Battery pack

6
SM13 is a battery pack for the Smart Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Logger, which makes the Smart a Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-23 SM13 Battery pack
completely mobile measuring tool. With
7
Dimensions: 145 x 85 x 37 mm (LxWxH)
the SM13 you don’t need to connect the
Logger to a wall socket for power, and Weight: 0.8 kg
can easily move it from one machine to Protection class: IP 40
another when you are measuring. Since
Connector: Negative pole at the centre of the char-
the SM13 battery pack is the same
ging connector
physical size as the SM11 flag unit, it
fits snugly into the SM9 carrying case. Current rating: Maximum 0.9A
8
The charger for the SM13 is called the Power: 2100 mAh. With normal use lasts
SM14 and provides a charging time of about 10-12 hours. (Higher capacity on
about 3 hours 15 minutes (2100 mAh). request.)
The SM14 also acts as afast charger for Batteries 20 rechargeable 1.2 V NiMH batteries of
the SM11. size AA(R06). Total 24 V
SM9 Carrying case 9

The SM9 is a practical carrying case with Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
pockets to suit the various Smart units. Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-09 SM9 Carrying case
Part of the protective foam insert in the
Dimensions: 535 x 155 x 430 mm (LxWxH)
lid of the case can be removed to make
10
room for a laptop computer, so that all Weight: 3.5 kg
the equipment required can be carried in
a single case.
Other accessories
Name Article number Description
11
SM6 70-300-06 AC/DC converter for Smart
SM14 70-300-24 Charger for flag unit SM11 and
battery pack SM13.
USB cable
Encoder adapter
70-300-15
70-300-13
USB cable for communication with
computer
Adapter for old type JSSM sensor
12
Stop unit adapter 70-300-14 Adapter for old type JSSM stop units
Extension cables 20-056-20, 20-056-21, 20-056-22, Jokab Safety's extension cables with 5
20-056-23 and 20-056-24 conductors ideal for all Smart accessories
13
Sensors and switches
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page 1
Why should you use sensors/switches?_________________________________7:2
How safe is a switch/sensor? _________________________________________7:3 2

Non-contact safety sensor Eden _______________________________________7:4
Safety Interlock switch JSNY5 _________________________________________7:8 3

Magnetic Switch JSNY7 ____________________________________________ 7:10
Safety Interlock Switch JSNY8 _______________________________________ 7:12 4

Safety Interlock Switch JSNY9 _______________________________________ 7:14
Magnetic lock Magne ______________________________________________ 7:16

5
Process lock Dalton ________________________________________________ 7:20
Safety lock Knox___________________________________________________ 7:24

6
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material,
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions, and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
12
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
13
Why should you use
sensors/switches?
- to supervise doors and hatches around
dangerous machines!
Assurance that a machine stops when a door or a hatch is

opened can be solved by using different types of switches
and sensors which are monitored with a safety relay or a
safety PLC. Switches and sensors are available both as
non-contact (dynamic or magnetic) and various types of
interlocking devices. Interlocking devices can be used when
it is required, via a signal, to lock a gate during processes
that cannot be stopped during certain operations. They are
also used with machines that have a long stopping time to
prevent someone from entering before the machine has
stopped.
- to ensure that a position is reached!

The sensor monitors that the robot is standing still in a
monitored position when someone enters the robot´s work-
ing area. The robot is then only stopped by the program. If
the robot leaves the position the power will be cut directly.
This is used when the robot does not stop safely without
restarting problems.
- to manage the safety in harsh

environments!
Non-contact dynamic sensors have a long lifetime because

they are not physically mechanically operated. They also
endure very harsh environments, e.g. cold, heat, high-pres-
sure wash-down which is important in the food industry
for example. Because the sensors are small, they are very
easy to position and can even be completely concealed in
doors and hatches.
1
Eden -
highest safety level and reliability Safety level
Our recommendation is to use the Eden sensor because
it is the safest and most reliable solution. The Eden sensor
2
is a non-contact switch and has a dynamic function. Also Eden -
it is possible to connect up to 30 Eden sensors in series sensor with
and still achieve safety category 4, in accordance with EN dynamic signal
954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
3
What requirements should one have on
sensors/switches?
The sensor/switch shall be reliable from both the safety Magnetic switch 4
and production point of view.
s!PERSONMUSTBEABLETOTRUSTTHATDANGEROUS
movements and functions are safely stopped by the Safety Interlock
sensors/switches. switch
s&ROMTHEPRODUCTIONPOINTOFVIEWUNINTENTIONALSTOPS
should be avoided.
Reliability 5
How safe is a sensor/switch?

7
In order to trust the safety function it is essential to be aware that a safety
sensor/switch must be mounted and be used according to the specifications.
The certification authorities only test the product according to the appropriate
standards and to the specifications from the manufacturer. 8
Mechanical switches order to reach the highest safety level. There are two types
For mechanical switches, e.g. key operated, this means that of non-contact sensors - active and passive. The active
a door or a hatch has to constructed to small tolerances in sensor, Eden, is constantly communicating via a dynamic
order for the switch, the key or the mounting brackets to last
according to the life time specification from the supplier. The
signal between the two parts and any failure will directly
lead to a stop signal. The passive type, a magnet switch, has
9
screws holding the parts have to be locked in such a way two reed contacts which are activated by a coded magnet.
that they cannot be loosened. In order to prevent material Both the passive and the active sensors are checked every
from getting into the slot for the key the environment has to time a door is opened. From a safety point of view the ac-
be clean. If a door goes outside the design tolerances from
wear, the screws loosen or material comes into the slot, this
tive sensor, Eden, is to be preferred because it is checked
constantly whereas the passive sensor is only checked
10
may lead to the interlocked switch not giving a stop signal when a door opens.
when the door is opened. Even two mechanical switches From the reliability point of view a long detection distance
on a door could fail to an unsafe state if the door somehow with large tolerances and a well defined on and off position
gets outside the tolerances of the switches. To prevent ac-
cidents the mechanical switch normally needs continuous
checks of both the switch and the installation.
is needed. The active sensor, Eden, fulfils these demands. A
magnet switch has smaller tolerances and an intermediate
position where only one contact opens. A bad installation
11
or vibrations can lead to an unintentional stop if one contact
Non-contact sensors/switches opens and closes again. The supervision of a two channel
For non contact sensors the risks associated with mechani- system is based on both contacts having to be operated
cal switches (see above) do not exist. If screws, brackets
or sensors get loose, it will lead to a stop signal. Therefore
in order to permit a new start. In a dynamic safety circuit
there is only one pulsed signal and therefore no intermedi-
12
only one sensor with dual or dynamic function is needed in ate position.
13
Approvals:
Non-contact safety sensor
Eden Safety sensor for:
Doors and hatches
Position control
Sector detection
Slot detection
Features:
Safety category 4 according to
13 ± 2 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
15 ± 2
1
13 ± 2 mm together with Vital or Pluto
Non-contact detection, large

sensing distance 0 - 15 mm
± 2 mm
5 Up to 30 sensors connected in
5
series to Vital at safety category 4
Versitile mounting, 360°

Flexible mounting and detection
The ability to operate at
long distances. Protection class IP 67/IP69.
A non-contact safety sensor for the highest Signal will penetrate through
safety level non-metallic materials (wood,
Eden - Adam and Eva is a non-contact safety sensor for use on plastic, etc)
interlocked gates, hatches etc. A coded signal is transmitted from
the control device Vital or from the safety PLC Pluto via Adam Safety light beams, E-stops and
to Eva which modifies the signal and sends it back again. The Eden can be connected in the
maximum sensing distance between Adam and Eva is currently same safety circuit together with
15 mm ± 2 mm. Vital or Pluto meeting safety
Up to 30 Edens can be connected in series to Vital and still
achieve the same safety level in the safety circuit. It is also
category 4 (EN 954-1/
possible to connect safety light beams and E-stops in the same EN ISO 13849-1).
safety circuit.
Adam is available with cable lengths up to 10 m and with LED indication on sensor and
M12 connectors. The LED on Adam provides indication of three status information via the con-
different conditions, contact/non-contact between Adam and nector cable
Eva and safety status. The same information is also available
via the Adam connection cable. Eden E is available for harsh Small hysteresis (< 1mm)
environments, as are Adam E and Eva E. Rapid blinking serves
as an alignment aid. There are also coded versions, Eden C,
Eden EC, Adam EC and Eva EC.
Application examples - Eden 1
Eden to detect position
Adam and Eva has contact
only if they are within 15 mm
from each other.
2
Adam on
wall.
Eva on robot.
3
Eden used for sector detection
Metal
Metal stops the signal between Adam and
Eva. Additional Eden sensor(s) can be
mounted to detect metal plate(s) in place. 4
Eden used to detect the position of the
saw guard.
Wood, plastic and other non-metallic
materials let the signal pass between
5
Adam and Eva.
6
Wood, plastic
etc
Eden can be hidden in doors and hatches
Non-metallic door material between 7
Adam and Eva allows the signal through
Mounting – Eden
80 mm 8
Mounting Adam with integral cable.
115
DA1
Mounting with one protection plate (DA1) for Adam
M12 using prewired moulded M12 connector.
9
120
Mounting with two protection plates (DA1) for Adam
M12 using M12 connector with glanded cable.
DA1 x 2
10
Wrong mounting without protection plate may
cause permanent damage to sensor.
Notes:
Four protection plates plates are supplied with Adam M12.
11
* To protect Adam and Eva protection plate (DA1) can be
used on both sides.
DA2 mounting
The DA2 mounting spacer must be used in order to
physically protect Eden from damage. Four spacers are
12
DA1, protection plate 2,5 mm DA2 provided with each Adam and Eva.
* Safety screw
13
Connection of Eden to Pluto
Connection of Eden to Vital 1
Technical data – Eden Life
Material
>107 cycles
Macromelt (Based on polyamid)
1
Eden E and Eden EC is also
Article number/Ordering data: 20-046-00 Eva covered by PUR (polyurethan).
20-046-06 Eva E
20-051-00 Adam M12 Chemical resistance
20-051-02
20-051-04
Adam 3 m
Adam 10 m
Macromelt: Cutting oils, vegetable and
animal oils, hydrogen peroxide,
diluted acids and bases: good
2
20-051-05 Adam 20 m
20-051-06 Adam E 10 m Alcohol and strong acids: not
20-051-07 Adam E 0.5 M12 recommended
20-051-08 Adam E 20 m PU (Eden E and Eden EC): Cutting oils, vegetable and
20-051-14
20-051-16
Eden C 10 m
Eden EC
animal oils,hydrogen peroxide,
diluted acids and bases,
alcohols: good
3
Safety category with Vital or Strong oxidating acids: not
Pluto (in accordance with recommended
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1) 4 4
LED on Adam
Colour
Weight
Yellow and black
Eva: 26 g
Green:
Flashing:
Eva within range, safety circuit
closed (door closed)
Eva within range, earlier safety
4
Eva E/Eva EC: 36 g
Adam M12: 30 g circuit open (door closed)
Adam 3 m: 220 g incl. cable Red: Eva out of range, safety circuit
Adam 10 m: 650 g incl. cable open (door open)
Eva is within 2 mm from maximum
Adam E10 m: 660 g incl. cable
Adam EC 10 m: 660 g incl. cable
Adam E 0,5 m + M12: 100 g incl.
Fast flashing:
Cable
sensing distance (door closed)
3 or 10 m, ø 5.7mm, black, PVC
5
cable 5 x 0.34mm² + screen, UL 2464
Power supply 24VDC +15%-25% Connector M12: 5-pin male contact
Power consumption Adam: without info output 45 mA
Max cable length

with info output max 55 mA
see Vital technical data
Connections
Brown (1)
White (2)
+24 VDC
Dynamic signal in
6
Blue (3) 0 VDC
Ambient temperature Black (4) Dynamic signal out
Eden/Eden C -40°C … +70°C (operation) Grey (5) Info output, see below
-25°C … +70°C (stock)
Eden E/EC -40°C … +70°C (operation)
(Test ok +90°C ... +100°C)
-25°C … +70°C (stock)
24 VDC when LED is green or flashing
(tolerance -2 VDC), 10 mA max
0 VDC when LED is red. (tolerance +2 VDC)
7
Protection class Warning: Incorrect connection may cause permanent damage to
Eden IP67 Adam devices.
Eden E/EC IP69K
Mounting Installation Eden/Eden C
M4 screw, e.g. safety screw
Eden Eden E/EC
8
20-053-42. Max. torque 2 Nm.
Screw to be locked with Loctite
or similar.
Installation EdenE/Eden EC
M4 screw, e.g. safety screw
9
20-053-42. Max. torque 2 Nm.
Screw to be locked with Loctite
or similar.
Detection distance max
Adam/Eva 15 ± 2 mm
Adam C/Eva C 12 ± 2 mm
Flash 2 mm before red position.
Flash 2 mm before red position.
10
Adam E/Eva E 12 ± 2 mm Flash 2 mm before red position.
Adam /Eva EC 10 ± 2 mm Flash 2 mm before red position. Adam 3 m Eva
Hysteresis approx. 1 mm Adam 10 m Safety screw. For more
Adam C 10 m screw options see the
Metal may have influence on detection distance.
This can be prevented by protection plates, DA1.
Minimum distance to metal
Adam M12 product list.
11
when there is metal on one or Safety screwdriver bit
more sides.
One More Adam E 0,5 M12,
Adam E/EC 10
Adam/Eva, Adam EC/Eva EC,
Adam E/Eva E
Adam C/Eva C
0 mm
0 mm
5 mm
2,5 mm
0 mm
5 mm
M12 m and Eva E/
EC for extreme
12
surroundings.
Minimum distance between
Eden pairs 50 mm
13
Approvals:
Safety Interlock switch
JSNY5 Application:
Gates
Hatches
Features:
2 NC + 1 NO (actuator in)
4 actuating positions
Actuator holding force 10 or
30 N
Switch operational description

JSNY5 offers three contacts which gives both the two con-
tacts needed for high safety level as well as a contact for
the indication of operating status.
The advanced design offers the choice of four operating
positions from only two actuator entries by simply rotating
the head through 180o.
However, when installed and in it's working condition only
one entry can be used, ensuring no other element can tamper
with the switch function.
When mounting the switch from the front two elongated
holes are provided to aid alignment with two set screw holes
for accurate fixing. Top fixing is also possible.
Three cable entries allow for a variety of cabling options
After opening the snap-on cover, the head portion can be removed
including through wiring.
(version A), after turning the head through 1800 (version B) it
can be replaced onto the body of the switch and be locked into
Positive forced disconnected contacts position by closing the snap-on cover. This ensures 4 actuating
The design assures that the contacts will not fail or be held positions are possible.
in a normally closed position, due to failure of the spring
mechanism or the welding/sticking of the contacts.
relays as for example from the RT-series, the safety PLC Pluto
Protection from unauthorised or incidental access or Vital (Tina) the requirements for both hatch and gate switch
To avoid unauthorised operation the JSNY5 switch is supervision can be fulfilled. To obtain the same level of safety
manufactured using multicoding to GS-ET 15. The switch as Eden, two switches per gate are required.
cannot be defeated by screwdrivers, magnets or any other
mechanism. Regulations and Standards
The JSNY5 is designed and approved in accordance with
Safety level appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
The positive forced disconnect contacts gives a high safety 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
level. By combining the JSNY 5 with one of our suitable safety EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088 and GS-ET 15.
Technical data
1
Article number/Ordering data: 20-022-00 JSNY5A holding force 10 N
20-022-01 JSNY5B holding force 30 N
Colour Black and yellow label
Enclosure/Cover
Actuator
PA 6 (UL94-VO)
Steel
2
Min. opening radius for actuator on a hatch 150 mm
Ambient operating temperature -30°C to +80°C
Contacts (actuator in) 2 NC + 1NO (NC are direct opening action)
Mechanical life 1 Million switch operations
Max switching frequency
Fixing
30/min
body 2 x M5, actuator 2 x M5
3
Cable entry 2x M20 x1.5
Weight approx. 0.13 kg
Degree of protection IP65 IEC 60529 / DIN VDE 0470 T1
Rated insulation voltage
Rated operational current
400 V AC
5A 4
Utilisation category AC-15/DC-13
Short-circuit protection Fuse 6A Slow acting, 16A quick acting
CSA 5A 300V AC B300 (same polarity)
5
Assembly - JSNY5
Easy accessibility for wiring Protected contact block Prevention of actuator dismantling
7
The snap-on cover is released by a screw- A transparent cover protects the contact A cover plate with a one-way snap-fit
driver and can be opened to an angle of block from external elements during the which seals the mounting screws prevents
1350 providing easy access to the wir- installation and wiring process. unauthorised dismantling of the actuator
ing terminals. Should the snap-on cover assembly. The cover plate must be mount-
not provide adequate security, a retaining
screw can be used.
ed to prevent overtravel of the switching
mechanism.
8
Contact Description - JSNY5
9
4
21 2
2
-3
-1
-2
mm
33
11
21,5
Actuator
withdrawn
Overlapping contact 33 - 34.
The overlapping contact 33 -34 enables
operational status indication of eg. incorrect 10
5 adjustment of switch before the positive
Actuator forced disconnect NC contacts open.
3,5
inserted
3,0 Note!
Traction travel
The switch must not be used as an end
stop! 11
Accessories and spare parts
s3TANDARDACTUATOR
s#ABLEGLAND
s3NAP ONCOVER
s4INA!WITH-CONNECTIONFORADYNAMICLOOP
s4INA"WITHCABLECONNECTION
s4INA!WITH-AND-CONNECTIONSFORADYNAMICLOOP
12
s&LEXIBLEKEYFORSMALLEROPENINGRADIUS
13
Approvals:
Magnetic Switch EMC
JSNY7 Application:
Gates
Hatches
Position control
Features
Small size
IP 67
Switch operation description

The magnetic switch is designed to operate in dirty industrial
environments and is certified to the highest level of safety
regulation when working together with a suitable JOKAB
SAFETY safety relay or Safety-PLC Pluto. The magnetic
switch is small and resistant to both dirt and water, and has
no dust collecting cavities making it usefull in environments
where hygiene is paramount. The small size of the switch
makes it easy to position and hide on gates and hatches.
The magnetic switch has a long working life since no
mechanical contact is made during operation.
Contacts
The magnetic switch has one closing and one opening
contact. Both contacts have to be monitored. The contacts JSNY7 is resistant to both dirt and water.
may be monitored by either the RT9 safety relay or other
suitable relays in the new RT-series, i.e. RT6, RT9 or Safety
PLC Pluto.
Protection from unauthorised or incidental access

To avoid unauthorised operation of the JSNY7 switch it is
only possible to actuate the JSNY7R with the coded magnet,
JSNY7M. Other magnets, screwdrivers and tools have no
affect on the switch contacts.
Safety level Regulations and Standards

The JSNY7 is approved to the highest level of safety regula- The JSNY7 is designed and approved in accordance with
tions, category 4 according to EN954-1 together with safety appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
relay in the RT-series. The magnetic switch is approved and 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
certified by DNV and BG. EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088 and GS-ET 15.
Technical data
4,5
1
6,5
Article number/ordering data: 20-023-00 JSNY7R-3 Magnetic switch mm
3 m cable 68
20-023-01 JSNY7R-6 Magnetic switch 14
10,7
7,2
2,5
78
6 m cable
20-023-02
20-024-00
JSNY7R-10 Magnetic switch
10 m cable
JSNY7M Magnetic switch
88 5
0
2
25
Colour Black
Enclosure/Cover PA 6 (UL94-VO)
Supply voltage max 30 VDC
13
Switch current max 100 mA
3
3
Max switching frequency 1 Hz
Mechanical life 3 x 108 switch operations, depending on load
Operating temperature range -5oC to +70oC (moveable)
-20oC to +70oC (fixed)
Connection Cable ø4.5, 4x0.25 mm2, 3 meter ; PVC
Switching point
(other lengths upon request)
Min. switch-on point 5 mm
Max. switch-off point 14 mm
Electrical connection 4
Two-channel switching, high safety level.
Weight Coded magnet: 32 g
Sensor with 3m cable: 133 g
black brown
Protection class IP67
5
grey blue
6
Electrical connection description - JSNY7
Electrical Connection example

7
Three JSNY7 connected to RT6
safety
Door 1
relay.
NOTE!
8
Door 2 Safety components drawn in re-
leased position.
Door 3
NOTE!
This solution with 3 magnetic
switches only complies with cat-
9
egory 3 as per EN 954-1/EN ISO
13849-1.
To reach highest level of safety only
one magnetic switch should be con-
nected to the safety relay. 10
11
12
13
Approvals:
Safety Interlock Switch
JSNY8 Application:
Gates
Hatches
Features:
Robust design
Universal installation
2 NC + 2 NC outputs
1000 N actuator holding force
Description In the magnetic lock (JSNY8M) version, the locking mecha-

The JSNY8 Safety Interlock Switch, in conjunction with the nism is only in the locked position when the solenoid (E1-E2)
machine control system, enables gates/movable guards etc to is supplied with operating voltage. Release of the actuator key
be locked in their protective positions, thus preventing access is only possible when the operating voltage is removed from
to machinery until dangerous operations have ceased. the solenoid (E1-E2).
Applications include:
s PROCESSESWHICHCANNOTBEINTERRUPTEDSUCHASWELDING Optional features
s MACHINERY WITH A LONG STOPPING PROCEDURE SUCH AS PAPER The following optional features are available:
machinery that requires a long braking operation. sACTUATORTOOPERATEATSMALLERRADIUS
s PREVENTIONOFUNAUTHORISEDACCESSTOAPARTICULARAREA s CUSTOMERSPECIlCAPPLICATIONS
The JSNY8 has 2 NC + 2 NC positive force disconnection Tamper-proof

contacts. The first pair closes when the actuator key is pushed The JSNY8 is tamper-proof. The safety device cannot be ma-
into the head. The other pair closes when the locking mechanism nipulated by screwdrivers, magnets or other tools.
is in the locked position. The head can be set in four positions,
thus providing the safety device with four different operating Safety level
positions. These are selected by twisting the head as shown The JSNY8 has double forced disconnection contacts to the
in the diagram above. The leading edges of the actuator key actuator key and the locking mechanism. The actuator key has
a triple coding design. To achieve maximum safety level in the
are reinforced and bevelled in order to guide it properly into the
connection to the machine’s control system, it is recommended
hole. The JSNY8 is encased in a robust metal housing (IP67)
that the JSNY8 is monitored by an appropriate Jokab Safety
providing a high level of protection to the internal operating
safety relay, Pluto safety-PLC or Vital. To obtain the same level
components.
of safety as Eden, two switches per gate are required.
Two versions
The JSNY8 is available in two basic versions, either with a spring JSNY8S JSNY8M
lock or a magnetic lock.
In the spring lock (JSNY8S) version, the locking mechanism
moves into the locked position directly when the door is closed
and the actuator key is pushed into the lock. The actuator key can
only be released and the gate opened by supplying operational
Regulations and Standards
voltage to the solenoid (E1-E2).
The JSNY8 is designed and approved in accordance with
The JSNY8S also has a emergency ’unlocking’ facility to en-
able the actuator key to be released without the energisation
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
of the solenoid (E1-E2).
EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088, GS-ET 19 and EN 60947-5-1.
Technical data
1
Article number/Ordering data: 20-030-00 JSNY8M 24DC
20-030-01 JSNY8S 24DC
20-030-05 JSNY8S 230AC
20-030-15 JSNY8M 230AC
Colour
Enclosure
Black
Metal housing
2
Actuator key Steel & plastic (PA6)
Min. operating radius for hatch 400 mm (smaller radius on request)
Actuator holding force 1000 N
Working temperature
Contacts
actuator key inserted
-30°C to +60°C
2 NC
3
locking mechanism, locked position 2 NC 50
Mechanical service life 1 million switch operations 30
Installation fixings 3 x M5
Cable entry
Weight
Enclosure class
2x M20 x 1.5
550 g
IP67
,5
ø5ø5.5
2200
55
4
Operating voltage 24V DC, 230 V AC 81
Rated insulation voltage 250V

JSNY8/9N2
Rated operating current 10A
Rmin: 150 mm
Utilisation category AC 12 250V/10A
AC 15 230V/4A
Fuse 10A slow-acting, 16A quick-acting
Flexible actuator. 5
Short-circuit protection
Power consumption 5.2 W
8
Note: Do not use switch as end
stop!
Contact description JSNY8S/M - JSNY8S/M 10

Contact
travel Actuator withdrawn
Contact opened 11
Contact closed
JSNY8S
Key actuator inserted
JSNY8M
Key actuator inserted Actuator inserted
12
Normally locked Normally unlocked
Fmin= 20 N
(E1-E2 unpowered) (E1-E2 unpowered)
13
Approvals:
Safety Interlock switch
JSNY9 Application:
Gates
Hatches
Features:
Compact and robust
Universal installation
2 X (1NO+1NC)
Actuator holding
force 1500 N
Eight head configurations
The control unit offers eight op-

LED status indication (optional)
erating positions that provide the
actuator with eight different input
options.
Description In the JSNY9M (magnetic lock) version, the mechanism

The JSNY9 is used for locking a gate/hatch, to prevent access is only locked when the gate/hatch is closed i.e. the actua-
to machinery, until hazardous operations have ceased. tor key inserted and the solenoid (E1 E2) supplied with the
Applications include: operating voltage. The gate/hatch can only be opened when
sPROCESSESWHICHCANNOTBEINTERRUPTEDEGWELDING this operating voltage is removed.
sMACHINERYWITHALONGSTOPPINGTIMEEGPAPERMACHINERY
which requires a long braking operation. Optional features
sPREVENTIONOFUNAUTHORISEDACCESSTOAPARTICULARAREA The following optional features are available:
s,%$ DISPLAY INDICATING THE STATUS OF THE ACTUATOR KEY
The JSNY9 is equipped with a 2 x (1NO +1 NC) contact locking mechanism and contacts.
configuration, the first pair of contacts changeover when the s!CTUATORTOOPERATEATSMALLERRADII
key is inserted. The second pair of contacts changeover when s#USTOMERSPECIlCAPPLICATIONS
the locking mechanism is in the locked position.
Protection from unauthorised access
The JSNY9 switch is encased in a robust plastic housing The JSNY9 is designed to protect against unauthorised
and can be mounted either horizontally or vertically. The access; screwdrivers, magnets or similar tools cannot
advanced design of the head provides eight possible key operate the safety switch.
insertion options, this is achieved by mounting the head
either vertically or horizontally on the base unit, as shown in Safety level
the diagram. The location for the actuator key is reinforced In order to achieve a high safety level, the JSNY9 switch is
and bevelled to ensure a smooth operation. equipped with dual sets of contacts operated with a coded
actuator key . In order to meet the required installation safety
Two versions level it is recommended that the JSNY9 safety switch is
The JSNY9 switch is available in two basic versions, either with monitored by an appropriate JOKAB SAFETY safety relay.
a spring lock or an electro-magnetic locking mechanism. To obtain the same level of safety as Eden, two switches
The JSNY9S (spring lock) switch operates immediately per gate are required.
when the gate/hatch is closed, i.e. when the key actuator is
inserted into the locking mechanism. The gate/hatch can be Regulations and Standards
opened and the actuator key released only by supplying the The JSNY9 is designed and approved in accordance with
operational voltage to the solenoid connections (E1 E2). The appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
JSNY9S also has a manual emergency unlocking facility to 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
enable authorised release of the actuator key. EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088, GS-ET 19, EN 60947-5-1.
Technical data
1
Article number/Ordering data: 20-036-01 JSNY9S 24VUC
20-036-12 JSNY9SLA 24VUC with LED
20-036-21 JSNY9M 24VUC
20-036-32 JSNY9MLA 24VUC with LED
Colour
Enclosure/Cover
Black
Polyamid PA6
2
Actuator Steel & plastic (PA6)
Min. key operating radius 400 mm (smaller radius available on request)
Actuator holding force 1500 N
Operating temperature
Contacts
(actuator in)
- 25o C to + 70o C
1 NO + 1 NC
3
Locking mechanism in locked position 1 NO + 1 NC (NC are direct opening action)
Mechanical life 1 million switch operations
Installation fixing 4 x M5
Cable entry
Weight
Enclosure Class
3 x M20 x 1.5
approx. 300 g
IP67
4
Operating voltage 24 V AC/DC
Isolation voltage 250 V
Thermal Current 2.5 A
Utilisation category
Short-circuit protection
AC 15 230V / 4A
Fuse 6 A slow acting
NB.
The safety switch must not be 5
Power consumption 1.1 VA (56 VA during 0.2s) used as an end stop!
22,4
Rm
in:
40
0 ø4,8 7
32-36
9,6
15
19,5
20 7,8
79,4
3
37,5
45
51
50 30
8
21
15
ø14
5
135
JSNY8/9N1
3xM20
170
ø5,5
5
124 20
ø5,3
81
9
30
32
42,5
2 5
184 JSNY8/9N2
Rmin: 150 mm
10
Contact description - JSNY9 S/M
Actuator travel
Actuator extracted
11
Contact open
Contact closed
JSNY9S
Actuator inserted
Locked position
JSNY9M
Actuator inserted
Unlocked position
JSNY9SLA/MLA
See separate data sheet
for switches with LED
12
(E1-E2 unpowered) (E1-E2 unpowered) indication. Actuator inserted
Fmin= 27 N ± 15%
13
Approval:
Magnetic lock
Not ready at time of print
Magne
Application:
Electrical locking of doors and
Magne 2
hatches to production applica-
tions that are sensitive to uninten-
tional/unnecessary interruptions.
For safety supervision the Magne 2
Magne 1 has an integrated Eden.
Magnetic lock with indication

Features:
The Magne 1 is a magnetic lock which has been adapted for
use in industrial applications and other harsh environments. Robust construction
It can electrically lock and hold a door closed with up to
1500 Newtons of force and when power is turned off no No moving parts
magnetic material will stick on the magnet surface.
Strong Magnetic holding
Magne 1A can be used together with Eden door position
sensors providing protection from dangerous machine force: 1500N
movements. Magne 2 already has an Eden sensor built in. Can stand and operate in
Use of M12 connectors makes it easy to connect several
harsh environments
Magne units and Eden sensors in series enabling control
and monitoring by either a Pluto safety PLC or a Vital safety Locked/unlocked indication-
module. Via the connection cable it is also possible to Possible to connect in series
obtain an indication signal informing if the Magne unit is
locked or not.
with Eden sensors
No current peaks on activation
Accessories:
s -OUNTINGKITFORCONVENTIONALDOORWITHFITTINGAND Magne 2 in combination with
screws for assembly on Jokab safety Quick-Guard a handle profile provides a
fencing system (5-15mm door gap) complete door solution
s 0LASTICHANDLE
s (ANDLEPROFILEFORMOUNTINGONAHINGEDDOORWITH*OKAB
Safety’s Quick-Guard fencing system (5-15 mm door gap). Handle profile that hides
Magne completely when
the door is closed.
Article no.: 42-023-01
Magne 1A with installation kit Magne 2A with installation kit Magne 2A with installation kit
(JSM D21B) and handle (incl. screw) (JSM D23) for sliding door fitted (JSM D21B, JSM D24) and
fitted on profile. on profile. handle (incl. screw) fitted on
Product numbers: 42-022-00, Product numbers: 42-022-10 profile.
42-023-05 and 42-023-10 and 42-023-02 Product numbers: 42-022-10
42-023-05, 42-023-03 and
42-023-10
Technical Data Magne
1
Article number/ordering data: 42-022-00 Magne 1A including anchor plate
42-022-10 Magne 2A including anchor plate and Eva
42-022-01 Magne 1B incl. anchor plate
42-022-12 Magne 2B incl. anchor plate and Eva
42-023-05 JSM D21B Anchor plate installation kit
42-023-01 Handle profile for Magne
42-023-02 JSM D23 Sliding door fittings
2
42-023-03 JSM D24 Installation kit for Eva
42-023-04 Anchor plate with permanent magnet
42-023-10 Handle for JSM D21B
Power supply: Magnet: 24 VDC + 15% -20% Installation tolerance
Power consumption:
Eden: 17–27 VDC, ripple max 10 %
Magnet: 7 W (300 mA at 24VDC)
3
Eden: 45–55 mA (see data for Eden)
Operating temp. range: -20°C to +50°C
Protection class: IP67
Weight: Magne 1: 610 g
Holding force:
Magne 2: 700 g
Anchor: 290 g
24 VDC: Min 1500 N
4
0 VDC: 0 N (Magne 1A/2A)
0 VDC: 30 N (Magne 1B/2B)
Contacts: Reed sensor (not safe)
Dimensions - anchor
Switch current max
Mechanical life:
Connector:
100 mA
>107 switch operations
M12 5-pole male connector (Magne 1)
5
M12 8-pole male connector (Magne 2)
Connections: Magne 1:
(1) Brown Locking, +24 VDC
(2) White Sensor supply
(3) Blue 0 VDC
(4) Black NO-contact
(5) Grey NC-contact
Anchor plate for Magne 1B/2B
with permanent magnet
6
Magne 2:
(1) White Dynamic signal input
(2) Brown +24V DC
(3) Green Locking +24V DC
(4) Yellow Locking 0V DC
(5) Grey Information closed (max. 10 mA)
7
(6) Pink Dynamic signal output 10 mm
(7) Blue 0V DC
(8) Red Information locked (max. 100 mA) Dimensions - cell rubber
8
Dimensions Magne 1
9
10
Dimensions Magne 2
11
12
13
Holding force - Magne 1 and 2
Holding force / Hållkraft
1600
1400
1200
1000
Newton
800
600
400
200
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Volt
Connection example - Magne 1 and 2
Connection example - Magne 1 in series 1
7
Connection example - Magne 2 in series
10
11
12
13
Approval:
Process lock Not ready at the time of printing
Dalton Use:
Doors and hatches
Advantages:
Small and robust
Integrated with Eden
Flexible installation
High enclosure classification
– IP 67
Withstands severe environments
Low current consumption
Status information with LED on
the lock housing and in the cable
connection.
Dalton M12 Eden M122 for severe environments
Dalton – the intelligent process lock Assembly

Dalton is a locking unit that is intended for use in preventing Dalton can be assembled with its opening in two directions.
unnecessary process stoppages, i.e. it is not a safety lock. It In order to ensure that Dalton works without any problems,
can be used either as a free-standing lock or integrated with the ball latch must be resting, i.e. not pressed in by the lock
Eden as a safety sensor. In the unlocked state the door is tongue when the door is closed Dalton's brackets are there-
held closed by a ball catch and locked mechanically. If nec- fore made to ensure the lock tongue and ball latch positions
essary, the holding force of the ball catch can be adjusted. can be adjusted.
The unit only permits locking if the ball catch is secured and
when the Eva is in contact with the Adam (depending on
the variant). When an input is supplied with voltage, the ball
catch is locked.
Dalton is easily connected with an M12 connector. The
Tina junction block can also be used for distribution of
both the safety and locking functions. The Dalton status is
indicated by LEDs and can also be read by a PLC via the
information output.
Dalton with 5-pole Dalton Eden with Dalton M121 Dalton M122
or 8-pole connector 5-pole or 8-pole
connector to Dalton
BW00314 - Example connection of Dalton to Vital 1 1
BW00196 - Dalton and Eden connected to Vital 1 or Pluto 6
10
Tina 12A junction block 11

Tina 12A can be used to connect two Daltons with Edens with a cable to the apparatus enclosure.
The summed information that indicates the states of both the Dalton and Eden also goes to the apparatus enclosure.
Transfer cables
A transfer cable can be used when the Dalton's 8-pole contact is to be connected to that of the Tina 4A, or
12
the Tina 8A's 5-pole M12 outlet. Note that the information from the Dalton and Adam cannot be
used.
13
Technical data - Dalton Resistance
Stainless steel Good resistance to most acids,
Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB except for hydrochloric and
Article number/ sulphuric acids.
ordering data: Connections Connector to connect Dalton
Dalton M111 20-038-00 8-pole male plug (varies depending on type)
Dalton M311 20-038-07 5-pole male plug, 8-pole male plug, M12
locking pin 4 5-pole male plug, M12
Dalton L001 20-038-90 Only ball latch, no Outlet for externally connected
electrical functions Adam female plug M12, 5-pole
20-038-10 5-pole male plug,
Dalton M315 locking pin 4, small Colour markings (pins)
Function 8-pole Colour 5-pole Colour
mounting plate for 1 (White)
the tongue Dynamic input signal, Adam
+24 VDC 2 (Brown) 1 (Brown)
Dalton M113 20-038-04 8-pole male plug, 3 (Green) 4 (Black)
angle brackets for Lock signal
Not used 4 (Yellow) 2 (White)
Jokab enclosure 5 (Grey)
Information Adam
Dalton - Lock with securing plate for separately connected Dynamic output signal, Adam 6 (Pink)
Eden 0 VDC 7 (Blue) 3 (Blue)
Information Dalton 8 (Red) 5 (Grey)
Dalton M112 20-038-03 8-pole male plug
Dalton M312 20-038-08 5-pole male plug, Warning
locking pin 4 Dalton locks mechanically. If the lock is forced, the Dalton can be
Dalton L002 20-038-91 Only ball latch, no permanently damaged.
electrical functions,
mounting plate also
for Eden
Dalton - Lock with M12 connector for connection of separately
mounted Eden
Dalton - Lock with integrated Eden
Dalton M124 20-038-09 8-pole male plug,
5-pole female plug
for Adam, angle
brackets for Jokab
enclosure
Accessories
DA 1 20-053-00 Spacer 2.5 mm for
Adam and Eva.
M12-CT0214 20-060-01 Transfer cable 0.2

m M12 5-pole plug
8-pole female plug
Tina 12A 20-054-18 Distribution block for

two Dalton Edens
with 8-pole cables
Locking function M - Locked when energised
LED indication
L - Only ball latch =Red =Green =Paus Information function
Colour Black
24 VDC +25/–20% 1 Locked
Operating voltage
0 Closed but unlocked
Current consumption 0 Open
Unlocked 40 mA
Locked 130 mA Alarm:
Lock input 5 mA 1Hz Lock has not entered the
Information output Max. 10 mA unlocked state
Eden See the data for Adam M12 1Hz Eden or ball catch not in
Enclosure classification IP67 position = open
1Hz Open, locking not permitted
Holding force
Unlocked 25-100 Nm 1Hz Lock has not entered the
Locked 2000 Nm locked state
Material
Ball catch, securing plate Anodised aluminium 1Hz Undervoltage - locking not
Enclosure Anodised aluminium permitted
Lock tongue, securing plate Stainless steel 1Hz Overvoltage
1Hz Overtemperature (> 80°C)
Dimensions drawing, Dalton M111, Dimensions drawing, Dalton M124 1
Dalton M311, Dalton L001
(and Dalton M121)
Dimensions drawing, Dalton M122, Dimensions drawing, Dalton M315

Dalton L002 and Dalton M112 5
8
Dimensions drawing, Dalton M113
10
11
12
13
Approval:
Safety lock Under review
Knox Application:
Locking doors to cells/lines
with long stop times.
When you need a robust
lock
Knox for secure locking Advantages:

Double locking function as
specified in PL e/cat. 4 (EN
ISO 13849-1)
Withstands harsh
environments
Status information with LEDs
on lock housing and at cable
connection.
Controlled to locked and
Knox - Double safety lock as specified in PL e/cat. 4 unlocked positions - remain
locked/unlocked in the event
Knox is a double lock that complies with the highest safety level (two lock cylinders of power failure.
with monitored positions) that can be used both as a safety and process lock.
The locking function is electronically controlled and is bi-stable, i.e. it retains its Electronic connection only on
position (unlocked/locked) in the event of a power failure. the door frame
The handles operate as they would on a normal door apart from the exterior
handle also having a reset function, and an interior handle that can be used for
emergency opening. Its design and durability mean that it is ideal for harsh envi-
ronments as the sensors in the lock are non-contact and the lock is manufactured
of stainless steel.
Open Emergency opened Reset, Operational mode

openable locked and reset
(emergency opening
only)
Technical data – Knox LED indicator – Knox 1
Make JOKAB SAFETY AB LED indicator
=Red =Green =Paus Function
Product number/
ordering data:
LED 1
Knox lock cylinder right hung 20-105-00
Knox lock cylinder left hung
Knox frame section
20-105-01
20-105-20
Locked (and reset)
Locked, no dynamic signal in 2
Accessories Unlocked
Tina 12A 20-054-18 Distribution block for LED 2
two Knox Reset
Not reset
Lock function S/M - unlocked and locked with
voltage. Alarm LED 2 Dirt indicator reset sensor 3
Operating voltage 24 VDC +/- 15%
Reset
Power consumption Not reset
Electronics 70 mA (in locked position)
Lock/lock inverse 135 mA (when locking/unlock-
Total max
Information output
ing)
150 mA
4
Max. 10 mA
Insulation class IP65
Holding strength
Unlocked
Locked
5000 N
(10,000 N ultimate breaking
strength)
5
5000 N
(10,000 N ultimate breaking
strength)
100 ±3
Connection
Colour marking (pin)
Male plug M12, 8-pole
6
Function 8-pole Colour 228
Dynamic input signal 1 (White)
+24 VDC 2 (Brown) 124
Lock 3 (Green)
Lock inverse
Information Locked
4
5
(Yellow)
(Grey) 7
Dynamic output signal 6 (Pink)
0 VDC 7 (Blue)
Information reset 8 (Red)
Warning
Knox locks mechanically. Forcing the lock may damage Knox perma-
nently.
10 ±7,50 8
58 9
40
110
10
256
11
12
13
Connection example - Knox
Connection example - Knox and Pluto
Connection example - Knox with other unlocking
1
7
Connection example - Knox with downtime monitor
10
11
12
13
Control devices
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page 1
Why should control devices be used? __________________________________8:2
Three-position devices - JSHD4 _______________________________________8:4 2

s Highest safety level ____________________________________________________8:5
s Versions and possibilities ________________________________________________8:6
s Technical data ________________________________________________________8:8
s Connection examples __________________________________________________8:9 3
Unique world-wide two-hand device - Safeball ________________________ 8:10
s Technical data ______________________________________________________ 8:11
s Connection examples ________________________________________________ 8:13 4
s4WOHANDCONTROLDESK*34$WITH3AFEBALL _______________________________ 8:14
Two hand device - JSTD20 _________________________________________ 8:18

s Technical data ______________________________________________________ 8:19 5
s Connection examples ________________________________________________ 8:19
Safety foot-operated switch - Fox ____________________________________ 8:20

s Technical data ______________________________________________________ 8:22
6
s Connection examples ________________________________________________ 8:23
10
11
12
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarentee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
13
Control devices
7HYSHOULD#ONTROL$EVICESBEUSED
..for the machine operator to be able to directly start
and stop dangerous machine movement.
Three-position device
Three-position devices, hold-to-run devices and enabling In an emergency situation the operator can either
devices are used during trouble-shooting, programming and press harder or release the three-position device
test running when no other safety components are possible to stop the machine.
or suitable. The device is held in the hand and the operator
can in an emergency situation either press harder or entirely
release the device to stop the machine.
§
From Directive 98/37/EC, 1.2.5
If, for certain operations, the machinery must be able

to operate with its protection devices neutralized, the
mode selector must simultaneously:
...
- permit movements only by controls requiring sus-
tained action,
...
Ergonomic three-position device, JSHD4

with double three-position button that gives a stop signal
when released or fully pressed in.
The two-hand device protects against "after-grasp";
1
if the operator by reflex tries to enter or reach into a
machine during the dangerous machine movement.
2
Two-channel all the way out to the hand
Safeball is an ergonomic two-hand control device with
four built-in buttons.
3
Two-hand control device
A two-hand control device is used when it must the guaran-
teed that the operator's hands will be kept outside the risk
area. If there is a risk that someone else other than the opera-
§ 4
tor can reach into the machine without the operator seeing
it, the safety device must be supplemented by something From Directive 98/37/EC, 1.3.8
more, e.g. a light beam.
To be able to operate the machine with the two-hand de-
vice, all the buttons on the device have to be operated within
SECONDSOFEACHOTHER4HISISCALLEDCONCURRENCE!LL
Guards or protection devices designed to protect ex-
posed persons against the risks associated with moving 5
parts contributing to the work (such as cutting
the buttons also have to be returned to their initial position tools, moving parts of presses, cylinders, parts in the
before one can start again. If any button is released during process of being machined, etc.) must be:
the machine movement the machine will be stopped. Using ...
the stopping time one can calculate the necessary safety
distance. A safety distance of less than 100 mm must not
- otherwise, movable guards complying with require-
ments 1.4.1 and 1.4.2.2.B or protection devices such
6
be used. as sensing devices (e.g. nonmaterial barriers, sensor
The highest safety level is assured by connecting the mats), remote-hold protection devices (e.g. two-hand
buttons of the two-hand device to a safety relay. The safety controls), or protection devices intended automati-
relay checks for concurrence and that all the buttons have
returned to their initial position before a new start can be
cally to prevent all or part of the operator’s device from
encroaching on the danger zone in accordance with 7
made. The safety relay also gives a stop signal if any of the requirements 1.4.1 and 1.4.3.
buttons are released. ...
8
The foot operated switch is used when the opera-
tor has to hold the material with both hands during
processing. 9
10
Safety foot operated
switch with three-position
function. §
A foot operated switch is used when the operator has to From EN 693 Machine tools - Safety - Hydraulic
11
hold the material during processing. The pedal must have a presses
safety cover to prevent unintentional start. For seated work
one must also have a foot support to facilitate the operator 5.4.6.1 Push button, foot switch and start control devic-
holding his foot in the pedal´s off position.
The highest safety level is secured by monitoring the pedal
es shall be adequately shrouded to prevent accidental
operation. Foot switches shall permit access from one
12
with a safety relay. direction only and by one foot only.
13
Approvals:
Three-position
device the safest solution during trouble shooting, Use:
Troubleshooting
programming and testing
Test running
Why three-positions? Programming
An operator who is under pressure must be able to give a
stop signal, whether in panic he/she pushes harder on the
button or just lets go of it.
Advantages:
Three-position devices, hold-in and acceptance devices
can be used for trouble shooting, programming and test Ergonomic
running in situations where no other protection is available ,%$INFORMATION
or feasible.
If the operator has to enter a risk area to trouble shoot or run Adaptable
a test, it is extremely important that he/she is able to stop the
machinery without having to rely on someone else to stand
by a stop button that is further away. In addition, no-one else
should be able to start the machinery from the outside after 2EDANDGREEN,%$S
it has been stopped by use of the three-position device.
Front and top buttons with
Hold to run device or Acceptance device, what is the
selectable functions.
difference?
Hold to run device: The start signal is given when the but-
ton is pressed. The stop signal is given when the button is
released or pushed fully in. Duplicated three-position
Acceptance device: The start signal for separate start- button that provides a
ing is given when the button is pressed. The stop signal is stop signal when it is re-
leased or pressed fully in.
given when the button is released or pushed fully in. “Sepa-
rate start” means, for example, that a program start signal
is sent to the robot via a separate button in the acceptance
device.
The three-position device is designed to be ergo-

nomic
The device is ergonomic, both in respect of its shape, fit-
ting to the hand, and the way the buttons are operated. It
is easy to operate the three-position device using just the
fingers, and the middle position provides a secure resting
POSITION4HEDEVICEHAS,%$INDICATIONSTHATSHOWTHEOP-
erational status, i.e. stop or ready signal. The two additional RT9 safety relay that monitors
buttons can be used, for example, for start/stop, up/down the duplicated three-position buttons
or forward/back. Internally the device is duplicated. The and wiring.
three-position function itself is built up of two completely
independent three-position buttons which are felt by the
user to be one button.
Three-position devices in different versions
fety.com
1
Highest safety level
whether the button is pushed or released 2
When the three-position button is released you will obtain a dual

stop. It is essential that the machine stops when you put aside the
When the three position button is pushed all the way in you will
obtain a dual stop. It is essential that the machine stops in an
5
three-position device, for example during adjustment. emergency situation.
How does a a three-position device work?

Released position
6
Safety level
A safe Enabling or Hold to Run device should function
as follows:
1. The Stop signal in released (top) and bottom position
shall have the same safety level.
2. Provide a ‘Start’ or ‘Ready’ signal in a distinct middle
7
position.
3. After a ‘Stop’ in the bottom position, a ‘Start’ signal or
‘Ready’ signal is not permitted until the three position
push-buttons have been totally released and again
pressed to the middle position.
8
This function is achieved mechanically within the three
position push-buttons in the device. Middle position Bottom position
4. A Short or Open circuit in the connection cables
shall not lead to a dangerous function e.g. ‘Start’ or
‘Ready’ signal. 9
In order to meet the above conditions, the three-position Regulations and standards
switch must be connected to a suitable safety relay with 4HE *3($ IS DESIGNED AND APPROVED IN ACCORDANCE
a two channel function, e.g. RT6, RT9 or JSBT4, which with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of
can monitor that both three-position buttons are working
and that there is no short or open circuit in the connec-
the applicable regulations and standards are: 98/37/EC,
%.)3/ %. %.)3/
10
tion cable or the switch.
11
Three-position device fitted to a Panel assembly of JSHD4H2 on a

12
machine control unit. programming unit for robots.
13
Three-position device
versions and possibilities
Top button
4HE*3($THREE POSITIONDEVICEISREADILYAVAILABLEIN
many standard versions. It is also possible to customize
the three-position device for specific applications.
The three-position device can be customized by the
selection of the following parts: Front button
s Front button - for programme start, low speed, etc.
s Top button - for programme stop, grip devices, etc.
s Bottom plate - wide bottom plate for fixing
interlocking devices and Eden (non-contact sensor)
or narrow bottom plate for more flexible handling.
Cable, straight or spiral cable with connectors or
assembled on the device
s LEDs, alternative connections
s Designed to work with a PLC or a safety relay
Bottom plates
Connections
Cables
Dimensions
JSHD4
1
63
2
Three-position push button JSHD2C
The button is the main component in a safe three-position
solution. To achieve the highest safety level two buttons are
3
173
160
used in a two-channel system.
4
-8
5
Panel assembly JSHD4H2

A panel assembly suitable for building into programming units
or similar control boxes. Provides simultanous activation of
both of the three-position buttons.
40 6
mm 62
10.3

16
JSHD2C 1.4

14.3
ø2,8
(2x) 7
20.7
17.3

8
3.4

JSHD4H2 60
21
External assembly JSHD4H2A

The external assembly is similar to the panel assembly unit,
22
12
although it is a ‘handle’ design making it suitable for assembly

18
on the outside of a control box. 9

mm
80
JSHD4H2A
- 10
34
11

Upgrading kit JSHD4S2

This kit is used to upgrade òlder robot´ control systems
mm 39
106
12
and will, together with a suitable safety relay, achieve a safe
two-channel three-position function.
13
Pin Color STD Color JSHK-S
Technical data - JSHD4
A White White
B Brown Brown
Electrical contact ratings
Three-position button: 6$#MAX!MINM!6 C Green Green
Extra button: 6!#$#MAX! D Yellow Yellow
Protection class )0 E Grey -
Operating temperature TO²# F Pink Grey
Function indication G Blue Pink
Three-position buttons ready signal: {9ES|GREEN,%$ H Red Blue
{.O|RED,%$ I Black Red
Material Polyamide 6.6 J Purple -
Insulation resistance min 20 M Ohm K - -
Operation force APPROX. L - -
Mechanical life 1 000 000 cycles to middle position STD: JSHK, JSHK-E, JSHK-T
Ordering data/Article numbers

Article numbers Description
Standard versions
*3($4HREE POSITIONDEVICEWITHEXTRABUTTONSTOPFRONT
*3($$4HREE POSITIONDEVICEWITHEXTRABUTTONFRONT
*3($%4HREE POSITIONDEVICEWITHEXTRABUTTONTOP
*3($&4HREE POSITIONDEVICEWITHOUTEXTRABUTTONS JSHK0 12 pole
*3($8.4HREE POSITIONDEVICEFORHARSHENVIRONMENTS connector for JSHD4.
*3($-54HREE POSITIONDEVICEFOR%DEN
*3($&!4HREE POSITIONDEVICEFOR0,#WITHSPIRALCABLE
*3($0$4HREE POSITIONDEVICEWITHPOTENTIOMETER
*3($(!4HREE POSITIONDEVICEFOREXTERNALPANELASSEMBLY

*3($34HREE POSITIONDEVICE!""UPGRADINGKIT
*3($(4HREE POSITIONDEVICEFORINTERNALPANELASSEMBLY Spiral cable, available in
*3($#TYPE%4HREE POSITIONBUTTON different lengths.
*3($#TYPE+4HREE POSITIONBUTTON
Accessories
20-003-03 JSHK0 12 pole connector
*3(+-ETRECABLEANDCONNECTOR Cable, available in

20-003-01 JSHK10 10 Metre cable and connector different lengths.
*3(+-ETRECABLEANDCONNECTOR
20-003-04 JSHK20 20 Metre cable and connector
*3(+-ETRECABLEANDCONNECTOR
*3(+ %METREEXTENSIONCABLE

20-003-30 JSHK-T1 Cable drum
20-003-20 JSHK16S 1.6 Metre spiral cable and connector

20-003-21 JSHK20S 2.0 Metre spiral cable and connector Cable drum
*3(+3-ETRESPIRALCABLEANDCONNECTOR
*3-!7ALLBRACKETFORINTERLOCKSWITCHESAND

three-position device
*3-!7ALLBRACKETFOR!DAM
JSM5A Wall bracket for JSM52A Wall bracket
*3-7ALLBRACKETFORTHREE POSITIONDEVICE interlock switches and for three-position device.
three-position device.
NOTE! Contact us for other variants.
Connection example - Three-position device JSHD4 to Pluto 1
S3
5
Time-limited entrance/exit
!FTERLIFTINGTHETHREE POSITIONDEVICEOUTOFITSHOLDER*3-!THEINTERLOCKEDGATECANBEPASSEDFORENTRANCE
6
into the risk area within x sec. The time limit is set in the Pluto program.
7
Connection examples - Three-position device JSHD4 with various safety modules
10
11
12
13
Approvals:
One and two hand devices
Safeball™ Safeball for:

Presses
Punches
Fixtures
Shearing machines
Features:
Two hand device
One hand device
Ergonomic
Low activation force
Flexible mounting
Several grip possibilities
Highest safety level
Two channel switching in each
hand
A two hand device which is

comfortable and easy to use.
SAFEBALL™
Unique World Wide Two hand device When can a Two hand or One hand control be used ?
A Two hand control can be used when it is necessary to
Safeball™ consists of a spherical ball containing two embed- ensure that the operator is outside and must be prevented
ded pushbutton switches, one on each side of the ball. By from reaching into the hazardous area. If the operator de-
using this pushbutton configuration, the risk of unintentional cides, after the start signal has been given to the machine,
activation is minimised and the device is simple and ergo- to make an ‘after-grasp’ i.e. try to adjust the part that has
nomic to use. been placed into the machine, then a dual stop signal is
Safeball™ can be utilised for either One hand (one Safe- given to the machine.
ball™) or Two hand (two Safeballs™) applications. In either A one hand control device can be used when the operator
application, and in order to meet the required level of safety, cannot reach the hazardous area with his/her free hand or
the Safeball™ switches are monitored by specified/certified on less dangerous machines.
JOKAB SAFETY Safety relays (see electrical connection).
In the case where Two hand control is used, both Safe- Highest Safety Level
balls™ i.e. all four pushbuttons have to be activated within 4HE3AFEBALL»ISCERTIlEDBY$.6 (Inspecta) in Sweden for
SECONDS)FONEORMOREPUSHBUTTONSARERELEASEDA3TOP use as a Two hand control device, when used with a JSBR4
signal is given to the machine. In order to provide the highest JOKAB SAFETY Safety relay or Pluto Safety-PLC, in accord-
level of safety the Safeball™ design provides the operator ANCEWITHTHEHIGHESTSAFETYLEVELINSTANDARD%.TYPE
with a dual switching function and short-circuit supervision )))C AND%. %.)3/ SAFETYCATEGORY
in each hand.
Each Safeball™ is ergonomically designed and has both
its cover and actuator made of environmentally-friendly
polypropylene. The design allows for comfort of use for all
hand sizes and operation from numerous gripping positions.
Mounting of the Safeball™ is also very flexible allowing the
device to be mounted in the most ergonomic position for
the operator. A top cover is not needed as activation switches
are fitted on each side of the Safeball™.
Technical data - Safeball
72
1
Article number/Ordering data: *34$ !3AFEBALLWITHM 68
cable
*34$ "3AFEBALLWITHM
cable

*34$ #3AFEBALLWITHM
cable
*34$ %3AFEBALL././
2
0,2 m cable
71
Material: Polypropylene
Colour: Yellow and black
Size: Height: approx. 71 mm,
$IAMETERMINMM
$IAMETERMAXMM 23 23
3
$IAMETERBASEMM
Weight: 0.2 kg with 2 m cable X mm
0.7 kg with 10 m cable
0.1 kg with 4x0.2 m wires
Temperature:
Protection class:
²#TO²#OPERATING
²#TO²#STORAGE
IP67. Not intended for use under water Chemical resistance at 20°C.
4
Operating force: Approx. 2 N
Actuator travel: 1.3 +/- 0.6 mm
Chemical Resistance
Max switching load: 6!$#RESISTIVELOAD Alcohols good
Recommended load:
Min switching load:
6M!$#
6M!$#RESISTIVELOAD
Paraffin oil
Milk
good
good
5
Contact resistance: 100 mohm Silicon oil good
Life, mechanical: > 1x106 operations at max. 1 Hz
Acetone good
Life, electrical: $EPENDANTUPONELECTRICALLOAD
characteristics Please contact us for more information.
Connection cable:
*34$ !
*34$ "*34$ %
M06# CABLEXMM 2
XMM2 wires, approx. 0.2 m

6
*34$ # M06# CABLEXMM2
Function - Safeball
Two hand control device
7
The Two hand control device is implemented by using Versions
two Safeballs™, each having two internal pushbuttons. Safeball is available in several versions to meet different
The Safe-balls™ must be mounted a minimum distance mounting requirements.
between each other (see Mounting description).
By utilising two pushbuttons in each device a double
s JSTD1-A - The standard version with actuators made of
plastic and 2 m of cable. 8
safety function is provided in each hand. s J STD1-B - Similar to the standard version but without a
The highest safety level is achieved by connecting all cable. Instead it has four wires, each 0.2 m long.
four pushbuttons to the JOKAB SAFETY JSBR4 safety s JSTD1-C 3IMILARTO*34$ !BUTWITHMCABLE
relay or Pluto Safety-PLC. The safety relay gives a dual and s JSTD1-E 3IMILARTO*34$ "BUTWITH./CONTACTS
supervised safety function and requires input activation
WITHINSECONDSINORDERTOSTARTTHEMACHINE)TALSO
9
checks that all four pushbuttons have returned to their
deactivated positions before a new start is allowed. The
JSBR4 safety relay also provides a stop signal if one or
more pushbuttons are released.
Activation of a
pushbutton.
10
One hand control device
Safeball™ is also a very practical method of providing a one
hand control device as it is very easy to find and activate
by the machine operator. One hand devices should only be
used when the operator cannot reach into the hazardous
area with his/her free hand or on less dangerous machines.
11
Before fitting the necessary risk assessment must be made
to determine suitability of this type of control. To achieve
the highest safety level for One hand control the Safeball™
must be connected to a JOKAB SAFETY safety relay (See
Electrical Connection).
3AFEBALL»*34$ISCERTIlEDBY$.6
Approval number: 12
01-MAL-CM-0101 (Two-hand device)
01-MAL-CM-0100 (One-hand device)
13
Mounting - Safeball
The Safeballs™ can be mounted in many different ways. Alternative mounting methods
They can be mounted on a table, a machine, on a support
or wherever suitable for ergonomic reasons. The Safeball™
can be mounted in a fixed position or on a tilting and/or
rotating support. This flexibility of mounting permits the
Safeball™ to be fitted in the best ergonomic position
for the ease of operation by the operator. The distance
requirement between two Safeballs™ or between a Safe-
Mounting on a table.
ball™ and a wall or edge of a table depends on how the
Safeball™ is mounted. Safeball™ can be mounted with
FOUR-SCREWSOR34SELF TAPPINGSCREWS
Note: When Safeballs™ are mounted in such a way that

the distance between them can be adjusted to less than
the specified minimum, the mounting screws must be Example of alternative
locked to ensure any changes in the distance between mounting.
the two balls cannot be made. Mounting with ball joint,
which can be rotated and
angled.
Approved Two hand device

To be an approved Two hand device, both Safeballs™ must be mounted a minimum distance apart in order to prevent
operation of both balls with one hand. Safeballs™ must be fitted a minimum distance from the edges of tables or
a wall. It is essential that Safeballs™ are correctly installed in order to prevent unintended activation of the devices
with part of the body in combination for example with a wall.
Mounting distance -Safety distance - Safeball
Mounting distance mm
Table mounting of two Safeballs™.
In order to prevent cheating the dis-
tances shown are the minimum al-
lowed.
120
180 120
Safety distance
The Safety distance is the distance between the Safe-
balls™ and the dangerous machine movement. The
safety distance requirement can be calculated using S
the following formula for Safeball™ in accordance with
the approving authority and EN 999: S= KxT+C
Where
S= safety distance in mm The safety distance is the distance between the
K= hand speed, 1600 mm/s Safeballs™ and the dangerous machine movement.
T= total stopping time for the dangerous movement
(including the response time of the safety relays
in seconds)
C= Constant= 0 mm for Safeball.
Note: S must never be less than 100 mm.
Electrical connection - Safeball 1
Two hand device
Safeballs™ are designed to be connected to a Jokab Safety JSBR4 Safety relay or Safety PLC to achieve the highest safety
requirements for a Two hand device.
Example of two devices connected to a Jokab Safety 2

JSBR4 safety relay. Response time on receiving a stop
SIGNALFROM*34$MS
3
black
black
blue
blue
grey
grey
red
red
One hand device

7
When used as a One hand device the Safeball™ is designed to be connected to a Jokab Safety RT6, RT7 or RT9 Safety relay in order
to achieve the highest possible safety level for this type of control.
Example of a single Safeball™ connected to a Jokab Safety relay RT9.

4HERESPONSETIMEAT@STOPISMS. 8
10
11
12
13
Two hand control station
JSTD25 with Safeball
With a JSTD25 two hand control station you have a prepared two hand unit that is easy to install, while utilising the
good ergonomics of the Safeball. There are several variants to meet differing needs. All versions meet EN 574, EN
954-1 and EN 13849-1 and are supplied with the internal connections made, to simplify installation.
JSTD25 for fixed installation
*34$ ! % 4WO 3AFEBALLS MOUNTED ON A STEEL HOUSING base, securing holes for mounting on the rear. The Safeballs
Replaces a traditional two hand device. Is available with are connected to terminal blocks, for the user to connect
an emergency stop button and ball joint fixtures for the the external wiring through one of the two inlet alternatives
Safeballs. Three 22 mm openings are prepared on the top (underneath or at the rear).
for buttons or signal lamps. Hatch for wiring routeing in the
JSTD25A!RTICLENO 4WOHANDCONTROLstation JSTD25D!RTICLENO 4WOHANDCONTROLstation

with 2 Safeballs. WITH3AFEBALLS*3-#
JSTD25B!RTICLENO 4WOHANDCONTROLstation JSTD25E!RTICLENO 4WOHANDCONTROLstation

with 2 Safeballs and emergency stop button. WITH3AFEBALLS*3-#ANDEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTON
For mobile installation 1
*34$&!RTICLENO 4WOHANDCONTROLUNITWITH

2 Safeballs.Two Safeballs mounted on the ends of an alu-
JSTD25G Article no. 20-007-62 3IMILARTO*34$&BUTTHE
dimensions additional equipment and type of connection
3
minium profile, shielded by over hand guards. Replaces a can, to a large extent, be customised before delivery. Can
traditional two hand device. Installed with the aid of grooves also be equipped with doubled protection plates for use in
in the aluminium profile. Connection to an M12 connector particularly severe conditions.
underneath. Can be equipped with an external emergency
STOP 3-),% AND AN %$%. SENSOR FOR POSITION CONTROL
Its low weight makes this particularly suitable for frequent
4
repositioning.
For mobile installation with a built-in Eden sensor 5
7
JSTD25P-1!RTICLENO 4WOHANDCONTROLUNIT can vary at different operating stations, since each station
portable. Two Safeballs mounted on the ends of an aluminium can be connected separately. Connection via an 8+1 Zylin
profile, shielded by over hand guards. With built-in Eva sen-
SORFORPOSITIONCONTROL$EVELOPEDASAPORTABLETWOHAND
connector. Accessories are a connector, spiral cable with
connector and suspension shelf. 8
device, where the response of the machine to operation
Accessories - JSTD25 9
JSTS31 Article no. 20-007-41 JSM C5 Article no. 20-007-09 JSTK40S
3TANDWITHSPACERRINGFOR*34$! % Angled ball joint for installation Article no. 20-007-67
(JSTS30 without spacer ring). of a Safeball on a table or a steel MLONGSPIRALCABLEFOR*34$0
housing.
JSTK80S
10
Article no. 20-007-68
MLONGSPIRALCABLEFOR*34$0
Height
11
MM
ø43
12
32
23
23
13
Connection example - JSTD25/A/B/D/E
Connection example - JSTD25F
Connection example - JSTD25H
Connection example - JSTD25P-1 1
4
Dimension sketch - JSTD25
370 ±1 90.5 ±0.5 5
129 ±2
6
95
M12, 5-pole male
220±0.5
4
356 ±2
10
11
12
13
Approvals
Two hand device
JSTD20 JSTD20 for:

Presses
Punching machines
Cutting machines
Fixtures
Features:
$URABLEMATERIAL
With or without emergency
stop pushbutton
&ULlLSREQUIREMENTSOF%.
Highest level of safety
Conventional Two hand device OFBOTHOPERATINGPUSHBUTTONSWITHINSECONDSTWOHAND

4HECONVENTIONAL*34$4WOHANDDEVICEUTILISESAWELDED DEVICETYPE)))#INACCORDANCEWITH%.ANDCATEGORY
steel housing. Two operating pushbuttons are protected INACCORDANCEWITH%. %.)3/ )FTHEEMER-
by over hand guards. Between these pushbuttons there is gency pushbutton is installed it should be provided with two
space for a emergency pushbutton and two extra controls normally closed contacts and be connected to a separate
or indication lamps. Below each of the operating pushbut- safety relay, e.g. from the RT series or Pluto.
tons is one normally open and one normally closed contact.
To start and run the machine both pushbuttons must be Why use a Two hand device?
ACTIVATED WITHIN SECONDS )F ONE OR BOTH PUSHBUTTONS A two hand device can be used when it is necessary to
are released a stop signal is given to the machine, and all ensure that the operator is outside and must be prevented
contacts must return to their deactivated positions before a from reaching into the hazardous area. If the operator de-
new start is allowed. cides, after the start signal has been given to the machine,
The design is robust and can withstand harsh environments to make an ’after grasp’ i.e. try to adjust the part that has
and long use. The pushbuttons and contact blocks are simple been placed inside the machine, then a dual stop signal is
to assemble for quick and easy installation. The device can given to the machine.
be mounted directly on the machine, on the Jokab Safety 4HENEW*34$ISEQUIPPEDWITHANEWTYPEOFLARGE
fencing system or on the JSTS30 floor mount. For use with OVERHANDGUARDSINACCORDANCEWITH%.4HESEPREVENT
portable Two hand devices the JSTS31 floor mount, which unintended activation by for instance a knee or elbow.
is provided with a spacer ring to fulfil the requirements of A Two hand device only protects the operator using it. Large
%.ISRECOMMENDED4HE*34$ISAVAILABLEWITHOR machines operated by several operators can be equipped
without an emergency stop pushbutton. with one control for each operator.
To calculate the correct safety distance, which depends
Highest level of safety on the machine’s stopping time including the response time
Correct connection to a Jokab Safety JSBR4 safety relay or of the relay, the use of the JOKAB SAFETY Smart Stopping
Pluto Safety PLC ensures the highest level of safety with dual analyser is recommended.
and supervised safety function and requires input activation
Technical data - JSTD20
Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden mm
1
Article number/ 20-007-20 JSTD20A
ordering number 20-007-21 JSTD20B
20-007-22 JSTD20C
Weight JSTD20: 6.4 Kg
JSTS30: 20 Kg
JSTS31: 23 Kg
2
170
Colour Black housing, Black pushbuttons,
Black floor stand.
Temperature -10°C…+70°C (Operating)
-20°C to +70°C (storage)
490
3
5
14
Material Housing: 3mm Steel
Gasket: Rubber
Pushbuttons: Plastic
Operating pushbuttons
Diameter 60 mm
Operating force Approx. 9N
4
Operating distance 3.5±1mm
Mechanical life 106 operations
Emergency pushbutton
(JSTD20B only)
Diameter 40 mm
Operating force 40N
Mechanical life 3 x 105 operations
5
Contacts Mechanically separated contact
blocks
Operating pushbuttons 1 NO + 1 NC
Emergency pushbuttons 2 x NC
Isolation voltage 690V rms
Contact resistance 20 mohm
6
Rated current 10A
Utilisation categories AC 15 240V 3A
DC 13 240V 0.27A
Cabling screw clamp terminals, 1 or 2 wires
with max. cross-section 2.5 mm2.
Contact material silver alloy on brass
7
Standards EN 418, EN 574, EN 954-1,
EN ISO 13849, EN 60947-1,
EN 60947-5-1, EN 999
Connection example - JSTD20

The Two hand device is intended for use with Jokab Safety’s JSBR4 safety relay (or Pluto Safety PLC ) to ensure the
8
highest level of safety. The JSBR4 ensures that all contacts have returned to their deactivated positions before a new
start is allowed. The safety relay also requires that all contacts are activated within 0.5 seconds. The JSBR4 gives a
stop signal if one or both of the pushbuttons are released.
9
JSTD20A Two hand device without
emergency stop
10
JSTD20B Two hand device with
emergency stop
11
12
13
Approvals:
Safety foot operated switch
Fox Foot operated switch for:

Presses
Rolls
Bending machines
Machine adjustment, etc.
Features:
Control device that frees the

hands
Three-position pedal
High safety level
Robust
Fox – a safety foot operated switch

which provides extra safety for the
operator
The Fox safety foot operated switch is used when the opera- Two-position function, Fox 21/22
tor has to have both hands free. Fox is very safe because A two-position foot operated device means that:
of its unique three-position function, duplicated contacts 1. A stop signal is provided in the top, or pedal released,
and robust safety cover. Fox has been developed for indus- position.
trial applications i.e. it has high mechanical durability. Fox is 2. A start/ready signal for separate starting is given in the
used for presses, bending machines, during adjustment of bottom, or fully depressed, position
machinery, etc. Fox is available in single and double pedal
versions (the double pedal is used for such tasks as steering Safety cover protects against unintentional actuation
back and forth). A robust metal safety cover prevents unintentional machine
start by a person or falling objects, thereby fulfilling the
Three-position function, Fox 31/32 standards which demand this. The robust aluminium safety
A safe three-position foot operated device means that: cover can withstand harsh environments.
1. Stop signals are provided in the top and bottom posi-
tions. Safety level
2. Start/ready signals for separate starting are provided in A high safety level is secured by monitoring the pedal´s
a distinct middle position. double contacts with one of our safety relays (see "Con-
3. After a stop in the bottom position a start or clear signal nection examples"). Furthermore the third 'emergency' po-
cannot be given before the reset knob has been operated sition of the Fox 31/32 pedal enhances safety.
and then the pedal pushed into its middle position.
Pedal function - Fox 31/32 1
1. The Pedal (A) is in its initial position. The contacts are
open and the machine is stopped.
2. The contacts are closed when the pedal (A) is pressed

down until the distinct contact point (B) is reached, and the
machine starts.
2
(A) Pedal (B) Contact point 3. If the operator in an emergency situation presses the
pedal to the bottom, a stop signal is immediately sent to the
(C) Lockout Reset knob

machine (the contacts open). The switch is mechanically
locked in this position and it has to be reset before a new 3
start can be made.
4. Reset: The contacts will only be disengaged after the

knob (C) is reset and the pedal is returned to its initial posi-
tion (A). 4
Versions - Fox
5
Fox 31 Fox 21
Pedal with three-position
execution and reset knob.
Pedal with two-position
execution.
6
Note. Also available as a double pedal, Fox 22
Fox 32 7
Double pedal with three-
position execution and reset
knobs.
Technical data - all versions of Fox Switching capacity AC-15: x6!
x6!
9
Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden 6!
Ordering data/ Fox 21 20-160-21 Degree of protection as per
Article number Fox 22 20-160-22 EN 60529, DIN VDE 0470/1 )0
Colour
Fox 31
Fox 32
20-160-01
20-160-02
Yellow and black
Mechanical life
(Number of operations)
6
10
Position 2 1x10
Rated insulating voltage Ui 690 V Position 3 3x10
Connection cable cross sections Material

Safety cover Aluminum
single resp. multi-strand
Fine wire with core end bush
1-4 mm²
Pedal
Ambient operating
Shockproof thermoplastic 11
(DIN 46228) MM¶
temperature ²TO²#
Terminal screws M4
Weight (approx.)
Short circuit protection, fusible with safety cover
cut-out (gL)
Insulation requirements met
!MAX Fox 31
Fox 32
1.7 kg
3 kg 12
up to 480V~
13
Dimensions - Fox 31/21
1 x M 20
Dimensions - Fox 32/22
2 x M 20
Connection example - Fox 1
10
11
12
13
Emergency stops
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page 1
Why do you need an Emergency stop? _________________________________9:2
Emergency stop for enclosure installation – INCA 1 _____________________9:4 2

Emergency stop with LED – Smile _____________________________________9:6
Emergency stop with LED – Smile Tina _______________________________ 9:10 3

Emergency stops in series with Tina (adapter unit) ____________________ 9:14
Emergency-stop Grab Wire Safety Switch JSNY10 _____________________ 9:16

4
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book or any associated promotional and information material
12
13
Why do you need an
Emergency stop?
So that anyone shall be able to stop a ma-
chine during a machine break-down or if
someone is in danger.
How do I recognise an E-stop?
All E-stops which comply with the relevant standards for

marking are red with a yellow background. An emergency
stop grab wire shall be red for high visibility. A sign that
indicates the location of the E-stop shall be green with a
white picture and possibly with text in the local country's
language.
How shall an E-stop stop the machine?

From 98/37/EC
An E-stop shall stop the machine as quickly as possible. To
obtain a quick stop one either removes the power directly ...
or one lets a frequency converter 'run down' and afterwards This device must:
after a little delay, remove the power. An E-stop shall not - have clearly identifiable, clearly visible and quickly
create other hazards. Therefore a risk analysis must be made accessible controls,
for the E-stop to be correctly connected. - stop the dangerous process as quickly as possi-
ble, without creating additional hazards,
- where necessary, trigger or permit the triggering
of certain safeguard movements.
...
Requirements for E-stops are stated in the following standards and regulations
98/37/EC The Machinery Directive EN ISO 13850 Safety of machinery – Emergency

Clause 1.2.4 in Annex 4 gives requirements for the emer- stop — Principles for design
gency stop function for new machines). See also clause A harmonized standard that gives technical specifications
1.2.2 Control devices. (see chapter “Standard and Regu- for the requirements in the Machinery Directive. Could also
lations”) be used for older machinery.
Council Directive 89/655/EEC of 30 November EN 60204-1 Safety of Machinery - Electrical equip-

1989 concerning the minimum safety and health ment of machines – Part 1: General requirements.
requirements for the use of work equipment by Harmonized standard that gives requirements for the electri-
workers at work cal equipment of machinery including the emergency stop
Clause 2.4 gives the requirements for the emergency stop actuator/function. Se clauses 9.2.2 and 9.2.5.4.2.
function for older machines. See also clause 2.1. (see
chapter “Standard and Regulations”)
1
10
11
12
13
Approval:
Emergency stop for enclosure C E R T I F I E D BY
installation
INCA 1 Application:
INCA 1 Tina Emergency stop for fitting in

housing
As general stop (black print)
Advantages:
Terminal blocks
Several emergency stops in
series
sELECTRICALCAT)NCA4INA
sPRINTMECHANICALCAT
Only 53 mm's construction
depth
With LED info in print
Info output (Inca1 Tina)
Print IP65, connector IP20
INCA 1 is an emergency stop device designed for installa- There is an LED in the emergency stop button, which
tion in a 22.5 mm slot in an apparatus enclosure. There are shows the current status:
two versions, the "INCA 1 Tina" with electronic adaptation s'REENALL/+
for connection to a dynamic safety circuit and connection s2EDTHISEMERGENCYSTOPHASBEENPRESSED
to Vital and Pluto units, and "INCA 1" that contains only s5NLIT).#! ORmASHINGREDGREEN).#!4INA A
contacts, for connection to a safety relay. The electrical protective device earlier in the circuit has been pressed
connections are easily made in an apparatus enclosure in.
with a detachable terminal block, which also provides ex-
cellent measuring points.
Pluto INCA 1(S)

A
+24V (+) S13
S34 1
IQ 10 (A2) S23
A pulse 2
0V Yellow front ring and emergency stop signs for emergency stop.
0V A2
3
I1 S24
4
I0 S14
5
Pluto Vital INCA 1(S) Tina

+24V A1 A
1
IQ 10 T
A pulse 2
0V
0V A2
3
I0 R
4
5
Technical data - INCA 1/INCA 1 Tina
Manufacturer: Jokab Safety AB, Sweden
Article no./Ordering data: 30-054-01 INCA 1
30-054-00 INCA 1 Tina
30-054-03 INCA 1S
30-054-02 INCA 1S Tina
30-054-04 Front ring Yellow
for INCA
30-054-05 Emergency
stop sign S D F,
22.5mm
30-054-06 Emergency
stop sign E F D,
22.5mm
Impact resistance
(half sinusoidal) Max. 150m/s², pulse width 11 ms,
3-axis, as per EN IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance
(sinusoidal) Max. 50 m/s² at 10 Hz…500 Hz,
10 cycles, 3 axis, as per EN IEC
60068-2-6
Climate resistance
Damp heat, cyclical 96 hours, +25 °C / 97%, +55 °C
/ 93 % relative humidity, as per EN
IEC 60068-2-30
Damp heat, sustained 56 days, +40 °C / 93 % relative
humidity, as per EN IEC 60068-2-78
Dry heat 96 hours, +70 °C, as per EN IEC
60068-2-2
Cooling 96 hours, -40 °C, as per EN IEC
60068-2-1
Salt mist 96 hours, +35 °C in a chemical
solution with NaCl as per EN IEC
60068-2-11
Safety category: INCA 1: 4 with relay or Pluto
INCA 1 Tina: 4 with Vital or Pluto
Colour: Yellow, red and black
Weight: Approx. 45 grams
Size: See drawing
Material: Polyamide PA66, Macromelt,
Polybutylenterephthalate PBT
5,6
Temperature: -10°C to +55°C (operation), -30°C
to +70°C (storage)
Enclosure classification Print: IP 65, Connector: IP20
Installation: 22,5 mm
Emergency stop LEDs: INCA 1:
'REEN3AFETYDEVICE/+SAFETY
circuit OK
Not lit: emergency stop pressed
previously.
Red: This emergency stop has been
pressed.
INCA 1 Tina:
'REEN3AFETYDEVICE/+SAFETY
circuit OK
Flashing: Safety device OK, safety
circuit previously broken.
Red: This button is pressed in, and
the safety circuit is broken.
Operating voltage (LED): INCA 1: 24 VDC
INCA 1 Tina: 24VDC +15% -25%
Current consumption (LED): INCA 1: 15 mA
INCA 1 Tina: 47 mA
Emergency stop button
Operating force: 22 ± 4 N
Operating movement: Approx. 4 mm to locked position
Contact material: 'OLD PLATEDSILVERALLOY
Minimum current: INCA 1: 10 mA 10 VDC/ 10 VAC
INCA 1 Tina: —
Maximum current: INCA 1: 2 A 24 VDC, 1 A 125 VAC
INCA 1 Tina: —
Mechanical life: > 50 000 operations
Standards: EN 60204, EN 60947-5-1 & -5
EN ISO 13850
Accessories 30-054-04 Yellow surround for
emergency stop button
Approvals;
Emergency stop with LED C E R T I F I E D BY
Smile Application:
To stop a machine or a
process
Features:
Several emergency stops in series
sELECTRICALCAT
sPRINTMECHANICALCAT
Robust
Print IP 65, housing IP67
Smile - small and cost effective E-stop

In order to fulfil the need for a small and easy to install E-stop,
Smile has been developed. The size of the device makes it pos-
sible to be installed wherever you want. With M12 connection/s or
cable and centralised mounting holes Smile is very easy to install,
especially on aluminium extrusions. Smile is available for E-stops 1
in both dynamic and static safety circuits i.e. for interfacing to 2
Vital/Pluto and Safety relays. Each version is available with either
one or two M12 connections or cable. In the top of the Smile E-
stop unit, LED’s show the actual status:
'REENPROTECTIONISOK2EDTHIS% STOPHASBEENPRESSEDAND
if the LED is off an E-stop earlier in the circuit has been pressed.
Smile emergency stop has six different variants:

1. Smile 10EA has a 1 m cable connected through the base of 3
the unit.
2. Smile 10EK has four 1 m short connecting leads through the
base of the unit. No LED.
3. Smile 11EA has a five-pole M12 connector on one end of the 4
unit.
4. Smile 12EA has two five-pole M12 connectors, one on each
end of the unit.
5. Smile 11EAR has one 5-pole M12 connector at one end.
6. Smile 12EAR has two 5-pole M12 connectors at each end.
6
Connection examples – Smile 1
Smile 10EA can be connected to either Pluto or a Smile 10EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety
safety relay. Single channel example with LED indication. relay. Two channel example with LED indication.
Safety category 1. The connection cable exits from Safety circuit category 4.
underneath the unit.
A A
2
+24V (+) S13 1 +24V (+) S13 1
S34
Pluto Safety 2 IQ 10 A-pulse (A2) S23 2
safety relay Pluto Safety
PLC
0V
E.g. RT6,
RT9
A2 0V 3
safety
PLC 0V
relay
E.g. RT6,
RT9
A2
0V 3 3
S34 4 S24 4
I0
I0 S14 5 S14 5
I1
Smile 10EA Smile 10EA
4
Smile 11EA can be connected to either Pluto or a Smile 11EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety
safety relay. Single channel example with LED indica- relay. Two channel example with LED indication. Safety
tion. Safety category 1. Connection via M12 connector. circuit category 4. Connection via M12 connector.
+24V (+) S13

1
A
+24V
(+) S13
1
A 5
S34
2 2
Pluto Safety IQ 10 A-pulse (A2) S23
PLC E.g. RT6, safety relay
0V RT9 A2
S34
0V 3
4
PLC 0V
I0
E.g. RT6,
RT9
S24
A2
0V 3
4
6
5 5
I0 S14 I1 S14
Smile 12EA can be connected to either Pluto or a Smile 12EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety 7
safety relay. Single channel example with LED indica- relay. Two channel example with LED indication. Safety
tion. Safety category 1. Connection via M12 connector circuit category 4. Connection via M12 connector + termi-
+ termination connector. nation connector.
+24V (+) S13

1
2
A
1
2
JST2
+24V
(+) S13
S34
1
2
A
1
2
JST2
8
Pluto Safety IQ 10 A-pulse (A2) S23

PLC E.g. RT6, safety relay
3 3 3 3
0V RT9 A2 0V PLC 0V E.g. RT6, A2 0V
I0
S34
S14
4
5
4
5
I0
I1
RT9 S24
S14
4
5
4
5
9
Smile 12EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety relay. Two channel serial connection example with LED
indication. Safety circuit category 3. Connection via M12 connectors. Note that there is no termination connector for
the Smile 12EA (C), this unit being connected back to the Pluto/safety relay via a separate cable. 10
A B C
1 1 1 1 1 1
+24V (+) S13
S34
IQ 10 A-pulse
Pluto Safety
(A2) S23
2 2 2 2 2 2
11
safety relay
3 3 3 3 3 3
PLC 0V E.g. RT6, A2 0V
RT9 4 4 4 4 4 4
I0 S24
I1 5 5 5 5 5 5
S14
Smile 12EA Smile 12EA Smile 12EA 12
13
Connection examples – Smile
Smile 12EA and 11EA can be connected to either Pluto or safety relay. Two channel example with LED indication.
Safety circuit category 3. Connection via M12 connectors. Note that there is no termination connector as the Smile
11EA (C) completes the circuit without the need for a termination connector (JST2) or return cable.
A B C
1 1 1 1 1
+24V (+) S13
S34
2 2 2 2 2
IQ 10 A-pulse
(A2) S23
Pluto Safety
safety relay
3 3 3 3 3
PLC 0V
E.g. RT6, A2
0V
RT9 4 4 4 4 4
I0 S24
5 5 5 5 5
I1
S14
Smile 12EA Smile 12EA Smile 11EA
E-Stop Button status LED Indication

The table shows the LED indication status of the E-Stop
A B C A B C
buttons from the example shown in above example.
R R R ↔ ' ' '
R R D ↔ ' ' Rd !3MILE%!
R D R ↔ ' Rd B "3MILE%!
R D D ↔ ' Rd B #3MILE%!
↔ 22ELEASED
D R R Rd B B
$$EPRESSED
D R D ↔ Rd B B
''REENLIGHTFROMTHETOPOFTHEBUTTON
D D R ↔ Rd B B 2D2EDLIGHTFROMTHETOPOFTHEBUTTON
D D D ↔ Rd B B ""LANKNOLIGHT Termination
device JST2
Smile 10EA/11EA/12EA are like any other emergency stops when 0V to the LED indication is not connected. This means
that any suitable Safety PLC or safety relay can be used. If the LED indication is used, the voltage between Pin 1(+) and Pin
3 (-) should be between 19.2 – 28.8 VDC. The following examples show connections to Safety PLC and Safety relay.
Single channel PLC connection Two channel Safety relay connection
Output 1 1 Output 1 1
2 2
Output 2
PLC
Safety
Relay
3 3
4 4
Input 2
Input 1 5 5
Input 1
Smile 11EA
Smile 11EA
Smile 10EA Smile 10EK

Brown 1 Brown
White 2 White
Blue 3
Black 4 Black
'REY 5 'REY
The cable is connected to Smile 10EA via the lid at the back. The leads are connected to Smile 10EK via the lid at the back.
No LED connection.
1. Input 1
2. Input 2 Brown Input 1
3. 0 VDC (to be connected only if LED indication is required) White Input 2
4. Output 2 Black Output 2
5. Output 1 'REY /UTPUT
Smile 11EA (R) Smile 12EA (R)
Brown 1 Brown 1 1 Brown
White 2 White 2 2 White
Blue 3 Blue 3 3 Blue
Black 4 Black 4 4 Black
'REY 5 'REY 5 5 'REY
1. Input 1 1. Input 1 1. Output 1

2. Input 2 2. Input 2 2. Output 2
3. 0 VDC (to be connected only if LED 3. 0 VDC (to be connected only if LED 3. 0 VDC
indication is required) indication is required) 4. Input 2, feedback
4. Output 2 4. Output 2, feedback 5. Input 1, feedback
5. Output 1 5. Output 1, feedback
Technical data – Smile
1
Article number/ordering data: 30-051-04 Smile 10EA with 1 m cable
30-051-06 Smile 10EK with short connecting
leads (No LED connection)
30-051-00 Smile 11EA with M12 male connector
30-051-02 Smile 12EA with male and female M12
connectors
30-051-01 Smile 11EAR
2
30-051-03 Smile 12EAR
30-051-09 Smile 11 SA
30-051-10 Smile 12 SA
30-051-11 Smile 11 SAR
30-051-12 Smile 12 SAR
30-051-13 JST2 termination for Smile 12.
Note. There are versions for dynamic technology
3
(with Tina).
Impact resistance (half sinusoidal) max. 150 m/s2, pulse width 11 ms, 3-axis, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance (sinusoidal) max. 50 m/s2 at 10 Hz, 10 cycles, 3-axis, as per
Climate resistance
EN IEC 60068-2-6
4
Damp heat, cyclical 96 hours, +25 °C / 97%, +55 °C / 93 % relative
Damp heat, sustained 56 days, +40 °C / 93 % relative humidity, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-78
Dry heat 96 hours, +70 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-2
Sign for emergency stop
Cooling
Salt mist
96 hours, -40 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-1
96 hours, +35 °C in a chemical solution with NaCl
as per EN IEC 60068-2-11
5
Safety category: Safety circuit up to Cat. 4 acc. To EN 954-1/EN
ISO 13849-1, together with appropriate control unit.
Weight:
Size:
Approx. 65 grams
Length: 84 mm + M12 contact(s) (12.5 mm each)
Width: 40 mm
6
Height: 52 mm
Material: Polyamide PA66, Macromelt, Polybutylentere-
PHTHALATE0"40OLYPROPYLENE005,6
Ambient temperature:
Protection class:
Mounting:
-10°C to +55°C (operation), -30°C to +70°C (stock)
IP 65
Two M5 recessed hexagon head screws, L ≥25 mm.
7
Hole cc: 44 mm
LED on E-Stop: 'REEN3AFETYDEVICEOK3AFETYCIRCUITCLOSED
Off: Safety circuit broken (When an E-Stop is
depressed all
following units in the circuit lose the LED function).
Red: Safety device actuator depressed and Safety
circuit broken.
8
Input voltage (LED): 17-27 VDC ripple ±10% (LED supply voltage)
Current consumption (LED): 15 mA
E-Stop button
Actuating force:
Actuator travel:
Material, contacts:
22±4 N
Approx. 4 mm to latch
Silver alloy gold plated
9
Life, mechanical: > 50 000 operations
Standards: EN ISO 13850, EN 60204, EN 60947-5-1 & -5
Min current: 10 mA 10 VDC/10 VAC
Max current: 2 A 24 VDC, 1 A 125 VAC
10
11
12
13
Approvals:
Emergency stop with LED C E R T I F I E D BY
Smile Tina Application:

To stop a machine or a
process
Features:
Several emergency stops in
series
sELECTRICALCAT
sPRINTMECHANICALCAT
Light grids, emergency stop
and Eden in the same safety
loop together with Vital or
Pluto gives safety category
4 as per EN 954-1/EN ISO
13849-1
Robust
Smile Tina - small and cost effective E-stop Info-signal from each emer-
gency stop
In order to fulfil the need for a small and easy to install E-stop,
Smile has been developed. The size of the device makes it pos- Print IP 65, housing IP67
sible to be installed wherever you want. With M12 connections or
cable and centralised mounting holes Smile is very easy to install,
especially on aluminium extrusions. Smile is available for E-stops
in both dynamic and static safety circuits i.e. for interfacing to Vital
system/Pluto safety PLC and Safety relays. Each version is avail-
able with either one or two M12 connections or cable. Two M12
connectors are used to enable the connection of E-stops in series,
which is often used with dynamic safety circuits fulfilling safety
category 4. In the top of the Smile Tina E-stop unit, LEDs show the
actual status according to the dynamic system:
1
'REENEVERYTHINGIS/+2ED% STOPACTIVATED&LASHING2ED
2
'REEN3TOPACTIVATEDFROMANOTHERPRECEDINGDEVICE
The Smile Tina emergency stop is available in four versions:

1. Smile 10EA Tina has a 1 m cable connected via the base of
the unit.
2. Smile 11EA Tina has a five-pole M12 connector on the end of
the unit for connecting the Jokab Safety cable.
3. Smile 12EA Tina has two five-pole M12 connectors, one on
each end of the unit for connecting the Jokab Safety cable. 3
4. Smile 12EAR Tina has two five-pole M12 connectors, one at
each end, for the connection of Jokab Safety cabling.
5. Smile 11EAR Tina has one 5-pole M12 connector at one end 4
for connection of cable from Jokab Safety.
5
Connection examples – Smile Tina 1
Smile 10EA Tina can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit cat-
egory 4 with LED indication/information. The connection cable exits from underneath the
unit.
Pluto
IQ10
Vital
T
2
I0 R
Smile 10EA Tina
3
Smile 11EA Tina can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category
4 with LED indication/information. Connection via M12 connectors. The circuit below shows
three Smile 11EA Tina units connected in series via connection terminals in the electrical
cabinet. 4
Electrical cabinet
IQ10 T A
5
I0 R
Pluto Vital Smile 11EA Tina
Connection termination
6
B
Smile 11EA Tina
7
C
Smile 11EA Tina
8
Smile 11EA Tina can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category
4 with LED indication/information. Connection via M12 connectors. The circuit below shows
three Smile 11EA Tina units and one Eden connected in series via a Tina 4A connection
block.
9
A
IQ10 T 1 3
Pluto Vital Tina 4A Smile 11EA Tina

I0 R 2 4
B
10
Smile 11EA Tina
C 11
Smile 11EA Tina
Eden = Adam & Eva
12
13
Connection examples – Smile Tina
E-Stop Button status Information output signal
A B C A B C The table shows the information output signal status from each of the Smile
R R R ↔ H H H 11EA Tina units in the previous connection examples.
↔ In the example showing connection with an Eden sensor, the Eden status
R R D H H L
information signal acts in the same way as the Smile Tina 11EA units.
R R R ↔ H L H
The status information signal can be connected to e.g. PLC input.
R R D ↔ H L L Note. The information signal must not be used as a safety signal. The sig-
D R R ↔ L H H nal should only be used to indicate the status of connected devices.
D R D ↔ L H L
!3MILE%!4INA $$EPRESSED
D D R ↔ L L H
"3MILE%!4INA ((IGHIESUPPLYVOLTAGE
D D D ↔ L L L #3MILE%!4INA ,,OW6$#
22ELEASED
Smile 12EA can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category 4 with
LED indication/information. Connection via M12 connectors. The last Smile 12 EA Tina unit feeds
the dynamic signal back to the Pluto/Vital.
A B C
IQ10 T
Pluto Vital
I0 R Smile 12EA Tina Smile 12EA Tina Smile 12EA Tina
E-Stop Button status LED Indication

A B C A B C The table shows the LED indication status of the E-Stop buttons in the previ-
R R R ↔ ' ' ' ous connection examples, where three Smile 10 EA, Smile 11EA or 12EA
Tina units are connected in series.
R R D ↔ ' ' Rd
R D R ↔ ' Rd F !3MILE%!4INA 2D2EDLIGHTFROMTHETOPOFTHE
R D D ↔ ' Rd Rd "3MILE%!4INA button
D R R ↔ Rd F F #3MILE%!4INA &&LASHESBETWEENGREENANDRED
22ELEASED light
D R D ↔ Rd F Rd
$$EPRESSED
D D R ↔ Rd Rd F ''REENLIGHTFROMTHETOPOFTHE
D D D ↔ Rd Rd Rd button
Smile 12EA can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital sys-

Eden = Adam & Eva
tem. Safety circuit category 4 with LED indication/information.
Connection via M12 connectors. The circuit shows two Smile Focus
12EA Tina’s, one Eden sensor and one Focus Light Curtain
connected in series.
M12-3A M12-3A
IQ10 T
Pluto Vital Tina 10A
I0 R Smile 12EA Tina Smile 12EA Tina
M12-3B
Smile 10EA Tina

Brown 1 + 1. Input voltage,17-27 VDC ripple+/- 10%
White 2
2. Dynamic input signal
Blue 3 -
Black 4 3. 0 VDC
'REY 5 4. Dynamic output signal
5. Information output
The connection cable is connected to the Smile 10EA Tina unit via the back panel.
Smile 11EA Tina Smile 12EA Tina
Brown 1 + Brown 1 + + 1 Brown
White 2 White 2 2 White
Blue 3 - Blue 3 - - 3 Blue
Black 4 Black 4 4 Black
'REY 5 'REY 5 5 'REY
1. Input voltage,17-27 VDC ripple+/- 10% 1. Input voltage,17-27 VDC 1. Output voltage to next unit
2. Dynamic input signal ripple+/- 10% 2. Dynamic output signal (To next
3. 0 VDC 2. Dynamic input signal Smile or to Pluto or Vital system)
4. Dynamic output signal 3. 0 VDC 3. 0 VDC
5. Information output 4. Not used 4. Not used
5. Not used 5. Information output
Technical data – Smile Tina
1
Article number/ordering data: 30-050-04 Smile 10EA Tina with 1 m connection cable
30-050-00 Smile 11EA Tina with M12 male connector
30-050-02 Smile 12EA Tina with male and female
M12 connectors
30-050-01 Smile 11EAR Tina
30-050-03 Smile 12EAR Tina
30-050-05 Smile 11 SA Tina
2
30-050-06 Smile 12 SA Tina
30-050-07 Smile 11 SAR Tina
30-050-08 Smile 12 SAR Tina
Note. There are versions for use with relay technology
Impact resistance (half sinusoidal)

(without Tina).
max. 150 m/s2, pulse width 11 ms, 3-axis, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-27
3
Vibration resistance (sinusoidal) max. 50 m/s2 at 10 Hz, 10 cycles, 3-axis, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-6
Climate resistance
Damp heat, cyclical
Damp heat, sustained

96 hours, +25 °C / 97%, +55 °C / 93 % relative
56 days, +40 °C / 93 % relative humidity, as per
4
EN IEC 60068-2-78
Dry heat 96 hours, +70 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-2
Cooling 96 hours, -40 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-1
Salt mist 96 hours, +35 °C in a chemical solution with NaCl
as per EN IEC 60068-2-11
Sign for emergency stop
Safety category: Safety circuit Cat. 4 acc. to EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1, together with appropriate Vital or
5
Pluto control unit.
Weight: Approx. 65 grams
Size: Length: 84 mm + M12 contact(s) (12.5mm each)
Material:
Width: 40 mm Height: 52 mm
Polyamid PA66, Macromelt, Polybutylenterephtha-
6
LATE0"40OLYPROPYLEN005,6
Ambient temperature: -10°C to +55°C (operation) -30°C to +70°C (stock)
Mounting Two M5 hexagon socket screws, L ≥25 mm.
LED on E-Stop
Hole centres: 44 mm
'REEN3AFETYDEVICE/+3AFETYCIRCUIT/+
Flashing: Safety device OK, Break in safety circuit
7
Red: Breaks in safety device and safety circuit
Time delay: 1:1.5 (Two Smile units are equal to three Edens in
time delay)
Input voltage:
Current consumption:
Current from information output:
17-27 VDC ripple ±10%
47 mA (57mA with max. current from information output)
10 mA max
8
E-Stop button Actuating force: 22±4 N
Actuator travel: Approx. 4 mm to latch
Material, contacts: Silver alloy gold plated
Life, mechanical:
Standards:
> 50 000 operations
EN ISO 13850:2006, EN ISO 13850,
9
EN 60204 and EN 60947-5-1 & -5
10
11
12
13
Approvals:
Emergency stops in series
with Tina
Application:
To stop a machine
or a process
Features:
Several E-stops in series to
Category 4
Light beam, E-stop and Eden
in the same safety circuit to-
gether with Vital/Pluto enables
safety category 4 according to
EN 954-1
Indication at every E-stop
Robust construction
Information signal from each
E-stop
IP 67
Several E-stops in series in accordance with Category 4
Our E-stops have built-in Tina 2A or Tina 3A units which Standards and regulations
makes it easy to connect up to 30 E-stops in a safety circuit The E-stop is designed to fulfil the applicable standards
in accordance with safety category 4, EN 954-1. The safety and regulations. An example of such standards is EN 418/
circuit, which is dynamic, is monitored either by the Pluto EN ISO 13850 (E-stop norm).
safety PLC or the Vital safety module.
LEDs which indicate status

On every E-stop with Tina units there are LEDs which
show the status of each individual E-stop. The E-stop
status information signal is also available via the Tina unit
connection cable.
Our E-stops are available in three versions

s % STOPWITH4INA!WITHCABLECONNECTIONFORCONNEC
tion to the dynamic circuit of Pluto or Vital
s % STOPWITH4INA!WITH-CONNECTORANDCONNEC-
tion to the dynamic circuit of Pluto or Vital.
s % STOPONLYWITHPOSITIVEFORCEDDISCONNECTDUALCON
tacts for cable connection (traditional E-stop)
Technical data - E-stops
Article number/ordering data
1
30 001-10 JSKL1-NS/2A E-stop with Tina2A
30 001-11 JSKL1-NS/3A E-stop with Tina3A
30 003-02 JSKL1-NS E-stop with 2NC
LED´s on Tina 2A, 3A 'REEN% STOP/+3AFETYCIRCUIT/+
Flashing: E-stop OK, break in safety circuit
Red: Break in E-stop and safety circuit 2
For additional information concerning Tina units,
see the section describing Tina.
Mechanical life 105 operations
Max. operating frequency
Operating force
Degree of protection according to
10 operations/min
50 N 3
IEC/EN 60529 IP67
Climatic proofing Constant in accordance with IEC 60068-2-3;
Cyclical in accordance with IEC 60068-2-30
4
Ambient operating temperature –10°C - 70°C
Mechanical shock resistance
in accordance with IEC 60068-2-27 '
Shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal
Contacts:
Rated insulation Voltage, Ui 500V
Max. short-circuit protective device
Fuse, gG/gL 10A
5
Electrical connection - E-stops
6
Dimensions - E-stops 9
10
Tina 3A
11
12
13
Approvals:
Emergency stop Grab Wire

Safety Switch
JSNY10 Application:
Machines
Transportation lines
Features:
Easily accessible
Forced contacts
Double switching in both
directions of travel
5PTOM7IRELENGTH
IP 65
Duplicated safety in both directions Forced Disconnected Contacts

The JSNY10 can provide an easy to reach emergency The contacts of the JSNY10 are forced disconnected.
stop along machines, transportation lines and processes. Forced disconnection means that the contacts are
The device is easier to install than several individual mechanically pulled apart thus ensuring protection
emergency-stop buttons. against contact welding/sticking.
The JSNY10 can be utilised in several different ways to
suit various applications e.g the wire could be positioned Safety level
at waist height along a transportation line, the emergency The forced disconnected contacts provide a high level of
stop being activated if somebody walks into or falls onto safety. By combining the JSNY10 with a suitable Jokab
the line or the wire could be positioned at head height Safety safety relay a high level of safety in respect of the
making it easy to grab by anyone requiring to initiate an connection of the machine control system is guaranteed.
Emergency Stop. JSNY10 can be combined with Tina units for connection
The JSNY10 has four contacts. When the switch to a safety circuit with several safety components in
is installed and the correct wire tension is set, all four accordance with Safety Category 4.
contacts are closed. If the wire is pulled, two of the
contacts open; if the wire breaks the other two contacts Regulations and Standards
open. In both cases a dual channel machine stop signal The JSNY10 is designed and approved in accordance to
will be given. relevant standards. Examples of relevant standards are
In order to reset the JSNY10 the integral mushroom- EN ISO 13850, EN60947-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0113,
head slam button has to be activated. EN ISO 12100-1, -2 and VDE 0660 T200.
Emergency-stop Grab Wire easily

accessible during normal work
operation along a machine
Technical data - JSNY10
Supplier JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
1
Ordering data see Component ordering list
Colour Black with yellow label
Housing Material
Lid Material
Cast aluminium
Aluminium
2
Operating temperature -30°C to +80°C
Switching contacts 4 NC (2 forced)
Protection class
Mechanical life
IP 65, EN 60529
1 million switching cycles M20 x 3
ø5
69
45,5
Max. switching frequency 20/min 1.5 (2x)
20.5
Reset method mushroom-head slam button
8.5
Max. wire length 25 m
Mounting 4 x M5 5 12 5
4
ø5.4
Terminals Screw terminal, 8 x M4
Cable access 2 x M20 x 1.5
Weight 700g (74)
ø25
ø15
ø35
82
72
Max. voltage
Thermal current
400 VAC
16 A
5
Utilisation category AC 15, DC 13 7.5 78.5
35 95.6 33
Short-circuit protection 16 A delay fuse, 20 A quick fuse
6
Mounting - JSNY10
Wire supports should be attached at a height of at least 20-25mm above the surface where the switch is to be installed.
Turnbuckles may be used to 'tune' the pull-wire system to the correct tension. A medium operating temperature should be maintained
during installation. The wire should be pulled heavily several times, then the tension of the wire should be readjusted to compensate
7
for the elongation of the wire resulting from thimble distortion.
Reset button Wire clamp Wire turnbuckle Eye bolt
8
min. 20-mm
max. 300 mm
max. 50 m (2 switches)
2 to max. 5 m
9
10
Component ordering list - JSNY10
JSNY10 (20-034-00) Switch JSNY10-S6 (20-034-02) Eye bolt M6x50
JSNY10-K (20-034-07) Mounting kit 25
1 pce Wire turnbuckle

m:
Plastic coated steel cable wire JSNY10-M6 (41-060-03) Nut M6 (to eyebolt) 11
4 pcs thimble JSNY10-V6 (20-034-06) Wire turnbuckle M5x50
4 pcs wire clamp
5 pcs eye bolts with nuts JSNY10-L3 (20-034-04) Wire clamp, duplex
JSNY10-W3 (20-034-05) Wire plastic coated red 3 mm/4 mm JSNY10-T4 (20-034-03) Wire thimble
(core/sleeve) per Meter
12
JSNY10-R5 (20-034-13) Swivel for wire
13
Contact Adjustment JSNY10
33-34
45-46
13-14
25-26
socket
scribed 8 mm 200N
line
6 mm
closed
open
2 mm
0 mm 80N
axis Tolerance of force: +/- 15%
When the wire is installed with the correct tension all contacts are closed. Adjust the turnbuckle to get correct tension,
the scribed line on the axis of the JSNY10 should be just visible at the top of the socket.
When an emergency stop condition occurs, switches 25-26 and 45-46 open, when the wire breaks contacts 13-14
and 33-34 open.
Mounted wire with correct tension
Emergency stop
Wire breakage
Electrical Connection JSNY10
Electrical connection of JSNY10,

highest level of safety.
Note!
The connection shows the JSNY10 in
a correctly tensioned condition.
Contact rails, Bumpers
and Safety Mats
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page 1
When shall I use contact rails, bumpers
and safety mats? __________________________________________________ 10:1
Contacts rails and bumpers _________________________________________ 10:2 2

Safety mats _______________________________________________________ 10:8
3
5
6
7
When shall I use contact rails, bumpers and safety mats?
8
Contact rails and bumpers
Contact rails are used as protection against squeezing
§
accidents, i.e. on moving machine parts and automatic
doors and hatches. The strips come in customised
Standard: EN 1760-2 Safety of machinery -
Pressure sensitive protective devices - Part
9
lengths and various cross sections.
2: General principles for the design and
Bumpers are used as safety buffers to protect against
testing of pressure sensitive edges and
remote control transport vehicles and other dangerous
pressure sensitive bars
moving objects that require long stopping distances.
10
Safety mats
Safety mats are used for protection around hazard-
§
ous machinery. They are well suited for monitoring an
area used for loading and unloading of material to a
machine.
Standard: EN 1760-1 Safety of machinery
- Pressure sensitive protective devices
- Part 1: General principles for the design
11
and testing of pressure sensitive mats and
pressure sensitive floors
12
13
Approvals:
Safety
contact rails Utilization:
& bumpers Protection against squeezing

accidents on moving machine
parts and automatic doors.
Features:
Can be connected to a
safety relay, Vital or Pluto
Supplied in customized
lengths
IP 65
Simple assembly on site
Lengths up to 25 m.
Contact!
Safety contact rails and bumpers as safety

devices for potentially dangerous machines
Safety contact rails ber protect the inner contact strip in the best way possible
Contact edges are used as protection against crushing inju- against damage and also allow for a contact angle excee-
ries, for example, moving machine parts, automatic doors. ding ±45˚. Normally supplied in lengths up to 25 m.
Contact edges with cast-in contact strips Bumpers

Our new contact edges consist of a rubber profile with a Bumpers are employed on automatic production lines to
cast-in contact strip. They are made up simply using con- minimise danger to both people and machines. The large
nection plugs that are glued to the ends together with a foam rubber cushions enable long practical braking and
terminal cap. The rubber profile is fitted on an aluminium run-through distances, thus enabling designers to optimise
profile. protection for both personnel and machines.
Available in EPDM design. Supplied in lengths up to 25 m. The safety contact strips are mounted inside aluminium
profiles which are, in turn, protected by the large foam cush-
Contact edges with contact strips SKS 18 ions that are glued to the carrier profile and then sprayed
The contact edge consists of a rubber profile with a safety with a thin film of polyurethane which makes the bumper
contact strip inside. The contact edge is fitted on an alumi- waterproof and helps to minimise wear and tear.
nium profile. The bumpers are delivered mounted to the carrier profile
The special design of rubber profiles of EPDM or NBR rub- in ordered lengths (0,2 m – 3 m).
Fields of Application
Safety contact rails GP - General
The safety contact strip, SKS 18, the actual contactor, is lo-
1
cated inside the safety contact rail. The safety contact strip
consist of a homogeneous highly insulating outer EPDM mate- Safety contact rail,
rial and has two internal conducting contact surfaces. The con- construction
ducting elastomer contains two copper wires that provide low-
resistance detection even in lengths exceeding 100 metres.
Rubber profile 2
Because of the contact points, the safety contact rail has
approximate 20 mm of inactive length at each end.
SKS 18
To provide protection against damage and to enable its
proper use, the safety contact strip is inserted into the switch-
ing chamber of the rubber contactor profile. The rubber pro- 3
files (EDPM or NBR) are then permanently sealed with a spe-
cial elastic adhesive and end caps to make them watertight.
The safety contact rail is then pressed into the aluminium Aluminium support
profile. profile, C-profile
4
Safety contact strip SKS 18 for contact edge GP
Technical data Safety contact strip SKS 18
Outer material
Inner material
EPDM, electrical insulation >30
Mohm
EPDM, electrical elastomer with
Conductive
contact surface
5
reinforce copper wire
Conductivity 60 ohm / 100 meters
Contact resistance approx. 50 ohm Highly insulated
Max. electrical load
Max. applied pressure
24 V / 100 mA
6.5 N/cm2
outer material
6
Dimensions 18 x 6 mm Copper wire
Construction - contact edge GE

Inside the contact edge there is a cast-in contact strip that
consists of two conductive alternating surfaces on the in-
Aluminium profile
7
side and a highly-effective insulating shell. There are tow
conductive wires in the contact surfaces that allow for low
Connection plug
ohm measurements even when the contact edge has an ex-
tended length. The cast-in contact strip is protected against
damage by the surrounding chamber. The cast end plugs Terminal resistor 8
ensure a permanent contact from the conductive surfaces
Rubber profile
in the contact strip. A special flexible adhesive is used to Terminal with integrated
make the connector ring watertight. cap contact strip
Rubber profiles
(1) 10-metre lengths of GP
9
Tekniska data edges on request
Type GP 25-25 GP 25-40 GE 25-25 GE 25-45 (2) Measured with ( Ø 80 mm
test specimen),
25 10 mm/s
(3) Measuring speed 10 mm/s 10
45
25 (4) Not including DIN 31006-2

25
40
(GS - BE - 17)
25
25 25
Fixing Profile
Material
AL 25-14
EPDM/NBR
AL 25-14
EPDM/NBR
Al 25-14
EPDM
Al 25-14
EPDM 11
Length max (m) (1) 6(10) 6(10) 25 25
Weight (g/m) 370 480 510 770
Weight incl. C-Profile 690 800 820 1080
(g/m)
Activation force (N)
Actuating distance (mm)
(2)
(3)
34/37
8.0/7.5
39/52
9.4/9.7
64,1
4,7
69,1
6,73
12
Braking distance (mm) (3) 10.2/9.5 7.2/5.9 6,48 20,73 NOTE! Contact us for other
Max. Actuating ( º ) (4) 2x 45º 2x 60º 2x20˚ 2x20˚ profile sizes.
13
Common properties
Technical specifications
Article number/ GP GE
ordering data: 76-025-25 Contact rail GP25/25 EPDM. 76-005-02 Contact edge GE25-25 EPDM per
Ordered by length metre.
76-125-25 Contact rail GP25/25 NBR. 76-005-04 Contact edge GE25-45 EPDM per
Ordered by length metre.
76-025-40 Contact rail GP25/40 EPDM. 76-005-44 Connection plug with 2.5 m cable.
Ordered by length 76-005-45 Connection plug with 5m cable
76-125-40 Contact rail GP25/40 NBR. 76-005-46 Connection plug with 10m cable
Ordered by length 76-005-47 Connection plug with resistor 8.2ΓQ
76-005-61 Terminal cap for GE25-45
76-009-01 Ready-made, 2+2 m cable 76-005-62 Terminal cap for GE25-25
76-009-05 Ready-made, 5+5 m cable
Please contact us for more alternatives.

Mechanical load max 1 500 N
Actuating angle (DIN) 1 2x 20º
Mechanical life 1 105
Max. operate temp. range2 -20Cº to +55ºC
Max. temperature range -25ºC to +70ºC
Protection classification IP 65
Max. Electrical load 24V 100mA
Resistance 0.6 Ohm/m
Conductors GP: 2x 0.38 mm2 GE: 2x 0.34 mm2
Conductors insulation material GP: PVC GE: PUR matt blackt
(1) According to DIN 31006-2 (GS - BE - 17)
(2) Not including DIN 31006-2 (GS - BE - 17)
Physical and chemical material properties

Properties EPDM NBR Resistance EPDM NBR 1 = no effect for lasting contact
Tensile strength 3 2 Water (distilled) 1-2 1 2 = slight effect non-lasting contact

Tensile elongation 3 2 Acids (diluted) 1 3 3 = moderate effect moderate contact
Durability 3 2 Bases (diluted) 2 2 4 = appreciable effect limited contact
Tear resistance 3 3 Non-oxidised acids 2 3 5 = strong effect short-term contact
Cold flexibility 2 3 Oxidised acids 4 5 6 = extreme effect avoid contact
Heat resistance 2 2 ASTM oil No. 3 6 1
Oxidation resistance 1 3 Vegetable oil 5 1
UV-resistance 1 3 Ester solvent 2 5
Weather/ ozone 1 3 Ketone solvent 3 5
resistance
Flame resistance 6 6 Aliphatic hydrocarb. 5 1
Gas permeability 4 2 Aromatic hydrocarb. 6 2-3
Halogenic hydro- 6 5
carb.
1= excellent - 6 = poor Alcohols 1 5
EPDM Good resistance to ozone and weather, Note! The information given is based on data obtained from
especially against chemicals the respective material suppliers. Although all efforts have been
NBR Good resistance to oil and petrol made, unforeseen factors can have a considerable effect on the
ASTM American Society for Testing Material generally applied indications during practical use therefore this
Kw Aromatic hydrocarbon information must be used as a general guide only. If there is any
Ester Organic solvent doubt as to the suitability of the materials used for any specific
Ketone Oxidized solvent application/environment, we will, upon request, supply rubber
Aliphatic i.e. petrol samples for your own evaluation or, if given written specifications
Aromatic i.e. benzol of your proposed environmental conditions, test the suitability of
materials for your specific application.
Mounting and electrical connection – Safety contact rails 1
The selected contact profile should be mounted using
a suitable aluminium C profile (as shown opposite).
2
Mounting
3
Stage 1 – GP and GE Stage 2 – GP and GE

5
Pan or round-head screws should not be used to mount In order to feed the connecting wire through the profile,
the aluminium C profile. If such screws are used this can an 8 mm hole must be drilled in a suitable position. Care-
result in the connecting wire in the aluminium profile be- fully remove the burr from the hole edges and insert the
ing damaged. supplied rubber collar. The connecting wires can also be
placed in the aluminium profile.
6
8
Stage 3 – GP
In order to make fitting of the safety contact rail easier,
the aluminium profile and the safety contact rail should
Stage 3 – GE
Safety contact edges with a t-base have to be pushed 9
be sprayed with a water based soap solution. One side of into the aluminium profile.
the rubber profile must then first be inserted into the pro-
file and then the whole profile pressed in. Once the soap
solution has evaporated, the contact strip will be firmly
fitted into the profile. In order to prevent subsequent slip-
ping of the safety contact rail, talcum powder, oils or simi-
10
larly permanent lubricating agents must not be used.
Note! Pulling or pushing the safe-

ty contact rail into the aluminium
profile can cause damage to the 11
contact rail and should be avoid-
ed at all costs.
Any other proposed methods of
fixing should only be attempted af-
ter consultation with Jokab Safety.
Other methods of fixing, unless
12
approved by Jokab Safety may in-
validate the warranty and may lead
to incorrect device operation.
13
The safety bumper principle Technical data
The contact function of the JOKAB SAFETY bumper con- Article number/
sists of the safety contact strip SKS 18 being actuated by ordering data: Bumper ASB
a special mechanical construction. This construction, which 76-200-01 53/100 black
76-200-02 100/200 black
is protected by a large foam cushion, is inserted and glued 76-200-03 150/300 black
to the carrier profile. The foam rubber is covered with a 76-200-04 200/400 black
polyurethane skin. The safety bumper is also covered with 76-200-05 53/100 black/yellow
cross-bound polyurethane, which can be provided in a 76-200-06 100/200 black/yellow
range of colours. By utilising this construction the bumper 76-200-07 150/300 black/yellow
76-200-08 200/400 black/yellow
gives a stop signal when impacted from all directions with
76-200-09 60/100 NBR black (63/100)
soft sides. 76-200-10 100/200 NBR black
The Safety Bumper must be connected to a suitable two 76-200-11 150/300 NBR black
input channel Safety Relay. e.g. Jokab Safety type RT6 or 76-200-12 200/400 NBR black
RT7 which provides all necessary monitoring of the bump- 76-200-13 200/200 black
ers activation and detection of cable faults. 76-200-14 150/150 NBR black
76-200-15 100/200 NBR black/yellow
The twin cable connection makes it possible to connect 150/250 NBR black/yellow
76-200-16
several bumpers in series. 76-200-00 Bumper base price
For further information and examples of electrical con-
Dimensions in accordance with the illustra-
nection see Connection examples. tion, or special dimensions
Actuating distance approx. 20% of height
Braking distance at least 50% of height
Actuating force [N] 150 N at 80 mm around the test
specimen
Life greater than 105
Protection class IP 65
Ambient temperature -20º to +60º
Chemical resistance
Oil, grease good
10% acid resistant
10% alkaline (caustic) solutions resistant
Connection cable 2 x 2 m; 2 x 0,34 mm2 PU
covered
Foam rubber core
Polyurethane cover
Aluminium profile
Safety contact strip
SKS 18
Carrier aluminium profile
Force
Useable
braking distance
approx. 50%
Contact at Max. Deformation

approx. 20% compression
to approx. 70% (%)
Standard shapes 1
Customer-specified
Shape A Shape B special shape
2
6
Cable exits at the ends of the bumper or according to customer requirements.
8
Cross-section height
9
Cross-section width
10
11
Dimensions
Bumpers are available in four different standard dimensions. Other dimensions can be supplied on request.
Note that in the case of customised orders, the ratio of 2:1 for X:Y must not be exceeded. Bumpers can
12
be supplied in lengths of up to 3000 mm. The minimum cross-section is 53 x 100 mm.
13
Approvals:
Safety
Mats Safety Mats for:
Personal protection within the dan-
gerous areas around presses, ro-
bots, production lines, machines
etc.
Features:
Can be connected to a safety
Certified according relay, Vital or Pluto
to EN 1760-1.
Very durable
IP 67
A Safety mat used as personal

protection within dangerous areas.
The ASK Safety Mat is used as personal protection within The safety mat and its connection cabling can be supervi-
the dangerous areas around presses, robots, production sed by a suitable Jokab Safety safety relay, which provides
lines, machines etc. a category 3 safety level for the cabling, while the mat is in
category 1.
Mat construction
The basic Mat construction consists of a ground plate of
either PVC, Aluminium or Stainless Steel which provides
protection against uneven ground etc. The Mat is made up
of a sandwich construction, the pressure contact switch
consisting of two conducting sheets separated from each
other by a webbed isolating layer. The internal switching sur-
face is cast into a durable polyurethane to protect against
moisture, and this is then covered with a top layer of ribbed
or chequered rubber mat or a thin aluminium plate.
When connected to a suitable monitoring system step- Attachment to the floor is by means of a ramped edge
ping on the Safety Mat will immediately be detected caus- trim or a z-profile made of aluminium. The ramp profile has
ing dangerous machine movements to be stopped. This is a channel for connection cables.
made possible by the detection of electrical contacts clos- Custom Mats can be made, i.e. special shape, resist-
ing within the sandwich construction of the Mat. As a load- ant against harsh industrial environments (mineral oil, acid,
bearing component the Mat is made with a bottom plate bleach etc.) or with a non-slip surface or M12-contacts.
of either synthetic material or metal. The Safety Mat is pro-
vided with a ribbed surface, which is fixed by adhesive to
the surface of the Safety Mat.
Ribbed Surface
Polyurethane- Upper Surface

Contact Surface 1 Contact!
Isolating Layer
Contact Surface 2
Technical Data - Safety Mats Max. area Entire mat = 2500 x 1400 mm
10 m2 (divided mat)
1
Height 10mm without ribbed surface
Article number/ 76-301-00 max 14.5 mm with ribbed
ordering data: Production cost cast mat in PU surface
with RF finish ASK-1U4.4-RF
76-301-02
Production cost cast mat in PU
Inactive Area
Switching Force
Nominally 10mm from Mat edge
150N (Round body 80mm)
2
with RF finish and cast-in ramp Max. Pressure 2000 N over ø 80 mm
edge trim ASK-1T4.4-RF
Material Yellow polyurethane, black rub-
ASK-1U4.4-RF. No ramp edge ber coating
trim:
76-310-05
76-310-06
1000 x 750 mm
1000 x 1000 mm
Protection Class IP 67 3
Ambient Air Temperature -20°C to + 60°C
76-310-07 1000 x 1500 mm
Chemical Resistance
ASK-1T4.4-RF. Cast-in ramp Oil, grease good
edge trim:76-310-10 10% acid resistant
1000 x 750 mm
76-310-11
76-310-12
1000 x 1000 mm
1000 x 1500 mm
10% alkaline (caustic) solutions
Cable
resistant
2 x 5 m, 2 x 0,34 mm2,
4
PU sheathed
The above have a PU surface
layer. Mats are available in any Mechanical Life > 1,5x106 load shifting
size and in other materials.
Connection cabling including 1
off M8 male and 1 off M8 female:
5
76-900-32 2.5 m
76-900-33 5m
Edge Trim - Safety Mats

6
ASK-1U4.4-RF Edge trim RS 14
Eliminates vertical edges and attaches the
Safety Mat to the floor. Also provides protec-
tion and channel for connection cables.
Profile BS14 7
Best for use on the side nearest the machine.
Permits a shorter distance from, for example, a
wall.
Corner trim
Connection cable
Can be used between two RS 14 profiles as an
alternative to mitre cutting of profiles. 8
Channel for connection cable
Surface protection
Fixing profile
9
10
Angle fixing profile
Secured area + 70 mm
Base unit Corner connection
Non-secured area
11
Non-secured area + 70 mm
Non-secured area
ASK-1T4.4-RF
Completely moulded mat
with moulded
edge profiles in PU.
12
Connection cable
13
Surface layer - Safety mats
Safety mats are normally supplied with a ribbed polyurethane non-slip sur-
face layer that withstands tough conditions very well (oil, acid or caustic
substances) and has anti-slip properties. If required, other patterns can be
supplied, or for special requirements even other materials, such as NBR
rubber or chequer plating in aluminium or stainless steel. Safety mats can
also be supplied without a surface layer, to have a full coverage rubber sheet
glued on during installation. Please contact us for more information about
these alternatives.
Safety distance - safety mat as per EN 999

If a safety mat is used as entry protection, the smallest S = smallest permitted safety distance in mm
permitted safety distance between the hazardous area K = body speed (velocity of propagation 1600 mm/s)
and the outer edge of the mat (seen from the hazard) is C = additional distance in mm based on the intrusion of
calculated using the formula from EN 999. the body into the risk zone before the protection device
is actuated (1200 mm)
S = (K * T) + C
i.e.
where
S = (1600 * T) + 1200
Mounting - Safety Mats
The ground on which the mats are to be laid must be level, clean and dry. The mats
should not be glued to the ground.
Place mat in required position with groundplate downwards.

If more than one mat is to be installed be sure to place the mats edge to edge (without
space).
If the mats are delivered without the ribbed surface premounted, the selected surface
should be placed in position over the mats and fixed by means of a suitable adhesive.
In the case of safety mats with cast-in rubber edge trim, the mat is secured to the floor
by screws straight through the edge trim. In the case of safety mats with an aluminium
edge trim, see below.
Place the selected edge trim to the mat. Edge trims are usually mitred (at 45 degrees)
to provide complete protection around the corners of the mat.
Mark the cable routes on the edge trim and cut out slots to allow cable access into the
cable channel as indicated. Connect the cables as shown under Electrical Connection.
Mark the locations of the securing screws along the scribed line on the edge trim. It is
recommended that fixing screws should be located at 60 cm spacing.
Secure the edge trim to the ground with 6 mm plugs and suitable screws. Plug the holes
above the screws in the edge trim with the cover plugs provided.
NOTE!
Safety mats must not be rolled/twisted or modified in any way. It is also essential that
mats are not cut into any shape or shortened following delivery.
Electrical connection - Safety contact rails, bumpers and safety mats 1
Contact edge, bumper or safety mat must be connected
to a suitable monitoring unit (e.g. Jokab Safety safety re-
lays RT6, RT7A/B, RT9, RT10, Vital with Tina 6A or Pluto
safety-PLC).
The monitoring unit monitors the functionality of the con-

2
tact protection and detects any breaks or short-circuits in
the lines. Several crush protection units can be connected
in series while still retaining the same level of safety.
When pressure is applied, the active surface of the con-

3
tact area in the contact protection is closed and the sa-
fety output on the monitoring unit trips. A stop signal will
be sent to the machine's safety circuits preventing any
dangerous movements.
4
5
Note! If alternative units are used rather than the recommended Jokab safety relays, it is essential that the user checks their suit-
ability with Jokab Safety before use. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation and/or damage to the safety bumpers and
invalidate warranty.
HK7601A – Connection contact protection for safety relay RT6 7
10
11
12
13
HK3310A – Connection contact protection for safety module Vital 1
HK0001A – Connection contact protection for safety PLC Pluto
Fencing system
Quick-Guard® and Safety Roller Door
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page 1
A flexible and stable fencing system which is easy to install_____________ 11:2
Quick-Guard® is supplied in three posibilities _________________________ 11:4 2

Quick-Guard® E - design directly on site ______________________________ 11:5
Quick-Guard® E - can be ordered in sections__________________________ 11:6 3

Quick-Guard® standard and SafeCAD® _______________________________ 11:8
Quick-Guard® Assembly, standard version ____________________________ 11:9 4

Assembly using NL2 and NL3 Net-locks on welded mesh ______________ 11:10
Dimensions of aluminium profile lengths and panels __________________ 11:11

5
Components
s
s
!LUMINIUMPROFILES __________________________________________________________
&ITTINGS ___________________________________________________________________
11:12
11:15
6
s $OOR#OMPONENTS __________________________________________________________ 11:18
s &ITTINGSFOR3WITCHES ________________________________________________________ 11:27
s 4ERMINAL#APSAND3TRIPS ____________________________________________________ 11:30 7
s !CCESSORIES _______________________________________________________________ 11:31
s )NFILL0ANELS-ESHAND3HEETS ________________________________________________ 11:32
Safety Roller Door ________________________________________________ 11:34 8
10
11
12
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarentee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
13
Quick-Guard® - fencing system
Quick-Guard Standard assembled with Quick-Guard Standard with black and Quick-Guard E with few
mesh. transparent Polycarbonate in-fill panels components and easy to angle at up
as used for medical applications. to 45°.
A flexible and stable fencing system which is easy to install

Advantages
Brackets are supplied pre-mounted Short delivery time
with screws and nuts
SafeCAD, a special program for
Easy to adjust, assemble and modify drawing Quick-Guard in 3D, from which
2D and other 3D views can be created.
Cutting lists can also be created from
Designed for various types of mesh,
this program.
solid and noise reduction panels
Adaption and Modification Our policy - To create systems that are

Quick-Guard is a very flexible fencing system consisting of environmentally friendly and provide ergonomic
a minimum of different components, e.g. aluminium profiles, working conditions
patented brackets, net-locks, mesh, solid or noise reduc- Quick-Guard is environmentally friendly. All components
tion panels. Using these components there are almost no in the Fencing System can easily be disassembled and
limitations as to what can be built. Quick-Guard fencing reused. All materials in the Fencing System are 100%
costs little to assemble and modify. recyclable. Quick-Guard can also provide a pleasing
ergonomic working environment.
Assembly
$UETOOURPATENTEDSCREW LOCKSYSTEMWECANSUPPLYALL
brackets pre-mounted with fixing screws and nuts. No holes
need to be drilled in the profiles and all cutting is straight.
This makes assembly and modification very easy.
Two versions of Quick-Guard

The Quick-Guard fencing system is available in two versions,
Quick-Guard (Standard) and Quick-Guard E which also can
be combined. The fencing systems are also easy to adjust
when production equipment is modified and/or moved.
Proposal and ordering

"YUTILISINGOUR!UTO#!$ BASED3AFE#!$PROGRAMWEARE
ABLETOMAKESYSTEMDESIGNSIN $VERYQUICKLY$RAWINGS
CUTTING LISTS ETC ARE GENERATED FROM 3AFE#!$ AND THE Patented screw-lock system and netlocks keep the
drawings can also be used for installation purposes. mesh in place when subjected to heavy loading.
What does the standard say? mm 0 200 500 900 mm 0 350
1
The European safety distance standard EN ISO 13857 2500 2500
provides information on acceptable safety distances in

hazardous areas.
2000
These figures give examples of the safety distances re-
quired for two different fencing heights, where the risk is 2
considered to be low if somebody reaches into the ha- 1600
zardous area. If there is a risk of direct injury and/or per-

sonal can be dragged into the hazardous area the safety
distances must be increased. For accepted heights and
distances please refer to EN ISO 13857 and other rele-
vant standards/regulations. When mesh is used there must
3
be a minimum distance of 200 mm (for persons older than
14 years) for a mesh size of 40x40 mm. For shorter distan-
ces and for noise reduction, polycarbonate sheet should Safety distance for Safety distance for 2000
be considered. When the fence shall protect for example
a robot cell, the fence should be placed with a minimum
1600 mm
guarding with
standard mesh.
mm guarding with solid
screens (e.g. polycarbo-
nate sheet).
4
distance of 500 mm between the guard fence and the mo-
ving machine part which reaches the furthest (according
TO %. $URING TEST DRIVING AND PROGRAMMING THERE
has to be space between the fence and moving parts to
prevent the operator from being squeezed between them.
Jokab Safety will be pleased to advise on guarding de-
5
sign and safety distances required.
Quick-Guard Fencing System, what does it manage?

6
Quick-Guard is a fencing system which is designed to polycarbonate panels also remained firmly in the aluminum
manage the requirements from a safety perspective. It ma- profiles. The fence was deformed during the collision but it
nages to stop machine parts and material that, during a
malfunction, can be thrown against the fence. We have
sprung back, with some deformation as a result. 7
made collision tests with a large industrial robot, ABB Irb
6600, which was driven into the fence at a pace of 3 m/s.
Both our Standard and Express fencing system withstood
this. Thanks to our patented net-lock, both net and polycar-
bonate panels remained firmly attached to the aluminum
In our pulling tests of up
to 500 kg, both mesh and
polycarbonate panels remai-
8
profile. A video showing these tests is available on our
ned firmly attached to the
website. In our tension-tests of up to 500 kg, both net and
the profile.
Patented assembly function 9

The Jokab Safety patented guide and locking method
makes it simple to assemble and dismantle the fencing
system. The nut has several advantages, it can easily be
located into the profile and automatically positions itself
when the screw is turned 90 degrees clockwise. When
in this position the bracket being fixed can be adjusted
10
as required and locked by turning the screw further clock-
wise. To remove the bracket the fixing screw is turned
anti-clockwise until the nut is in line with the profile slot.
#ENTRALISINGAND
turning limitations
-OUNTTHElXTURESBYlRSTSLACKENINGTHESCREWTURN 11
anti-clockwise. Then tighten the screw clockwise in the
Locking
usual way. The nut will then automatically mechanically
patented lock the fixture into the profile.
perpendicular
to profile slot
!LLlTTINGSARESUPPLIED0RE ASSEMBLEDFittings that do
not have a cast-in tab can be provided with a centring
12
#ENTRINGWASHER
washer.
13
Quick-Guard® is supplied in three ways
1. To be designed on site
You only order sections consisting of a few components.
Then the fencing system is built on site. A manual mesh
clipping tool, for easy cutting of the mesh, is provided
with the delivery if needed.
2. Cut to size according

to drawing
9OU GIVE US A SIMPLE SKETCH OR A !UTO#!$¸ lLE OF
how you want the fencing system to look. We input this
INFORMATIONINTO3AFE#!$ANDDESIGNTHEFENCEIN$
From this drawing, cutting and component lists and a
quotation are generated automatically.
3. Pre-mounted or assembled on site

We can deliver full/partially pre-
assembled fencing systems or we
can assemble them on site.
Quick-Guard® E - design directly on site 1
Quick-Guard E is installed quickly and cost effectively
because it only consists of patented net-locks, welded
mesh, panels of polycarbonate, u-profiles and fence posts
(profiles with floor-brackets). All parts for Quick-Guard
2
and pre-assembled doors are delivered immediately from
stock. The few components of the fencing system make it
easy for you to custom build and install the fencing system
yourselves.
The strength of the fencing system originates from the 3
fact that the welded mesh and/or panels of polycarbonate
are ‘locked’ into the profile. The outer wire of the mesh
is locked by uniquely designed ‘netlocks’ into the profile
making the fixing virtually as strong as being welded. The
polycarbonate panels are locked in with specially designed
infill-locks which, according to our tests, have been as
4
strong as the mesh netlock system. If you want more stable
fencing posts, you can choose a sturdier profile measuring
44 x 88 mm instead of the standard 44 x 44 mm profile.
It is always easy to combine Quick-Guard E with Quick-
Guard standard to achieve a complete system. It is also easy 5
to adjust and modify the guarding system when production
equipment is modified and/or moved.
Quick-Guard E is easy to assemble
and to angle 45°.
6
Assembly of Quick-Guard E
1. 2.
7
U-profile
Spacer screw
*3-
Net-lock NL2
8
0REMOUNTmOORlXTURESONVERTICALPOSTS-OUNTlXTURESBY 1. Insert spacer screw into the post profiles.
first slackening the screw anti-clockwise. Then tighten the 0LACETHELOWERU PROlLEONTHEMESH
screw clockwise in the usual way, the nut will then auto-
matically locate into the correct position and mechanically
0USHTHEMESHINTOTHEPROlLEANDlXTHEMESHWITH
NL2 netlocks.
9
LOCKTHElXTUREINTOTHEPROlLE-AKESURETHATTHENUTHAS 4. Fix top u-profile in place either before or after inserting
turned correctly. the mesh.
3. 4. 10
11
Assemble the next section. The distance between the

posts can be adjusted some mm after the mesh is locked
Lock the top of the mesh using NL3 netlocks; this way
the mesh is secured, stabilised and electrically grounded. 12
in with the Net-locks. The mesh can be angled up to 45° Grounding is needed when electrical devices or cables are
WITHOUTUSINGHINGES*3- + assembled on the mesh.
13
Quick-Guard® E - can be ordered in sections
Quick-Guard Express can be ordered in different sections consisting of a few components. By adding the dif-
ferent sections, one can easily build a guard fencing system. We have also developed a software program in
Excel for you to be able to quickly calculate which components you will need and to visualize a fencing system
built with sections.
One can easily assemble the Express sections. It is also possible to angle these sections (45°). The mesh can easily
be cut to the desired size with a simple clipping tool.
Designation explanation.
H, X, Y, Z, G, S and
JSM E11-N/PC20H8 X = Section type
Express 11 = c-c 1100 mm .-ESH 20 = Height 2000 mm XMM0ROlLE

15 = c-c 1500 mm 0#POLYCARBONATE 22 = Height 2200 mm XMM0ROlLE
IMAGE DESIGNATION ART.NO. DESCRIPTION

Section X
*3-% .8 40-106-02 #OMPONENTS FOR AN ADDITIONAL SECTION WITH ONLY
*3-% .8 40-101-03 one post. The height can be varied between
*3-% .8 40-102-03 2000 mm or 2200 mm. The section is supplied
*3-% .0#8 40-104-01 unassembled.
*3-% .0#8 40-105-01
*3-% 0#8 40-101-53 Included parts: Floorbracket, netlocks/panel
*3-% 0#8 40-102-53 locks, support screws, edge protection, Alumi-
*3-% .8 40-106-10 num profile and welded steel mesh/panel sheet.
*3-% .8 40-101-09
*3-% .8 40-102-08
IMAGE DESIGNATION ART.NO. DESCRIPTION 1
Section Y
*3-% 9 40-106-80 #OMPONENTSFORACOMPLETEPOSTWITHmOORBRACK-
*3-% 9 40-103-21 et to finalize the additional sections. The height
*3-% 9 40-103-41 can be varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm.
The section is supplied unassembled.
2
Included parts: Floorbracket, support screw, and
Aluminum profile.
3
Section Z
*3-% .:
*3-% .:
40-106-04
40-101-04
#OMPONENTSFORACOMPLETESECTIONWITHOUT
fence posts and floor brackets. The height can
4
*3-% .: 40-102-04 be varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm. The
*3-% .0#: 40-104-02 section is supplied unassembled.
*3-% .0#: 40-105-02
*3-% 0#:
*3-% 0#:
40-106-54
40-101-54
Included parts: Netlocks/panel locks, edge pro-
tection and welded steel mesh/panel sheet.
5
*3-% 0#: 40-102-54
*3-% .: 40-106-08
*3-% .: 40-101-10
Section G
*3-% .: 40-102-09
6
*3-% .'
40-101-05 #OMPONENTSFORCOMPLETECONVENTIONALDOOR
*3-% .'
40-102-05 with outer profile 44x88 mm. The height can
*3-% .0#' 40-104-03 be varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm. The
*3-% .0#'
*3-% 0#'
40-105-03
40-106-55
section is supplied unassembled. The size of the
door can easily be adjusted on site.
7
*3-% 0#' 40-101-55
*3-% 0#' 40-102-55 Included parts: L-brackets, floorbrackets, net-
locks/panel locks, handle, hinges, door stop,

4HEDOORLEAFIS
supplied pre-mounted.
crossbar, aluminum profiles and welded steel
mesh/panel sheet.
8
Section S 9
*3-% .3 40-101-06 #OMPONENTSFORACOMPLETESLIDINGDOORWITH
*3-% .3 40-102 -06 outer profile 44x88 mm. The height can be var-
*3-% .0#3 40-104-04 ied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm. The section
*3-% .0#3 40-105-04 is supplied unassembled. The size of the door
*3-% 0#3
*3-% 0#3
40-101-57
40-102-56
can easily be adjusted on location. 10
Included parts: L-brackets, T-brackets, floorbrack-
*3-% .3 40-101-11 ets, netlocks/panel locks, handle, suspension
*3-% .3 40-102-10 wheels, guiding components, door stop, cross-
bar, endcaps, aluminum profiles and welded
steelmesh/panel sheet.
11
12
13
Quick-Guard® Standard and SafeCAD®
Quick-Guard consists of a minimum of different components, 3AFE#!$4HISISA@PLUG INPROGRAMFOR!UTO#!$¸. A sim-
such as aluminum profiles, patented assembly parts, net- ple sketch of the guarding system that is required is used
locks, mesh, solid or noise reduction panels. Furthermore as the program input. The positions of doors and hatches,
the cost for assembly and modification of the system is choice of mesh, polycarbonate, aluminum/steel sheet or
low. Thanks to our patented screw-lock system, we can noise reduction panels are typed in. The program automati-
supply all brackets pre-mounted with fixing screws and CALLY GENERATES $ DRAWINGS ALONG WITH COMPONENT AND
nuts. No holes need to be drilled in the profiles and all cuts cutting lists. These drawings are also used as the basis for
are made straight. Assembly and modification is therefore assembly/ installation.
very easy. It is always easy to combine Quick-Guard E with Quick-
To be able to quickly and easily custom design practical Guard to achieve a complete system. It is also easy to adjust
safety solutions, we have developed a computer programme, and modify when the production equipment is modified
and/or moved.
Brackets are delivered

Pre-assembled with
screws and nuts.
SafeCAD®
Example of component and cutting list print-outs from SafeCad.

Quote
!RTICLENO $ESCRIPTION 1TY 5NIT
*3-" +&LOORBRACKET PCS
*3-" +, BRACKET PCS
*3-" +4 BRACKET PCS
*3- +&LOORBRACKETINSTEEL
#UTLIST0OLYCARBONATE
PCS

!RTICLENO *3-3UPORTSCREWFOR%CONOMY
$ESCRIPTION 1TY
,ENGTH PCS
7IDTH 3UMM

*3-!%DGEPROTECTIONPROlLEFORWELDEDMESH
*3-90#!0CSHEETMMUNCOLOUREDX
M

*3-90#!0CSHEETMMUNCOLOUREDCUTTOSIZE
#UTLIST7ELDED-ESH
!RTICLENO $ESCRIPTION 1TY ,ENGTH 7IDTH 3UMM
*3-9.77ELDEDSTEELMESHXXBLACKX
*3-9.77ELDEDSTEELMESHXXBLACKX
*3-9.77ELDEDSTEELMESHXXBLACKCUTTOSIZE

Quick-Guard® Assembly, standard version 1
Assembly of the Quick-Guard¸ system is very easy. All components are very light in weight and ergonomic in design. This
enables, in most cases, one man to be able to assemble both simple and complex structures with ease using very few
different types of fixing components. All fixtures can be mounted easily from “outside” by using the specially designed
”locking nut” which can be located anywhere in the extrusion channel. The fixture components, by means of integral
locating keys, ensure that correct angles are achieved and enable the number of bolts/nuts to be reduced to half the
number that would otherwise be required.
2
1. 2. 3
0REMOUNTmOORlXTURESBYlRSTSLACKENINGTHESCREWANTI Attach lower horizontal extrusion between vertical posts.

5
clockwise. Then tighten the screw clockwise in the usual Use a a spacing block to ensure the correct distance from
way. The nut will then automatically locate into the correct the floor.
position and mechanically lock the fixture into the profile.
6
3. 4.
7
Insert infill panel and fix middle horizontal profile. The

distance between the profiles is the width of the infill
Insert top infill panel. Fix top profile with fittings on the
top on both sides.
9
minus 20 mm.
5. 6. 10
11
Fix the poles to the floor.

Secure infill sheet with plastic strip or Net-lock fixings.
Easy, fast and quick. See more under Assembly of netlocks.
12
)FTHEREISARISKOFTHEROBOTSTRIKINGTHEPOLYCARBONATE*3-
0,PANELLOCKSMUSTBEUSED
13
Assembly using NL2 and NL3 Net-locks on welded mesh
NL2 Net-lock NL3 Net-lock
-ESHWITHOUTERWIRE -ESHWITHOUTOUTERWIRE
The outer mesh
wire is locked into
the profile.
max 2 mm
min 15 mm
max 2 mm
The Net-lock locks
The outer mesh wire is the mesh against
When assembling the Net-lock NL2 it is first put into
locked into the profile. the profile.
the profile as the drawing shows. Then the Net-lock is
turned 90°. When cutting the welded mesh the wire
ends should not be longer than two (2) mm. When assembling the Net-lock NL3 it is first put into
the profile with the tabs on each side of the mesh wire.
The screw is then tightened. When cutting the welded
mesh the wire ends should be at least 15 mm to fit
into the profile. NL3 must be used to lock the mesh
into the slot.
Number of Net-locks
Number of Net-locks Quick-Guard Number of Net-locks Quick-Guard E
standard version On Quick-Guard E both Net-lock NL2 and NL3 can be
On Quick-Guard standard version NL3 is recommended used. For mesh edges without outer wire NL3 must be
as it can handle mesh with and without an outer wire. used instead of NL2.
about 400 mm NL3 is used in order
90 mm to mechanically lock
the mesh and to
electrically ground
the mesh.
approx. 350 mm NL2 or NL3
Ne
!ot
NL2 or NL3
O
hw
m
-w
d
ted
nlish
e
out an outer wire NL3
must be used. NL2 or NL3
90 mm
NL2 or NL3
NOTE! On both Quick-Guard Standard and Quick-Guard E at least two NL3 should be used in order to
mechanically lock the mesh and to electrically ground the mesh. NL3 should only be used on doors.
Fixing posts to the floor when mesh is required to be fitted at a later date.
Temporarily mount at least two middle profiles before dril-
ling and fixing posts to the floor. This method is used when
Right Wrong infill mesh or panels are to be fitted at a later date.
Note! Never attempt to fix the posts to the floor without

first connecting at least two middle profiles to ensure the
posts are parallel to each other and vertical.
Dimensions for aluminum profile lengths and panels. 1
9
Material Width Height
0OLYCARBONATE
7ELDEDMESH
8MM
8MM
9MM
9MM 10
3TEELPANEL 8MM 9MM
Sound-absorbing panel 25mm X-37 mm Y-37 mm
Sound-absorbing 50 mm X-37 mm Y-37 mm
,AMINATEDGLASS 8MM 9MM
$OUBLE0C
3OUNDABSORBENTPANELPROlLE*3-!3
PCS8
PCS,8
PCS9
PCS,9
11
3OUND ABSORBINGPROlLE*3-!3 PCS,8(mitred 2 x 45 degrees) 2 pcs. L=Y (mitred 2 x 45 degrees)
$OUBLE0CPROlLE*3-!3 PCS,8 PCS,9
12
13
ALUMINUM PROFILES
A wide range of aluminium profiles are available and include, fencing profile, guide rails, and cable ducting. The cable
ducting is available in three sizes, and can be delivered with or without mounting holes. The cable ducting is easy to
OPENANDCANBEPROVIDEDWITHENDCAPS#OVERSTRIPSOFPLASTICAREALSOAVAILABLEINCLUDINGFENCINGPROlLESMAKING
the entire groove cross section utilisable as ‘installation conduit’ for cables. The Aluminium profiles have integral "V"
grooves to aid in centring any drilling that may be necessary.
Fencing Profile
$ESIGNATION *3-! 44
Article numbers: 40-037-70 (cut to length) 20,25
40-037-74 (L=6000)
11
-ATERIAL .ATURALLYANODIZEDALUMINIUM
3,3
$IMENSIONS XMM
11,5
16,5
Ø 5,6 (2x)
32
$ESIGNATION *3-!!
Article numbers: 40-037-35 (cut to sizes)
40-037-98 (L=1400) 44
40-037-37 (L=2000)
40-037-38 (L=2000) v
40-037-39 (L=2400)
20,25
11
40-037-40 (L=2500)
v
v
40-037-41 (L=6000) v
11,5
3,3
-ATERIAL .ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
$IMENSIONS XMM
Order Unit: 10 pcs/box
$ESIGNATION *3-!! 88
Article numbers: 40-037-42 (cut to sizes) v
40-037-43 (L=2000)
v v
40-037-44 (L=2200)
20,25
11
40-037-45 (L=6000)
v
44
v
11,5
-ATERIAL .ATURALANODIZED v v
aluminium v
3,3
$IMENSIONS XMM 44
$ESIGNATION *3-! 88
Article numbers: 40-037-75 (cut to length) v
40-037-79 (L=6000)
v
v
Ø 5,6 (4x)
-ATERIAL atural anodized aluminium
N
88
$IMENSIONS X
v
v
20,25
11
v
v
11,5
v v
v
44
3,3
55,8 Ø 8 (4x)
75,4
Technical data
Angular moment Flexural resistance
Typ Vikt (kg/m) lx (mm4x104) ly (mm4x104) Wx (mm3x103) Wy (mm3x103)
*3-! 1.040 1.1 7.6 1.19 3.43
*3-!! 1.504 12.4 12.4 5.64 5.64
*3-!! 2.379 79.6 21.6 18.1 9.8
*3-! 3.632 143.0 143.0 32.5 32.5
Fencing U-Profile 1
$ESIGNATION *3-! 10,4
Article numbers: 40-037-28 (cut to sizes, max 2.0 m)
40-037-27 (L=1076)
40-037-46 (L=1476)
2
23
40-037-47 (L=2000)
Weight: 0.230 kg/m
H-profile
$ESIGNATION *3-! 10,4
3
!RTICLENUMBERS *3-!CUTTOSIZES 6,7
40-037-51 (L=1076)
40-037-52 (L=1476)
-ATERIAL
40-037-53 (L=2020)
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM 4
44
Weight: 0.452 kg/m
3
5
Guide Rails
$ESIGNATION *3-!"
Article number: 40-037-26 33
-ATERIAL
Holes:
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
c-c = 275 mm, ø = 6 mm
6
34
Standard Length: 4.0 m

Weight: 0.530 kg/m
$ESIGNATION *3-!
7
Article number: 40-037-49
#UTTOSIZESINCLSCREWS 56
40-037-08
(Length 2.0 m, incl. screws)
40-037-48
8
(Length 6.0 m, incl. screws)
$ELIVEREDWITH 3CREW*3-3%
79
.UT*3--"
9
v
17
Holes: c-c = 450 mm, ø = 8.5 mm

Standard Length: 2.0; 6.0 m
Weight: 1.585 kg/m
Cable Ducting
$ESIGNATION *3-!? 10
!RTICLENUMBERS *3-!!
*3-!"
-ATERIAL .ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM 44
$IMENSIONS XMM
Standard Length:
*3-!!
2.0 m
WITHHOLESC CMM
v
11
25
v
v
ø= 5 mm v
*3-!" WITHOUTHOLES
Weight:

KGM*3-!!
KGM*3-!"
12
13
$ESIGNATION *3-!?
!RTICLENUMBERS *3-!! 44
*3-!" v
$IMENSIONS XMM
v
60
*3-!! WITHHOLESC CMM
ø = 5 mm
*3-!" WITHOUTHOLES
v
v
Order Unit: 10 pcs/box v
Weight: KGM*3-!!
KGM*3-!"
$ESIGNATION *3-! 88
$IMENSIONS XMM
68
Weight: 1,844 kg/m
v
v
v
v v v
Cable tie
$ESIGNATION *3-8
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL .YLONBLACK
Profiles for installation of acoustic damping

Profile for 25 mm sound-absorbing panel, JSM YLA25A_
$ESIGNATION *3-!3 23,7
Article numbers: 40-037-95 (cut to length)
40-037-09 (L=2000)
20
36,5
43,4
$IMENSIONS XMM
Weight: 0,545 kg/m
29,1
Profile for 50 mm sound-absorbing panel, JSM YLA50A

$ESIGNATION *3-!3 51
20
36,5
42-021-81 (L=6000)
43,3
$IMENSIONS X
22
Weight: 0,694 kg/m 44
55
Profile for double 5mm Polycarbonate panel, JSM YPC5_

$ESIGNATION *3-!3
4,9
40-037-10 (L=2000)
16,3
23,2
$IMENSIONS XMM
Weight: 0,510 kg/m
40
FITTINGS 1
Jokab Safety’s fencing system is put together with various types of fitting. Uprights are anchored to the floor with
floor angle fittings. With a small angle fitting it is possible to hang an electrical enclosure and strengthen the corners
OFFREE STANDINGWALLS#ORNERSANDJOINTSARECONSTRUCTEDWITHTHEAIDOF4,AND)lTTINGS)FANGLESDIFFERENTTO²
BETWEENTHEFENCESECTIONSAREREQUIREDA*3- +ANGLElTTINGCANBEUSED4HISHINGEHASADISTANCEBETWEEN
centres of 47 mm, which means that the gap between uprights will always be less than 20 mm. According to EN
ISO 13857, the minimum permitted protection distance is 120 mm for a gap narrower than 20 mm.
2
Floor/Angle fitting
$ESIGNATION *3- +
3
Article numbers: 40-030-14
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3#X
Washer 9 x 18 x 1,5 (x 2)

-ATERIAL
.UTS*3--"X
!LUMINIUM
4
Quantity: 10 pcs/box
$ESIGNATION *3-" +
5
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3#X
Washer 9 x 18 1,5 (x 2)

-ATERIAL
.UT*3--"X
!LUMINIUM
6
7
$ESIGNATION *3-" +
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWS*3-3#X

Washers 9 x 18 x 1,5 (x 4)
.UTS*3--"X 8
7ASHERS*3-""X
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM
$ESIGNATION *3- +
9
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3$X
.UT*3--"X
Article number:
$ESIGNATION
40-030-10
*3- + 10
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3$X
.UT*3--"X
-ATERIAL :INC PLATEDSTEEL *3- +
*3- +
11
12
13
Small Angle fitting, e.g. Electrical cabinet fitting
$ESIGNATION *3-" +
Two counter sunk holes
*3-! +
One counter sunk hole
!RTICLENUMBER *3-B-K)
*3-! +
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREW*3-3#
.UT*3--"
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM
Order unit: 10 pcs/box
L-bracket
$ESIGNATION *3-" +
105
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3!
.UT*3--" 6
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM
105
41
T-bracket
$ESIGNATION *3-" +
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3
CREW*3-3!
.UT*3--"
105
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM
6
41
I-bracket, joint
$ESIGNATION *3-! +
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREW*3-3! 85
.UT*3--"
41
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM 6
44
Distance screw
$ESIGNATION *3-
-ATERIAL :INC PLATEDSTEEL
Angle bracket 1
$ESIGNATION *3- +
102
.UT*3--"
Hole: c-c =47 mm
3 47
Note!4HE*3- +MUSTONLYBEUSEDFOR 75
making fence angles. 3
10
11
12
13
DOOR COMPONENTS
To mount conventional doors a hinge is available which permits an opening angle of 180°. For mounting a sliding
door, guide rails and suspension wheels are utilised. Other sliding elements make it possible to build different types of
hatches. Guide rollers, for wide and heavy doors, door closers, fittings for sensors/switches etc are also available.
Conventional Door Sliding Door
Hatch Double Hatch
Folding Hatch Sliding Hatch
Hinge kit 1
$ESIGNATION *3-$!Hinge

-ATERIAL
.UT*3--"
:INC PLATEDSTEEL 2
102
Fixing Holes : c-c = 62 mm
Note!*3-$!MUSTNOTBEUSEDASAFENCINGANGLE
fitting because its gap can exceed 20 mm.
3
62
3
95
$ESIGNATION *3-$"Spring hinge 22

4
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3PACERPLATESCREWSNUTS
-ATERIAL Zinc-plated steel
28
5
115
NOTE! The door gap will be 28 mm when installed.
76
6
Handle
$ESIGNATION *3-$Handle 26
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREW*3-3$
.UT*3--"
7
-ATERIAL 4HERMOPLASTICBLACK
150
8
44
$ESIGNATION *3-$Handle 40
9
22
-ATERIAL
Handle: Thermoplastic, black
Fittings: Aluminum
10
150
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
Suitable sliding door on the inside of the fence.
70
5 26
119
11
12
13
Door closer
$ESIGNATION *3-$
(conventional door)
-ATERIAL $OORCLOSER STEEL
Bracket - Aluminum
$ESIGNATION *3-$SLIDINGDOOR
Gas spring
$ESIGNATION 'ASSPRINGINCLUDINGMOUNT
Stroke length: 300 mm
-ATERIAL 3TEEL
$ESIGNATION *3-$!'ASSPRINGINCLUDING
mount
Stroke length: 350 mm
-ATERIAL 3TEEL
Fixing details included:

Side fastener (42-021-27)
U fitting (42-021-28)
Specify the required force when ordering
Securing plate for padlock

$ESIGNATION *3-$"RACKETFOR0ADLOCK 3
hasp
50
Note! Two pieces are required for one complete unit.

13
35
62
Ball Catch
$ESIGNATION *3-$"CONVENTIONALDOOR 40
Article number: 40-033-41 40 5
-ATERIAL
70
Brackets: Aluminium
"ALL#ATCH .ICKEL PLATEDBRASS
50
20
$ESIGNATION *3-$#SLIDINGDOOR
5
40
40 1
50
-ATERIAL
70
Brackets: Aluminium
10
2
20
$ESIGNATION *3-$$FOLDINGDOOR 60
3
80
-ATERIAL
Brackets: Aluminium
4
68
58
5
5
22
35
25
70 5
Upper Door bolt
5PPER$OORBOLT 80 60
$ESIGNATION *3-$!
6
40
-ATERIAL
5
Brackets: Zinc-plated steel
35
Rod: Stainless steel 90

7
65
30
115
10
8
40
9
1130
5
40
35
10
11
12
13
Lower Door bolt
$ESIGNATION *3-$
-ATERIAL
Brackets: Zinc-plated steel 40
Rod: Stainless steel
130
280
10
8
55
83
25
18
Lower Door bolt

,OWER$OORBOLT
$ESIGNATION *3-$"
-ATERIAL
Brackets: Zinc-plated steel
40
Rod: Stainless steel
100
6
995
390
30
4
40
25
10
180
25
18
Cam lock 1
Cam lock 22
$ESIGNATION *3-$ 60
32
-ATERIAL 2
Brackets: Aluminium
,OCKUNIT 0OLYAMIDEBLACK
70
35
$ELIVEREDWITHOUTKEY
Key to cam lock

6
3
$ESIGNATION *3-$FORCAMLOCK*3-$
-ATERIAL :INCBLACK
Sliding bolt for Eden

4
$ESIGNATION *3-$FORHINGEDDOOR
110 110
-ATERIAL 3TEELPAINTEDYELLOW
72
5
Supplied without an Eden 130
14
For installation on hinged doors. 60
180
6
40
Magne 1A mount
7
$ESIGNATION *3-$
-ATERIAL !NODISEDALUMINIUM
8
3UPPLIEDWITHOUT-AGNE!-AGNETICLOCK
For installation on hinged doors
10
11
12
13
Door stop
$ESIGNATION *3-$! 40
60
25
$ESIGNATION *3-$ 60
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWS.UTSAND
vibration damper
60
For mounting on vertical profiles.
60
5
$ESIGNATION *3-$" 60
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWS.UTSAND
vibration damper
40
75
For mounting on horizontal profiles.
5
Suspension wheels
$ESIGNATION *3-$
&ORALUMINIUMPROlLEGUIDERAILS*3-!"AND
*3-!
Sliding elements
Sliding element, (rectangular)
$ESIGNATION *3-$
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWAND.UT
-ATERIAL 0OLYAMID
40
Sliding element, (round)
19
1
$ESIGNATION *3-$
40
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWAND.UT 8
-ATERIAL 0OLYAMID
2
Sliding element, (guide)
19
$ESIGNATION *3-$
3
40
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWAND.UT 8
-ATERIAL 0OLYAMID
9,6
4
Guide Components for Sliding Door
Guide Bracket for Sliding Door
30
$ESIGNATION *3-$
5
5
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUMAND0!
65
For mounting on vertical profiles.

50
6
Guide Bracket for Sliding Door
$ESIGNATION *3-$!
60
5 7
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUMAND0!
40
For mounting on horizontal profiles.

50
8
Bracket for Guide Pin 40
$ESIGNATION *3-$"
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM
9
120
5
10
11
12
13
Guide roller
Guide roller for conventional door with
locking mechanism
$ESIGNATION *3-$
*3-$ + 0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH
angle bracket *3-$ +
!RTICLENUMBERS *3-$
*3-$ +
$IAMETER MM
-AXLOAD KG
97
*3-$
Guide roller for sliding door

$ESIGNATION *3-$!
*3-$! + 0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH
angle bracket
!RTICLENUMBERS *3-$! *3-$! +
*3-$! +
$IAMETER MM
-AXLOAD KG
95
*3-$!
Diagonal bar for door

$ESIGNATION *3-$ 20
Length: 1160 mm
$ESIGNATION *3-$!
400/1160

Length: 400 mm
SWITCH FITTINGS 1
Eden fittings
Fittings for Eden, adapted for sliding and 4
conventional doors
$ESIGNATION *3-$( 2
Article number 40-033-36
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM
100
Note!
Two fittings are needed for a complete Eden.
40 4
Eden Fitting for sliding door (flush with fence)

$ESIGNATION *3-$* 60 5
Article number 42-020-40 4
80
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM
6
67
51
Note! /NE*3-$(ANDONE*3-$*ARENEEDED
for a complete unit.
Fittings for JSNY5 Interlock Switches

Conventional opening door Interlock 50
7
Switch Fittings.
20
$ESIGNATION *3-$!
4
50
8
55
9
12
Conventional opening door Interlock Switch 50

5
10
Fittings.
$ESIGNATION *3-$!!
11
40

70
50 5
12
40
13
Sliding Door Interlock Switch Fittings 45
$ESIGNATION *3-$" 127
60
40
5 65
60
5
Fittings for Magnet Switches JSNY7

Hinged door Magnet Switch Fittings 3
$ESIGNATION *3-$%
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM
Note! Two fittings are needed for a complete JSNY7. 90
35
Sliding Door Magnet Switch Fittings 5

$ESIGNATION *3-$' 8
-ATERIAL !LUMINIUM
90
90
40
40
Fittings for Interlock Switches JSNY8 and JSNY9

Sliding Door Interlock Switch
for JSNY8 Fittings.
$ESIGNATION *3-$$ 90
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS 40
138
50
4
5
Conventional opening door Interlock 40 55 1
Switch Fittings for JSNY9 and JSNY8 35 42
$ESIGNATION *3-$#
2
154
60
94
4
5
3
Sliding door Interlock Switch Fittings 96 5 40
for JSNY9
4
5
$ESIGNATION *3-$&
40
60
40
5
134
6
60
10
11
12
13
TERMINAL CAPS AND STRIPS
Terminal caps are available to cover profile ends, thus eliminating sharp edges. Strips are also available, both narrow
and wide, to cover the side of the fencing profile.
Terminal Caps
Terminal Cap for JSM A44A
$ESIGNATION *3-,!YELLOW 44
44
*3-,"GREY
!RTICLENUMBERS *3-,!
5
*3-,"
-ATERIAL 0OLYAMIDE
$IMENSIONS XMM
Terminal Cap for JSM A4488A

$ESIGNATION *3-,!YELLOW 44
*3-,"GREY 88
!RTICLENUMBERS *3-,!
*3-,"
5
-ATERIAL 0OLYAMIDE
$IMENSIONS XMM
Terminal Cap for JSM A25 44

$ESIGNATION *3-,
25
-ATERIAL 0OLYAMIDEGREY

$IMENSIONS XMM
5
Terminal Cap for JSM A60 44

$ESIGNATION *3-,
-ATERIAL 0OLYAMIDEGREY
60
$IMENSIONS XMM
Cover Strip
Narrow Cover Strip, for JSM A44A, JSM A44A,
JSM A4488A and JSM A8888
$ESIGNATION *3-49ELLOW
16
*3-4"'REY
!RTICLENUMBERS *3-4!

*3-4"
2,5
-ATERIAL !"3
$IMENSIONS MM
Order Unit: 2m
Wide Cover Strip, for JSM A44A, JSM A44A,

JSM A4488A and JSM A8888
$ESIGNATION *3-4! 40
-ATERIAL 06#YELLOW
SOFTMATERIAL
$IMENSIONS MM
2,5
Order Unit: 25 m/coil

/THERCOLOURSAVAILABLEUPONREQUEST
Accessories 1
Accessories
All fittings and door components are delivered complete with screws, washers and nuts pre-mounted. For cable
DUCTINGTHESCREWS3"ANDNUTS-"HAVETOBEORDEREDSEPARATELYPCSM
2
Designation Article number Description Dimension Material Order Unit
JSM S5B 3CREWTOCABLE

ducting
-X :INC0LATEDPCSBOX
Steel 3
JSM S6A 3CREWFORHINGE -X :INC0LATEDPCSBOX
cross-slotted Z (pozidrive) Steel
JSM S8A

&IXINGSCREWCOUNTERSUNK -X

:INC0LATED PCSBOX
$ACROLIT
4
JSM S8C &IXINGSCREWFORmOOR -X :INC0LATEDPCSBOX
fitting and small angle Steel
5
JSM S8D &IXINGSCREW -X :INC0LATED 100 pcs/box
Steel
JSM S8E &IXINGSCREWFOR -X :INC0LATED PCSBOX

'UIDERAIL*3-! 3TEEL 6
JSM M4B ,OCKINGNUT - :INC0LATED PCSBOX
Steel
JSM M5B ,OCKINGNUT - :INC0LATED PCSBOX

7
Steel
JSM M6B ,OCKINGNUT - :INC0LATED

PCSBOX
JSM M8B ,OCKINGNUT -

Steel
:INC0LATED
PCSBOX
8
Steel
JSM X1 #ABLETIE MM.YLONBLACKPCSBOX

UV-resistant 9
JSM X2 41-900-43 EXPANSION SHELLBOLT -X :INC0LATED 50pcs/box
Steel
JSM X3 41-910-00 Window cleaning fluid (Antistatic) for

polycarbonate sheets. Actuator head 0.5 L. per can 10
JSM X4 -ESHCLIPPINGTOOL L=300 each
JSM B4C #ENTRINGWASHER Ø4,2 :INC0LATED 100 pcs/box

steel
11
JSM B5C #ENTRINGWASHERL Ø5,2 :INC0LATED 100 pcs/box
steel
steel 12
steel
13
Surfaces
Surfaces
The choice of net and surfaces depends, among other things, on the protection distance. In the case of netting,
a minimum distance of 200 mm (for anyone aged 14 or older) with a mesh size of 40x40 mm in accordance with
%.)3/&ORCLOSERPROTECTIONDISTANCESANDFORNOISEREDUCTIONSOLIDPANELSAREUSED0ANELSAREAVAI-
lable in different materials. For protection of welding cells, polycarbonate welding transparencies are used.
Welded net
$ESIGNATION *3-9.7?7%?
Stitch: 40x40 mm
Thread: 3,5 mm
Article no. Name Material Dimensions Type

*3-9.7 3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED XMM 7ELDED
*3-9.7 3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED #UTTOSIZE 7ELDED
*3-9.7% 3TAINLESSSTEEL33 XMM 7ELDED
*3-9.7% 3TAINLESSSTEEL33 XMM 7ELDED
*3-9.7% 3TAINLESSSTEEL33 #UTTOSIZE 7ELDED
Other colours or woven wire mesh netting supplied on request.
Net locking for welded netting with outer wire
$ESIGNATION *3-.,
-ATERIAL 0!!"3
Net locking for welded and woven wire mesh netting, with or without outer wires
$ESIGNATION *3-.,
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWS
-ATERIAL :INC
Shockproof panelling
0LASTICPANELS
NAME*3-9?
Other materials can be supplied on request.
Plastic panel name: JSM Y_

Article no. Name Material Dimensions Type
*3-90#! 0OLYCARBONATEUNCOLOURED MM X
*3-90#! 0OLYCARBONATEUNCOLOURED MM X
*3-90#! 0OLYCARBONATEUNCOLOURED MM #UTTOSIZE
*3-90#!# 0OLYCARBONATEDARKTINTWELD PROTECTED MM #UTTOSIZE
*3-90#!# 0OLYCARBONATEDARKTINTWELD PROTECTED MM X
*3-9'! ,AMINATEDGLASS MM #UTTOSIZE
Surfaces 1
#ROSS BENTSHEETMETALPANEL
8-12
Other materials are available on request. 2
Steelplate
Article no. Name Material Thickness Dimensions

*3-9'0!
*3-9'0!
'ALVANISEDSHEETMETALX CRACKED
'ALVANISEDSHEETMETALX CRACKED

MM
MM
#UTTOSIZE
#UTTOSIZE
3
0AINTEDSHEETMETALCANBESUPPLIEDONREQUEST
Panel fixings
$ESIGNATION *3-0,FORMMPANELS
10
Article no. Name Length 4
*3-0,FORMMPANELS *3-0,! MM
-ATERIAL *3-0," MM
*3-0, 06#BLACK 11 *3-0,# MM
*3-0,
Quantity:
06#BLACK
50 pcs/package
*3-0,$ MM
5
*3-0,! MM
*3-0," MM
*3-0,# MM
*3-0,$ MM
6
For metal panel fixings
$ESIGNATION *3-'
5

20
-ATERIAL %0$-
7
3
Standard package: 10m/roll 1 2
Sheet securing glass 10

$ESIGNATION *3-' 6
Article numbers:
-ATERIAL
41-930-06
%0$-
8
12
Standard package: 50m/roll 1
Panel lockings
$ESIGNATION*3-0,FORMMPANELS
9
0RE ASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWS
-ATERIAL :INC
10
Soundabsorbing
Article no. Name Material Thickness Dimensions Kg/m2
*3-9,!! outside – painted or galvanised smooth sheet metal MM #UTTOSIZE
inside - galvanised preformed sheet metal
core – steel wool 11
*3-9,!! CHECKOUTARTNR ABOVE MM X
*3-9,!! CHECKOUTARTNR ABOVE MM #UTTOSIZE
Cut to size – max dimension 2000 x 1200
NOTE!
12
-OUNTINGPROlLE*3-!3USEDFOR*3-9,!!?ANDMOUNTINGPROlLE
*3-!3USEDFOR*3-9,!!?
13
Approvals:
Safety
Roller Door
Applications:
Allowing access to risk areas
0ROTECTIONFROMEJECTEDPAR-
ticles, e.g chips and welding
splash
Features:
Highest safety level according

to EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
0REVENTSUNINTENTIONALSTART
Withstands harsh environments
Quick operation
High reliability
Noise absorbing
Roller door for short safety distances

and narrow spaces
3AFETY2OLLER$OORSMAKEITPOSSIBLETOHAVEASHORTSAFETY Simple assembly

distance to the machine. The noise absorbing roller door is 4HE 3AFETY 2OLLER $OOR IS SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE BECAUSE
compact and it can therefore be placed in narrow spaces. it consists of few components and it is supplied partly
It is easy and quick to access the machine or gain access pre-assembled. It can be integrated into the Quick-Guard
FORSERVICINGWITHTHE3AFETY2OLLER$OOR fencing system from Jokab Safety as well as in other types
It demands a minimum of maintenance and offers reliable of fencing systems. It can also be installed on the machine
operation. To be able to start the machine/plant the door has or other permanent construction.
to be completely closed. The closed position is monitored
by the Eden non-contact sensor from Jokab Safety. As Customized roller door
soon as the door begins to open the Eden sends a signal This door design is easy to customize. The largest possible
TOTHEMACHINEPLANTVIATHE0LUTO3AFETY 0,#FROM*OKAB opening width is 4000 mm and the largest possible opening
Safety. The roller door fulfills safety category 4 together height is 3000 mm. The maximum size of the door fabric
WITH%DENAND0LUTO is 10 m2. If a larger door fabric is desired, contact Jokab
Safety. The door is supplied as standard with a light-grey
Protects against welding splash door fabric. Other colours can also be supplied. The roller
The roller door protects against ejected particles, such door can be supplied with a viewing window in full width
as chips and welding splash. The roller door fabric is also and at an optional height. The viewing window can also
resistant towards a great number of chemicals, which be made in a special material that protects against weld-
permits it to be installed in harsh environments. ing splash. The door cloth can also be made completely
transparent with yellow vertical reinforcing strips.
1
Standard door fabric With viewing window Fully transparent

3
4
Function
Highest protection in accordance with EN 954-1/ to the machine area. The door is equipped with a safety
EN ISO 13849-1 contact strip in the bottom preventing it from causing per-
The monitoring of the door´s position by two Eden sensors
TOGETHERWITHWITHA0LUTOMONITORINGUNITFULlLLSCATEGORY
sonal injury on any person. When the safety contact strip
is affected the door is is compressed, the door movement
5
according to EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1. These units are reverses to move upwards. The opening and closing of the
CERTIlEDBY4¯6AND$.6 door can be controlled via the buttons or via the signals
from the control system of the machine.
Functions
The door protects against access to moving parts in the Prevents an unintentional start 6
machine/plant. The production process can begin when When the door is located in front of the machine/plant, where
the door is fully closed. The closed position is monitored the operator can enter the area with his entire body, safe
by an Eden sensor on both sides of the door. Because the interlocking of the door´s downward movement is needed.
door is monitored by Eden sensors at both sides of the door This is to prevent the machine from being started from the
it is impossible to lift one side of the door and reach into
the risk area without the machine/plant stopping. When
outside when somebody is inside the roller door.
One way to solve this is to use a horizontal light curtain
7
the door has moved a maximum of 10 mm upwards a stop which covers the area which the operator can occupy
signal is sent to the protected machine/plant. The Eden within the risk area. Another solution is to place double light
SENSORSAREMONITOREDBYA0LUTO3AFETY 0,#WHICHHAS beams in the opening, combined with a reset facility. Yet
failsafe outputs for stopping the machine/plant in the risk
area and to control the door.
another solution is to use time-reset. A time-reset button is
placed inside the risk area and a button is placed outside 8
The door also protects from particles ejected by the pro- the risk area. First, the button in the risk area should be
duction process, e.g. chips and welding splash. It has a pressed and thereafter (within a certain amount of time,
good sound absorbing ability. Because the door operates e.g. 5 seconds) the button outside should be pressed.
quickly, at 0.8-1.0 m/s, the operator has a good access After this the door can be manoeuvred downwards.
9
Safety distances & standards 10

Minimum safety distance EN 999 Safety of machinery - The positioning of protec-
For the roller door to be able to provide good protection it tive equipment in respect of approach speeds of parts of
has to be installed a sufficient distance away from moving the human body
machine parts.
Note. The roller door has good protection against welding 11
Useful standards splash and smaller ejected particles from the the produc-
EN ISO 13857 Safety of machinery - Safety distances to tion area. The roller door is not intended to act as collision
prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower protection. The installer of the roller door has the respon-
limbs. sibility of ensuring that sufficient safety distance against
moving machine parts is provided. 12
13
Technical data – Safety Roller Door
Colour Frame - yellow, door cloth - grey
Other colours available on request.
Ordering data 3AFETY2OLLERDOORVIEWING
window, completely transparent
or viewing window with weld
splash protection.
2600
$AYLIGHTHEIGHT$AYLIGHTWIDTH
2000
Maximum size, door cloth 10 m²
If a larger size is needed,
contact Jokab Safety AB.
Maximum width 4000 mm
Maximum height 3000 mm
Driving unit Three phase motor 200-415
6!# (ZK7'&! 175 175
Speed, roller door 0.8 – 1.0 m/s up/down

2000
Max. number of cycles/minute 3 (during continous operation 2350
24 hours a day)
Door fabric material -ULTI LAYERPOLYESTERFABRICCLOTH
WITH06#MMTHICKORTRANSPAR-
ENT06#4HEVIEWINGWINDOW
can also be supplied with protec-
tion against welding flash light.
(Removes 99% of the UV-trans-
mision from the welding process)
600
Door fabric colour Grey (RAL 7038), can be supplied
with recessed window (only in full
width). Other colours are possible.
#ANEVENBEMADETRANSPARENT
(with yellow vertical reinforcing strips) $AYLIGHTHEIGHT
Material frames Aluminum extrusion
Material covering plates 06# COATEDSHEETSTEELPAINTED
with RAL 1023
Material upper wall mounting 5 mm sheet metal covered with
zinc
Sound absorption approx. 10dB
100 $AYLIGHTWIDTH 100
Ambient temperature #TO
When operating in temperatures
BELOW #THEOILINTHEGEAR
box should be replaced with an
oil suitable to withstand cold
temperatures. Screw holes
Safety level #ATEGORYINACCORDANCEWITH
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
Durability towards chemicals Ammoniac, sodium hydrate,
phosphoric acid, tartaric acid,
oxalic acid, hydrochloric acid,
citric acid, acetic acid, oil, deter-
gent, calcium chloride (contact
Jokab Safety for more specifica-
$AYLIGHTHEIGHT
#LEARANCE
tions) aperture
Control monitoring unit for
roller door *OKAB3AFETY|S3AFETY 0,#0LUTO
Outputs 4 safe outputs for connection to
machine/plant.
Monitoring of position of the 2 Eden sensors
roller door one on each side of the door.
$AYLIGHTWIDTH
Contact strip '0 INTHEBOTTOMFRAMEOF
the door fabric.
The door motion is reversed if
the contact strip is compressed.
1
2
Component ordering list
Safety PLC Pluto for dynamic and static inputs ____________________________________ 12:2
Accessories Pluto_ _______________________________________________________________________________12:2 3
Safety module Vital, for dynamic inputs ______________________________________________ 12:3
Safety sensor Eden ____________________________________________________________________________ 12:3
Light beam Spot 10, Spot 35 _ ______________________________________________________________12:5
Tina units for the connection of safety components to "Vital" circuits:
4
Focus light grids/light curtains, switches/sensors, emergency stops,
contact edges, bumpers and mats _______________________________________________________12:6
Connectors and cables _ _____________________________________________________________________ 12:8
Safety Relays ____________________________________________________________________________________ 12:10
5
Scanner Look ____________________________________________________________________________________ 12:13
Light curtains Focus–category 4 _______________________________________________________ 12:14
Light curtains Focus–category 2 _______________________________________________________ 12:15 6
Mirrors for light curtains_____________________________________________________________________ 12:17
Light grids Focus–category 4 ____________________________________________________________ 12:17
Light grids Focus–category 2 ____________________________________________________________ 12:18
Spot 10, Spot 35 and Laser Aligner ____________________________________________________ 12:18
7
Bypass and reset accessories ___________________________________________________________ 12:19
Mechanical accessories for light curtains, light grids, light beams and
bypassing__________________________________________________________________________________________ 12:21 8
Stopping time measurement and Machine diagnosis _ ________________________ 12:24
Sensors and switches _ ______________________________________________________________________ 12:25
Mechanical switches _________________________________________________________________________ 12:27
Control devices - one and two hand-control devices–Safeball ____________12:29
9
Control devices - 2 and 3-position pedals–Fox _ _________________________________12:30
Control devices - 3-position devices and pushbuttons ________________________ 12:30
Emergency stops Inca, Smile _ ___________________________________________________________12:33 10
Contact edges _ _________________________________________________________________________________12:36
Bumpers ___________________________________________________________________________________________12:36
Safety Mats _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 12:37
Fencing System QuickGuard, SafeCAD, Roller Door __________________________ 12:37
11
12
13
PRIS
DESIGNATION PRODUCT ART.NR DESCRIPTION
KR.
Safety PLC Pluto for dynamic and static inputs

Pluto A20 20-070-03 Safety PLC with 8 failsafe inputs + 8 non-failsafe outputs/ 1234567
failsafe inputs + 2 individually failsafe relay outputs + 2
individually failsafe transistor outputs. For use with Pluto
safety bus.
Pluto S20 20-070-05 As A20 but without Pluto safety bus and without current
monitoring on Q16 + Q17.
Pluto B20 20-070-06 As A20 but without current monitoring on Q16 + Q17.
Pluto B16 20-070-07 As B20 but without safety outputs Q0 – Q3.
Pluto B46-6 20-070-15 Safety PLC with 24 failsafe inputs + 16 non-failsafe
outputs/failsafe inputs + 4 individually failsafe relay outputs
+ 2 individually failsafe transistor outputs. For use with Pluto
safety bus. For use with a Pluto safety databus.
Pluto S46-6 20-070-16 Similar to B46-6 but without a databus.
Pluto AS-i 20-070-10 Safety PLC with AS-i databus

With 4 failsafe inputs + 4 non-failsafe outputs/failsafe inputs
+ 2 individual failsafe relay outputs + 2 individual failsafe
transistor outputs. With connection for Pluto safety databus.
Accessories Pluto
Gate-P1 20-070-70 Gateway for 2-way communication between the Pluto bus
Gateway Pluto and Profibus.
Profibus
Gate-C1 20-070-71 Gateway for 2-way communication between the Pluto bus
Gateway Pluto and CANopen.
CANopen
Gate-D1 20-070-72 Gateway for 2-way communication between the Pluto bus
Gateway Pluto and Devicenet.
DeviceNet
Gate-E1 20-070-73 Gateway for 2-way communication between Pluto databus
Gateway Pluto and Ethernet.
Ethernet
IDFIX-R 20-070-20 Identifier–assigns Pluto a specific address.

IDFIX-RW 20-070-21 Identifier–assigns Pluto an address. This version is
programmable.
IDFIX DATA 20-070-23 Identifier–to give Pluto AS-i a specific address.
R-120 20-070-22 Terminating resistance for Pluto databus.
HMI-display 20-070-25 HMI display 4 x 20 LCD Graphic. UNIOP (Exor).

20-070-28 HMI-software Designer 6.
20-070-29 HMI programming cable.
1
Pluto Manager 20-070-40 Programming tool for Pluto equipped with safety function
blocks. Can be downloaded from www.jokabsafety.com.
2
Pluto 20-070-56 For connecting PC to Pluto for programming and on-line
programming monitoring.
3
cable
Bus cable 20-070-30 CAN-Bus cable yellow 2 x 0.50 mm2.

20-070-31 CAN-Bus cable purple 2 x 0.50 mm2 halogen free.
Absolute
encoder
20-070-36 Absolute value encoder model RSA 597
(single-turn).
5
6
20-070-37 Absolute value encoder model RSA 698
(multi-turn).
20-070-38 Cable for absolute value sensor Unitronic LiYCY 12 x 0.25.
20-070-39
20-070-57
Connector for absolute encoder RSA 597.
Pluto communication cable for HMI-display.
7
Safety module Vital, for dynamic inputs 8

Vital 1 20-052-00 Safety module, 22.5 x 85 x 120 mm, 24 VDC.
9
Safety sensor Eden
Eva 20-046-00 Eva is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden
sensor system. IP67. 4 off DA2 spacer rings are included.
10
11
12
13
Eva E 20-046-06 Eva E is encapsulated in polyurethane for harsh environments.
Eva E is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden E
sensor system. IP69K.
Adam M12 20-051-00 Adam M12 is a safety sensor unit with a fixed M12 male
connector. IP67. 4 off DA1 spacer rings and 4 off DA2 spacer
rings are included in the package.
Adam 3 m 20-051-02 Adam 3 m is a safety sensor unit with 3 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67.
4 off DA2 spacer rings are included in the package.
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67.
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67. The package includes 4 off
DA2 spacer rings.
Adam E 10 m 20-051-06 Adam E 10 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in

polyurethane for harsh environments with 10 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen)
IP 69K.
Adam E 20-051-07 Adam E 0.5 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in extra

0.5 m M12 polyurethane for harsh environments with 0.5 m cable
5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen and M12 male connector IP69K.
Connector IP67.

polyurethane for harsh environments with 20 m cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen) IP69K. Connector IP67.
Eden C 10 m 20-051-14 Adam C with 10 m cable and Eva C in coded version.
1
20-051-16 Adam EC 10 m and Eva EC is a coded safety sensor unit
covered with extra polyurethane for harsh environments with
10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen. IP69K. Connector IP67.
DA 1 20-053-00 Protection plate, thickness 2.5 mm, polycarbonate. For Adam

M12 and associated Eva. Not suitable for Adam E and Eva E. 3
4
DA 2 20-053-01 Mounting spacer 4.5 x 8 x 4 mm, in black polyamide, for use
with Adam and Eva units.
20-053-10 Mounting screw M4, length 18 mm. 5

20-053-20 Mounting screw, M4, length 16 mm, external mounting for
6
Adam and Eva.
20-053-30 Mounting screw, M4, length 25 mm, external mounting for

Adam E and Eva.
20-053-32 Mounting screw M4, in nylon, length 25 mm, for recessed or

external mounting of Adam/Eva (Adam E/Eva E).
7
20-053-42 Safety screw SM4 x 20, mounting of Adam and Eva.
20-053-43 Safety screw SM4 x 25, mounting of Adam E and Eva E.

8
20-053-44 Safety nut M4.
9
20-053-50 Safety screwdriver bit SBITS.
20-053-62 SM4 x 20 Safety screw + 1 screwdriver bit.

10
Light beam Spot 10, Spot 35

11
Spot 10T/R 20-009-06 Safety light beam for up to 10 m distance.
M18 steel casing with M12 connector.
Accessories, see “Mechanical accessories for light curtains/
light beams and bypassing”.
12
13
Plastic enclosure with
M12 connector.
Accessories, see “Mechanical accessories for light curtains/
light beams and bypassing”.
JSRL2 20-008-01 Laser Aligner for use with Spot 35 T/R light beam.
Tina units for the connection of safety components to "Vital" circuits: Focus

light grids/light curtains, switches/sensors, emergency stops, contact edges,
bumpers and mats
Tina 1A 20-054-00 Blind M12 male connection plug for Tina 4A and Tina 8A.
Must be fitted into unused Tina 4A and Tina 8A sensor
positions.
Tina 2A 20-054-01 Tina 2A with M20 fitting for connection of emergency stops
and other safety devices having a suitable combination of
voltage-free contacts.
Tina 2B 20-054-11 Tina 2B with cable for internal assembly in emergency stops
and other safety sensors with voltage-free contacts.
Tina 3A 20-054-02 Tina 3A with M12 connection and M20 fitting for use with
E-stops and other safety sensors with volt free contacts.
Tina 3A, 6A and 7A are similar units but with different
housings.
Tina 3Aps 20-054-14 As Tina 3A but with + 24V and 0V available.

Tina 4A 20-054-03 Connection block with four M12 female sensor connection
inputs.
Cable diameter range: 7–12 mm.
Tina 5A 20-054-04 Bypass unit for dynamic units with supervision of the bypass
lamp.
1
Tina 6A 20-054-06 Tina 6A with M12 male and female connectors for safety mat/
strip/bumper connection. Tina 3A, 6A and 7A have the same
electrical function in different enclosures.
2
Tina 7A 20-054-07 Tina 7A, for installation on DIN rails in apparatus enclosures.
Electrical connection via detachable terminal blocks.
Tina 7A is used for emergency stops in the same apparatus
enclosure, or for external edge contact strips, safety mats
or bump strips. Tina 3A, 6A and 7A have the same electrical
function in different enclosures.
3
Tina 8A 20-054-05 Connection block with eight M12 female sensor connection
inputs.
Cable diameter range 7–12 mm.
4
Tina 8B 20-054-10 Connection block with eight M12 female sensor connection
ProfiBus inputs. The M12 connection on the end connects the input
and output of the dynamic signal, information and supply
voltage (24VDC). The information signals from the sensors
are transferred to ProfiBus which has M12 connector inputs 5
and outputs. For more technical description, contact the
nearest Jokab Safety distributor.
Tina 10A 20-054-12 Tina 10A adapts the OSSD outputs (PNP) from Focus to
Vital/Pluto. 6
Tina 10B 20-054-13 Tina 10A adapts the two OSSD outputs (PNP) from Focus to
Vital/Pluto. Tina 10B has an extra M12 connector (3) for reset,
a reset lamp and power off.
7
(Suitable for FMI-1C. 22-043-02).
Tina 10 C 20-054-16 Similar to Tina 10B but output 3 to be connected to a light

beam/light curtain transmitter. 8
9
Tina 11A 20-054-17 Junction block with 2 off M12 female outputs for dynamic
sensors, such as Tina, Eden or Spot.
Tina 12A 20-054-18 Distribution block for two Dalton process locks with Eden.
10
Tina Duo 1 20-051-30 Expansion and local reset unit for Vital and Pluto sensors.
With connector for external reset button.
11
12
13
Tina Duo 2 20-052-35 Expansion and local reset unit for Vital and Pluto sensors.
Integral reset button.
Connectors and cables

M12-3A 20-055-00 M12 ’Y’ connector, typically for serial connection of all safety
devices such as Spot light beam (transmitter and receiver),
Eden, E-stops, Switches, Safety strips, etc.
M12-3B 20-055-01 M12 ’Y’ connector, typically for connection of light beam
(transmitter and receiver), or parallel connection of two Edens
to a Tina 4/8.
M12-3D 20-055-03 M12 ’Y’ connector for connection of Focus light beam
transmitter and receiver.
M12-3E 20-055-02 M12 ’Y’ connector for connection of two dynamic sensors
with separate return lines to the same cable. For IQ
connection to Pluto.
M12-3 m 20-055-04 M12 ’Y’ connector and parallel and muting function.
Connection 3 is dominant.
M12-C61 20-056-00 6 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 female
connector.
connector.
connector.
M12-C61V 20-056-01 6 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with angled M12 female
connector.
M12-C101V 20-056-11 10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with angled M12 female
connector.
M12-C62 20-056-02 6 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 male
connector.
Screen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.
M12-C102 20-056-12 10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 male
connector.
1
M12-C112 20-056-20 1 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight female + male
connectors.
M12-C312 20-056-21 3 m cable 5 x 0,.34 mm2 + screen with straight female + male
connectors
2
M12-C612 20-056-22 6 m cable 5 x 0,34 mm2 + screen with straight female
+ M12 male
M12-C1012 20-056-23
10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight female
3
+ male connectors
M12-C2012 20-056-24 20 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight female
M12-C63 20-056-30
+ male connectors
6 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 female
4
connector.
connector.
connector.
5
M12-C134 20-056-50 1 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 with straight M12 female+male.
M12-C334 20-056-51 3 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 with straight M12 female+male.
6
M12-CT0122 20-060-00 Transfer cable 10 cm 5 x 0.34 mm2.

5-pole male plug/5-pole male plug.
7
8
M12-CT0214 20-060-01 Transfer cable 20 cm M12 5-pole female plug, 8-pole male
plug.
M12-CT0232 20-060-02 Transfer cable 20 cm M12 5-pole male plug, 8-pole female
M12-CT134F 20-060-03
plug.
Transfer cable 1 m M12 8-pole male plug, 8-pole
female plug.
9
C5 20-057-00 Cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen, specify length.
10
C8 20-057-10 Cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 + screen, specify length.
11
12
13
C9 20-057-15 Cable 7 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + screen,
specify length. For Tina 4A.
C13 20-057-20 Cable 11 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + screen,

specify length. For Tina 8A.
M12-C01 20-055-10 Straight M12 female connector with 6-pole screw connection
for cable. Cable external diameter 2.5–6.5 mm, 5-pole.
M12-C02 20-055-11 Straight M12 male connector with cable screw connection.
Cable diameter range 2.5–6.5 mm. 5-pole.
M12-C03 20-055-16 Straight M12 female connector with cable screw

connection. Cable diameter range 2.5–6.5 mm. 8-pole.
M12-C04 20-055-17 Straight M12 male connector with cable screw

connection. Cable diameter range 2.5–6.5 mm. 8-pole.
20-055-21 M12, protection cap for male connector.

JS SP-1 22-070-00 M12, protection cap for female connector.
Safety Relays
JSBR3 10-001-00 JSBR3 24DC Safety relay.
10-001-02 JSBR3 24AC Safety relay.
JSBR4 10-002-00 JSBR4 24DC Safety relay.

1
JSBT3 10-003-00 JSBT3 24DC Safety relay.
10-003-02 JSBT3 24AC Safety relay.
10-003-03
10-003-04
JSBT3 48AC Safety relay.
JSBT3 115AC Safety relay.
2
3
JSBT4 10-004-00 JSBT4 24DC Safety relay.
10-004-14
10-004-20
JSBT4 115AC Safety relay 1 s.
JSBT4 24DC 1,5s Safety relay.
4
JSBT5 10-005-01 JSBT5 24AC/DC Safety relay.
10-005-07 JSBT5 24AC/DC Safety relay.
10-005-11 JSBT5 24AC/DC Safety relay.
5
JSE1 10-007-00 JSE1 24DC Safety relay.
JSG1 10-008-00 JSG1 24DC Safety relay. 6
JSHT1A 10-011-00 JSHT1A 24DC Timer module.
10-011-02 JSHT1A 24AC Timer module.
10-011-04 JSHT1A 115AC Timer module. 7
JSHT1B 10-011-10 JSHT1B 24DC Timer module.
JSHT2A 10-012-00 JSHT2A 24DC Timer module.

9
10-012-03 JSHT2A 48 AC Timer module.
10-012-04 JSHT2A 115 AC Timer module.
10-012-05 JSHT2A 230 AC Timer module. 10
JSHT2B 10-012-10 JSHT2B 24DC Timer module.
10-012-12 JSHT2B 24AC Timer module.
10-012-13
10-012-14
JSHT2B 48 AC Timer module.
JSHT2B 115 AC Timer module.
11
10-012-15 JSHT2B 230 AC Timer module.
12
13
JSHT2C 10-012-20 JSHT2C 24DC Timer module.
JSN1A 10-014-06 JSN1A mains module 230/115AC/2.
JSR1T 10-015-00 JSR1T 0 Expansion relay 6A 24 DC.

10-015-05 JSR1T 1,5 Expansion relay 6A 24DC.
10-015-06 JSR1T 8 Expansion relay 6A 24 DC.
10-015-10 JSR1T 0,5 Expansion relay 6A 24 D.
10-015-20 JSR1T 10s Expansion relay 6A 24DC.
10-015-60 JSR1T 5 Expansion relay 6A 24DC.
JSR3T 10-017-01 JSR3T Expansion relay 24 AC/DC.
JSS1 10-018-00 JSS1 Safety relay 24 DC.

JSBRT11 10-025-00 JSBRT11 24DC Safety relay.
10-025-02 JSBRT11 24AC Safety relay.
RT6 10-026-00 RT6 24DC Safety relay.

10-026-02 RT6 24AC Safety relay.
JSR2A 10-027-01 JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 24AC/DC.

10-027-03 JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 48 AC.
10-027-04 JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 115AC.
10-027-05 JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 230AC.
1
RT7 B 10-028-10 RT7B 24DC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
10-028-12 RT7B 24AC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
10-028-13
10-028-14
RT7B 48AC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
RT7B 115AC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
2
10-028-15 RT7B 230AC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
3
RT7 A 10-028-20 RT7A 24DC Safety relay with max. 1,5 s delay.
10-028-22 RT7A 24AC Safety relay with max. 1,5 s delay.
RT9 10-029-00 RT9 24DC Safety relay.

4
5
E1T 10-030-00 E1T 0s Expansion relay 24DC.
6
10-030-10 E1T 0,5s Expansion relay 24DC.
10-030 -20 E1T 1 s Expansion relay 24DC.
10-030-30 E1T 1,5s Expansion relay 24DC.
10-030-40 E1T 2s Expansion relay 24DC.
10-030-50 E1T 3s Expansion relay 24DC.
BT50 10-033-00
10-033-10
BT50 Safety relay.
BT50T Safety relay.
7
8
BT51 10-033-20 BT51 Safety relay.
10-033-30 BT51T Safety relay.
9
RT10 10-029-50 RT10 Safety relay 24 VDC. For mats/edges with two-wire
function.
10
Scanner Look
11
50033346 Adjustable mounting disc.
LOOK JS4-4 50034195 LOOK JS4-4 Scanner.
50035814 LOOK Mounting plate. 12
13
Light curtains Focus–category 4
F4-14-150 22-010-00 F4-14-150 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
150 mm
22-010-03 F4-14-150 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-06 F4-14-150 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
300 mm
450 mm
600 mm
750 mm
900 mm
1050 mm
1200 mm
1350 mm
1500 mm
1650 mm
150 mm
300 mm
450 mm
600 mm
1
750 mm
F4-35-900
22-011-46
22-011-50
F4-35-750 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
F4-35-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
2
900 mm
1050 mm
F4-35-1050 22-111-40
22-111-13
F4-35-1050 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver. 3
1200 mm
22-011-66 F4-35-1200 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program. 4
1350 mm
1500 mm
F4-35-1500 22-011-70
22-011-73
F4-35-1500 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
5
1650 mm
22-011-83
22-011-86
6
Light curtains Focus–category 2
150 mm
22-030-03
22-030-06
7
300 mm
F2-14-450
22-030-16
22-030-20
8
450 mm
9
600 mm
750 mm
F2-14-900
22-030-46
22-030-50
10
900 mm
1050 mm
F2-14-1050 22-130-10
22-130-13
11
12
1200 mm
13
1350 mm
1500 mm
1650 mm
150 mm
300 mm
450 mm
600 mm
750 mm
900 mm
1050 mm
1200 mm
1350 mm
1500 mm
1650 mm
1
Mirrors for light curtains
MF-150 22-041-01 MF-150 mirror height 150 mm.
MF-300
MF-450
22-041-02
22-041-03
MF-300 mirror height 300 mm.
2
MF-800
MF-900
22-041-06
22-041-07
MF-900 mirror height 900 mm. 3
22-041-20 Bracket for MF-mirrors. 4
Light grids Focus–category 4

F4-K4-900 22-012-00 F4-K4-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
5
900 mm
22-012-06 F4-K4-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
1200 mm
F4-K4-1200 22-013-00
22-013-06
F4-K4-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
F4-K4-1200 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
6
7
800 mm

500 mm
900 mm
F4-KL4-900 22-016-00 F4-KL4-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver. 8
22-016-06 F4-KL4-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
F4-KL4-1200 22-017-00 F4-KL4-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.

1200 mm
22-017-06 F4-KL4-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program. 9
800 mm

10
500 mm
500 mm
F4-KL2-500D 22-111-20 F4-KL2-500D Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
11
F4-K1C-500 22-020-00 F4-K1C-500 Focus Transmitter/Receiver + Mirror.
500 mm 22-020-06
22-020-09
F4-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver/Mirror L
program.
FTR4-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L program.
12
13
F4-K1C-500 LD 22-020-10 F4-K1C-500 LD Focus Transmitter + Receiver/Mirror L
500 mm program.
Light grids Focus–category 2

900 mm

1200 mm

800 mm

500 mm
F2-K1C-500 22-036-00 F2-K1C-500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver+Mirror.

500 mm
22-036-06 F2-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver/Mirror L.
22-036-09 FTR2-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
Spot 10, Spot 35 and Laser Aligner

M18 steel casing with M12 connector.

Plastic housing. M12 connection.
JSRL2 20-008-01 Laser Aligner for use with Spot 35 T/R light beam.
JSRL3 20-008-02 Laser Aligner for use with Focus products.
1
Bypass and reset accessories
LH1 40-007-10 Bypass indication lamp (including ML1 light bulb).
ML1 40-007-15 Light bulb 24V 5W. 3
ML2 40-007-20 LED indicator lamp, long life, 24V AC/DC <45 mA.
4
MF-T 22-040-20 MF-T Muting unit with transmitter and receiver and
4 integrated photo-cells.
5
MF-L 22-040-30 MF-L Muting unit with transmitter and receiver and
2 integrated photo-cells.
MUTE R 22-044-00 Retro-reflecting photo-cell M18/M12

6
(FSTR1) Range with FZR1: 0.15-2.5 m
FZR2: 0.15-5.1 m.
FZR1 22-044-01 Reflector Ø 80 mm incl. screw MC6S M5 x 14 + Locking nut
M5.
7
FZR2 22-044-02 Reflector 100 x 100 mm incl. screw MC6S M5 x 14

+ Locking nut M5. 8
JSOGP800/ 22-044-10 Diffuse-reflecting photo-cell, Range 200-800 mm,

9
MUTE D M12-connection.
10
FMC-1 22-042-00 FMC-1 Focus muting connection unit with 4 connectors.
11
12
13
FMC-2 22-042-10 FMC-2 Focus muting connection unit with 6 connectors.
FMI-1A 22-043-00 FMI-1A muting lamp unit with M12 connector in Focus profile.
FMI-1B 22-043-01 FMI-1B muting lamp unit with reset + lamp and power “off”
button, with M12 connector.
FMI-1C 22-043-02 FMI-1C unit with reset + lamp, power”off” button, and M12
connector.
FMI-1D 22-043-03 FMI-1D unit with reset + lamp, power”off” button, muting
resistor and M12 connector.
FMI-1E 22-043-04 FMI-1E unit with reset + lamp and M12 connector.
FMC-1 Tina 22-045-00 FMC-1 Tina unit Focus connection to Vital. 4 connectors

for muting.
FMC-2 Tina 22-046-00 FMC-2 Tina unit Focus connection to Vital.

6 connectors for muting.
FRM-1A 22-048-00 FRM-1A Relay interface unit for Focus with 8-pin
M12 connector.
1
BP-1 22-090-23 Blanking programming unit for Focus light curtains.
2
Bjorn 22-041-40 Bjorn H2 mirror stand for Focus.
22-041-41 Bjorn V2 mirror stand for Focus.
22-041-45 Bjorn N2 floor stand for Focus.
3
Wet 22-038-00 Wet-150.
22-038-01
22-038-02
Wet-300.
Wet-450.
4
22-038-03 Wet-600.
22-038-04 Wet-750.
22-038-05
22-038-06
Wet-900.
Wet-1200.
5
22-038-07 Wet-1500.
22-038-08 Wet-1650.
6
22-038-09 Wet-K500.
22-038-10 Wet-K800.
22-038-11 Wet-K900.
22-038-12 Wet-K1200.
22-038-13 Wet-K1C.
22-038-14
22-038-15
Wet-1050.
Wet-1350.
7
22-038-16 Wet-K500 D.
22-038-17 Wet-MFT.
22-038-18 Wet-MFL.
8
JSSP-1 22-070-00 M12 connector protection cap.
JSAP-1 22-070-10 JSAP-1 Adapter plug including resistor and 2 jumpers.

9
JSERS1 20-009-55 JSERS1 Electromechanical relay with socket base including
B-Delay 22-044-03
jumper.
B-delay for delaying the B sensor when muting a Focus. 10
Mechanical accessories for light curtains, light grids, light beams and
bypassing 11
22-090-00 2 x M6 x 14 stainless steel bolts with washers and lock nuts.
22-090-01 M6 x 14 Stainless steel bolt.
12
13
22-090-02 M6 Stainless steel lock nut.
22-090-04 Washer for M6 bolt. Stainless steel.
22-090-05 2.2 x 19 mm screw for Focus.
22-090-06 Rubber seal for Focus end piece.
22-090-07 End piece without hole. For Focus profile.
22-090-08 End piece without hole. For Focus profile.
22-090-09 End piece with M12-5 male.
JSM 66 22-090-10 Bracket 2 mm RF A2.
22-090-11 JSM 66 Fixing complete, with 2 bolts.
22-090-12 JSM 66 Bracket, complete, including 2 bolts and screws.
22-090-13 Bracket 2.5 mm RF A2 painted black.
JSM 67 22-090-15 JSM 67 Plastic hinge.
1
JSM 68 22-090-18 Test tool 14/35.
JSM F1-K 40-043-00 JSM F1-K Mounting screw set for Aluminium profile.

2
3
JSM F2-K 40-044-00 JSM F2-K screws for JSM64.
JSM F3-K 40-045-00 JSM F3-K Mounting kit for components to, for example,
JSM 44 Aluminium profile.
5
6
JSMA44 L 40-001-00 JSMA44-L Post 1100 mm with end cap.
40-001-02
40-001-10
JSMA44-L Post 1300 mm with end cap.
JSMA44-L Post 1300 mm including floor fittings.
7
40-001-11 JSMA44A-L Post 1100 mm including floor fittings and end
cap.
40-001-12 Post 1300 mm + 1 m including floor fittings, end cap,
brackets and mounting kit.
8
JSM 36-K2 40-030-10 Floor fixture with screws for mounting to post.
Normally two are used per post.
9
10
JSM60-L 40-003-00 Fixing plate for JSM 9 or JSM 63. Includes screws for profile.
JSM62-L 40-004-00 Bracket for JSM 9 for horizontal angling around a machine.
Includes screws for profile.
11
12
13
JSM6 40-006-00 Mirror for 0-10 m. Dimensions: 100 x 40 x 25 mm. Screws for
bracket included.
JSM7A 40-006-05 Mirror for 0-20 m, adjustable mirror plate. Dimensions:

115 x 80 x 30 mm. Screws for bracket included.
JSM8A 40-006-06 Mirror for 0-35 m, adjustable mirror plate. Dimensions:

160 x 135 x 30 mm. Screws for bracket included.
JSM9 40-007-00 Bracket for mirror.
JSM63 40-007-01 JSM63 Bracket for Spot 35 T/R light beam. (Two
JSM 63 units accompany each light beam.) Will gradually be
replaced by JSM 66.
JSM64 40-007-02 Wired M18 bracket for, for example, Spot 10T/R or MUTE R
(FSTR1).
Stopping time measurement and Machine diagnosis

70-099-20 Calibration unit for Stopping time analyzer equipment.
Smart Logger 70-300-01 Safety and motion analyser tool. Analysis tool for moving
machinery systems.
SM2 70-300-02 Stop unit for Smart with pushbutton for interaction with
emergency stops and other pushbuttons.
SM3 70-300-03 Stop unit for Smart with relay for electrical connection to
machinery system.
SM5/1250 70-300-04 Linear transducer for Smart with 1250 mm wire and wire
damper.
SM5/2500 70-300-05 Linear transducer for Smart with 2500 mm wire and wire
damper.
SM6 70-300-06 Mains power supply unit for Smart. 115-230 VAC/24 VDC
with detachable europlug.
SM7 70-300-07 Wheel transducer for Smart, with stand. SM9.
SM9 70-300-09 Case for Smart equipment, capable of holding all Smart
equipment and also room for a laptop computer.
SM11 70-300-11 Stop unit for Smart with rotating flag for interaction with light
curtains and other optical sensors.
SM13 70-300-23 Battery pack for Smart.
SM14 70-300-24 Battery charger for SM11 and SM13 with europlug. Also
suitable for JSSM11.
1
Stop unit 70-300-14 Stop unit adapter making JSSM1 stop units compatible with
adapter Smart.
2
USB cable 70-300-15 USB cable for connecting Smart Logger to a computer.
Small case for 70-300-40 Small case intended to hold the equipment needed to
Smart upgrad- upgrade JSSM equipment to Smart.
ing kit
Upgrading kit 70-300-41 Smart upgrading kit with a small case. The kit consists of
with a small a small case containing a Smart Logger, SM6, USB cable,
case
Upgrading kit 70-300-42
Encoder adapter and Stop unit adapter.
Smart upgrading kit with an SM9. The kit consists of an
3
with small SM9 case containing a Smart Logger, SM6, USB cable,
case Encoder adapter and Stop unit adapter.
Basic kit 70-300-43 SM9 case with Smart Logger, SM6 and USB cable.
Sensors and switches 4

Eva 20-046-00 Eva is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden
sensor system. IP67. 4 off DA2 spacer rings are included.
5
Eva E 20-046-06 Eva E is encapsulated in polyurethane for harsh environments.
Eva E is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden E
sensor system. IP69K.
6
7
Adam M12 20-051-00 Adam M12 is a safety sensor unit with a fixed M12 male
connector. IP67. 4 off DA1 spacer rings and 4 off DA2 spacer
rings are included in the package.
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67
9
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67
Adam 20 m 20-051-05

Adam 20 m is a safety sensor unit with 20 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67. The package includes 4 off
10
DA2 spacer rings.
11
12
13
polyurethane for harsh environments with 10 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen) IP69K.
Connector IP67.
Adam E 20-051-07 Adam E 0.5 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in

0.5 m M12 extra polyurethane for harsh environments with 0.5 m cable
5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen and M12 male connector.
IP69K. Connector IP67.

polyurethane for harsh environments with 20 m cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen) IP69K. Connector IP67.
Eden C 10 m 20-051-14 Adam C with 10 m cable and Eva C in coded version.
Eden EC 20-051-16 Adam EC 10 m and Eva EC is a coded safety sensor unit
covered with extra polyurethane for harsh environments with
10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen. IP69K.
DA 1 20-053-00 Spacer plate, 2.5 mm thick, in polycarbonate. For Adam

M12 and associated Eva. Not suitable for Adam E and Eva E.
DA 2 20-053-01 Mounting spacer ring 4.5 x 8 x 4 mm, in black polyamide, for

use with
Adam and Eva units.
20-053-10 M4 mounting screw, Length 18 mm, for recessed mounting of

Adam and Eva.
20-053-20 M4 mounting screw, Length 16 mm, for projecting mounting

of Adam and Eva.
20-053-30 M4 mounting screw, Length 25 mm, for projecting

mounting of Adam E and Eva E.
1
20-053-32 M4 nylon mounting screw, Length 25 mm, for recessed or
projecting mounting of Adam and Eva (Adam E and Eva E).
20-053-42 SM4 x 20 safety screw, for mounting Adam and Eva. 2

20-053-43 SM4 x 25 safety screw, for mounting of Adam E and Eva E.
20-053-44 Safety nut M4.

3
20-053-50 Safety screwdriver bit SBITS. 4


5
Mechanical switches
JSNY5 20-022-00
20-022-01
JSNY5A Safety switch 2NC+ 1NO 10N.
JSNY5B Safety switch 2NC+ 1NO 30N.
6
7
JSNY7 20-023-00 JSNY7R-3 Magnetic switch 3 m cable.
20-023-01 JSNY7R-6 Magnetic switch 6 m cable.
20-023-02
20-024-00
JSNY7R-10 Magnetic switch10 m cable.
JSNY7 m Magnetic key.
8
JSNY4 20-029-00
20-029-01
JSNY4A Safety switch 2NC 10N.
JSNY4B Safety switch 2NC 30N.
9
10
JSNY8 20-030-00 JSNY8 m 24DC Safety switch.
20-030-01 JSNY8S 24DC Safety switch.
20-030-02
20-030-03
JSNY8 mN2 24DC Safety switch including flexible key.
JSNY8SN2 24VDC Safety switch including flexible key.
11
20-030-05 JSNY8S 230AC Safety switch.
20-030-15 JSNY8 m 230AC Safety switch.
JSPG11 20-031-00 JSPG11 cable gland PG11/6 mm.
12
13
JSNYN_ 20-032-00 JSNYN1 Steel key (standard).
20-032-01 JSNYN2 Key, horizontal axis.
20-032-02 JSNYN3 Key, vertical axis.
20-032-03 JSNYN4 Key with 100N holding force.
JSNYN5 20-032-06 JSNYN5 Flexible key for JSNY5.
JSNY8/9N_ 20-032-04 JSNY8/9N1 standard key.
20-032-05 JSNY8/9N2 flexible key for JSNY8/9.
JSNYL1 20-033-00 JSNYL1 cover for JSNY5.
JSNY8EO 20-032-20 JSNY8EO Emergency opening button for JSNY8S.
JSNY9 20-036-01 JSNY9S 24VUC Safety switch.
20-036-02 JSNY9SN2 24VUC Safety switch including flexible key.
20-036-12 JSNY9SLA 24VUC Safety switch with LEDs.
20-036-21 JSNY9M 24VUC Safety switch.
20-036-22 JSNY9MN2 24VUC Safety switch including flexible key.
20-036-32 JSNY9MLA 24VUC Safety switch with LEDs.
JSNYL2 20-033-01 JSNYL2 cover for JSNY9.

JSNYL3 20-033-02 JSNYL3 cover for JSNY9 with LEDs.
20-033-03 Gasket for JSNYL2/L3.
20-304-01 Latch for JSNY9 including bolts.
Magne 1A 42-022-00 Magnetic lock.
Magne 2A 42-022-10 Magnetic lock with indication.
JSM D21 42-023-00 Magne installation kit.

JSMD2AGS 42-023-10 Handle/screw for JSM D21 Magne installation kit.
42-023-01 Handle profile that completely hides a Magne unit when the
door is closed.
Dalton M111 20-038-00 0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.
Dalton M311 20-038-07 0.5 m cable with M12 5-pole male plug, locking pin 4.
Dalton L001 20-038-90 Only ball latch, no electrical functions.
Dalton M315 20-038-10 5-pole male plug, locking pin 4, small mounting plate for the
tongue.
Dalton M113 20-038-04 8-pole male plug, angle brackets for Jokab enclosure.
Dalton M112 20-038-03 Lock with securing plate for separately connected Eden.
0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.
Dalton M312 20-038-08 Lock with securing plate for separately connected Eden.
0.5 m cable with M12 5-pole male plug, locking pin 4.
Dalton L002 20-038-91 Only ball latch, no electrical functions, mounting plate also for
Eden.
1
Dalton M121 20-038-01 Lock with M12 connector for connection of separately
mounted Eden.
2
Dalton M122 20-038-02 Lock with integrated Eden.
3
Dalton M124 20-038-09 8-pole male plug, 5-pole female plug for Adam, angle
brackets for Jokab enclosure.
DA 1 20-053-00 Spacer, 2.5 mm, for Adam and Eva.
4
5
M12-CT0214 20-060-01 Transfer cable 0.2 m M12 5-pole male plug, 8-pole female
plug.
6
Tina 12A 20-054-18 Distribution block for two Dalton Edens with 8-pole cables.
7
Control devices - one and two hand-control devices–Safeball
JSTD20 20-007-20 JSTD20A Two-hand station without emergency stop push
20-007-21
button.
JSTD20B Two-hand station with emergency stop push
button.
8
20-007-22 JSTD20C Two-hand station housing only.
JSTD1_ 20-007-30 JSTD1-A Safeball with 2 m cable.
20-007-31
20-007-32
JSTD1-B Safeball with 0.2 m cable.
JSTD1-C Safeball with 10 m cable.
9
20-007-34 JSTD1-E Safeball 1NO+ 1NO with 0.2 m cable.
JSM C5 20-007-09 JSM C5 Ball & socket table mount for Safeball.
10
JSTS30 20-007-40 JSTS30 Floor stand.
JSTS31 20-007-41 JSTS31 Floor stand including spacer ring.
11
12
13
JSTS32 20-007-42 JSTS32 Spacer ring for floor stand.
JSTD25A 20-007-50 JSTD25A Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs, no emergency
stop push button.
JSTD25B 20-007-51 JSTD25B Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs and emergency

stop push button.
JSTD25C 20-007-52 JSTD25C Two-hand station without Safeball or emergency

stop push button.
JSTD25D 20-007-53 JSTD25D Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs and JSM C5, no
emergency stop push button.
JSTD25E 20-007-54 JSTD25E Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs, JSM C5, and

JSTD25B-1 20-007-57 JSTD25B-1 Two-hand station, grey, with 2 Safeballs and

JSTD25F 20-007-60 JSTD25F Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs.
20-007-64 Protective plates for Safeball (kit) including fasteners.
JSTD25G 20-007-62 JSTD25G.

JSTD25P-1 20-007-65 JSTD25P-1 Two hand station, portable, with 2 Safeballs.
20-007-66 Connector for JSTD25P-1.
20-007-67 4 m long spiral cable for JSTD25P-1.
20-007-68 8 m long spiral cable for JSTD25P-1.
20-007-80 Universal shelf for JSTD25P-1.
Control devices - 2 and 3-position pedals–Fox
FOX 31 20-160-01 FOX 31 3-position footswitch, single, with reset button.
FOX 32 20-160-02 FOX 32 3-position footswitch, double, with reset button.
FOX 21 20-160-21 FOX 21 2-position footswitch, single.
FOX 22 20-160-22 FOX 22 2-position footswitch, double.
Control devices - 3-position devices and pushbuttons

JSHD2C 20-001-10 JSHD2C type E 3-position pushbutton, 3 cables.
20-001-13 JSHD2C type K 3-position pushbutton, 2 cables.
JSHD4 20-002-00 JSHD4 3-position control device with 2 extra pushbuttons
(top/front).
1
JSHD4D 20-002-01 JSHD4 3-position control device with extra pushbutton
(front).
JSHD4E 20-002-03 JSHD4E 3-position control device with extra pushbutton

(top). 3
4
JSHD4F 20-002-04 JSHD4F 3-position control device without extra pushbuttons.
JSHD4FN 20-002-18 JSHD4FN 3-position device with spiral cable and

connector. 6
JSHD4 mU 20-002-78 JSHD4 mU 3-position control device for Eden .
JSHD4FA 20-002-79 JSHD4FA 3-position control device for PLC, spiral cable.
8
JSHD4FU 20-002-81 JSHD4FU 3-position device without extra pushbuttons.
10
JSHD4P 20-002-94 JSHD4P 3-position control device with extra pushbuttons, no
LEDs.
11
12
13
JSHD4PB 20-002-95 JSHD4PB 3-position control device with extra pushbuttons
for use together with Pluto PLC.
JSHD4PC 20-002-96 JSHD4PC 3-position control device with extra pushbuttons,

black Eva plate, spiral cable.
JSHD4PD 20-002-97 JSHD4PD 3-position control device with 2 extra pushbuttons.
JSHD4H2A 20-002-02 JSHD4H2A 3-position control device for external panel

mounting.
JSHD4S2 20-002-07 JSHD4S2 3-position control device, ABB upgrading kit.

JSHD4H2 20-002-31 JSHD4H2 3-position device for panel mounting.
JSHK_ 20-003-00 JSHK5 Cable 5 m for JSHD4.

20-003-01 JSHK10 Cable 10 m for JSHD4.
JSHK0 20-003-03 JSHK0 12-pole connector for JSHD4.
JSHK1 20-003-08 JSHK1-A Female chassis receptacle.

20-003-09 JSHK1-B Male chassis receptacle.
20-003-07 JSHK1-C Male chassis receptacle.
JSHK5-E 20-003-10 JSHK5-E Extension cable 5 m.
1
JSHK10-K 20-003-11 JSHK10-K cable for JSHD4K, 12-pole.
JSHK5-E1 20-003-12 JSHK5-E1 Connection cable 5 m.
20-003-13 15 m Highly flexible hold-to-run cable with JSHK connector,
yellow cable. 2
JSHK_ 20-003-20 JSHK16S Spiral cable 1,6 m max. with connector.
20-003-21 JSHK20S Spiral cable 2,0 m max. with connector.
3
JSHK-T1
JSM 54A
20-003-30
20-205-28
Cable drum, 12 m cable.
JSM 54A Wall bracket for Adam.
4
JSM5A 40-005-03 JSM5A Wall bracket for 2 switches JSNY5.
JSM55 40-005-05 JSM55 Wall fixing for 3-position device.
Emergency stops Inca, Smile 6

INCA 1 Tina 30-054-00 Emergency stop button for panel mounting with Tina function
and dynamic function principle. LED indication in the button.
INCA 1 30-054-01 Emergency stop button for panel mounting with

7
mechanical contacts. LED indication in the button.
INCA 1S Tina 30-054-02 Stop button for panel mounting with Tina function and
8
dynamic function principle. LED indication in the button.
Black print.
INCA 1S 30-054-03 Stop button for panel mounting with mechanical

9
contacts. LED indication in the button. Black print.
INCA front ring 30-054-04 Yellow surround for emergency stop button. 10
Emergency
stop sign
30-054-05
30-054-06
S D F, 22,5 mm
E F D, 22,5 mm
11
30-054-07 S D F, 32,5 mm
30-054-08 E F D, 32,5 mm
12
13
Smile 11EA 30-050-00 Emergency stop for Vital, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector, red/
Tina green LED.
Smile 12EA 30-050-02 Emergency stop for Vital, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector,

Tina 1 xM12/5-pole female connector, red/green LED.
Smile 10EA 30-050-04 Emergency stop for Vital, 1 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2, red/green

Tina LED.
Smile 11 SA 30-050-05 Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, r/g LED.

Tina Black button.
Smile 12 SA 30-050-06 Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-pole
Tina female, r/g LED. Black button.
Smile 11 SAR 30-050-07 Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, r/g LED.
Tina Black button. Enclosure reversed.
Smile 12 SAR 30-050-08 Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-pole

Tina female, r/g LED. Black button. Enclosure reversed.
Smile 11EA 30-051-00 Emergency stop 2 xNC, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector.
Smile 12EA 30-051-02 Emergency stop 2 xNC, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector,

1 xM12/5-pole female connector.
Smile 10EA 30-051-04 Emergency stop 2 xNC, 1 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2.
1
Smile 10EK 30-051-06 E-stop 2 xNC, 0,5 m wires 4 x 0,5 mm2.
Smile 11 SA 30-051-09 Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male. Black button. 3

Smile 12 SA 30-051-10 Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-pole
female. Black button.
Smile 11 SAR 30-051-11 Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male. Black button.
Enclosure reversed.
4
Smile 12 SAR 30-051-12 Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-pole
female. Black button. Enclosure reversed.
5
JST2 30-051-13 Termination for Smile 12.
6
JSKL1-NS/2A 30-001-10 JSKL1-NS/2A Emergency stop button box with internal
Tina 2A.
7
JSKL1-NS/3A 30-001-11 JSKL1-NS/3A Emergency stop button box with internal
Tina 3A.
8
JSKL1-NS 30-003-02 Emergency stop button box with internal 2NC relay.
9
JSNY10 20-034-00 JSNY10 Emergency stop pull-rope switch. 10
11
JSNY10-M6 20-034-01 JSNY10-M6 Nut.
JSNY10-S6 20-034-02 JSNY10-S6 Eyebolt.
JSNY10-T4 20-034-03 JSNY10-T4 Wire thimble.
12
13
JSNY10-L3 20-034-04 JSNY10-L3 Duplex wire clamp.
JSNY10-W3 20-034-05 JSNY10-W3 Red plastic-coated wire.

JSNY10-V6 20-034-06 JSNY10-V6 Wire turnbuckle M6 x 60.
JSNY10-K 20-034-07 JSNY10-K Mounting kit, 25 m wire.

JSNY10-S8 20-034-09 JSNY10-S8 Eyebolt M8 x 50.
Nödstoppssky- 20-034-10 Emergency stop sign JSNY10 (in Swedish).
lt JSNY10
Nödstoppssky- 20-034-11 Emergency stop sign JSNY10 (in English).
lt JSNY10
JSNY10-R5 20-034-13 JSNY10-R5 Swivel for wire.
Contact edges
AL 25-14 76-002-02 AL 25-14 Aluminium profile for 25-xx.
Kabel LIYY 76-002-18 Cable LIYY 2 x 0.34.
SKL 15-10 76-015-10 SKL 15-10 Mini-safety contact rail including AL 15-8.
KKB 76-015-12 KKB 2.2 m cable for SKL15-10 2.2 m.
Klämlist 76-027-38 Safety contact rail 25-25 EPDM with lip.
76-025-25 Safety contact rail 25-25 EPDM.
76-125-25 Safety contact rail 25-25 NBR.
76-125-65 25-65 NBR with lip.
Bumpers
Bumper ASB 76-200-01 Bumper ASB 53/100 black.
76-200-02 Bumper ASB 100/200 black.
76-200-05 Bumper ASB 53/100 black/yellow.
76-200-09 Bumper ASB 60/100 NBR black (63/100).
76-200-10 Bumper ASB 100/200 NBR black.
76-200-15 Bumper ASB 100/200 NBR black/yellow.
76-200-16 Bumper ASB 150/250 NBR black/yellow.
1
Safety Mats
ASK 76-301-05 Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim, size to order.
76-300-03
76-300-04
Safety mat ASK-1P2-TBV stainless steel.
Safety mat ASK-1P2-ARB aluminium.
2
ASK 76-301-06 Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Size to order with cast-in ramp
edge trim.
ASK 76-310-05 Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim
76-310-06
1000 x 750 mm.
Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim
3
1000 x 1000 mm.
76-310-07 Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim
1000 x 1500 mm.
ASK 76-310-10 Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Cast-in ramp edge trim
1000 x 750 mm.
4
76-310-11 Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Cast-in ramp edge trim
1000 x 1000 mm.
76-310-12 Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Cast-in ramp edge trim
Junction cable 76-900-32

1000 x 1500 mm.
Junction cable including 1 off M8 male and 1 off M8 female
5
connectors, 2.5 m cable.
76-900-33 Junction cable including 1 off M8 male and 1 off M8 female
connectors, 5 m cable.
RS 14 76-300-05 RS 14, Ramp rail in aluminium.
6
BS 14 76-300-08 BS 14 profile for ASK in aluminium.

7
Corner piece 76-300-09 Corner piece for RS14, in polyamide.
8
Fencing System QuickGuard, SafeCAD, Roller Door
Aluminium profiles
JSM A4416 40-037-70 Aluminium profile, 44 x 16, naturally anodised, per metre.
9
40-037-74 Aluminium profile, 44 x 16, naturally anodised,
L=6000 mm.
JSM A44A 40-037-35
40-037-36
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, per metre.
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=1100 mm.
10
40-037-98 Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=1400 mm.
40-037-38
40-037-39
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=2400 mm. 11
JSM A4488A 40-037-42 Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 88, per metre.
40-037-43
40-037-44
12
13
JSM A88 40-037-33 Cable duct 88 x 68 L=2000 mm.
JSM A12 40-037-28 U-profile edging, per metre.

40-037-27 U-profile edging L=1076 mm.
JSM A13 40-037-50 H-profile, per metre.
40-037-51 H-profile, L=1076 mm.
40-037-52 H-profile, L=1476 mm.
40-037-53 H-profile, L=2020 mm.
JSM A3130B 40-037-26 Aluminium guide rail including screws.
JSM A56 40-037-49 Aluminium guide rail including screws, per metre.

40-037-08 Aluminium guide rail including screws, L=2000 mm.
40-037-48 Aluminium guide rail including screws, L=6000 mm.
JSM A25A 40-037-13 Cable duct 44 x 25 with ”keyhole”, including lid, L=2000 mm.
JSM A25B 40-037-14 Cable duct 44 x 25 including lid, L=2000 mm.
JSM A60A 40-037-15 Cable duct 44 x 60 with ”keyhole”, including lid, L=2000 mm.
JSM A60B 40-037-16 Cable duct 44 x 60 including lid, L=2000 mm Cap, L= 2 M.
JSM A8888 40-037-75 Al-profile 88 x 88 Natural anodized aluminium

(cut to length).
40-037-79 Al-profile 88 x 88 Natural anodized aluminium L=6000.
JSM AS1 40-037-95 Profile for 25 mm sound-absorbing panel, (per metre).

40-037-09 Profile for 25 mm sound-absorbing panel, L=2000 mm.
JSM AS2 40-037-96 Profile for double 5 mm polycarbonate panel

(per metre).
40-037-10 Profile for double 5 mm polycarbonate panel, L=2000 mm.
1
JSM AS3 42-021-80 Profile for 50 mm sound-absorbing panel
(per metre).
2
42-021-81 Profile for 50 mm sound-absorbing panel,
L=6000 mm.
Fixing
JSM 30B-K 40-030-06 JSM 30B-K Floor bracket, pre-fitted, in aluminium.
3
JSM 36-K1 40-030-09 Floor bracket in steel plate, pre-fitted with 3 screws. 4
5
JSM 36-K2 40-030-10 Floor bracket in steel plate, pre-fitted with 3 screws.
6
JSM 39-K 40-030-14 Aluminium floor bracket, pre-fitted.
7
JSM 30B-K1 40-030-11 Angle fitting, pre-fitted with 4 screws.
8
JSM 31AI-K 40-030-04 JSM 31A1-K Small angular bracket one countersunk hole.
JSM31B-K 40-030-13 Small angled bracket, pre-fitted.
9
JSM 32B-K 40-030-07 JSM 32B-K L-bracket, pre-fitted.

10
11
JSM 33B-K 40-030-08 T-bracket, pre-fitted.
12
13
JSM 34A-K 40-031-04 I fitting, pre-fitted.
JSM 35-K 40-033-14 Hinge including screws, centres at 47 mm.
JSM 37 40-033-31 Spacer screw for Economy.
Fixing for switches

JSM D4A 40-033-09 JSM D4A Fittings for JSNY5, hinged door.
JSM D4AA 40-033-34 Securing fitting for JSNY5 hinged door.
JSM D4B 40-033-10 Fittings for JSNY5 sliding door with guide rail.
JSM D4E 40-033-18 Fixing plate for JSNY7 hinged door.
JSM D4G 40-033-33 Securing fitting for JSNY7 sliding door.
JSM D4C 40-033-16 JSM D4A Fittings for JSNY8 and JSNY9 hinged door.
1
JSM D4D 40-033-17 JSM D4D Fittings for JSNY8 sliding door.
2
JSM D4F 40-033-30 Securing fitting for JSNY9 sliding door.
4
JSM D4H 40-033-36 JSM D4H Securing fitting for ADAM & EVA (EDEN) hinged
door and sliding door.
JSM D4K 40-033-45 Securing fitting for EDEN/EDEN E. Stainless steel. 6

JSM D4J 42-020-40 Securing fitting for Adam/Eva. Folding partitions.
7
Door components
JSM D1A 40-033-15 Hinge including screw 62 mm centres.
8
JSM D1B 42-020-47 Sprung hinge, complete.

9
10
JSM D2 40-033-01 JSM D2 Handle including screw.
11
12
13
JSM D18 42-020-50 Handle including spacer angle.
JSM D5 40-033-04 JSM D5 Suspension wheel.
JSM D6 40-033-05 JSM D6 Sliding element, rectangular.
JSM D7 40-033-06 JSM D7 Sliding element, round.
JSM D8 40-033-07 JSM D8 Sliding element, guide.
JSM D9 40-033-08 Castor wheel, with locking brake, 75/97.

JSM D9-K 40-033-11 Castor wheel, with locking brake, 75/97, including angle
bracket.
JSM D9A 40-033-12 Apparatus fixed wheel, 75/95.

JSM D9A-K 40-033-13 JSM D9A-K Guide roller 75/79 including angle bracket.
JSM D12 40-033-22 Guide pin for sliding door, vertical.
JSM D12A 40-033-23 Guide pin for sliding door, horizontal.
JSM D12B 40-033-24 Guide plate for sliding door.
JSM D13 40-033-25 Door stop, vertical, with vibration damper, for sliding door.
1
JSM D13A 40-033-26 Door stop, right angle.
2
JSM D13B 40-033-27 Door stop, horizontal, with vibration damper, for sliding door.
3
JSM D14 40-033-28 Cross brace for door 20 x 5 L=1160 mm.
JSM D14A 42-021-73 Cross brace for door 20 x 5 L=400 mm.
JSM D3 40-033-02 JSM D3 Door closer, including mounting components for

hinged door.
5
JSM D19 42-020-56 Door closer incl. mounting components for sliding door. 6
JSM D11B 40-033-41 Ball latch for hinged door.

8
JSM D11C 40-033-42 Ball latch for sliding door.

9
10
JSM D11D 42-020-52 Ball latch folding door.
11
12
13
JSM D22 42-024-10 Gas spring including fixture, stroke length 300 mm.
JSM D22A 42-024-11 Gas spring including fixture, stroke length 350 mm.
JSM D10 40-033-20 Sliding bolt.
JSM D10A 40-033-21 Sliding bolt with return spring L=1000 mm.
JSM D10B 40-033-38 Door sliding bolt with spring.
JSM D15 40-033-39 Cam lock, complete, excluding key.
JSM D16 40-033-44 Key to fit JSM D15.
JSM D17 42-020-22 Securing plate for padlock.
1
JSM D21 42-023-00 Magne 1A mounting fixture.
3
Express sections height 2000 och 2200
JSM E11 40-101-03 Mesh section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000.
-N20X8
JSM E15 40-101-09 Mesh section c-c=1500 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000. 4
-N20X8
JSM E11 40-101-53 Pc section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000.
-PC20X8
JSM E11
-N22X8
JSM E15
40-102-03
40-102-08
Mesh section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2200.
Mesh section c-c=1500 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2200

5
-N22X8
-PC22X8
JSM E11
-N/PC20X8
40-104-01 Mesh/Pc-section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000. 6
JSM E11 40-105-01 Mesh/Pc-section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2200.
-N/PC22X8
JSM E11 40-101-04 Mesh for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2000.
-N20Z
7
-N20Z
JSM E11 40-101-54 Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2000.
-PC20Z
JSM E11
-N22Z
40-102-04 Mesh for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2200.
8
-N22Z
-PC22Z
JSM E11
-N/PC20Z
40-104-02 Mesh/Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2000. 9
JSM E11 40-105-02 Mesh/Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2200.
-N/PC22Z
10
JSM E11 40-101-05 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh H=2000.
-N20G
JSM E11 40-101-55 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with Pc H=2000.
-PC20G
JSM E11 40-102-05 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh H=2200.
-N22G
JSM E11
-PC22G
40-102-55 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with Pc H=2200. 11
JSM E11 40-104-03 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh/Pc H=2000.
-N/PC20G
JSM E11 40-105-03 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh/Pc H=2200.
-N/PC22G
12
13
JSM E11 40-101-06 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh H=2000.
-N20S
-N20S
JSM E11 40-101-57 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with Pc H=2000.
-PC20S
-N22S
-N22S
JSM E11 40-102-56 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with Pc H=2200.
-PC22S
JSM E11 40-104-04 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh/Pc H=2000.
-N/PC20S
JSM E11 40-105-04 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh/Pc H=2200.
-N/PC22S
JSM E11 40-103-21 Post 44 x 88 incl. floor bracket L=2000.
-20Y8
-22Y8
Express sections height 1400

-N14X4
-N14X8
-N14X4
JSM E15 40-106-07 Mesh section c-c=1500 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=1400
-N14X8
JSM E11 40-106-52 Pc section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 44 post H=1400
-PC14X4
-PC14X8
-N14Z
-N14Z
-PC14Z
1
JSM E11 40-106-05 Door frame c-c=1100 incl. door leaf with mesh H=1400.
-N14G
JSM E11 40-106-55 Door frame c-c=1100 incl. door leaf with Pc H=1400.
-PC14G
2
3
-14Y4
-14Y8
4
6
Cap and edges
JSM L1A 40-034-00 Terminal cap for JSM A44A, yellow.
JSM L1B 40-034-03 Terminal cap for JSM A44A, grey. 7
JSM L4A 40-034-04 Terminal cap for JSM A4488A, yellow.
JSM L4B 40-034-05 Terminal cap for JSM A4488A, grey.
8
JSM L2 40-034-01 Terminal cap for JSM A25, grey.
9
JSM L3 40-034-02 Terminal cap for JSM A60, grey.
10
JSM T3A 40-037-31 Cover strip, narrow, yellow, L=2000 mm.
JSM T3B 40-037-32 Cover strip, narrow, grey, L=2000 mm.
11
JSM T2A 40-037-19 Wide PVC cover strip yellow.
12
13
Surfaces and fixations
JSM NL2 40-031-06 JSM NL2 Netting lock in plastic, for welded mesh.
JSM NL3 40-031-08 JSM NL3 Netting lock in zinc, for mesh.
JSM PL3 40-038-11 Securing fixture in zinc for surfacing material.
JSM PL1_ 40-038-01 Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.

L=842 mm for 5 mm panels.
40-038-02 Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
JSM PL2_ 40-038-07 Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
JSM G2 40-038-06 Foam rubber edging, self-adhesive 5 x 20 mm.
1 2
JSM G3 41-930-06 U-Rubber strip 12 x 2 x 6.
JSM YN40W1 40-040-13 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 2020 x 864 mm.

JSM YN40W11 40-040-29 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3.5 black 1074 x 1216 mm.
JSM YN40W9 40-040-16 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black per square metre.
1
JSM YN40WE1 40-040-25 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 rostfritt (SS 2333)
2020 x 864 mm.
2
JSM YN40WE2 40-040-18 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 rostfritt (SS 2333)
1074 x 1816 mm.
JSM YN40WE9 40-040-19 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 rostfritt per square metre.
JSM YPC5A1 40-039-10 5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 2020 x 864 mm.

JSM YPC5A2
JSM YPC5A3
40-039-11
40-039-17
5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 2020 x 1174 mm.
5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 1076 x 1816 mm.
3
JSM YPC5A9
JSM YPC4A1
40-039-12
40-039-14
5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, per square metre.
4 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 2020 x 865 mm. 4
JSM YPC4A9 40-039-16 4 mm clear polycarbonate panel, per square metre.
5
JSM YPC3AC1 40-039-25 3 mm dark tinted polycarbonate weld-protected panel,
2050 x 3000.
JSM YPC3AC9 40-039-24 3 mm dark tinted polycarbonate weld-protected panel, per
square metre.
6
JSM YGP1A9 40-039-07 1.0 mm cross-bent galvanized panel.
JSM YGP2A9 40-039-09 1.5 mm cross-bent galvanized panel.
7
JSM YG6A9 42-150-06 Laminated glass 6.4 mm. 8

JSM YHG5A9 40-039-03 Toughened glass 5.0 mm.
9
JSM YLA25A1 40-039-26 Sound-absorbing panel 25 mm smooth (white polyester)/
perforated (galvanized), 1963 x 1200 mm.
JSM YLA25A9 40-037-11 Sound-absorbing panel 25 mm smooth (white polyester)/
JSM YLA50A9 42-150-23
perforated (galvanized), per metre.
Sound-absorbing panel 50 mm smooth (white polyester)/ 10
perforated (galvanized), per metre.
Accessories
JSM M4B 40-035-07 Captive nut, M4 galvanized. 11
JSM M5B 40-035-04 Captive nut, M5 galvanized.
JSM M6B 40-035-05 Captive nut, M6 galvanized. 12
13
JSM M8B 40-035-06 Captive nut, M8 galvanized.
JSM B4C 40-035-50 Centring washer M4 galvanized steel.
JSM S8D 41-014-01 Screw MC6S 8.8 M8 x 16 galvanized.
JSM S8C 41-014-02 Screw MC6S 8.8 M8 x 20 galvanized.
JSM S8A 41-019-00 Screw MC6S 10.9 M8 x 16 Dacrolite.
JSM S8E 41-019-01 K6S 10,9 M8 x 12 galvanized (for JSM A56).
JSM S5B 41-039-01 Screw MRX-Z M5 x 12 galvanized.
JSM S6A 41-039-02 Screw MKFX-Z M6 x 12 galvanized.
JSM X1 40-033-43 Cable clamp, white nylon, including screw and box of 10.
JSM X2 41-900-43 M10 x 68 expansion bolt, galvanized.
JSM X3 41-910-00 Polishing and anti-static compound for polycarbonate. 0,5 l.
JSM X4 41-911-01 Bolt croppers.
1
10
11
12
13
1
10
11
12
13
Confirmation of compliance - Safety relays, switches, control devices, light beams/light curtains
Other language versions may be obtained on request.
Försäkran om överensstämmelse EC Declaration of conformity

We JOKAB SAFETY AB declare that the safety components of JOKAB SAFETY make with type designations and
Vi JOKAB SAFETY AB försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY med nedanstående
Boplatsgatan 3 safety functions as listed below, is in conformity with the Directives
Boplatsgatan 3 typbeteckningar och funktioner, är i överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i
S-213 76 Malmö 98/37/EC,
S-213 76 Malmö föreskrifterna
Sweden 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEG/(2006/95/EC)
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),
89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC/ (2004/108/EC)
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG)/(2006/95/EG)
ELSÄK-FS 2003:2 (89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG, 93/68/EEG)/ELSÄK-FS2007:1 Product Certificate/Notified Body Product Certificate/Notified Body
(2004/108/EG) Safety relay for Pulse relay
Produkt Certifikat/Anmält organ Produkt Certifikat/Anmält organ genaral use
Säkerhetsreläer för Pulsrelä JSBR3 06-SKM-CM-0124, NB0409 JSA2
generell användning JSBR4 06-SKM-CM-0516, NB0409 Three position device
JSBR3 06-SKM-CM-0124, NB0409 JSA2 JSBT3 08-SKM-CM-0108, NB0409 JSHD4 06-SKM-CM-0130, NB409
JSBR4 06-SKM-CM-0516, NB0409 Trelägesdon JSBT4 08-SKM-CM-0109, NB0409 Light beam/Light
JSBT3 08-SKM-CM-0108, NB0409 JSHD4 06-SKM-CM-0130, NB409 curtain
JSBT4 08-SKM-CM-0109, NB0409 Ljusbommar/Ljusridåer JSBT5(T), 06-SKM-CM-0127, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-14/35-xxx TÜV Z10 03 05 49833 003), NB0123
JSBT5(T), 06-SKM-CM-0127, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-14/35-xxx TÜV Z10 03 05 49833 003), NB0123 BT50 (T), BT51(T) 08-SKM-CM-0144, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-Kxx-xxx TÜV Z10 03 04 49833 002, NB0123
BT50 (T), BT51(T) 08-SKM-CM-0144, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-Kxx-xxx TÜV Z10 03 04 49833 002, NB0123 RT6 06-SKM-CM-0146, NB0409 Safety interlocking
switches
RT6 06-SKM-CM-0146, NB0409 Nyckelbrytare
RT7 08-SKM-CM-0110, NB0409 JSNY5
RT9 06-SKM-CM-0145, NB0409 JSNY7R/M 06-SKM-CM-0132, NB409
JSBRT8 06-SKM-CM-0123, NB0409 JSNY8
JSBRT11 08-SKM-CM-0105, NB0409 JSNY9 ET 04224, NB0340
JSE1, JSS1, JSG1 Two hand device
JSE1, JSS1, JSG1 Tvåhandsdon
Expansion relays JSTD1, JSTD25 01-MAL-CM-0109, NB409
Expansionsrelä JSTD1, JSTD25 01-MAL-CM-0109, NB409
JSR1T 06-SKM-CM-0126, NB409 JSTD20 01-MAL-CM-0101, NB409
JSR2A 08-SKM-CM-0106, NB409 Emergency stop wire
JSR2A 08-SKM-CM-0106, NB409 Linnödstopp
switch
JSR3T 08-SKM-CM-0107, NB409 JSNY10
E1T 06-SKM-CM-0143, NB409 Fotmanöverdon
E1T 06-SKM-CM-0143, NB409 Three position pedal
Säkerhetstimer Fox
Safety timer-relay Fox
JSHT1A/B 06-SKM-CM-0128, NB409
JSHT2A/B/C 06-SKM-CM-0129, NB409
Tillämpade harmoniserade EN 292-1,-2/EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 418/EN ISO 13850
Applicable harmonized EN 292-1,-2/EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 418/EN ISO 13850
standarder EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60204-1,
standards EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60204-1,
EN 50081-2/EN 61000-6-4, EN 50082-2/EN 61000-6-2
EN 50081-2/EN 61000-6-4, EN 50082-2/EN 61000-6-2
Torgny Olsson Mats Linger Torgny Olsson Mats Linger

Malmö 2008-05-05 Kungsbacka 2008-05-05 Malmö 2008-05-05 Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
EG-Konformitätserklärung
Wir JOKAB SAFETY AB erklären, daß nachfolgend aufgeführte Gerätetypen des Herstellers JOKAB SAFETY
Boplatsgatan 3 den Anforderungen der aktuellen Richtlinien
S-213 76 Malmö 98/37/EG,
Schweden 73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG/(2006/95/EG)
89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG, 93/68/EEG/ (2004/108/EG) entsprechen
Produkt Zertifikat/Gemeldete Stelle Produkt Zertifikat /Gemeldete Stelle

Sicherheitsrelais für Pulsrelais
algemeine
Anwendungen
JSBR3 06-SKM-CM-0124, NB0409 JSA2
JSBR4 06-SKM-CM-0516, NB0409 Zustimmungsschalter
JSBT3 08-SKM-CM-0108, NB0409 JSHD4 06-SKM-CM-0130, NB409
JSBT4 08-SKM-CM-0109, NB0409 Lichtschranke -
Lichtvorhang
JSBT5(T), 06-SKM-CM-0127, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-14/35-xxx TÜV Z10 03 05 49833 003), NB0123
BT50 (T), BT51(T) 08-SKM-CM-0144, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-Kxx-xxx TÜV Z10 03 04 49833 002, NB0123
RT6 06-SKM-CM-0146, NB0409 Sicherheitsschalter
JSE1, JSS1, JSG1 Zweihandsteuerung
Expansionsrelais JSTD1, JSTD25 01-MAL-CM-0109, NB409
JSR2A 08-SKM-CM-0106, NB409 Seilzugschalter
E1T 06-SKM-CM-0143, NB409 Fußschalter
Sicherheits Fox
”zeitrelais”
Harmonisierte Normen EN 292-1,-2/EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 418/EN ISO 13850
EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60204-1,
EN 50081-2/EN 61000-6-4, EN 50082-2/EN 61000-6-2
Torgny Olsson Mats Linger

Malmö 2008-05-05 Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
Confirmation of compliance - door sensitive edges, bumpers
1
EC Declaration of conformity
Försäkran om överensstämmelse
We JOKAB SAFETY declare that the safety components of JOKAB
Vi JOKAB SAFETY AB försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
med nedanstående typbeteckningar och funktioner, är i
överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i
föreskrifterna
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),
AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
SAFETY manufacture, with type designations and
safety functions as listed below, are in conformity
with the Directives
98/37/EC
2
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (2006/95/EG) 2006/95/EC
ELSÄK-FS 2007:1 (2004/108/EG) 2004/108/EC
Produkt Typbeteckning Product Type
Klämlist GP 25-25, GP25-40 Contact rail GP 25-25, GP25-40

Bumper ASB Y x X
Bumper
tillsammans med vald
säkerhetsmodul
Säkerhetsreläer
ASB Y x X
RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9, RT10

Together with safety
module
Safety relays RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9, RT10
3
Säkerhetsmodul och Vital 1 inklusive Safety module and Vital 1 inclusive Tina 6A
Anpassningsenhet Tina 6A adapter unit
Säkerhets-PLC Pluto Säkerhets-PLC Pluto
Tillämpade harmoniserade EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, EN 1760-2, Applicable harmonized EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, EN 1760-2,
4
standarder EN 1760-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2, standards EN 1760-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2,
EN 60204-1 EN 60204-1
Anmält organ enligt nedan har fått tillsänt teknisk dokumentation enligt AFS 1994:48, The technical documentation according to 98/37/EC, Annex VI, has been sent to the
Bilaga 6, för förvaring. following Notified Body
SP Sveriges Provnings- och Forskningsinstitut SP Technical Research Institute of Sweden
Box 857 Box 857
501 15 Borås 501 15 Borås
Sweden
ID-nr NB 0402
ID-nr NB 0402
5
Torgny Olsson Mats Linger, VD
10
11
12
13
Confirmation of compliance- fencing
Confirmation of compliance- safety mats

EC Declaration of conformity
We JOKAB SAFETY AB declare that the safety components of JOKAB
Vi JOKAB SAFETY AB försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY Boplatsgatan 3 SAFETY manufacture, with type designations and
Boplatsgatan 3 med nedanstående typbeteckningar och funktioner, S-213 76 Malmö safety functions as listed below, are in conformity
S-213 76 Malmö är i överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i Sweden with the Directives
föreskrifterna 98/37/EG,
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG), 73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG,
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG) 89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG, 93/68/EEG
ELSÄK-FS 2003:2 (89/336/EG, 92/32/EEG,
93/68/EEG) Product Type
Safety mat ASK-P-RF
Produkt Typbeteckning
Together with safety relays
Kontaktmatta ASK-P-RF
Safety relays RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9
tillsammans med säkerhetsrelä
Appliacable harmonized EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, EN 1760-1,
Säkerhetsreläer RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9 standards EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2
Tillämpade harmoniserade EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, The technical documentation according to 98/37/EC, Annex VI, has been sent to the
standarder EN 1760-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2 following Notified Body
Anmält organ enligt nedan har fått tillsänt teknisk dokumentation enligt AFS
1994:48, Bilaga 6, för förvaring. SP, Technical Research Institute of Sweden
SP Sveriges Provnings- och Forskningsinstitut Box 857
Box 857 501 15 Borås
501 15 Borås Sweden
ID-nr NB 0402
ID-nr NB 0402

Malmö 2006-10-10 Kungsbacka 2006-10-10 Torgny Olsson Mats Linger
Confirmation of compliance- the Vital concept
1
2
Vi JOKAB SAFETY AB försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY med EC declaration of conformity
Boplatsgatan 3 nedanstående typbeteckningar och funktioner, är i We JOKAB SAFETY AB declare that the safety components of JOKAB SAFETY manufacture,
S-213 76 Malmö överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i föreskrifterna Boplatsgatan 3 with type designations and safety functions as listed below, are in
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG), S-213 76 Malmö conformity with the Directives
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (2006/95/EG) Sweden 98/37/EG
ELSÄK-FS 2007:1 (2004/108/EG)
3
2006/95/EG
2004/108/EG
Produkt Certifikat/Anmält organ
Product Certificate/Notified Body
Vital1 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
Vital1 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
Eden (Adam , Eva) 06-SKM-CM-0131, NB409
Eden (Adam , Eva) 06-SKM-CM-0131, NB409
Tina 1-8 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
Tina 1-8 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
Tina Duo 1, Tina Duo 2, 05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409 Tina Duo 1, Tina Duo 2, 05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409
Tina 8B Profibus Tina 8B Profibus
Spot 10, 35 06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409 Spot 10, 35 06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409
Tillämpade harmoniserade
standarder
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850
EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088,
EN 61496-1, -2, EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2
Applicable harmonized
standards
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850, EN 954-1, EN 574,
EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, -2,
EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2 4
6
EG-Konformitätserklärung DÉCLARATION DE CONFORMITÉ CE
Wir JOKAB SAFETY AB

Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
erklären, dass nachfolgend aufgeführte Gerätetypen des
Herstellers JOKAB SAFETY den Anforderungen der aktuellen
Richtlinien
Nous JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
déclarons que les composants de sécurité de la marque JOKAB
SAFETY, de types et fonctions de sécurité listées ci-dessous, sont
conformes aux Directives
7
Schweden 98/37/EG Suède 98/37/CE
2006/95/EG 2006/95/CE
2004/108/EG 2004/108/CE
Produkt Zertifikat/Gemeldete Stelle Produit Certificat/Organisme notifié

Vital1 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409 Vital1 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
Eden (Adam , Eva)
Tina 1-8
Tina Duo 1, Tina Duo 2,
06-SKM-CM-0131, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409
Eden (Adam , Eva)
Tina 1-8
Tina Duo 1, Tina Duo 2,
Tina 8B Profibus
06-SKM-CM-0131, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409
8
Tina 8B Profibus
Spot 10, 35 06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409
Spot 10, 35 06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409
Harmonisierte Normen EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850, N 954-1, EN 574, Normes harmonisées EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850
EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, -2, applicables EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, -2,
EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2 EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2
Torgny Olsson Mats Linger Torgny Olsson Mats Linger

9
Malmö 2008-05-05 Kungsbacka 2008-05-05 Malmö 05/05/2008 Kungsbacka 05/05/2008
10
11
12
13
Confirmation of compliance - Pluto safety PLC
Försäkran om överensstämmelse EC declaration of conformity

Vi JOKAB SAFETY AB försäkrar att säkerhetskomponenterna av fabrikat JOKAB
We JOKAB SAFETY AB declare that the safety components of JOKAB
Boplatsgatan 3 SAFETY med nedanstående typbeteckningar och
Boplatsgatan 3 SAFETY manufacture, with type designations and
S-213 76 Malmö funktioner, är i överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i S-213 76 Malmö safety functions as listed below, are in conformity with
föreskrift Sweden the Directives
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EEG), 98/37/EEC,
ELSÄK-FS 2007:1 (2004/108/EC) 2004/108/EC
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (2006/95/EC) 2006/95/EC
Programmable electronic safety system (Safety PLC system) Pluto version A20, B20,
Programmerbart elektroniskt säkerhetssystem (Säkerhets-PLC) Pluto version B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Applicable EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
Tillämpade EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996, harmonized EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005,
harmoniserade EN ISO 13849-2:2003 ,EN 62061:2005, standards EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005,
standarder EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005, EN 60204- EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997
1:1997, EN 50178:1997, EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007, EN 61000-4-
EN 61000-4-
Other applicable IEC/EN 61508
Övriga standarder IEC/EN 61508 standards and DIN V VDE 0801:1990 with amendment A1:1994
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 med tillägg A1:1994, documents
EG-Typkontroll TÜV-Rheinland, Anmält organ nr. 0197 EC Type-Examination TÜV-Rheinland, Notified body No. 0197
Certifikat nummer BB 60020181 0001 Certificate no BB 60020181 0001
Mats Linger Torgny Olsson Mats Linger Torgny Olsson

Kungsbacka 2007-11-15 Malmö 2007-11-15 Kungsbacka 2007-11-15 Malmö 2007-11-15
DÉCLARATION DE CONFORMITÉ CE EG-Konformitätserklärung

Nous JOKAB SAFETY AB déclarons que les composants de sécurité de la Wir JOKAB SAFETY AB erklären, dass nachfolgend aufgeführte Gerätetypen
Boplatsgatan 3 marque JOKAB SAFETY, de types et fonctions de Boplatsgatan 3 des Herstellers JOKAB SAFETY den
S-213 76 Malmö sécurité listées ci-dessous, sont conformes aux S-213 76 Malmö Anforderungen der aktuellen Richtlinien
Suède Directives Schweden 98/37/EEG,
98/37/EEC, 2004/108/EG
2004/108/EC 2006/95/EG
2006/95/EC
Système de sécurité électronique programmable (automate programmable industriel Programmierbare Sicherheitssteuerung (Sicherheits-SPS) Pluto version
dédié sécurité) Pluto, versions A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i Angewandte EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
Normes EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996, harmonisierte EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005
harmonisées EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005 Normen EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005
aplicables EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005 EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997
EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997 EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007 EN 61000-4-
EN 61000-4- Andere Normen
IEC/EN 61508
Autres normes et DIN V VDE 0801:1990 und Änderung A1:1994
IEC/EN 61508
documents
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 et supplément A1:1994 EG- TÜV-Rheinland, gemeldete Stelle Nr. 0197
applicables
Baumusterprüfung:
Examen de type TÜV-Rheinland, organisme notifié n°. 0197
Nummer der BB 60020181 0001
CE
Bescheinigung
n° de certificat BB 60020181 0001

1
Nós JOKAB SAFETY AB

Declaração de Conformiddae EC
declaramos que os componentes produzidos pela JOKAB
Wij JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
EG-verklaring van overeenstemming
verklaren, dat ondergenoemde veiligheidscomponenten,
geproduceerd door JOKAB SAFETY, voldoen aan de
2
Boplatsgatan 3 SAFETY, com as designações e funções de segurança S-213 76 Malmö eisen zoals gesteld in de actuele richtlijnen
S-213 76 Malmö abaixo indicadas, estão em conformidade com as
Sweden 98/37/EEC,
Sweden 98/37/EEC,
2004/108/EC
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC 2006/95/EC
Sistema de segurança electrónico programável (Safety PLC system) Pluto versão

A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Aplicações standard: EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
Programmeerbare veiligheidsbesturing (Veiligheids-PLC) Pluto versies
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Toegepaste EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
3
EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005 geharmoniseerde EN ISO 13849-2:2003 EN 62061:2005
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005 normen: EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005
EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997 EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007 EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61000-4- EN 61000-4-
4
Outras aplicações e IEC/EN 61508 Andere normen IEC/EN 61508:2000 deel 1 t/m 7
documentos standard DIN V VDE 0801:1990 e correcções A1:1994 DIN V VDE 0801:1990 en wijzigingen A1:1994,
Tipo de exame EC TÜV-Rheinland, Notified body No. 0197 EG-Type-onderzoek TÜV-Rheinland, aangemelde instantie nr. 0197
Certificado no BB 60020181 0001
Certificaat nummer BB 60020181 0001
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15 Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15 5
6
EC dichiarazione di conformità ES-IZJAVA O SKLADNOSTI
La JOKAB SAFETY AB Dichiara che i componenti di sicurezza prodotti da Mi JOKAB SAFETY AB zagotavljamo in potrdimo da varnostne komponente znamke
sottoscritta Boplatsgatan 3 JOKAB SAFETY identificati e svolgenti le funzioni di Boplatsgatan 3 JOKAB SAFETY spodaj navedenega tipa oznake in
S-213 76 Malmö sicurezza di cui sotto, sono prodotti in conformità S-213 76 Malmö varnostne funkcije, so v skladu
Sweden dolocenih direktiv
Sweden alle Direttive
98/37/CEE,
2004/108/CE
2006/95/CE
98/37/EEC,
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
7
Sistemi programmabili di sicurezza (PLC di sicurezza) Pluto versioni Programljiv elektronski varnostni sistem (Varnostni PLC sistem) Pluto razli čica
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Standards EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996, Veljavni EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,

harmonizirani EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005,
armonizzati
applicabili
EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005,
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005, EN 60204-
1:1997, EN 50178:1997,
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,
standardi EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005, EN 60204-
1:1997, EN 50178:1997,
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,
EN 61000-4-
8
EN 61000-4-
Drugi veljavni
Altri Standard e IEC/EN 61508
IEC/EN 61508 standardi in
documenti applicabili DIN V VDE 0801:1990/A1:1994
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 e revisione A1:1994 dokumenti
Ente esaminatore - TÜV-Rheinland, registrato al No. 0197 ES-Preskus tipa TÜV-Rheinland, Priglašen organ st. 0197
9
EC Certifikat število BB 60020181 0001
Certificato n. BB 60020181 0001

10
11
12
13
Confirmation of compliance- Smart stop timer
Sweden
Kungsbacka Malmö Jönköping Stockholm Västerås
Jokab Safety AB Jokab Safety AB Jokab Safety AB Jokab Safety AB Jokab Safety AB
Varlabergsvägen 11 Boplatsgatan 3 Mekanikervägen 6 Kanalvägen 17 Fältmätargatan 16
SE - 434 39 Kungsbacka SE - 213 76 Malmö SE - 564 35 Bankeryd SE - 183 30 Täby SE - 721 35 Västerås
Tel: +46 (0) 300-67 59 00 Tel: +46 (0) 40-67 15 600 Tel: +46 (0) 36-37 04 60 Tel: +46 (0) 8-544 707 40 Tel: +46 (0) 21-81 44 30
Fax: +46 (0) 300-67 59 01 Fax: +46 (0) 40-67 15 601 Fax: +46 (0) 36-37 04 69 Fax: +46 (0) 8-544 707 49 Fax: +46 (0) 21-81 44 39
E-mail: info@jokabsafety.se E-mail: info@jokabsafety.se E-mail: info@jokabsafety.se E-mail: info@jokabsafety.se E-mail: info@jokabsafety.se
Global sales
Australia Finland Korea Slovenia
Sensorplex Pty Ltd Juha-Elektro OY Hanlim Auto Co., Ltd. Kolektor Synatec D.O.O.
Unit B3/2A Hallmarc Business Park Kylvöpolku 6, Room 1124 & 1125, OPUS 1 B/D, Vojkova ulica 8b
Cnr Westall & Centre Roads P.O. Box 57 #611-26 Gurobon-Dong, Guro-Gu, 5280 Idrija, Slovenia
Clayton Vic 3168 FI-00641 Helsinki SEOUL Tel: +386 5 37 20 677
Tel: +61 (03) 9562 6699 Tel: +358 (0) 10 8328 100 Tel: 82-2-2639-8567/8 Fax: + 386 5 37 20 660
Fax: +61 (03) 8080 5988 Fax: +358 (0) 10 8328 109 Fax: 82-2-2639-8778 E-mail: synatec@kolektor.si
E-mail: sales@sensorplex.com E-mail: info@juha-elektro.fi E-mail: info@jokabsafety.co.kr Web: www.kolektorsynatec.si
web: www.sensorplex.com/jokab.htm Web: www.juha-elektro.fi Web: www.jokabsafety.co.kr
South Africa
Austria France Netherlands PK Welding Robotics
Contra GmbH Jokab Safety France SAS Isolectra B.V. Unit 17, Eastend Prime Park
Autokaderstr. 104 30, rue Godot de Mauroy Rivium Boulevard 101 Montague Gardens, Milnerton 7441
A-1210 Wien 75009 Paris NL-2909 LK Capelle aan den IJssel Cape Town
Tel: +43 (0)1 278 25 55 Tel: +33 810 08 36 20 Tel: +31 (0) 10 28 55 285 Tel: +27 21 552 5249
Fax: +43 (0)1 278 25 58 Fax: +33 810 40 91 14 Fax: +31 (0) 10 28 55 400 Fax: +27 21 552 5349
E-mail: office@contra.at E-mail: E-mail: industrie@isolectra.nl E-mail: xxx@xxx
Web: www.contra.at dominique.svennarp@jokabsafety.com Web: www.isolectra.nl
Spain
Web: www.jokabsafety.com
Belgium Norway Safework S.L.
Jokab Safety AB, Sweden Germany Automasjon og Sikkerhet C/ Bac de Roda n° 7
E-mail: belgium@jokabsafety.se Jokab Safety (D) GMBH Skipperveien 16 ES-08005 Barcelona
Web: www.jokabsafety.com Max-Planck-Straße 21 NO-3150 Tolvsrød Tel: +34 93 308 07 38
DE-78549 Spaichingen Tel: +47 33 01 52 20 Fax: +34 93 307 22 62
Brazil Tel: +49 (0) 7424 95865 0 Fax: +47 33 01 52 04 E-mail: info@safework.es
Jokab Safety Div. of ABG Fax: +49 (0) 7424 95865 99 E-mail: aut-sikk@online.no Web: www.safework.es
Av. das Araucárias, 509 - Barigüi E-mail: info@jokabsafety.de Web: www.jokabsafety.no
CEP 83707-000 Araucária Switzerland
Web: www.jokabsafety.com
(Curitiba) Paraná Poland Mattle Industrieprodukte AG
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH
Tel: +55 41 3643 1384 Contra Sp. Z.O.O. In der Mühle 5
Büro Günzburg
Fax: +55 41 3643 3628 ul. Stawowa 71 CH-8340 Hinwil
Ichenhauser Str. 36
E-mail: info@abg.ind.br 43-400 Cieszyn Tel: +41 44 938 13 33
D-89312 Günzburg
Web: www.abg.ind.br Polska Fax: +41 44 938 13 34
Tel. +49 (0) 8221 204313 0
Tel: +48 33 857 53 44 E-mail: info@mattle-ag.ch
Canada Fax +49 (0) 8221 204313 99
Fax: +48 33 857 54 14 Web: www.mattle-ag.ch
E-mail: info@jokabsafety.de
NCC Electronics LTD. E-mail: office@contra-polska.pl
Web: www.jokabsafety.de Turkey
7800 Twin Oaks Drive Web: www.contra-polska.pl
Windsor, Ontario Debra GMBH (Cologne) S-Mikron Elektronik Elektrik Sanayi
Canada, N8N 5B6 Bunzlauerstraße 2 Portugal Taah. Ltd. Şti
Tel: +1 519 735 1106 DE-50858 Köln (Weiden) Prosistav Lda Nilüfer Ticaret Merkezi 66. Sok. No:8
Fax: +1 519 735 1299 Tel: +49 (0) 2234 78898 Zona Industrial da Mota 16110 Nilüfer – Bursa/turkey
E-mail: sales@nccelectronics.com Fax: +49 (0) 2234 74071 Rua 7 lote 6 A Tel: +90224 443 52 33
Web: www.jokabsafetyna.com E-mail: info@debra-safety.de Gafanha da Encarnação Fax: +90224 443 52 42
Web: www.debra-safety.de PT-3830-527 Ílhavo Web: www.s-mikron.com.tr
China Tel: +351 (0) 234 397 210
Ireland United Kingdom
Jokab Safety China Fax: +351 (0) 234 181159
2610/1701 Beijingxi RD Pressure Hydraulics Ltd Jokab Safety (UK) Ltd
E-mail: prosistav@prosistav.pt
New Century Plaza Head Office Unit G, Old Stratford Business Park
Web: www.prosistav.pt
JingAn District Unit 1/3 Falcon Drive
Shanghai 200 040 O’Brien Road Singapore/Malaysia Old Stratford
Tel: +86 21 613 242 77 Carlow Pics Technologies Milton Keynes
Fax: +86 21 613 242 80 Tel: +353 (0) 59 9143601 Blk 3, Ang Mo Kio Pk 2A, Northamptonshire
E-mail: info@jokabsafety.com.cn Fax: +353 (0) 59 9143731 #05-06, Singapore (568 050) MK19 6FG
Web: www.jokabsafety.com.cn E-mail: Tel: +65 6744 8018 Tel: +44 (0) 1908 261595
rconnolly@pressure-hydraulics.com Tel: +65 6481 2894 Fax: +44 (0) 1908 267100
Czech Republic Web: www.pressure-hydraulics.com Fax: +65 6744 1929 E-mail: info@jokabsafety.co.uk
Contra spol. S R.O. Fax: +65 6481 6869 Web: www.jokabsafety.com
Italy
Bohuslava Martinu 64 E-mail: picstec@pacific.net.sg
CZ-602 00 Brno Jokab Safety Italia S.R.L USA/Mexico
Tel: +420 5 43 210 046 Via J.F. Kennedy, 19 Slovakia Jokab Safety North America
Fax: +420 5 43 242 712 IT-20059 Vimercate - fraz. Velasca MI Lucob Spol S.R.O. 6471 Commerce Drive
E-mail: contra-brno@contra-brno.cz Tel: +39 039 6880134 Obchodni Zastupce Westland, Michigan
Web: www.contra-brno.cz Fax: +39 039 6085331 Fialkove udolie 25 48185 U.S.A.
E-mail: info@jokabsafety.it SK-811 01 Bratislava Tel: +1 734 595 6087
Denmark Web: www.jokabsafety.com Tel: +421 2 432 921 77 Fax: +1 734 467 7311
Jokab Safety DK A/S Fax: +421 2 544 124 33 E-mail: sales@jokabsafetyna.com
Rugmarken 15 E-mail: office@lucob.sk
DK-3520 Farum Web: www.lucob.sk
Tel: +45 44 34 14 54
Fax: +45 44 99 14 54
E-mail: info@jokabsafety.dk
Web: www.jokabsafety.dk

The Safety handbook
Sweden
Kungsbacka +46 (0) 300 67 59 00
Malmö +46 (0) 40 67 15 600
Bankeryd +46 (0) 36 37 04 60
Stockholm +46 (0) 8 544 707 40
Västerås +46 (0) 21 81 44 30
Experience – Systems – Products
Global sales
Australia Sensorplex Pty Ltd +61 (03) 9562 6699
Austria Contra GmbH +43 (0)1 278 25 55
Belgium Jokab Safety AB, Sweden +46 (0) 300 67 59 00
Brazil Jokab Safety Div. of ABG +55 41 3643 1384
Canada NCC Electronics LTD. +1 519 735 1106
China Jokab Safety China +86 21 613 242 77
Czech Republic Contra spol. S R.O. +420 5 43 210 046
Denmark Jokab Safety DK A/S +45 44 34 14 54
Finland Juha-Elektro OY +358 (0) 10 8328 100
The Safety handbook

France Jokab Safety France SAS +33 810 08 36 20
Germany
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH +49 (0) 7424 95865-0
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH Büro Günzburg +49 (0) 8221 204313 0
Debra GMBH (Cologne) +49 (0) 2234 78898
Ireland Pressure Hydraulics Ltd +353 (0) 59 9143601
Italy Jokab Safety Italia S.R.L +39 039 6880134
Korea Hanlim Auto Co., Ltd. +82 2 2639 8567/8
Netherlands Isolectra B.V. +31 (0) 10 28 55 285
Norway Automasjon og Sikkerhet +47 33 01 52 20
Poland Contra Sp. Z.O.O. +48 33 857 53 44
Portugal Prosistav Lda +351 (0) 234 397 210
Singapore/Malaysia Pics Technologies +65 6744 8018
Slovakia Lucob Spol S.R.O. +421 2 432 921 77
Slovenia Kolektor Synatec D.O.O. +386 5 37 20 677
South Africa PK Welding+Robotics LTD +27 31 914 0990
Spain Safework S.L. +34 93 - 308 07 38
Switzerland Mattle Industrieprodukte AG +41 44 938 13 33
Turkey S-Mikron Elektronik Elektrik Sanayi
Taah. Ltd. Şti +90224 443 52 33
United Kingdom Jokab Safety (UK) Ltd +44 (0) 1908 261595
USA/Mexico Jokab Safety North America +1 734 595 6087
www.jokabsafety.com Innovations in safety

EN Safety Handbook 08v2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EN Safety Handbook 08v2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Safety handbook

The Safety handbook

For other countries see www.jokabsafety.com

www.jokabsafety.com Innovations in safety

Dick Ste rhets PLC:n duktionste

rik Str nsson (bako Pluto i fabrik iker på Hä

Pluto eratör r ern ma sty

Pluto Safety PLC

Vital and Tina safety systems

Stop time measurement and machine diagnosis

Emergency stop devices

Contacts rails/Bumpers/Safety mats 10

Jokab Safety 2008

World-wide we use locally based employees with Production + Safety = Production-

Mats Linger and Torgny Olsson founded Jokab Safety AB

Number of machines/different stops

Developments of the 80's

Developments of the 90's

Pluto All-Master safety PLC

SafeCad for Quick-Guard Safeball - ergonomic control device

1995 RT series universal relays Three-position

First safety relay First steel fencing system

The objectives of the Machinery Directive, 98/37/EC, are to Harmonised standards

B2-standard B2: Standards on safeguards,e.g. two-hand controls, interlocking devices,

EN ISO 10218-1 Dealing with detailed safety requirements for a particular

CE-marking and Declaration of conformity

About CE-marked machinery the Directive gives the follow-

"Old" machines "New" machines

Council Directive 89/655/EEC

The manufacturer is under an obligation to assess the

The standard EN ISO 14121-1 gives guidance on the infor-

Priority Example of hazard and safety measure taken

3. Use guard/safety Hazard: Crushing injuries because of unintended start during

5. Warnings Hazard: Burns because of hot surfaces in reach

Combine the five step method with production friendly thinking.

Jokab Safety has extensive experience within directives and standards

Safety of machinery – Minimum gaps

EN ISO 13850 Safety of machinery – Emergency stop

EN 999 (will be replaced by

Applying EN ISO 13849-1.

Key Risk parameters

The standard gives the designer several choices for

NOTE The calculated values in the table are based on the

The method is as follows:

As an example - a common solution - consider an interlocked

Safety relay Two positive output monitored contactors

Safety Integrity Level, SIL

There is a method in EN 62061 for assigning the Safety Integrity Level. 3

• Possible category which can require additional

Overdimensioned measure according to this method.

Our course trainers have a extensive experience in machine safety

Training in machine safety

We offer company-adapted training in the following fields:

A course in risk analysis contains the following:

We can offer assistance and support in both short and longer

Safety relays • Level crossings with barriers

Supervised Reset Contact Strip/Mat

Pluto with and without a databus ______________________________________2:4

Pluto Gateway _____________________________________________________ 2:14

Example – Robot cell with Pluto _____________________________________ 2:28

Pluto settings _____________________________________________________ 2:30 7

Our solution with All-Master

Most safety devices on the market can be connected di-

Gateway for two-way databus HMI!N(-)OPERATOR Pluto bridge

0LUTOWITHOUTABUSCONNECTIONISAVAILABLEINTWOSIZESWITHAND)/THE3AND3 RESPECTIVELY)NOTHER

)$ #ONNECTIONFORIDENTIlERWHICHHASAUNIQUE)$NUMBERTHATCANBEREADBYTHESYSTEM

)NATWO CHANNELSYSTEMBOTHCHANNELSWILLBEMEASUREDUSINGTWODIFFERENTSIGNALS4HESYSTEMWILL 2

%LECTRICALINSULATION #ATEGORY))INACCORDANCEWITH AS-i databus

Analogue inputs ) 6 ) 6 ) 6

Gate-C1 Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus

Gate-D1 Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus

IDFIX-R )DENTIlERSnTOGIVE0LUTOANADDRESS2EADONLY

IDFIX-RW )DENTIlERSnTOGIVE0LUTOANADDRESS0ROGRAMMABLE2EADWRITE

IDFIX-DATA )DENTIlERSnFOR0LUTO!3 ISTORAGEOFSAFETYCODES

Operator's panel (-)DISPLAYX,#$'RAPHIC5.)/0%XOR

Pluto program- For loading PLC programs and monitoring.

Databus cable CAN-Bus cable yellow 2 x 0.50 mm²

CAN-Bus cable purple 2 x 0.50 mm² halogen-free

Absolute !BSOLUTEENCODERMODEL23!SINGLETURN

Absolute Absolute encoder model RSA 698 (multi turn)

0,54/'ATEWAY%THERNET'!4% %FORTWO WAYCOMMUNI- Data to Pluto

Binary server (TCP/IP) 3IMPLE4#0)0PROTOCOLTOSEND

).2 = Door Signal from the door sensor

-ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM 32?%RROR#ODE 32?0LUTO$ISPLAY